MultiCharts User Manual
MultiCharts User Manual
Contents
Charts ................................................................................................................. 10
MultiCharts Work Area ...................................................................................................................................10
Understanding Chart Window ........................................................................................................................21
Creating Charts ...............................................................................................................................................22
Volume Analysis ..............................................................................................................................................30
Volume Profile ................................................................................................................................................30
Go To Specified Bar .........................................................................................................................................36
Chart Settings ..................................................................................................... 37
Chart Scaling ...................................................................................................................................................37
Margins ...........................................................................................................................................................38
Scale Labels .....................................................................................................................................................39
Scale Range .....................................................................................................................................................44
Scale Type .......................................................................................................................................................47
Candlestick Chart ............................................................................................................................................49
Chart Style .......................................................................................................................................................50
Dot On Close Chart..........................................................................................................................................50
Dot on Close Chart ..........................................................................................................................................51
HL Bar Chart ....................................................................................................................................................53
HLC Bar Chart ..................................................................................................................................................54
OHLC Bar Chart ...............................................................................................................................................55
Hollow Candlestick Chart ................................................................................................................................57
Invisible Chart .................................................................................................................................................59
Line on Close Chart .........................................................................................................................................60
Symbol Settings .................................................................................................. 62
Changing Symbols ...........................................................................................................................................62
Chart Resolution .............................................................................................................................................63
Data Numbers .................................................................................................................................................69
Data Range ......................................................................................................................................................69
Quote Field......................................................................................................................................................70
Sessions ...........................................................................................................................................................71
Time Zone .......................................................................................................................................................72
Using Subcharts...............................................................................................................................................72
Chart Window..................................................................................................... 76
Background .....................................................................................................................................................76
Chart Appearance ...........................................................................................................................................77
Chart Window .................................................................................................................................................77
Chart Window .................................................................................................................................................78
Data Window ..................................................................................................................................................80
Price Scale .......................................................................................................................................................80
Status Line .......................................................................................................................................................82
Time Scale .......................................................................................................................................................85
Drawing Tools ..................................................................................................... 88
Andrews’ Pitchfork ..........................................................................................................................................88
Arc ...................................................................................................................................................................90
Arrow Down ....................................................................................................................................................92
Arrow Up .........................................................................................................................................................94
Ellipse ..............................................................................................................................................................96
Equidistant Channel ........................................................................................................................................98
Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines ...............................................................................................................102
Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs ..................................................................................................................105
Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan ...................................................................................................................109
Fibonacci Time Zones ....................................................................................................................................112
Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines ................................................................................................................115
Gann Fan .......................................................................................................................................................118
Gann Square..................................................................................................................................................121
Horisontal Line ..............................................................................................................................................124
Recatangle.....................................................................................................................................................126
Regression Channel .......................................................................................................................................129
Remain in Drawing Mode .............................................................................................................................133
Retracement Calculator ................................................................................................................................133
Snap Mode ....................................................................................................................................................134
Text (Drawing Tool) .......................................................................................................................................134
Time Line .......................................................................................................................................................136
Trend Line .....................................................................................................................................................139
Improve Visual Appearance of Drawing Tools ..............................................................................................142
Non-Standard Chart Types ................................................................................ 143
Cumulative Delta...........................................................................................................................................143
Heikin-Ashi ....................................................................................................................................................145
Kagi................................................................................................................................................................147
Line Break......................................................................................................................................................150
Point and Figure ............................................................................................................................................152
Renko ............................................................................................................................................................154
Volume Delta ................................................................................................................................................156
Intra-Bar Order Generation, Bar Magnifier on Non-Standard Chart Types ..................................................159
Using Charts ..................................................................................................... 161
Adjusting Chart .............................................................................................................................................161
Background Dragging ....................................................................................................................................164
Changing Visual Order...................................................................................................................................164
Making Screenshot .......................................................................................................................................165
Prining Charts ................................................................................................................................................165
Reloading Charts ...........................................................................................................................................166
Using Pointers ...............................................................................................................................................167
Studies .............................................................................................................. 169
Expert Commentary ......................................................................................................................................169
Indicator Scaling ............................................................................................................................................169
Indicator Settings ..........................................................................................................................................176
Signal Settings ...............................................................................................................................................181
Skip Identical Ticks ........................................................................................................................................183
Realtime-History Matching ...........................................................................................................................184
Study Templates ...........................................................................................................................................186
Using Alerts ...................................................................................................................................................188
Using Studies .................................................................................................................................................192
Trading ............................................................................................................. 198
Broker Profiles .................................................................................................. 198
Broker Profiles Overview ..............................................................................................................................198
AvaTrade Broker Profile ................................................................................................................................200
CQG Broker Profile ........................................................................................................................................201
Dukascopy Broker Profile ..............................................................................................................................202
FXCM Broker Profile ......................................................................................................................................203
Interactive Brokers Broker Profile.................................................................................................................204
IWBank Quick Trade Broker Profile ..............................................................................................................207
LMAX Broker Profile ......................................................................................................................................208
MB Trading Broker Profile.............................................................................................................................208
Open E Cry Broker Profile .............................................................................................................................209
Patsystems Broker Profile .............................................................................................................................210
Rithmic 01 Broker Profile ..............................................................................................................................211
Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile ...................................................................................................................211
Trading Technologies Broker Profile .............................................................................................................212
ZenFire Broker Profile ...................................................................................................................................213
ZenFire Local Sim Broker Profile ...................................................................................................................214
ZenFire/Rithmic Server Sim Broker Profile ...................................................................................................215
Manual Trading ................................................................................................ 216
Chart Trading ................................................................................................................................................216
Chart Trading Orders and Strategies .............................................................................................................223
Depth of Market (DOM) ................................................................................................................................230
Manual Trading and Automated Trading on the Same Instrument at the Same Time .................................241
Place Order Option .......................................................................................................................................242
Bracket ..........................................................................................................................................................242
Breakeven .....................................................................................................................................................244
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy ......................................................................................................................246
Breakout........................................................................................................................................................248
Breakout UP/Fade Strategy ..........................................................................................................................249
Fade Strategy ................................................................................................................................................251
Limit Order ....................................................................................................................................................252
Master Strategy ............................................................................................................................................253
Profit Target ..................................................................................................................................................255
Stop Limit Order ............................................................................................................................................257
Stop Loss .......................................................................................................................................................259
Stop Order.....................................................................................................................................................261
Trailing Stop ..................................................................................................................................................262
Trade Bar .......................................................................................................... 265
Strategy Trading .............................................................................................. 268
Auto Trading .................................................................................................... 268
Auto Trading Tab ...........................................................................................................................................268
Auto Trading Status Messages ......................................................................................................................274
Getting Started with Auto Trading ................................................................................................................275
Trading on One Instrument From Multiple Charts .......................................................................................278
Understanding Automated Trade Execution ................................................................................................280
Strategy Properties .......................................................................................................................................281
Commission Rules .........................................................................................................................................284
Understanding Strategies .............................................................................................................................289
Strategy Alerts...............................................................................................................................................289
Broker Plug-ins ................................................................................................. 293
CQG Broker Plug-in .......................................................................................................................................293
Dukaskopy Broker Plug-in .............................................................................................................................294
FXCM Broker Plug-in .....................................................................................................................................294
Interactive Brokers Broker Plug-in ................................................................................................................294
IWBank Quick Trade Broker Plug-in ..............................................................................................................294
LMAX Broker Plug-in .....................................................................................................................................295
MB Trading Broker Plug-in ............................................................................................................................295
Open E Cry Broker Plug-in .............................................................................................................................296
Patsystems Broker Plug-in ............................................................................................................................297
Rithmic 01 Broker Plug-in .............................................................................................................................297
Rithmic Local Sim Broker Plug-in ..................................................................................................................298
Trading Technologies Broker Plug-in ............................................................................................................299
ZenFire broker Plug-in ...................................................................................................................................301
ZenFire Local Sim Broker Plug-in...................................................................................................................302
ZenFire/Rithmic Server Sim Broker Plug-in ...................................................................................................303
Order and position Tracker ............................................................................... 305
Symbol Mapping ............................................................................................... 310
Backtesting ....................................................................................................... 314
Backtesting vs Live Trading ...........................................................................................................................314
Bar Magnifier ................................................................................................................................................315
Intra-Bar Price Movement Assumptions .......................................................................................................316
Limit Order Execution Assumptions ..............................................................................................................317
Order Linking.................................................................................................................................................318
Precise Backtesting .......................................................................................................................................319
Understanding Backtesting ...........................................................................................................................321
Using Performance Report ............................................................................................................................322
Optimization ..................................................................................................... 326
Performing Optimization ..............................................................................................................................326
Understanding Optimization .........................................................................................................................329
Using Optimization Report ............................................................................................................................333
Walk Forward Optimization ..........................................................................................................................335
Data Playback ................................................................................................... 338
Data Playback in Market Scanner .................................................................................................................338
Keyboard Shortcuts .......................................................................................................................................340
Real-Time Market Scanner................................................................................ 342
Understanding real-Time Market Scanner ....................................................................................................342
Working with Grid .........................................................................................................................................343
Working with Studies ....................................................................................................................................345
Working with Symbols ..................................................................................................................................348
Time and Sales .................................................................................................. 352
QuoteManager................................................................................................. 357
Managing Data ................................................................................................. 357
Data Cache ....................................................................................................................................................357
Editing Data ...................................................................................................................................................357
Exporting Data ..............................................................................................................................................360
Import Symbol List ........................................................................................................................................361
Importing Data ..............................................................................................................................................362
Mapping ASCII ...............................................................................................................................................365
Online Mode Data Collection ........................................................................................................................367
Setting Data Sources ......................................................................................... 368
Data Sources Overview .................................................................................................................................368
Built-in Data Sources ........................................................................................ 373
ASCII Mapping ...............................................................................................................................................373
AvaTrade .......................................................................................................................................................373
Barchart ........................................................................................................................................................373
CQG ...............................................................................................................................................................374
CSI .................................................................................................................................................................375
Dukascopy .....................................................................................................................................................375
ESignal ...........................................................................................................................................................376
FreeQuotes ...................................................................................................................................................376
GlobalServer..................................................................................................................................................376
Interactive Brokers ........................................................................................................................................377
IQFeed ...........................................................................................................................................................379
IWBank Quick Trade ......................................................................................................................................379
LMAX .............................................................................................................................................................380
MB Trading ....................................................................................................................................................380
MCFX (MultiCharts Forex Data) ....................................................................................................................381
Metastock .....................................................................................................................................................381
MIG Bank.......................................................................................................................................................382
Open E Cry ....................................................................................................................................................382
Patsystems ....................................................................................................................................................383
Rithmic 01 .....................................................................................................................................................383
TradeNode ....................................................................................................................................................384
Tradestation ..................................................................................................................................................384
Trading Technologies ....................................................................................................................................385
Universal DDE................................................................................................................................................385
ZenFire ..........................................................................................................................................................386
Setting Exchanges ............................................................................................. 388
Setting Exchanges & ECNs .............................................................................................................................388
Setting Holidays ............................................................................................................................................389
Setting Symbols ................................................................................................ 391
Operating Symbol List ...................................................................................................................................391
Setting Custom Session Templates ...............................................................................................................394
Setting Expiration Rules ................................................................................................................................395
Settings Properties ........................................................................................................................................396
Editing an existing symbol properties ...........................................................................................................397
Symbol Dictionary for Futures ......................................................................................................................400
Multiplier for Trading Technologies Symbols ...............................................................................................402
Collecting Data ..............................................................................................................................................403
Custom Futures .............................................................................................................................................404
Up, Down and Total Volume .........................................................................................................................408
PowerLanguage................................................................................................ 409
Language Elements ........................................................................................... 409
How Scripts Work ............................................................................................. 412
Indicators ......................................................................................................................................................412
Signals ...........................................................................................................................................................414
Additional Information Sources ........................................................................ 416
EasyLanguage Resources .................................................................................. 417
Free Manuals ................................................................................................................................................417
Books.............................................................................................................................................................417
Internet resources.........................................................................................................................................417
Once per bar alert .......................................................................................................................................... 417
Outputting Dates in EasyLanguage ................................................................................................................ 419
PowerLanguage Editor ...................................................................................... 422
Default Study Properties ................................................................................................................................ 422
Editing Study Scripts ....................................................................................................................................... 425
Editor Overview.............................................................................................................................................. 427
Editor Settings ................................................................................................................................................ 427
Editor Work Area ............................................................................................................................................ 428
Importing and Exporting Studies .................................................................................................................... 430
Using Studies (PowerLanguage Editor) .......................................................................................................... 432
Portfolio Backtester .......................................................................................... 436
Backtesting a Portfolio ..................................................................................................................................436
Configuring Strategies ...................................................................................................................................436
Operating Portfolios ......................................................................................................................................441
Portfolio Optimization ..................................................................................................................................445
Portfolio Performance Report ......................................................................................................................448
Portfolio Settings ..........................................................................................................................................449
Understanding Portfolio Backtesting ............................................................................................................450
FAQ................................................................................................................... 453
“MultiCharts must be run with Administrator Priviliges in order to register a new Data Feed” ..................453
Collecting and Saving Data to MultiCharts ...................................................................................................453
Compilation Error (errLine 0, errColumn 0, errLine End 0, errColumnEnd 0) ...............................................455
Creating Custom Futures Using ASCII Import ...............................................................................................457
Custom Criteria Optimization .......................................................................................................................457
“Data feed could not be loaded” Error Message ..........................................................................................458
“Floating-Point Division by Zero” Error Message ..........................................................................................458
Getting Started Wizard .................................................................................................................................459
Global Variables ............................................................................................................................................459
Help – About MultiCharts Error ....................................................................................................................459
How Signals are Calculated ...........................................................................................................................460
How to Backup User Data .............................................................................................................................460
How to Collect Dumps ..................................................................................................................................462
How to Configure a Proxy Connection .........................................................................................................463
How to Connect Multiple Interactive Brokers Profiles .................................................................................463
How to Connect to a Data Feed or a Broker .................................................................................................464
How to Get Data from FXCM (MCFX data feed) and Set Up for Trading on FXCM .......................................464
How to Install an Updater .............................................................................................................................466
How to Make Indicator and Signal Calculation results the Same .................................................................466
How to Migrate from MultiCharts 32 bit to MultiCharts 64 bit ....................................................................467
How to Move MultiCharts Database, Studies and Logs from C Drive ...........................................................469
How to Reduce Database Size .......................................................................................................................471
How to Solve Digital Rights Management System Connection Problem ......................................................472
How to Use Your License on Two Computers at the Same Time ..................................................................472
Incompatible Version of Tsstorage.dll in Module Shaper Error ....................................................................472
Interactive Brokers Pacing Violation .............................................................................................................473
Is there a TPO or Market Profile indicator in MultiCharts? ..........................................................................473
MultiCharts Logs ...........................................................................................................................................473
MultiCharts Processes...................................................................................................................................475
Pre-built Studies in MultiCharts ....................................................................................................................476
Problems with Data in MultiCharts ...............................................................................................................482
Reasons of Order Rejection ..........................................................................................................................485
Spread and Pair Trading ................................................................................................................................486
Symbol Guide ................................................................................................................................................487
Tick, Minute and Daily Data ..........................................................................................................................488
What Affects Chart Timestamps ...................................................................................................................489
What is my Multicharts User ID ....................................................................................................................490
What Data Sources Can Be Used to Plot Depth of Market (DOM) Window .................................................490
Why Are Accounts in IB TWS Constantly Switching? ....................................................................................491
Why an Order Was or Was Not Executed? ...................................................................................................492
Why is Data Playback Strategy Performance different from Backtesting Results ........................................493
Charts
MultiCharts Work Area
The application window consists of Toolbars, Workspaces, and Windows (Chart , Scanner, Order and Position
Tracker, DOM, Time and Sales).
For detailed information about Windows, click here.
Understanding Workspaces
Workspaces help manage the working process. Several Workspaces can be open at the same time. It is possible to
create, save, open, close, rename, and delete Workspaces, as well as to switch between Workspaces that are open
in the application window. Each Workspace can contain multiple windows.
Names of all open Workspaces are shown in the tabs at the bottom of application window. The tab of the currently
selected (active) Workspace is highlighted. To switch to another open Workspace click the tab of the Workspace you
wish to switch to.
To achieve peak performance limit the number of simultaneously open workspaces to the ones you actually need.
Creating Workspaces
To create a new Workspace, click the New Workspace
icon on the Main toolbar.
Workspaces can also be created by using the Ctrl + N hot key, or by selecting File in the main menu, then pointing
to New and clicking New Workspace.
Note: If there are no open Workspaces when a new Chart Window is created, a new Workspace for that window
will be created automatically.
Saving Workspaces
A Workspace, complete with Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Windows and all
settings, is saved as a file with .wsp extension.
To save a Workspace, click the Save Workspace
icon on the Main toolbar. Workspaces can also be saved by using
the Ctrl + S hot key, or by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Save Workspace.
If the Workspace has not yet been named, the Save As dialog box will appear, allowing to choose a file name for the
workspace.
In order to save an already named Workspace under a new name, select File in the main menu and click Save
Workspace As.
To save Workspaces automatically on application exit, see Workspaces Preferences.
Opening Workspaces
Saved Workspaces can be opened by using Windows Explorer/File manager as well as from the application.
10
To open a Workspace from the application, click the Open Workspace
icon on the Main toolbar; in the Open
dialog box that appears, navigate to and select the Workspace file (.wsp extension) and click the Open button.
Workspaces can also be opened by using the Ctrl + O hot key, or by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
Open Workspace.
Recently used Workspaces can be opened by clicking the down-arrow to the right of the Open Workspace
icon
on the Main toolbar and then clicking a Workspace name, or by selecting File in the main menu, then pointing to
Recent Workspaces and clicking a Workspace name.
To open Workspaces automatically on application startup, see Workspaces Preferences.
Closing Workspaces
To close a Workspace, click the Close Workspace
icon on the Main toolbar. Workspaces can also be closed by
using the F4 key, or by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Close Workspace.
If any changes have been made to a Workspace since it was last saved, and: Do not show "Save Workspace" dialog
on Exit checkbox in Workspace Preferences is not selected, the Save Workspace dialog box will appear:
-
click Yes to save the changes and close the Workspace;
-
click No to discard the changes and close the Workspace;
-
click Cancel to cancel the operation and keep the Workspace open.
To disable the dialog box and close workspaces without confirmation, see Workspaces Preferences.
Important:
If both the Do not show "Save Workspace" dialog on Exit checkbox and Do not save workspaces option are selected
in the Workspace tab of the Preferences window then no changes to the workspace will be saved on exit!
Renaming Workspaces
Workspaces can be renamed by two different methods:
•
Save a copy of the Workspace under a different name. See Saving Workspaces; or:
•
Use Windows Explorer or another program to rename a Workspace file as any other Windows file.
Note: Workspaces that are open cannot be renamed by Windows Explorer. Close the Workspace prior to renaming
it.
Deleting Workspaces
Use Windows Explorer or another program to delete the Workspace file as you would any other Windows file.
Deleting a Workspace does not delete the data or the studies.
Note: A Workspace that is open cannot be deleted. Close the Workspace prior to deleting it.
Workspaces Preferences
Workspaces preferences settings determine which workspaces, if any, will be opened on application startup,
whether changes to workspaces will be saved on application exit, and if a confirmation prompt will appear when
Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Windows are closed.
To set workspace preferences:
1.
Open the Preferences window by selecting File in the main menu and then clicking Preferences; the window
can also be opened by using ALT+F, ALT+F keyboard shortcut sequence.
11
2.
Select the Workspaces tab.
3.
To open Workspaces on startup, select the Open Workspaces on Start checkbox; clear the checkbox to not
open any Workspaces on startup.
4.
To show the Workspaces dialog box on startup, select the Show the dialog checkbox; clear the checkbox to
not display the dialog box.
5.
Select the Workspaces to be opened on startup.
6.
To show Save Workspace dialog box on exit, clear the Do not show "Save Workspace" dialog on Exit checkbox;
select the checkbox to not display the dialog box.
7.
Select Save workspaces or Do not save workspaces to save or not to save the workspaces on exit, respectively.
8.
To prompt for a confirmation when a Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Window
is closed (deleted), clear the Do not prompt for confirmation when I want to close a window checkbox; check the
checkbox to prompt for a confirmation when a window is closed.
Understanding Windows (Chart/Scanner/Order and Position
Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales)
Chart Windows contain charts, studies, and drawings. The number of windows that can be added to Workspaces is
limited only by your computer's hardware configuration.
In Workspaces with multiple windows only one window at a time is active. The active window is the window to
which any changes will be applied, and is distinguished by the color of its title bar. Any one of the windows in a
Workspace can be selected as the active at any time.
Windows can be moved within a workspace or detached and positioned anywhere on your computer’s desktop,
arranged in any order, resized, maximized, minimized, and closed. Closing a window deletes it from the Workspace.
Windows are saved only as a part of the Workspace that contains them.
Creating Windows
A Chart Window is always created at the same time as the chart/grid that is placed in it. It is not possible to create
an empty window, without a chart/grid. A Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Window
is always created in the currently selected Workspace.
Read more about Creating Charts
Read more about Workspaces.
Selecting a Window as Active
Before making changes to a Window you should make sure that it is active. Only one window at a time can be active.
A Window can be selected as active by one of the following methods:
•
Click anywhere on the window to make it active; or:
•
Select Window in the main menu and click the name of the window.
Color change of the window's title bar will indicate that the window has become active.
Detaching and Attaching Windows
12
By default, Windows are displayed within a Workspace. Windows can be detached from a Workspace and positioned
anywhere on your computer's desktop; on a multiple-monitor system, one or more Windows can be displayed on
each monitor.
A Window can be detached by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Detach Window
button on the title bar of the window;
or:
•
Select Window in the main menu and click Detach Window.
Note: Detached windows' last chosen positions are retained the next time that the application is
started A Window can be attached back to the Workspace by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Attach Window
button on the title bar of the window;
or:
•
Select Window in the main menu and click Attach Window.
Detached Windows "Always on Top" Feature
To keep a detached Window displayed always on top of other windows click the Stick
bar of the window; the button will change to
To cancel the feature click the Unstick
button on the title
.
utton again; the button will change to
.
Note: Detached window's last chosen Always on Top status is retained the next time that the application is started.
Arranging Windows
It is possible to arrange windows in any order. A Window can be positioned anywhere by placing the mouse pointer
over the window's title bar, holding the left mouse button, and dragging the window to the desired position.
Windows within a workspace can also be arranged automatically:
•
To arrange all open windows for convenient viewing select Window in the main menu and click Arrange All
any minimized windows will be placed at the bottom of the Workspace, below any open windows.
•
To arrange all windows horizontally or vertically select Window in the main menu and click Arrange
Horizontally or Arrange Vertically, respectively.
•
To arrange all open windows in a cascade select Window in the main menu and click Cascade; any minimized
windows will be placed at the bottom of the Workspace, below any open windows.
Note: Windows' last chosen positions are retained the next time that the application is started.
Deleting Windows
A window can be deleted from a Workspace. To close a Window means to delete it. It is possible to delete all of the
windows from a Workspace, leaving the Workspace empty.
To delete a Window from a Workspace click the Close button on the title bar of the window; in the dialog box that
appears, click Yes to delete the window, or click Cancel to cancel the operation and keep the window open.
To disable the dialog box and delete windows without confirmation, see Workspaces Preferences.
Switching between Windows
13
Within a Workspace you can switch between the open windows by using the Ctrl + F6 hotkey combination, or by
clicking anywhere on the window you wish to switch to.
Copying Windows
The active Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Window can be copied, complete with
all settings, data series, and studies, and pasted to any open Workspace.
To copy an active window use one of the following methods:
•
Select File in the main menu and click Copy Window; or:
•
Use CTRL+SHIFT+C hot key combination.
To paste the copied Window:
•
Select File in the main menu and click Paste Window, or:
•
Use Ctrl + Shift + V hot key combination.
Understanding Toolbars
Toolbars provide convenient access to commonly used functions. These functions can also be accessed by using the
menus, but the toolbars let you do it with just one click.
There are six toolbars: Chart Analysis, Command Line, Control, Drawing, Main, and Resolution. Any of the toolbars
can be made floating, allowing them to be positioned anywhere, or hidden if they are not needed.
Hiding and Redisplaying Toolbars
All toolbars are displayed by default.
To hide a toolbar select View in the main menu, then click Toolbars and uncheck the toolbar that is to be hidden.
A floating toolbar can also be hidden by clicking the Close button on the toolbar's title bar.
To redisplay a toolbar select View in the main menu, then click Toolbars and check the toolbar that is to be
displayed.
The Resolution toolbar can also be hidden or redisplayed by clicking the Resolution
icon.
Floating or Docking Toolbars
By default, toolbars are displayed docked to the top of the application window. Any of the toolbars can be made
floating or docked. A floating toolbar has its own title bar and can be positioned anywhere on your computer’s
desktop.
Toolbars can be made floating by using one of the following methods:
•
Double-click the move handle of a docked toolbar; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the toolbar's move handle; hold the left mouse button and drag the toolbar
to the desired position.
Toolbars can be docked by one of the following methods:
•
Double-click the toolbar's title bar. The toolbar will dock along the top border of the application window; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the title bar of a floating toolbar; hold the left mouse button and drag the
toolbar to any of the four borders of the application window. Once the mouse pointer comes close to a border of
14
the window, an outline will indicate where the toolbar will be docked. Releasing the mouse button will dock the
toolbar.
Note: Toolbars' last chosen positions are retained the next time that the application is started.
Resizing Floating Toolbars
A floating toolbar can be resized the same way as any other window.
Note: Toolbars' last chosen sizes are retained the next time that the application is started.
Toolbar Icons Reference
Main Toolbar
New Workspace
Creating Workspaces
Save Workspace
Saving Workspace
Open Workspace
Opening Workspace
Close Workspace
Closing Workspace
New Chart Window
Creating Charts
New Scanner Window
Understanding Real-Time Scanner
New QuoteManager
Understanding QuoteManager
New PowerLanguage Editor
Understanding PowerLanguage Editor
Control Toolbar
Decrease Bar Spacing
Changing Bar Spacing
Increase Bar Spacing
Changing Bar Spacing
Compress Price Scale
Changing Price Scale Compression
Expand Price Scale
Changing Price Scale Compression
Move Up
Moving a Data Series Vertically
Move Down
Moving a Data Series Vertically
Scroll Left
Scrolling Horizontally through a Chart
Scroll Right
Scrolling Horizontally through a Chart
Increase Weight
Changing Bar Weight
Decrease Weight
Changing Bar Weight
Zoom In
Zooming In
Zoom Out
Zooming Out
Reset Scales
Resetting Both Scales
Reset Time Scale
Resetting Time Scale (Bar Spacing)
Reset Price Scale
Resetting Price Scale
15
Hide Object
Hiding Indicators
Chart Analysis Toolbar
Insert Symbol
Inserting Additional Symbols into a Chart Window
Insert Study
Inserting Studies
Show / Hide Drawing Tools
Inserting Drawing Tools
Format Instruments
Changing Symbols
Format Window
Chart Appearance
Bar Chart
Setting OHLC Chart Style
Hollow Candlestick Chart
Selecting Hollow Candlestick Chart Style
Line on Close Chart
Selecting Line on Close Chart Style
Arrow Pointer
Pointer
Cross Pointer
Cross Pointer
Show/Hide Chart Hint
Understanding Hint Modes
Show/Hide Cross
Cross Mode
Tracking Time and Price
Cross Mode
Data Window
Data Window
Resolution Toolbar
Tick Bar
Setting Resolution of Tick-Based Charts
Volume Bar
Setting Resolution of Volume-Based Charts
Range Bar
Setting Resolution of Range-Based Charts
Second Bar
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Minute Bar
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Hourly Bar
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Daily Bar
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Weekly Bar
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Monthly Bar
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Quarterly Bar
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Yearly Bar
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Drawings Toolbar
Trend Line
Inserting Trend Line
Horizontal Line
Inserting Horizontal Line
Time Line
Inserting Time Line
Regression Channel
Inserting Regression Channel
16
Equidistant Channel
Inserting Equidistant Channel
Andrews' Pitchfork
Inserting Andrews' Pitchfork
Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines
Inserting Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines
Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan
Inserting Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan
Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs
Inserting Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs
Fibonacci Time Zones
Inserting Fibonacci Time Zones
Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines
Inserting Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines
Gann Fan
Inserting Gann Fan
Gann Square
Inserting Gann Square
Retracement Calculator
Inserting Retracement Calculator
Text
Inserting Text
Rectangle
Inserting Rectangle
Ellipse
Inserting Ellipse
Arc
Inserting Arc
Arrow Down
Inserting Arrow Down
Arrow Up
Inserting Arrow Up
Command Line Toolbar
Resolution
Click the Resolution icon to hide or redisplay the Resolution Toolbar.
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Command Line
Understanding Command Line
Data Playback Toolbar
Playback Resolution
Setting Playback Resolution
Playback Start Time
Setting Playback Start Time
Jump To Time
Using Jump To Time button
Jump To Bar
Using Jump To Bar mode
Step Backward
Using Step Backward
Step Forward
Using Step Forward
Pause/Resume Playback
Using Pause/Resume Playback
Terminate Playback/Go To Realtime
Terminate Playback/Go To Realtime
Playback Speed Slider
Setting playback speed
Global Mode
Data Playback Modes
17
Understanding Command Line
Command Line toolbar allows the active window's chart resolution or symbol to be changed simply by entering a
text command.
Type the appropriate command in the Command Line combo box and press Enter.
To select a previously used command use the drop-down function.
Examples:
Type in: "5 minutes" to change the chart resolution to 5 minutes.
Type in: "AMD" to change the symbol to AMD.
The List of Supported Commands
.bsi
Increases bar spacing.
.bsd
Decreases bar spacing.
.rep
Calls Strategy Performance Report.
.isy
Inserts additional symbol into existing chart or creates a new chart. Available parameters: name, df, res, desc, from,
to. “,” is the delimiter.
.csy
Changes symbol (specific data series) plotted on chart to another specific symbol (if there is no chart, this
command creates an empty chart window with no data series plotted). Available parameters: dnum, name, df,
res, desc, from, to, mute. “,” is the delimiter.
.iind
Inserts specific indicator to the active chart. Available parameters: name, base, bref, fmt. “,” is the delimiter.
.isig
Inserts specific signal to the active chart. Available parameters: name1, name2. nameN (up to 99). “,” is the
delimiter.
.rld
Reloads data on the active chart and on all charts with the same symbol. Available parameters: glob, ResSize
ResName, int.
SymName
Changes the symbol to a specified one on the active chart. If there is no selected symbol , the symbol that is plotted
on data series 1 is changed.
18
ResSize ResName
Changes resolution of the symbol plotted as data series 1 of the active chart to a specified one.
.at_toggle
Turns on/off auto trading on the active chart.
.shs
Switches between different styles for Hint window.
.eds
Shows the entire data series of the active chart window.
Table of Parameters for .ISY and .CSY Commands
Description
Parameter
Number of data series
dnum
Symbol name
name
Data provider
df
Resolution of the chart
res
Symbol description
desc
Starting point of data interval
from
Ending point of data interval
to
Do not show the Format Instrument dialogue window if there is an error in the mute
request
Example 1: Enter to command line: .isy [email protected]#, df=IQFeed, res=1 min, desc=E-MINI S&P 500 MARCH 2013,
from=12/31/2012, to=5/10/2013 in order to insert 1 minute graph of S&P mini 500 from IQFeed starting from 31th
of December 2012 up to 10th of May 2013 as additional data series to the active chart window.
Example 2: Enter to command line: .csy dnum=1, [email protected]#, df=IQFeed, res=1 min, desc=E-MINI S&P 500
MARCH 2013, from=12/31/2012, to=5/10/2013 in order to change the data series 1 to 1 minute graph of S&P mini
500 from IQFeed starting from 31th of December 2012 up to 10th of May 2013 as additional data series to the active
chart window.
Note: If dnum parameter is not specified, the selected data series will be affected. If no particular data series is
selected, the data series 1 will be affected.
Table of Parameters for .IIND and .ISIG Commands
Description
Parameter
Name of an indicator/signal
name
Number of data series to base an indicator on
base
19
Maximum number of bars a study will reference, or maximum bars back bref
Show Format Indicator window
fmt
Example 1: Enter to command line: .iind name=MACD, base=1, bref=100 in order to apply MACD indicator to the
data series 1 with MaxBarsBack parameter = 100 to the active chart window.
Example 2: Enter to command line: .isig name=Bollinger Bands LE in order to apply Bollinger Bands LE signal to the
active chart window.
Note: If no parameters are specified, the Insert Indicator or Insert Signal window is called.
Table of Parameters for .RLD Command
Description
Parameter
Reloading of all charts with all data series
dnum
Reloading of particular charts
ResSize ResName
Reloading a specified number of days/weeks/months int ResSize ResName
back
Example 1: Enter to command line: .rld 1 min in order to reload data on all charts with 1 minute resolution.
Example 2: Enter to command line: .rld int 2 weeks in order to reload 2 weeks of data on the active chart.
Note: If a parameter is specified incorrectly, the .rld will be used for the active chart.
Table of Resolutions for Command Line
Resolution
name
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Tick
tick
ticks
t
ts
Contract
volume
volumes
contract contracts
Point
point
points
pt
Point Original
origpoint origpoints orpt
orpts
Change
change
changes
chg
chgs
Second
second
seconds
sec
secs
Minute
minute
minutes
min
mins
Hour
hour
hours
hr
hrs
Day
day
days
d
ds
Week
week
weeks
wk
wks
Month
month
months
mth
mths
Quarter
quarter
quarters
qrt
qrts
Year
year
years
yr
yrs
pts
20
Customizing Toolbars
With Custom Toolbars, the user can not only choose which toolbar to display, but also which buttons appear on the
toolbar. Adding more toolbars and buttons makes it easier to access certain functions. Consolidating the most
frequently used buttons onto one toolbar saves space and permits a larger display area in the workspace.
To customize the toolbars,
1.
Select View from the main menu, then select Toolbars and Customize. The Customize window will appear.
2.
In the Toolbars pane, select the type of toolbar to customize. Check the selected toolbar’s check box to display
the toolbar. Uncheck the selected toolbar to remove the toolbar.
3.
In the Commands pane, select which buttons will appear on the toolbar.
4.
Select the Close button.
Understanding Chart Window
Chart Window consists of several Chart Window Areas:
Where:
1 - Status Line Area
•
a. Auto Trading Status Switch
•
b. Volume Profile Switch
•
c. Instrument name
•
d. Instrument Dropdown
•
e. Linking Chart by Instrument
•
f. Instrument description
•
g. Chart resolution
21
•
h. Resolution Dropdown
•
i. Linking Chart by Resolution
•
j. Study Status Switch
2
- Chart Area
3
- Subchart Divider
4
- Subchart Area
5
- Time Scale Area
6
- Price Scale Area
7
- Chart Trading Panel
Each area intended for manipulation for its own set of objects.
Note: There can be several Subchart Areas in a Chart window.
Note: There can be one or two Price Scale Areas in a Chart window.
Chart Number Format
MultiCharts uses the Regional Settings of the Windows operating system to format numbers. The Regional Settings
can be edited by going to Customize Regional Options in the Windows operating system. The items that can be
edited include the following:
•
Decimal symbol
•
Digit grouping symbol
•
Negative sign symbol
•
Negative number format
•
Display leading zeros
•
List separator
•
Measurement system
To access the Customize Regional Options, please refer to the help files from the Windows operating system.
The number of digits behind a decimal depends on whether the number is associated with a symbol or study. For
symbols, the number of digits after a decimal is defined in the Price Scale. For studies, the number of digits after a
decimal is based on the number of significant digits.
Creating Charts
A Chart is created for a financial instrument, designated by a Symbol, such as "GOOG".
A new chart can be created by entering the symbol parameters into the Command Line toolbar, or by using the
Format Instruments window.
If the symbol name is known, the simplest way to create a new chart is to enter the symbol name and all known
symbol parameters into the command line. Any omitted symbol parameters will automatically be selected, and the
symbol plotted.
Creating Chart Using Format Instruments Window
To create a new chart:
22
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Instrument tab.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header.
If you can't find a symbol, see Adding Symbols to Symbol List
5.
Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Merging Data Sources into a Single Chart
In some instances real-time data and historical data must be obtained from two separate data sources. A real-time
data source and a historical data source can be merged into a single chart.
To create a new chart:
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button. The
Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
into a Hand
-
changes
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Instrument tab.
3.
Check Merge Data Sources into a Single Chart check box.
4.
From the For drop-down list box, select History.
5.
Select a data feed for the historical data from the Data Source drop-down list box.
6.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header.
23
If you can't find a symbol, see Adding Symbols to Symbol List
7.
From the For drop-down list box, select RealTime.
8.
Select a data feed for the real-time data from the Data Source drop-down list box.
9.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header.
If you can't find a symbol, see Adding Symbols to Symbol List
10. Double-click the symbol, or click OK , to create a chart with default settings.
To learn more about changing the symbol settings read the following:
Changing Symbols
Chart Resolution
Quote Field
Sessions
Data Range
Time Zone
Data Numbers
Using SubCharts
Chart Style
Chart Scaling
Creating Charts Using the Command Line Toolbar
A new chart can be created by entering the symbol parameters into the Command Line toolbar:
By default, the Command Line toolbar is displayed docked to the top of the application window. If the toolbar is not
displayed, it may have been hidden. To learn how to redisplay the toolbar, see Floating or Docking Toolbars
To learn more about toolbars, see Understanding Toolbars
Symbol parameters consist of the Symbol Name, Data Source, Category, and Exchange parameters. Depending on
the data source and the symbol category, one or more parameters are required on order to precisely identify the
symbol to be plotted.
Automatic Selection of Omitted Symbol Parameters
MultiCharts simplifies the process of symbol selection by automatically selecting, whenever possible, any omitted
symbol parameters, by analyzing the Symbol Name.
Note:
When symbol parameters are entered into the command line the first time that MultiCharts is used, the Data Source
must be specified.
Automatic selection of omitted symbol parameters is based on both the Symbol Name and on the Data Source.
Once specified a single time, the Data Source will be selected automatically if DataSource parameter is not specified.
Entering a symbol name alone is often sufficient to create a chart for a stock. For example, a plot for Google, Inc.
can be created by simply typing goog into the command line toolbar; all the other parameters will be selected
24
automatically. However, for some symbol categories and data sources, additional parameters may be required in
order to precisely identify the symbol to be plotted.
If the exact symbol name is not known, but only the symbol description or the symbol root, or if plotting the symbol
through the command line does not work, QuoteManager can be used to search for and identify the correct symbol.
Note: When symbol parameters are entered into the command line the first time that that MultiCharts is used, the
Data Source must be specified.
Entering Symbol Parameters into a Command Line
Symbol parameters are entered in the following format:
DataSource: SymbolName; Exchange; Category
Note:
Data Source and Symbol Name are separated by a colon (:), while Symbol Name, Exchange Name, and Category are
separated by a semicolon (;).
•
If DataSource parameter is not specified, SymbolName parameter does not have to be preceded by a colon.
•
In neither Exchange nor Category parameters are specified, SymbolName does not have to be followed by a
semicolon.
•
If Category parameter is not specified, Exchange parameter does not have to be followed by a semicolon.
•
If Exchange parameter is not specified, and Category parameter immediately follows the SymbolName
parameter, two semicolons must separate SymbolName and Category parameters (SymbolName;; Category).
DataSource - an optional parameter; specifies the data source
•
DataSource - is specified by the DataSource abbreviation :
Data Source Name
Abbreviation
ASCII Mapping
ASC
AvaTrade
AVA
Barchart.com
BC
Bloomberg
BL
CQG
CQG
CSI
CSI
Dukascopy
DUK
eSignal
ES
Free Quotes
F
GlobalServer
GS
IQFeed
IQ
Interactive Brokers
IB
IQBank QuickTrade
IWB
LMAX
LM
MB Trading
MB
25
MCFX
FX
Metastock
MS
MIG Bank
MIG
Open E Cry
OEC
Patsystems
PS
Rithmic 01
RT
TradeStation
TS
Trading Technologies TT
Universal DDE
DDE
WeBank
WB
Zen-Fire
ZF
Note: DataSource parameter is not case-sensitive
A list of available data sources and corresponding abbreviations can also be found in the Data Sources window in
QuoteManager. To open the Data Sources window in QuoteManager, click the Data Sources icon
or select Tools
in the main menu and click Data Sources.
•
If DataSource is not specified, the most recently used Data Source will be used.
•
If DataSource is not specified and cannot be selected automatically, a Format Instruments window will open.
SymbolName - a required parameter; specifies the symbol name
•
SymbolName parameter is not case-sensitive.
•
The maximum symbol name length is 31 characters; longer symbol names will be truncated to 31 characters.
•
Symbol name can contain any number of spaces and characters, separated by spaces.
•
Spaces at the beginning and at the end of a symbol name are discarded.
Exchange - an optional parameter; specifies the exchange abbreviation
•
Exchange is specified by the exchange abbreviation; the list of available exchanges and corresponding
abbreviations can be found in the Exchanges & ECNs window in QuoteManager. To open the Exchanges & ECNs
window in QuoteManager, click the Exchanges & ECNs
icon, or select Tools in the main menu and click
Exchanges & ECNs.
•
If the specified exchange abbreviation is not in the Exchanges & ECNs list, a Format Instruments window will
open.
•
If Exchange parameter is not specified, a default exchange will be selected based on the data source and
category ( category selection takes place prior to default exchange selection ). Category - an optional parameter;
specifies the symbol category
•
Category is specified by the category name abbreviation:
Category
Abbreviation
Stock
Stk
Index
Idx
26
Future
Fut
Stock Option Opt
Forex
Fx
Bond
B
Cash
C
Spread
Spd
Note: category parameter is not case-sensitive.
•
If the specified Category is not a valid category abbreviation, a Format Instruments window will open.
•
If Category is not specified, the symbol name will be analyzed in order to select the symbol category
automatically.
Automatic Symbol Category Selection
Symbol category is automatically selected by evaluating the symbol name according to the following rules, in the
order that they are listed; once a symbol name satisfies any one rule, a category is assigned and MultiCharts
proceeds to exchange selection.
Symbol category is Future if any of the following are true:
•
Symbol name ends with a number
•
Symbol name ends with a #F, preceded by a space
•
Symbol name begins with an @
•
Symbol name begins with a c# ( except TradeStation(R) symbols ) Symbol category is Index if any of the
following are true:
•
Symbol name begins with a $
•
Symbol name ends with a .X
Symbol category is Forex if any of the following are true:
Note: For InteractiveBroker data source, symbol category will be Cash
•
Symbol name ends with a - FX
•
Symbol name contains any two different sets of the following combinations of letters:
EUR, USD, GBP, AUD, CAD, CHF, JPY, HKD, KRW, SEK, MXN, NOK, PLZ, CZK, ILS, HUF, MXP, NZD,
PLN, RUR, BRE, USS, SKK, TWD, SIT, SGD, RUB, SON, MTL, LVL, LTL, SEK, HRK, EEK, DKK, CYP
if the Category cannot be selected automatically, category Stock will be selected; category selection takes place
prior to default exchange selection.
Sample Entries and Corresponding Parameters
Command Line Entry
Data Source*
Symbol
Exchange
Category
ES:O #F
eSignal
O #F
UNDEF
Futures
ES:ES H8
ES H8
UNDEF
Futures
ES:$INDU
$INDU
UNDEF
Indexes
ES:EURGBP A0-FX
EURGBP A0-FX
UNDEF
Forex
IQfeed
@ES#
UNDEF
Futures
IQ:@ES#
27
IQ:NUH8
NUH8
UNDEF
Futures
IQ:ADR.X
ADR.X
UNDEF
Indexes
IB
ESH8
GLOBEX
Futures
IB:MSFT
MSFT
SMART
Stock
IB:EUR.USD
EUR.USD
IDEALPRO
Cash
OEC:6AH8
OEC
6AH8
UNDEF
Futures
TS:ESH08
TS
ESH08
CME
Futures
TS:AUDCAD
AUDCAD
FOREX
Forex
TS:$TSTOP
$TSTOP
NASDAQ
Indexes
TS:@ES
@ES
CME
Futures
IB:ESH8
* The Data Source is specified in the table's Command Line entries for illustration purposes only; once specified a
single time, the Data Source will be selected automatically even if DataSource parameter is not specified.
Understanding Multi-Symbol Charts
It is possible to add several symbols' data series to the same Chart Window. Each data series in a multi-symbol chart
has a unique Data Number. The Data Number is assigned according to the order in which the data series was added
to the Chart Window.
Important: Any data series can be deleted from the Chart Window, except for the data series that was added first
(Data #1).
Inserting Additional Symbols into a Chart Window
To insert an additional symbols’ data series into a Chart Window, click the Insert Instrument
icon on the main
toolbar.
Additional data series can also be inserted by one of the following methods:
1.
Use the F5 key; or:
2.
Select Insert in the main menu and click Symbol; or:
3.
Right-click on the chart area and then click Insert Instrument; or:
4.
If the Chart Window already contains more then one data series, right-click on the chart area, then click Format
Instruments, and click the Add button.
Deleting Symbols from a Multi-Symbol Chart
Any of the symbols (data series) can be deleted from a multi-symbol Chart Window, except for the first symbol that
was added (the symbol with the Data # = 1).
To delete a symbol (data series), right-click on the chart area and then click Format Instruments; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select the data series that is to be deleted and click the Remove button.
Data series can also be deleted by one of the following methods:
28
•
Position the mouse pointer over the data series that is to be deleted; once the Pointer
a Hand
•
, right-click and then click Remove Series; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the data series that is to be deleted; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
changes into a
, click on the data series and then press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Selecting the Active Symbol (Data Series) in a Multi-Symbol Chart
In a multi-symbol Chart Window only one of the data series at a time is active. The active data series is the data
series to which any changes will be applied. Any one of the data series in a multi-symbol chart can be selected as
active at any time.
Before making changes to a particular symbol's chart within a multi-symbol Chart Window you should first make
sure that it is the active symbol (data series).
The first symbol (data series) added to a multi-symbol Chart Window is the active symbol by default.
To select a symbol (data series) as active simply click on the data series.
Understanding Data Server Mode
Data server mode selection provides flexibility for working with data feeds. This feature makes it possible to
overcome limitations of some of the data feeds. If a data feed is available only on weekdays, the locally stored data
can be used on weekends. If a data feed makes gap filling impractical by forcing a lengthy download of 24 hours of
data for any intraday query, the gap filling feature can be disabled.
Two Data server modes are available:
Online – The locally stored data is used to for a historical chart. A check for gaps is not performed. Once the historical
chart is completed, the real-time data will be received from a real-time data feed. Check Download missing
historical data check box to perform a check for gaps and to fill any gaps found by connecting to a historical data
feed.
Offline – Only the locally stored data is used. No connections to data feeds are made.
Setting Data Server Mode
To change the Data server mode close all the Workspaces containing windows, or close all the windows in open
Workspaces. Once a new Data server mode has been set, all Chart Windows will function according to the new
mode, even if they were originally created under another Data server mode.
Note: The Data server mode can not be changed while there are any open Chart Windows in any of the open
Workspaces.
To set the Data server mode:
1.
In the main menu select File and click Preferences.
2.
Select the Data Server Mode tab.
3.
Choose the data mode.
4.
Check Show this dialog box on startup check box to display the Data Server Mode dialog box on startup, or
uncheck the box to simply use the last selected Data mode.
29
Volume Analysis
Volume is the number of shares or contracts that trade over a given period of time. The higher the volume, the more
active the security. To determine the movement of the volume (up or down), volume tools (such as indicators or
specific chart types) illustrate in different ways how many shares have traded per period and show trends in the
same way that prices do.
Here are some tools that MultiCharts offers for Volume Analysis:
Volume Profile
Volume Delta
Cumulative Delta
Volume Profile
Understanding Volume Profile
Volume Profile tracks trading activity volume across different price levels and varying time lengths. It is an advanced
chart attribute providing traders the opportunity to see the most traded volume areas, how much volume was
traded on particular price levels recently or within a specified time period and divides total traded volume into BUY
traded volume and SELL traded volume.
Using Volume Profile
Volume Profile can be turned on/off from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Volume Profile tab.
3.
Check the Show Volume Profile check box to turn Volume Profile on/off. The Show Volume Profile check box
is unchecked by default.
4.
Select one of the available Profiles:
30
•
Tick Count. If this profile is selected, volume provided by the data source is not taken into account. Each tick
volume equals to 1. Each line demonstrates the number of ticks traded on a specific price level colored in blue ( by
default). The following components are available for this volume profile style :
•
Volume Bar Color. Identical to Total Volume, shows total ASK + BID ticks traded on each price level. Default
color is blue, it can be changed to any other color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Volume
Shading, it can be changed to Solid Blocks, HollowGram or Invisible.
•
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
•
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
•
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
•
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%).Example 1:
Assume there are 5 price levels in volume profile. Total volume of level 1 is 400; total volume of level 2 is 600 ;
total volume of level 3 is 1000; total volume of level 4 is 500; total volume of level 5 is 300. The total volume of the
whole volume profile is 2800. Default Value are is 70%; 70% of 2800 = 1960. It always starts with POC, that is the
level 3 with 1000 total volume. 1960 - 1000 (POC) = 960. Check closest levels: 2 and 4; each of these levels total
volume is less than 960. Total volume of level 2 is higher then total volume of level 4. 960 - 600 (level 2) = 360.
Check closest levels: 1 and 4; only level 1 total volume (400) is enough to cover 360.Example 2: Assume there are
5 price levels in volume profile. Total volume of level 1 is 200; total volume of level 2 is 600; total volume of level 3
is 1000; total volume of level 4 is 200; total volume of level 5 is 300. The total volume of the whole volume profile
is 2300. Default Value are is 70%; 70 % of 2300 = 1610. It always starts with POC, that is the level 3 with 1000 total
volume. 1610 - 1000 ( POC) = 610. Check closest levels: 2 and 4; each of these levels total volume is less than 610.
Total volume of level 2 is higher then total volume of level 4. 610 - 600 (level 2) = 10. Check closest levels: 1 and 4;
each of these levels total volume is more than 10. Both levels are identical (200 and 200 total volume), in this case
the rest 10 volume goes to the level then is lower, in this example it is the level 4.
•
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Ticks, it can be changed to Invisible or to POC.
•
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
•
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
•
Total Volume. If this profile is selected, it displays ask + bid volume provided by a data source for every tick.
Each line demonstrates total volume traded on a specific price level and colored in blue (by default). The following
components are available for this style of volume profile:
•
Total Volume. Shows total ASK + BID volume traded on each price level. Default color is blue, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Volume Shading, it can be
changed to Solid Blocks, HollowGram, Invisible.
31
•
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
•
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
•
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
•
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%). See the example
above.
•
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Volume, it can be changed to Invisible or POC.
•
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
•
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
•
Buy x Sell Volume. If this profile is selected, it displays ask x bid volume provided by a data source for every
tick. Depending on the ask and bid volume amounts each line is colored in green and red (by default)
proportionally.Example: If the ASK volume is 3000 and BID volume is 2000, the displayed value is 3000 x 2000.
•
Buy Volume. Shows ASK volume traded on each price level.
•
Sell Volume. Shows BID volume traded on each price level.
•
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
•
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
•
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
•
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%). See the example
above.
•
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Volume, it can be changed to Invisible, POC,
Buy x Sell Volume or Delta.
•
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
32
•
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
•
Delta. If this profile is selected, it displays total volume value and ask - bid result as a part of the total volume
in each line. If the ASK - BID result value is negative, it is colored in red, if the value is positive it is colored in green
(by default).Example: If the ASK volume is 3000 and BID volume is 2000, their delta is 1000, so the 4 /5 of the line
is colored in blue and 1/5 of the line is green, meanwhile the displayed value is 5000 (Total Volume).
The following components are available for this style of volume profile:
•
Total Volume. Shows total ASK + BID volume traded on each price level. Default color is blue, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Volume Shading, it can be
changed to Solid Blocks, HollowGram, Invisible.
•
Buy Volume. Shows ASK volume traded on each price level.
•
Sell Volume. Shows BID volume traded on each price level.
•
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
•
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
•
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
•
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%). See the example
above.
•
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Volume, it can be changed to Invisible, POC,
Buy x Sell Volume or Delta.
•
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
•
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
•
Buy vs Sell Volume. If this profile is selected, it displays total volume value in each line and the line is colored
in green/red (by default) depending on whether the ask volume is greater or smaller than bid volume.Example: If
the ASK volume is 3000 and BID volume is 2000, the ASK volume is greater than BID volume, the line is colored in
green, however the displayed value is 5000 (Total Volume).
The following components are available for this style of volume profile:
•
Buy Volume. Shows ASK volume traded on each price level.
•
Sell Volume. Shows BID volume traded on each price level.
•
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
33
•
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
•
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
•
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%). See the example
above.
•
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Volume, it can be changed to Invisible, POC,
Buy x Sell Volume or Delta.
•
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
•
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
5.
Select Breakdown by:
•
Up Ticks vs Down Ticks method:
If the current tick price is higher than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to BUY volume.
If the current tick price is lower than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL volume.
If the current tick price is the same as the previous tick price, the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.
Example: If a new tick comes with higher than previous price and volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then
another tick comes with the same as previous price, the volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
If a tick is first one in the series, its volume goes to BUY volume.
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick trade data from your data source for the specified in chart
settings data range, if Up Ticks vs Down Ticks is selected.
•
Ask Traded vs Bid Traded method:
If the current tick price is higher or equals current ASK tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to BUY
volume.
If the current tick price is lower or equals current BID tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL
volume.
If the current tick price is between ASK and BID prices, than the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with a price higher or
equals current ASK tick price and its volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then another tick comes with a
price that is between ASK and BID prices, the volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick ask and bid data from your data source for the specified in
chart settings data range, if Ask Traded vs Bid Traded is selected.
34
6.
Adjust Ticks per Row value (set to 1 by default) to change the the amount of minimum price increments (set
in QuoteManager by Price Scale and Min. Movement covered by each line of Volume Profile.
7.
Select 1 of 3 available Time parameters for the Volume Profile to be shown:
•
If Last option is selected, it shows Volume Profile for a specified:
•
Number of last Bars;
•
Number of last Sessions.
Note: In comparison to Every, the starting point for Last is the current/latest bar on chart. Volume profile will
not cover a period more than the specified Data Range in chart settings.
•
If Every option is selected, it shows Volume Profile for a specified:
•
Number of every Bars;
•
Number of every Sessions.
Note: In comparison to Last, the starting point for Every is the first bar on chart. Volume profile will not cover
a period more than the specified Data Range in chart settings.
•
If Start ... End ... option is selected, it shows Volume Profile for a specified period of time according to your
regional settings.Example: Show volume Profile from dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss to dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.
8.
Two Alignment modes are available:
•
To show Volume Profile from the Right;
•
To show Volume Profile from the Left.
9.
It is possible to adjust the Transparency of the Volume Profile.
Note: Though the Volume Profile transparency can be set to 100%, one can see the bars of plotted chart
symbol. This is because be default Volume Profile is shown in the background and the data series is on the
foreground.
10. It is possible to adjust the Width of the Volume Profile.
•
If Last is selected in Time section, the 100% of Width is 100% of visual chart space.
•
If Every is selected in Time section, the 100% of Width is 100% of space allocated for specified number of
bars/sessions.
•
If Start ... End ... is selected in Time section, the 100% of Width is 100% of space allocated for specified time
period.
11. It is possible to adjust the Value Area of the Volume Profile. Value Area is the area (specified in %) of most
traded volume of the profile (100%).
12. Check Use As Default box to use your custom settings of volume profile as default ones.
13. Check Display Above Price Bars to put volume profile in front and the bars in the background. By default the
volume profile is in the background.
Displaying Multiple Volume Profiles
Volume profile is a tool that can be enabled or disabled for a particular data series. 1 data series can have only 1
Volume Profile displayed, however it is possible to see multiple different Volume Profiles for the same instrument
on 1 chart:
1.
Create a chart with Volume Profile,
2.
Make a right-click on this chart and select Insert Instruments...,
3.
Do not change anything in settings of the new data series, except for the following fields:
•
The data should be shown on SubChart #1 in Settings tab,
35
•
The chart Style should be Invisible Bars,
•
Volume Profile can be set differently to the first one.
4.
Click Ok to load second data series with another volume profile.
All the rest settings should be 100% identical to the original data series.
Volume Profile Switch
Since MultiCharts 8.7 beta 1 Volume Profile can be plotted on the chart with a single click on the Volume Profile
Switch
button located in the status line.
Go To Specified Bar
Go To Specified Bar feature allows you to jump to needed bars and dates without scrolling.
To jump to a specific bar or time and date:
1.
Select View in the main menu and click Go To Specified Bar.
2.
Select the Bar Number or the Date Time option and specify the bumber of the bar or the time and date you
want to jump to.
3.
Click Go.
36
Chart Settings
Chart Scaling
The Price Scale is located on the left and/or the right side of the chart and consists of a vertical line with marks
indicating values and identified by Labels.
The values on the scale are specific to the symbol or indicator plotted on the chart.
The scale represents the value range within which the chart is plotted. To determine the value of a point on a chart
the vertical position of the point is referenced to a value on the Price Scale.
The Range of the Price Scale and the chart's top and bottom Margins can be set.
The Labels, identifying scale's marks, can be customized.
Five Price Scale range modes (scaling modes) are available:
Screen
Entire Series
User Defined
Movement Size
Price Range
Two Scaling Types are available (except for the Movement Size scaling mode):
Linear
Semi-Log
Each scale range setting and scaling type offers its own advantages.
Expanding Scale to Indicator
If the price scale is based on the data series and an indicator is overlaid on the data series, the range of the price
scale may not be wide enough to capture all parts of the indicator. In this case, the parts of the indicator that fall
outside of the range of the price scale will not be displayed in the chart.
To automatically expand the range of the price scale so that it will capture all parts of the indicator:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
37
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the General section, select Expand Scale to Indicators.
Note: This feature only works if the indicator's scaling range is set to Same as Symbol.
Overlaying Data Series
When two or more data series exist in the same subchart, it is possible to overlay the data series:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the General section, select Overlay Data Series.
By default, the price scale of the first data series is shown.
To change to the price scale of another data series:
1.
Right-click on the price scale.
2.
Select the data series in the window.
Tip: Two different Price Scales can be displayed at the same time by setting the left and right price scales.
Margins
Margins are the extra spaces between the visual representation of a data series and the chart's upper and lower
borders and are set as a percentage of the data series' price range. Margins can not be set for a chart with a User
Defined price scale.
How to set
Margins are set from the Format Instruments window:
38
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In Use Margins section, check the Use Margins check box to add margins; uncheck the box to not add margins.
4.
In the Top Margin text box enter the top margin as a percentage of the series price range.
5.
In the Bottom Margin text box enter the bottom margin as a percentage of the series price range.
Note: To use these margin settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Scale Labels
Scale Labels are the numbers that appear next to the marks on the price scale that indicate what value the marks
represent.
If a chart contains multiple objects, the object, for which the label values are displayed, can be selected. The object
is selected separately for the right and for the left price scales, making it possible to display different label values on
the right than on the left scale of the chart.
The numbers displayed on the labels can be abbreviated, and either the increment (step size) between the labels or
the total number of labels can be set.
Selecting Object for Label Values
The object, for which the label values on a price scale are displayed, can be selected by right-clicking on the price
scale and then clicking the #) Object Name, where # is the number, indicating the order in which the object has been
added to the chart.
Dividing Scale Label Values
The values of some indicators, for example volume, can be rather large, such as 25,000,000,000.
The numbers displayed on the labels can be abbreviated by dividing the values they represent by a set factor.
For example, a label for the value of 25,000,000,000, divided by a factor of 1,000,000,000, will read "25.00".
Characters can also be added to the end of the label, for example a "b", resulting in a label that reads "25.00 b"
instead of the "25,000,000,000".
39
Tip: You can elect to set the division factor automatically or manually.
Dividing Label Values Automatically
The division factor with the corresponding characters is selected automatically.
To change the characters, see Dividing Label Values Manually.
Automatic selection of the division factor can be chosen from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, check Divide Scale Labels check box.
4.
Select the Auto radio button.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Dividing Label Values Manually
The division factor can be set manually, and the corresponding characters assigned, from the Format Instruments
window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, check Divide Scale Labels check box.
4.
Select the Manual radio button.
40
5.
In the drop-down list box select the division factor.
6.
In the Displayed as text box enter the characters to be added to the end of the label for the selected division
factor; these characters will also be used when Dividing Label Values Automatically.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Canceling Label Value Division
Label value division is canceled from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, uncheck Divide Scale Labels check box.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts check Use as Default check box.
Setting Label Step
You can choose from three different settings that determine the increment (step size) between labels:
•
Automatic - the increment is optimized dynamically to aid the visual assessment of price levels
•
Set Step Size - the increment between labels is set manually
•
Set Number of Labels - a set number of labels is always displayed
Automatic
Increment between the labels is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
41
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, uncheck Set Labels Manually check box.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Set Step Size
Increment between the labels is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Symbol window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar;
if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button. The
Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, check Set Labels Manually check box.
4.
Select the Set Step Size radio button.
5.
In the Set Step Size text box enter the increment value (step size), in units displayed on the scale.
Note: A label at each step will only be displayed if there is enough room on the scale.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Set Number of Labels
A fixed total number of labels can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
42
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, check Set Labels Manually check box.
4.
Select the Set Number of Labels radio button.
5.
In the Set Number of Labels text box enter the fixed number of labels desired.
Note: The set number of labels will only be displayed if there is enough room on the scale.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Using Fractional Price Scale Format
MultiCharts can display prices in both decimal and fractional format.
Configuring Fractional Price Scale Format for Symbols
Configuring Fractional Price Scale Format for Studies Configuring
Fractional Price Scale Format for Drawings
Fractional format is available for the following values:
Open
High
Low
Close
Last
Bid
Ask
Net Change
Last Price Marker
Price value in the Status Line
Price value in the Chart Hint
Price value in the Drawing Properties
Minimum and Maximum check boxes values under the Scale tab of the Format Instruments dialog window
Fractional format is not available in the following scenarios:
When exporting data from the chart:
When exporting data from Strategy Performance Report
When accepting/rejecting orders in the dialog window
When closing open positions in the dialog window
When assigning market position at the broker in the dialog window
In the Alert messages
43
Setting the Number of Digits After the Decimal
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the General section, select No. of digits after decimal.
4.
Select the number of digits in the drop-down list.
Scale Range
Five types of Price Scale Range can be used: Screen, Entire Series,
User Defined, Price Range, and Movement Size.
Screen Scale Range
The range of the price scale is equal to the range of the data series
that's visible on the chart. The price scale will adjust automatically if
the user scrolls to another part of the data series.
Setting Screen Scale Range
Scale range can be set from theFormat Instruments window:
1. Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format
Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on
the main toolbar;
if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click
the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer changes into a
right-click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Hand
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
44
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scaling Range list box, select Screen.
4.
Select the Use Margins check box to set a margin between the plot and the chart’s upper and lower borders.
5.
Enter numbers in the Top Margin % box and Bottom Margin % box to define the top margin and bottom
margins.
6.
In the Scaling Type section select Linear or Semi-Log.
7.
Select the Center Last Price check box to center the last price of the data series in the middle of the price scale.
Note: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Entire Series Scale Range
The range of the price scale is equal to the range of the entire data series, including parts of the data series not
currently shown on the chart. Since the range of the price scale is that of the entire data series, the range of the
price scale will not change if the user scrolls to another part of the data series.
Setting Entire Series Scale Range
Scale range can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scaling Range list box, select Entire Series.
4.
Select the Use Margins check box to set a margin between the plot and the chart’s upper and lower borders.
5.
Enter numbers in the Top Margin % box and Bottom Margin % box to define the top margin and bottom
margins.
6.
In the Scaling Type section select Linear or Semi-Log.
7.
Select the Center Last Price check box to center the last price of the data series in the middle of the price scale.
Note: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
User Defined Scale Range
The range of the price scale is defined manually. Any part of the data series that falls outside of the defined range
will not be displayed in the Chart Window.
45
Setting User Defined Scale Range
Scale range can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scaling Range list box, select User Defined.
4.
In the Maximum box, enter the maximum value of the range.
5.
In the Minimum box, enter the minimum value of the range.
6.
In the Scaling Type section select Linear or Semi-Log.
Note: User Defined scale range can not be used as a default.
Movement Size Scale Range
The range of the price scale is defined manually. The scale will be based on the number of points within a unit of
length. For example, the user can specify that each inch of the price scale represents 10 points.
Setting Movement Size Scale Range
Scale range can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
4.
In the Scaling Range list box, select Movement Size.
Enter a unit length.
46
5.
Select either inches or centimeters in the drop-down box.
6.
Enter the number of points that the unit of length in Step 4 will represent.
Note: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Price Range Scale Range
The range of the price scale is defined manually. The range of the scale will be based on the number of points above
and below the Last Price Marker. For example, if the last price market is at 100, the user can specify that the range
of the scale will be 20 points above and 20 points below the Last Price Marker (i.e., 120 to 80)
Setting Price Range Scale Range
Scale range can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scaling Range list box, select Price Range.
4.
In the Above box, enter the number of points above the Last Price Marker. This is the maximum value of the
range.
5.
In the Below box enter the number of points below the Last Price Marker. This is the minimum value of the
range.
Note: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Scale Type
Two types of chart Scaling can be selected: Linear or Semi-Log.
Linear Scaling
A Linear price scale is the conventional, absolute scale. A $10 change in price will always be represented by the same
displacement along the vertical axis, regardless of the base price from which the change took place.
47
Setting Linear Scaling Type
Scaling Type is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scaling Type section, click the Linear radio button.
To center the last quote in the middle of the price scale, check the Center Last Price check box; the last quote can
not be centered for a chart with a User Defined price scale.
To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Semi-Log Scaling
A Semi-Log (percent-of-change) price scale is a percentage-based scale. A 10% change in price will always be
represented by the same displacement along the vertical axis, regardless of the absolute price change. A $5 price
change from a $50 base price (10%) will be represented by the exact same vertical displacement as a $10 price
change from a $100 base price (10%), even though the absolute values of $5 and $10 are not equal.
Important: Margins should not be used with a Semi-Log price scale.
Setting Semi-Log Scaling Type
Scaling Type is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
48
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scaling Type section, click the Semi-Log radio button.
To center the last quote in the middle of the price scale, check the Center Last Price check box; the last quote can
not be centered for a chart with a User Defined price scale.
To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Candlestick Chart
Candlestick Chart visually presents the data series as a sequence of "Candlesticks".
A Candlestick emphasizes the range between the Open and the Close price points (ticks), and the direction of price
movement (trend) between them.
Each candlestick consists of a "Body" and a "Wick". The body is a pillar-like rectangle, connecting the Open and the
Close (the first and the last ticks’) prices of the tick group, on which the candlestick is based. The body’s color
indicates the trend – the direction of price movement – between the Open and the Close ticks. The wick consists of
two vertical lines, one extending from the top and one from the bottom of the body, to the High and Low price
points. Each part of the wick is displayed only if its corresponding price point falls outside of the body’s range.
A Candlestick has three components: Up, Down, and Wick; Up is the body in an uptrend, and Down is the body in a
downtrend.
The color of each of the components, the width of the wick, and the body's border is customized in the Chart Style
section.
Selecting Candlestick Chart Type
Chart type can be selected from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Type list box select Candlestick.
49
Selecting Candlestick Chart Style
Chart style can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
create custom colors.
5.
From the Width drop-down list box select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To show candlestick borders, select Show Candlestick Border check box;clear the box to hide the border. The
style of the border is the same as of the Wick.
7.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
8.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
9.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Chart Style
Several types of charts can be created. Chart style can be customized for each type of a chart.
The following types of charts are available:
OHLC Bar Chart
HLC Bar Chart
HL Bar Chart
Candlestick Chart
Dot On Close Chart
Line On Close Chart Invisible
Chart
Each chart type offers an alternative visual representation that has its own advantages.
The type and style of a chart are set in the Style tab of the Format Instruments window.
50
Chart Type is selected in the Chart Type section, and Chart Style settings can be customized in the Chart Style
section.
Changes to Chart Type and Chart Style settings will be applied to the Chart Window in real time.
Last Price Marker
Last Price Marker is a special label displayed on the price scale that indicates the latest price value of the data series.
If multiple data series are plotted in different subcharts within the same chart window, then the marker is displayed
for each data series.
However, if multiple data series are plotted in the same subchart, then the marker is displayed only for the series
that was added first (Data #1).
To turn off/on Last Price Marker for a data series:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
Under the Advanced group box, check or uncheck the Last Price Marker checkbox.
Chart Style
Changing Bar Weight
Chart's bars' Weight can be changed by
•
•
clicking Increase Weight
or Decrease Weight
icons on the Control toolbar
selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Increase Weight or Decrease Weight
Dot on Close Chart
Dot On Close chart visually presents the data series as a sequence of dots that are not connected by a line.
Each dot graphically represents the Close ( last tick's) price of each tick group.
The color and size of the dots can be customized in the Chart Style section.
51
Selecting Dot on Close Chart Type
Chart type can be selected from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Type list box select Dot on close.
Selecting Dot on Close Chart Style
Chart style can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
From the drop-down list select a style.
5.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as of the Close component.
6.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
Changing Dot Weight
To change the Weight (size) of the dots:
•
click Increase Weight
or Decrease Weight
icon on the Control toolbar, or
52
•
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
HL Bar Chart
HL Bar Chart visually presents the data series as a sequence of bars.
Each HL bar is a vertical line connecting the High and the Low price points (ticks), and graphically represents the
range of an instrument’s price movement over a defined interval.
An HL Bar has one component: High/Low.
The color and width of each of the bar's component can be customized in the Chart Style section.
Note: HL Bar Type is available only for Regular, Renko and Cumulative Delta chart types.
Selecting HL Chart Type
Chart type can be selected from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Type list box select HL Bar.
Setting HL Chart Style
Chart style can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1. Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format
Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button. The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the
following methods:
- Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
;
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
53
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
From the drop-down list select a style.
5.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as of the Close component.
6.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
Changing Bar Weight
To change bars' Weight:
•
click Increase Weight
or
•
click Decrease Weight
icon on the Control toolbar,
•
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
HLC Bar Chart
HLC Bar Chart visually presents the data series as a sequence of bars.
Each HLC bar is a vertical line connecting the High and the Low price points (ticks), and graphically represents the
range of an instrument’s price movement over a defined interval. The price of the last tick of the tick group, on
which the bar is based, is indicated on the right side of the line by a mark known as the bar's Close component.
An HLC Bar has two components: High/Low and Close.
The color and width of each of the bar's components can be customized in the Chart Style section.
Selecting HLC Chart Type
Chart type can be selected from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
into a Hand
-
changes
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
54
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Type list box select HLC Bar.
Setting HLC Chart Style
Chart style can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
From the drop-down list select a style.
5.
To apply the most recently selected component's style of to all components, click the Apply to all components
button.
6.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as of the Close component.
7.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
Changing Bar Weight
To change bars' Weight:
•
click Increase Weight
or
•
click Decrease Weight
icon on the Control toolbar,
•
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
OHLC Bar Chart
OHLC Bar Chart visually presents the data series as a sequence of bars.
Each OHLC bar is a vertical line connecting the High and the Low price points (ticks), and graphically represents the
range of an instrument's price movement over a defined interval. The price of the first tick of the group, on which
the bar is based, is indicated on the left side of the line by a mark known as the bar's Open component. The price of
55
the last tick of the group, on which the bar is based, is indicated on the right side of the line by a mark known as the
bar's Close component.
An OHLC Bar has three components: Open, High/Low, and Close.
The color and width of each of the bar's components can be customized in the Chart Style section.
Selecting OHLC Chart Type
Chart type can be selected from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Type list box select OHLC Bar.
OHLC Chart Type can also be selected by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Bar Chart
icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; or:
•
In the main menu select View and click Bar Chart.
Setting OHLC Chart Style
Chart style can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
56
4.
From the drop-down list select a style.
5.
To apply the most recently selected component's style of to all components, click the Apply to all components
button.
6.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as of the Close component.
7.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
Changing Bar Weight
To change bars' Weight:
•
click Increase Weight
icon on the Control toolbar,
•
click Decrease Weight
icon on the Control toolbar,
•
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
Hollow Candlestick Chart
A Hollow Candlestick Chart plots the data series using a sequence of candlestick figures. A single candlestick consists
of a body and a wick. The entire length of the candlestick represents the distance from the high to the low.
The body represents the distance between the open price and the close price.
The wick can be on either end or both ends. A wick above the body represents the distance from the high to the
open/close, whichever is closer. A wick below the body represents the distance from the low to the open/close,
whichever is closer.
On the chart, the body of a candlestick takes the form of a pillar-like rectangle. The wick is the line above and/or
below the body.
The body of a candlestick can be either hollow or solid.
Hollow
A candlestick with a hollow body is called a bullish candlestick. The close is higher than the open.
Solid A candlestick with a solid body is called a bearish candlestick. The close is lower than the open.
Additionally, a candlestick can be one of three colors.
Green (Up)
The close of the current candlestick is higher than the close of the previous candlestick.
Grey (Neutral)
The close of the current candlestick is the same as the close of the previous candlestick.
Red (Down)
The close of the current candlestick is lower than the close of the previous candlestick.
Tip: These are the default colors.
To change the colors,
1.
2.
3.
4.
Double-click on the data series in the chart.
Select the Style tab.
Select Hollow Candlestick under Chart Type.
Click the color bars under Chart Style to select different colors.
57
Selecting Hollow Candlestick Chart Type
Chart type can be selected from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Type list box select Hollow Candlestick.
Candlestick Chart Type can also be selected by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Hollow Candlestick Chart
icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; or:
•
In the main menu select View and click Hollow Candlestick.
Selecting Hollow Candlestick Chart Style
Chart style can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
into a Hand
-
changes
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
create custom colors.
5.
From the Width drop-down list box select a width to change the thickness of the candlestick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
58
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Invisible Chart
In an Invisible Chart the data series is present, but not visually presented.
An invisible chart can be used when the data series is needed for a calculation, but the visual presentation of the
data series is not required.
Selecting Invisible Chart Type
Chart type can be selected from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Type list box select Invisible Chart.
Selecting Invisible Chart Style
Chart style can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
59
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the Dot on Close Chart's Close component.
4.
To use this style setting for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
Line on Close Chart
Line On Close chart visually presents the data series as a sequence of dots that are connected by a line.
Each dot graphically represents the Close ( last tick's) price of each tick group.
The color and width of the line can be customized in the Chart Style section.
Selecting Line on Close Chart Type
Chart type can be selected from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Type list box select Line on Close.
Line on Close Chart Type can also be selected by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Line on Close Chart
icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; or:
•
In the main menu select View and click Line on Close.
Selecting line on Close Chart Style
Chart style can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
60
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
From the drop-down list select a style.
5.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as of the Close component.
6.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
Changing Line Weight
To change line's Weight:
•
click Increase Weight
or
•
click Decrease Weight
icon on the Control toolbar,
•
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
61
Symbol Settings
Changing Symbols
Symbols can be changed using either Command Line Toolbar or Format Symbol Window.
Changing Symbol Using the Command Line Toolbar
To learn more review Creating Charts Using the Command Line Toolbar
Changing Symbol Using Format Symbol Window
Symbols can be selected either by the symbol name or by the security description.
Changing Symbol by Symbol Name
Only the symbols which have already been added to the Symbol List will be available. The 32 most common Futures
symbols are pre-loaded into the Symbol List; all other symbols must be added by the user.
Note: To learn more see Adding Symbols to Symbol List
To change a symbol by symbol name:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Symbol tab.
3.
Select a data source in the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Click the Symbol/Description
5.
Enter all or part of the symbol name in the name/description combo box; as the name is entered, a dynamically
selector and choose Symbol.
filtered list of the available matching symbols and their descriptions will be displayed.
62
6.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can't find a symbol, see Adding Symbols to Symbol List.
7.
Double-click the symbol or click OK.
Changing Symbols
Changing Symbol by Security Description
Symbols can be selected by the security description as well as by the symbol name.
Only the symbols which have already been added to the Symbol List will be available.
The 32 most common Futures symbols are pre-loaded into the Symbol List; all other symbols must be added by the
user.
Note: To learn more see Adding Symbols to Symbol List
To change a symbol by security description:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Symbol tab.
3.
Select a data source in the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Click the Symbol/Description
5.
Enter all or part of the security description in the name/description combo box; as the description is entered,
selector and choose Description.
a dynamically filtered list of the available matching symbols and their descriptions will be displayed.
6.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can't find a symbol, see Adding Symbols to Symbol List.
7.
Double-click the symbol or click OK.
Chart Resolution
A Tick is the information about each real trade (or each bid, or each ask, of a potential trade) received from a data
vendor. A tick consists of the price, time, and volume.
63
A Bar Chart is the most popular format for visually presenting a Data Series. Each Bar is a vertical line connecting the
High and the Low price points (ticks), and graphically represents the range of an instrument’s price movement over
a defined Interval. The price of the first tick of the group, on which the bar is based, is indicated on the left side of
the line by a mark known as the bar's Open component. The price of the last tick of the group, on which the bar is
based, is indicated on the right side of the line by a mark known as the bar's Close component.
Defining the Interval on which each of the chart's bars is based determines the Chart Resolution. Chart resolution
is also sometimes referred to as the Chart Compression.
Chart resolution can be based on a Time interval (seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, or years), or on a
Count interval (tick, volume, change, or range).
The choice of time- versus count-based charts depends on the user's preference and trading style. Daily or weekly
bars can be used to help identify long-term trends, while tick bars are better suited for day trading.
Count-based charts are becoming increasingly popular because they focus in on the price movement and filter out
the periods of low market activity.
Understanding Tick-Based Charts
Each bar in a tick-based chart is based on a tick group that consists of a defined number of successive ticks. The first
tick of the group forms the bar's Open component, the tick with the highest price forms the bar's High component,
the tick with the lowest price forms the Low component, and the last tick of the group forms the bar's Close
component. The bar is closed once the defined number of ticks has been reached. The first tick of the following
group forms the next bar’s Open component.
A 1-tick chart consists of the dots, representing the price values of each of the incoming raw ticks (quotes).
Note: If 1-Tick resolution is used, only the following chart types are available: Dot on Close, Line on Close, Invisible
Bar
You can elect to use the price data from Trades, Asks, or Bids by Setting Quote Field.
Setting Resolution of Tick-Based Charts
Resolution of tick-based charts can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the number of ticks to be used for each bar.
64
4.
In the Resolution Unit drop-down list box select Tick.
Note: The maximum number of ticks that can be used to create a single bar is 1,000,000.
Resolution of tick-based charts can also be set by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Tick Bar
icon on the Resolution toolbar; from the drop-down list select the number of ticks to be
used for each bar; or:
•
Click the down-arrow to the right of the Resolution
icon on the Command Line toolbar, then point to Tick
Bar and select the number of ticks to be used for each bar from the drop-down list; or:
•
Enter the appropriate command into the Command Line toolbar combo box.
Click here to find out how to use the Command Line.
Understanding Time-Based Charts
Each bar in a time-based chart is based on a tick group that consists of all ticks over a defined interval of time. The
first tick of the group forms the bar's Open component, the tick with the highest price forms the bar’s High
component, the tick with the lowest price forms the Low component, and the last tick of the group forms the bar's
Close component. The first tick with a time stamp past the original bar’s interval forms the next bar’s Open
component.
You can elect to use the price data from Trades, Asks, or Bids by Setting Quote Field.
Setting Resolution of Time-Based Charts
Resolution of time-based charts can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the number of time periods to be used for each
bar.
4.
In the Resolution Unit drop-down list box select the time period.
Note: The maximum interval values that can be used for each of the time period units are: 86400 seconds, 1440
minutes, 24 hours, 30 days, 52 weeks, 12 months, 4 quarters, or 10 years. Resolution of time-based charts can also
be set by one of the following methods:
65

Click the Second Bar
or the Minute Bar
icon on the Resolution toolbar; from the drop-down list select
the number seconds or minutes, respectively, to be used for each bar; or:

Click the Hourly Bar
, the Daily Bar
, the Weekly Bar
, the Monthly Bar
, the Quarterly Bar
,
or the Yearly Bar
icon on theResolution toolbar to select a 1-hour, 1-day, 1-week, 1-month, 1-quarter, or 1year bar, respectively;

Click the down-arrow to the right of the Resolution
icon on the Command Line toolbar and select the
time period. For Second and Minute bars the number of time period units can also be selected from a drop-down
list;

Enter the appropriate command into the Command Line toolbar combo box.
Understanding Range-Based Charts
Each bar in a range-based chart is based on a tick group that consists of successive ticks over a defined price range.
The bar's Open component is always one tick above or below the Close component of the previous bar, and the
bar’s Close component is always at the High or the Low of the bar. All the bars are of the same height, equal to the
range. The next bar is started once the tick with a price outside of the original bar's range has been received. If the
price movement is greater than the combined range of two consecutive bars, additional "virtual" bars are inserted
between the bars to fill the gap.
You can elect to use the price data from Trades, Asks, or Bids by Setting Quote Field.
A range-based chart can only be created from tick data.
Note: The maximum period of the price data that can be used to create a single bar in a range-based chart is one
trading day, including all of the trading sessions on that day.
Setting Resolution of Range-Based Charts
Resolution of range-based charts can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the price movement, in points, that is to trigger
creation of the next bar.
4.
In the Resolution Unit drop-down list box select Point.
Note: The maximum number of points that can be used to create a single bar is 10,000.
Resolution of range-based charts can also be set by one of the following methods:
66

Click the Range Bar
to be used for each bar;
icon on the Resolution toolbar; from the drop-down list select the number of points

Click the down-arrow to the right of the Resolution
icon on the Command Line toolbar, then point
to Range Bar and select the number of points to be used for each bar from the drop-down list;

Enter the appropriate command into the Command Line toolbar combo box.
Understanding Volume-Based Charts
Each bar in a volume-based chart is based on a tick group that consists of successive ticks for a defined number of
contracts. The first tick of the group forms the bar's Open component, the tick with the highest price forms the bar's
High component, the tick with the lowest price forms the Low component, and the last tick of the group forms the
bar's Close component. The bar is closed once a tick, bringing the current bar’s total to the defined number of
contracts, has been received. If the last tick’s volume is grater than is required to complete the current bar, the tick
is split. The volume required for the current bar is used for that bar, and the balance is used to start the next bar.
You can elect to base this chart on the actual volume of all transactions, or on the total number of transactions
(ticks) only, by using the Build Volume On selector.
You can elect to use the data from Trades, Asks, or Bids for this chart by Setting Quote Field.
Setting Resolution of Volume-Based Charts
Resolution of volume-based charts can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the number of contracts to be used for each bar.
4.
In the Resolution Unit drop-down list box select Contract.
Note: The maximum number of contracts that can be used to create a single bar depends on the data vendor.
Resolution of volume-based charts can also be set by one of the following methods:
• Click the Volume Bar
Icon on the Resolution toolbar; from the drop-down list select the number of
contracts to be used for each bar
•
Click the down-arrow to the right of the Resolution
icon on the Command Line toolbar, then point to
Volume Bar and select the number of contracts to be used for each bar from the drop-down list
•
Enter the appropriate command into the Command Line toolbar combo box. Click here to find out how to use
the Command Line.
67
Build Volume On Selector
You can elect to base a chart on the actual volume of all transactions, or on the total number of transactions (ticks)
only, by using the Build Volume On selector.
Build Volume On selector is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Chart section, in the Build Volume On drop-down list box, select Trade Volume or Tick Count to base
the chart on the actual volume, or on the number of ticks, respectively.
Understanding Change-Based Charts
Each bar in a change-based chart is based on a tick group that consists of successive ticks over a defined number of
price changes.
The first tick of the group forms the bar's Open component, the tick with the highest price forms the bar's High
component, the tick with the lowest price forms the Low component, and the last tick of the group forms the bar's
Close component.
The bar is closed once the tick with a price, bringing the current bar's total number of price changes to the defined
number, has been received. The first tick of the following group forms the next bar’s Open component.
You can elect to base this chart on the Trades, on the Asks, or on the Bids by Setting Quote Field.
Setting Resolution of Change-Based Chart
Resolution of change-based charts can be set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the number of price changes to be used for each
bar.
4.
In the Resolution Unit drop-down list box select Change.
Resolution of change-based charts can also be set by entering the appropriate command into the Command Line
toolbar combo box.
68
Data Numbers
Each data series in a multi-symbol chart has a unique Data Number. Data Numbers are used to differentiate data
series in multi-symbol charts, and for the calculation of indicators that use several data series. The Data Number is
automatically assigned according to the order in which the data series was added to a Chart Window.
The Data Number can also be set manually while a series is being added, except for the very first series to be added
to a Chart Window, which is always Data #1. A Data Number can no longer be changed once the series has been
plotted.
Note: Any data series can be deleted from a multi-symbol Chart Window, except for the data series with the Data
#1. Data series # 1 can only be deleted by closing the Chart Window.
Setting Data Number
The Data Number can be set manually from the Format Instruments window only when the series is being added.
Once the series has been plotted, the Data Number can not be changed.
To manually set a Data Number to a data series:
1.
Follow the instructions for inserting an additional data series into a Chart Window; to learn how insert an
additional series, see Inserting Additional Symbols into a Chart Window.
2.
Before clicking OK select the Settings tab in the Format Instruments window.
3.
In the Display section, in the Data Number drop-down list box, select a Data Number for the data series being
created.
Data Range
Data Range is the entire period of data that is covered by the chart.
Data Range can be defined by two different methods:
1.
By defining the number of bars, or days, back from a particular date; or:
2.
By defining the start and end dates.
Setting Bars/Days Back
Data Range is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
69
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Data Range section click the top radio button.
4.
In the text box enter the number of bars or days back to be used.
5.
In the drop-down list box choose Bars Back or Days Back.
6.
In the …Back From combo box, your computer's system date is set up by default; if required, enter another
date or use the drop-down calendar.
7.
Click
to save the data range and disable auto adjustment to the current date.
Setting Dates Range
Data Range is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Data Range section click the bottom radio button.
4.
In the From combo box enter the starting date or use the drop-down calendar; your computer's system date
is set up by default.
5.
In the To combo box, your computer's system date is set up by default; if required, enter another date or use
the drop-down calendar.
6.
Click
to save the data range and disable auto adjustment to the current date.
Quote Field
There are three types of quotes:
•
Asks - the prices asked for by the sellers
•
Bids - the prices offered by the buyers
•
Trades - the prices of completed trades
70
Setting Quote Field
You can elect to use the data from the Trades only, from the Asks only, or from the Bids only, by setting the Quote
Field.
Quote Field is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Chart section, in the Quote Field drop-down list box, select Ask, Bid, or Trade, to use ask, bid, or trade
data, respectively.
Sessions
Trading sessions are the hours in which a contract is available for trading. The trading session for each contract varies
depending on the contract and the exchange.
A user may also want to only plot certain hours of the trading session instead of the entire session. Additionally, the
user may want to plot the same symbol using different trading sessions.
Setting Sessions
Sessions are set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
71
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Chart section, in the Sessions drop-down list box, select an applicable trading session.
Tip: To create custom session templates, see Setting Custom Session Templates
Time Zone
You can elect for the Local Time or for the Exchange Time to be displayed on the chart's time scale, by setting the
Time Zone.
Local Time is the system time of your computer, and the Exchange Time is the local time at the location where the
exchange is based.
Setting Time Zone
Time Zone is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Display section, in the Time Zone drop-down list box, choose Local or Exchange Time Zone.
Using Subcharts
When additional objects are inserted into a Chat Window, the window is divided horizontally into SubCharts. A
single window can contain up to 20 SubCharts.
SubCharts allow several data series or other objects to be synchronized and viewed alongside each other.
Each SubChart is assigned a sequential number according to its position in a Chart Window, starting from the top. A
chart that is the only chart in the Chart Window is SubChart number 1.
SubCharts can be Resized, Maximized, and Hidden. Each SubChart can contain a number of charts or studies, and
objects can be moved from one SubChart to another.
72
Resizing SubCharts
To Resize SubCharts, position the mouse pointer over the border line between two SubCharts; once the pointer
changes into a Splitter
, hold the left mouse button and drag the border to the desired position.
Maximizing and Restoring SubCharts
A SubChart can be maximized to fill the entire Chart Window, and a maximized SubChart can be restored to its
original size.
Maximizing SubCharts
To maximize a SubChart, right-click on the chart area of the SubChart to be maximized and then click Maximize
SubChart.
Restoring SubCharts
To restore a maximized SubChart to its original size, right-click on the chart area and then click Restore SubChart.
Moving Data Series between SubCharts
A data series in one SubChart can be moved to an existing or a new SubChart within the same Chart Window. Each
SubChart can contain a number of objects.
Moving Data Series to Existing SubChart
A data series can be moved using the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Display section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select the SubChart # you wish to move the series to.
A data series can also be moved by the following method:
1.
Position the mouse pointer over the over the series or the Status Line of the series to be moved.
2.
Once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to another
SubChart.
3.
Release the mouse button to complete moving the series.
73
Moving Data Series to New SubChart
A data series can be moved using the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Display section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select Show On Top or Show On Bottom to move the
series to a new SubChart at the top or at the bottom of the Chart Window, respectively.
A data series can also be moved by the following method:
1.
Position the mouse pointer over the series or the Status Line of the series to be moved.
2.
Once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the upper
or lower border of the Chart Window, or of another SubChart.
3.
Once the pointer changes into the Create New SubChart
symbol, release the mouse button to create a
new SubChart.
Hiding and Redisplaying SubCharts
In some instances displaying a SubChart may not be necessary. A SubChart can be hidden by hiding all of the objects
it contains. Hidden objects retain their full functionality.
Hiding Subcharts
A SubChart can be hidden by hiding all of the objects it contains.
Objects can be hidden by using the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
74
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Display section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select Hide.
An object can also be hidden by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Hide Object icon on the Control toolbar; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Hide Object.
To hide a SubChart you may have to repeat the procedure for any additional objects that the SubChart may contain.
Redisplaying Hidden SubCharts
A hidden object or a data series can be redisplayed in a SubChart.
To redisplay a data series:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format
Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the
Format button. The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the object to be redisplayed and click the Format button to display the Format Instruments window.
3.
Select the Settings tab.
4.
In the Display section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select Show On Top, Show On Bottom, or SubChart
#n, to redisplay the data series in a new SubChart at the top, a new SubChart at the bottom, or in an existing
SubChart, respectively, in the Chart Window.
75
Chart Window
Background
Chart Background consists of Background Color, Grid, and Session Break lines.
Setting Background Color
Background Color is set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Background tab.
3.
In the Background Color section select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other
button to create custom colors.
Tip: To use these background settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Grid
Grid aids in the visual assessment of price levels and time increments. Grid Type and Color can be selected, or the
Grid can be hidden. The available Grid Types are: Point, Solid, Horizontal, Dotted, and Detailed Dotted.
Grid is set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Background tab.
3.
In Show Grid section check the Show Grid check box to display the Grid on the chart; uncheck the box to hide
the Grid.
4.
Select Grid type in the Type drop-down list box.
5.
Select Grid color in the Color drop-down palette box.
Tip: To use these background settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
76
Setting Session Breaks
Session Breaks are indicated on the chart by vertical lines. The lines' Color, Style, and Weight can be selected, or
Session Break lines can be hidden.
Session Breaks are set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Background tab.
3.
In Show Session Breaks section check Show Session Breaks check box to display the lines on the chart; uncheck
the box to hide the Session Break lines.
4.
Select line color in the Color drop-down palette box.
5.
Select line style in the Style drop-down list box.
6.
Select line weight in the Weight drop-down list box; line weight can only be selected for the solid line style.
Tip: To use these background settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Chart Appearance
The appearance of the following Chart Window elements can be customized from the Format Appearance Window:
Background
Background Color
Grid
Session Brakes
Chart Window
Setting SubChart Dividers
Title Bar
Setting Scroll Bar
Price Scale
TimeScale
Status Line
Volume Profile
Note: Changes to Chart Appearance settings will be applied to the Chart Window in real time.
77
Chart Window
The appearance of SubChart Dividers and of the Chart Window's Title Bar and Scroll Bar are set from the Format
Window window.
Setting SubChart Dividers
SubChart Dividers separate the SubCharts in the Chart Window. The Dividers' Style and Color can be selected, or
Dividers can be hidden.
Hiding and Redisplaying Dividers
SubChart Dividers are set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Chart Window tab.
3.
In Show SubChart Dividers section, check Show SubChart Dividers check box to display the dividers; uncheck
the box to hide the dividers.
Tip: To use these settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Line Divider
Line SubChart Divider consists of a flat line. The Color and Style of the line can be selected. SubChart Dividers are set
from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Chart Window tab.
3.
In Show SubChart Dividers section, check Show SubChart Dividers check box to display the Dividers.
4.
Click the Line radio button.
5.
Select line color in the Color drop-down palette box.
6.
Select line style in the Style drop-down list box.
Tip: To use these settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Setting 3D Divider
3D SubChart Divider color and style are determined by the operating system appearance settings.
78
SubChart Dividers are set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Chart Window tab.
3.
In Show SubChart Dividers section, check Show SubChart Dividers check box to display the Dividers.
4.
Click the 3D radio button.
Tip: To use these settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Title Bar
A Title Bar is a horizontal bar, located at the top of a window and containing title text and maximize, minimize, and
close buttons. A window is moved by dragging its title bar with the mouse. Chart Window Title Bar displays the
name, resolution, and data source of the first data series that was added to the chart. The Title Bar can be set to be
hidden, displayed, or displayed only when the Chart Window is active (Auto-Hide).
Title Bar is set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Chart Window tab.
3.
In the Title Bar section:
•
Click the Off radio button to hide the Title Bar.
•
Click the On radio button to display the Title Bar.
•
Click the Auto-Hide radio button to auto-hide the Title Bar.
Tip: To use these settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Scroll Bar
The Scroll Bar offers a fast and convenient method for viewing the parts of a data series that extend outside the
visible range of the Chart Window. The chart is scrolled through by positioning the mouse pointer over the “bar” of
the Scroll Bar, holding the left mouse button, and dragging the “bar” to the left or to the right, or by clicking move
left or move right buttons on the Scroll Bar.
The Scroll Bar can be set to be hidden, displayed, or displayed only when the Chart Window is active (Auto-Hide).
Please note that the Scroll Bar will only appear if the series actually extends beyond the visible range of the Chart
Window. Scroll Bar is set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
79
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Chart Window tab.
3.
In the Scroll Bar section:
•
Click the Off radio button to hide the Scroll Bar.
•
Click the On radio button to display the Scroll Bar.
•
Click the Auto-Hide radio button to auto-hide the Scroll Bar.
Tip: To use these settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Data Window
The Data Window displays information about a specific bar on the chart.
When the user points the mouse pointer at a bar on the chart, the Data Window will automatically show data series
information, strategy information, and indicator information.
The data series information will show the date and time stamp, price level of the mouse pointer, symbol name,
open, high, low, close, up volume, down volume, and bar number.
The strategy information will show the direction of the signal, quantity, and the entry/exit price.
The indicator information will show the indicator names and values.
Displaying Data Window
To display the Data Window:
1.
Select View from the main menu, then select Show Data Window, or
2.
Press CTRL+SHIFT+D, or
3.
Click the Data Window
toolbar icon.
Price Scale
The Price Scale is located on the left or/and on the right side of the chart and consists of a vertical Line with marks,
indicating values, and identified by Labels. The values on the scale are specific to the symbol or indicator plotted
on the chart. The scale represents the value range, within which the chart is plotted. To determine the value of a
point on a chart, the vertical position of the point is referenced to a value on the Price Scale.
Price Scale Line and Label styles can be set, or Price Scale and Labels can be hidden completely.
Price Scale Position
Price scale position can be set from the Format Window window:
80
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Y - Price Scale tab.
3.
In the Settings section, check Left or/and Right check boxes to display the scale on the left or/and on the right
side of the chart, respectively; uncheck both boxes to hide the Price Scale and Labels.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Price scale position can also be set by right-clicking on the price scale and then checking Left Price Scale or/and Right
Price Scale, to display the scale on the left or/and on the right side of the chart, respectively; uncheck both options
to hide the Price Scale and Labels.
Price Scale Style
Price scale style is set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Y - Price Scale tab.
3.
In the Style section, select scale line color in the Line Color drop-down palette box.
4.
Select scale line style in the Line Style drop-down list box.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Price Scale Labels
Price Scale Labels are set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Y - Price Scale tab.
3.
In the Settings section, the Label Width is set for the Right or/and the Left scales individually:
•
to determine label width automatically, click the Automatic radio button.
•
to determine label width manually, click the Manual radio button and enter the desired width, in characters,
into the Characters textbox.
4.
In the Style section, select label color in the Label Color drop-down palette box.
5.
In the Font section, select label font in the Font drop-down list box.
81
6.
In the Size section, select label font size in the Size drop-down list box.
7.
In the Font Style section, check Bold, Italic, and/or Underline check boxes to select bold, italic, and/or
underline label font style.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Marker Style
In the Format Window window:
Check Precise Marker check box to indicate the current price on the price scale in a precise way.
Check Countdown check box to display the countdown box below the Price Marker showing the time remained until
the end of the current bar.
Status Line
Status Line is located at the top of the chart and displays symbol information and market snapshots for the data
series and studies being plotted. Status Line Fields, Color, Font, and Style can be configured, or the Status Line can
be hidden.
In Tracking Mode, Status Line tracks the position of the mouse pointer. The information is displayed for each series
for only the single bar, corresponding to the pointer’s current horizontal position along the time scale. If the mouse
pointer is not positioned over the chart, or if the Tracking Mode is not enabled, information displayed is for the
series’ entire current trading sessions.
In MultiLine Mode, a separate Status Line for each of the plotted series or studies is displayed at the top of the
chart. If the MultiLine Mode is not enabled, all information is displayed in a single Status Line.
Data series and studies can be Linked, Moved, and Deleted by using the Status Line Management Controls.
Status Line Mode
Status Line Mode is set from the Format Windowwindow:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Status Line tab.
3.
In the Enable Status Line section:
•
To enable the status line, check the Enable Status Line check box; uncheck the box to hide the status line.
•
To enable the Tracking Mode, check the Enable Tracking Mode check box; uncheck the box to disable the
Tracking Mode.
•
To enable the MultiLine Mode, check the Enable MultiLine Mode check box; uncheck the box to disable the
MultiLine Mode.
82
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Status Line Fields
Status Line Fields are configured from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Status Line tab.
3.
In the Enable Status Line section, select a field in the Status Line Fields scrolling list box.
•
To display a field in the status line, check the check box next to the field’s name, or select the field and click
the Show button.
•
To hide a field, uncheck the check box next to the field’s name, or select the field and click the Hide button.
•
To change the order in which fields are displayed in the status line, select a field and use the Move Up or
Move Down buttons.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Status Line Style
Status Line Style is set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the Status Line tab.
3.
In the Status Line Colors section, select a color for each text or value type in the Color drop-down palette box.
4.
In the Font section, select status line font in the Font drop-down list box.
5.
In the Size section, select status line font size in the Sizedrop-down list box.
6.
In the Font Style section, check Bold, Italic, and/or Underline check boxes to select bold, italic, and/or
underline status line font style.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Status Line Management Controls
It is possible to Delete, Move between SubCharts, and Link series and studies by using the Status Line.
Deleting Series or Study
Series or study can be deleted by using the Status Line:
To delete a series or indicator:
83
•
Click the Remove
button on the series status line; note that the Remove button will not appear if it is
hidden in the Status Line settings.
Important: Any series can be deleted, except for the data series that was added first (Data #1).
Moving Series or Study
A series or a study can be moved to another existing or new SubChart within the same Chart Window.

To move a series to an existing SubChart, position the mouse pointer over the Status Line of the series to be
moved; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to
another SubChart. Release the mouse button to complete moving the series.

To move a series to a new SubChart, position the mouse pointer over the Status Line of the series to be
moved; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the
upper or lower border of the Chart Window, or of another SubChart. Once the pointer changes into the Create
New SubChart
symbol, release the mouse button to create a new SubChart.
Symbol and Resolution Linking
It is possible to Link charts in groups based on the symbol name or resolution.
Each group is identified by one of 14 different colors. When any one chart of the linked group is changed, the changes
will automatically be applied to the rest of the linked charts. Different Chart Windows as well as SubCharts within
the same window can be linked.
Linking can save a considerable amount of time when working with complex workspaces.
Linking Charts by Instrument
When the symbol for any one chart of the linked group is changed, the changes will automatically be applied to the
rest of the linked charts:
•
To link a chart by symbol, click the Instrument Link
button on the Status Line of the series to be linked;
please note that the Symbol Link button will not appear if it is hidden in the Status Line settings.
•
To assign the series to a Link Group, select the Link Group Color Code from the drop-down list.
•
To un-link the series, select Not Linked
•
To link the series to all charts in all open Workspaces, select Linked to All
.
.
Note: The resolution of the linked charts will not be affected. All studies or signals previously applied to the chart
will be recalculated for the new symbol. All manually placed drawing objects will remain in their original location.
Objects based on formula calculations (such as signal arrows, etc.) may disappear if the new data series does not
match the calculation criteria.
Linking Charts by Resolution
When the resolution of any one chart of the linked group is changed, the changes will automatically be applied to
the rest of the linked charts:
•
To link a chart by resolution, click the Resolution Link
button on the Status Line of the series to be linked;
please note that the Resolution Link button will not appear if it is hidden in the Status Line settings.
•
To assign the series to a Link Group, select the Link Group Color Code from the drop-down list.
84
•
To un-link the series, select
Not Linked
•
To link the series to all charts in all open Workspaces, select
Linked to All
Note: The symbols of the linked charts will not be affected. All studies or signals previously applied to the chart will
be recalculated for the new resolution. All manually placed drawing objects will remain in their original location.
Objects based on formula calculations (such as signal arrows, etc.) may disappear if the new data series does not
match the calculation criteria.
Instrument Dropdown
This feature allows fast switching between recently used instruments. As this feature is data source based, it
indicates recently used instruments provided by the same data source that provides the data for the current
instrument on the chart. No recent instruments will be shown in the list if a chart from a particular data source is
plotted for the first time or one and the same instrument is always used. To see the list of recently used instruments,
click the Recent Instruments button
near the instrument name in status line.
Resolution Dropdown
This feature allows fast switching between ten recently used resolutions. As this feature is not data source based, it
will indicate resolutions previously used on any chart from any data source. To see the list of recently used
instruments, click the Recent Resolutions button
near the current resolution in the status line.
Time Scale
The Time Scale is located at the bottom of the chart and consists of a horizontal Line with time stamp marks
identified by Labels.
The increment (step size) between the labels is optimized dynamically to aid in the visual assessment of time stamp
data.
The values on the scale are specific to the resolution of the chart. The scale represents the data range, within which
the chart is plotted. To determine the time value of a point on a chart, the horizontal position of the point is
referenced to a value on the Time Scale. Chart's Bar Spacing, Chart Shift, and Empty Periods settings affect the span
of the scale displayed.
Bar Spacing and Chart Shift can be set, and Empty Periods displayed or hidden. Time scale Line and Label styles can
be selected, or Time Scale and Labels can be hidden completely.
Setting Bar Spacing
Bar Spacing can be set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
85
2.
Select the X - Time Scale tab.
3.
In the Settings section, in the Bar Spacing text box, enter the bar spacing, in pixels.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
The chart's bar spacing can also be changed by one of the following methods:
•
•
Click the Increase Bar Spacing
or the Decrease Bar Spacing
icon on the Control toolbar; or:
Use Ctrl + Plus and Ctrl + Minus hotkey combinations; the numeric pad keys as well as the regular keyboard
keys can be used; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Increase Bar Spacing or Decrease Bar Spacing.
Setting Chart Shift
Studies that visualize the predicted price movement require a Chart Shift on the chart.
Chart Shift is set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the X - Time Scale tab.
3.
In the Settings section, in the Chart Shift text box, enter the Chart Shift, in bars or percentage.
Click the Bars / % button to switch beetween bars and percentage.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Display of Empty Periods
Empty Periods occur when there is no market activity or a period of no data.
Empty Periods display is turned on or off from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the X - Time Scale tab.
3.
In the Settings section, check Show Empty Periods check box to display the empty periods on the chart;
uncheck the box to hide the empty periods.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Time Scale Line
Time Scale Line is set from the Format Window window:
86
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the X - Time Scale tab.
3.
In the Settings section, check Show Scale check box to display the scale; uncheck the box to hide the Time
Scale and Labels.
4.
In the Style section, select scale line color in the Line Color drop-down palette box.
5.
In the Style section, select scale line style in the Line Style drop-down list box.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Time Scale Labels
Time Scale Labels are set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
Select the X - Time Scale tab.
3.
In the Style section, select label text color in the Label Color drop-down palette box.
4.
In the Font section, select label font in the Font drop-down list box.
5.
In the Size section, select label font size in the Size drop-down list box.
6.
In the Font Style section, check Bold, Italic, and/or Underline check boxes to select bold, italic, and/or
underline label font style.
87
Drawing Tools
Andrews’ Pitchfork
This tool was developed by Alan Andrews. Andrews' Pitchfork consists of three parallel lines usually drawn from
three consecutive major peaks or troughs. The three parallel lines formed by Andrews' Pitchfork can help predict
channels of support and resistance in a trending market.
The three trend lines are drawn as follows:
1.
The first centerline at the left-most point that you selected and it passes right between the right-most points.
This centerline is known as the handle of the pitchfork.
2.
The second and the third trend lines begin at the right-most points and are drawn parallel to the centerline.
These trend lines are known as the tines of the pitchfork.
Inserting Andrews' Pitchfork
1.
Select one of three ways to insert Andrews' Pitchfork:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Andrews' Pitchfork.
•
Click the Andrews' Pitchfork
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Andrews' Pitchfork
from the menu.
2.
The cursor will change to the Andrews' Pitchfork
.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the pitchfork's handle is to begin.
4.
In the Chart Area click where the first tine is to begin.
5.
In the Chart Area click where the second tine is to begin.
Moving Andrews' Pitchfork
To move Andrews' Pitchfork without changing its shape:
1.
Drag the cursor to Andrews' Pitchfork that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Reshaping Andrews' Pitchfork
To reshape Andrews' Pitchfork (change its direction or the distance between its tines):
1.
Drag the cursor to Andrews' Pitchfork that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
.
88
3.
Left-click Andrews' Pitchfork and 3 small squares will appear at the handle and the tines of the pitchfork.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
Formatting Andrews' Pitchfork
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of Andrews' Pitchfork. All the changes are performed in the Format
Andrews' Pitchfork window.
Each instance of an Andrews' pitchfork has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Andrews'
pitchforks in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Andrews' Pitchfork window.
One can change the settings of Andrews' Pitchfork: the color, style and weight of the handle, base and the tines.
One can choose any element of the pitchfork to be displayed or hidden. It is also possible to change the time and
price coordinates of Andrews' Pitchfork.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Andrews' Pitchfork window.
To access the Format Andrews' Pitchfork window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Andrews' pitchfork that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Andrews' pitchfork that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Andrews' Pitchfork'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Andrews' pitchfork that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the pitchfork check or uncheck the Handle, Base, Tine 1 or Tine 2 check
boxes.
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the handle, base and tines
or click the Others… button to select the custom colors.
5.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the handle, base and tines.
6.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the handle, base and tines.
7.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Andrews'
Pitchforks. 8. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Andrews' Pitchfork window.
To access the Format Andrews' Pitchfork window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Andrews' pitchfork that is to be formatted.
89
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Andrews' pitchfork that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Andrews' Pitchfork'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Andrews' pitchfork that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Handle Date, Tine 1 Date and Tine 2 Date
fields or use the drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Handle Value, Tine 1 Value and Tine 2
Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Andrews' Pitchfork
To clone an Andrews' Pitchfork:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Andrews' pitchfork that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Arc
An Arc is a non-analytical drawing tool represented as an arched line and drawn for the purpose of highlighting the
desired segment of a chart. For instance, Arcs can highlight a top, bottom, or a group of bars. Arcs can be of any
formations that is has any inclination angle.
Inserting Arc
1.
Select one of three ways to insert an Arc:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Arc.
•
Click the Arc
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
2.
The cursor will change to the Arc
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Arc is to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the arc.
5.
Release the button.
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Arc from the menu.
.
90
Moving Arc
To move an Arc without changing its angle:
1.
Point the cursor at the Arc that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Reshaping Arc
To reshape an Arc (change its angle or length):
1.
Point the cursor at the Arc that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Left-click the Arc and 2 small squares will appear on the Arc.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Formatting Arc
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of an Arc. All the changes are performed in the Format Arc window.
Each instance of an Arc has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Arcs in the same Chart
Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Arc window.
One can change the settings of an arc: the color, style and weight of the arc and the trend line upon which the arc
is based. One can choose any element of the arc to be displayed or hidden. A full arc can be also displayed. It is
possible to change the time and price coordinates of the arc.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Arc window.
To access the Format Arc window:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Arc that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Arc that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Format 'Arc'… from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1.
In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2.
Select the Arc that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Arc check or uncheck the corresponding check boxes.
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the trend line and the arc
or click the Others… button to select the custom colors.
91
5.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the trend line and the arc.
6.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the trend line and the arc.
7.
Check the Display Full Arc check box to extend the arcs to the shape of an ellipse or circle (depending on the
Divide Time/Price separately setting).
8.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Arcs.
9.
Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Arc window.
To access the Format Arc window:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Arc that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Arc that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Format 'Arc'… from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1.
In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2.
Select the Arc that is to be formatted and press the Format… button. 2. Select the Properties tab.
2.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
4.
Click OK.
Cloning Arc
To clone an Arc:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Arc that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Arrow Down
Arrow Down
Up and Down Arrows are non-analytical drawing tools drawn for the purpose of highlighting the desired segment of
a chart. For instance, Arrows can highlight a specific bar, top or bottom.
92
Inserting Arrow Down
1.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Arrow Down.
2.
The cursor will change to the Arrow Down
3.
In the Chart Area left click where the Arrow is to be placed.
.
Moving Arrow Down
To move an Arrow:
1.
Point the cursor at the Arrow that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the arrow to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Formatting Arrow Down
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Arrow Down. All the changes are performed in the Format Arrow
Down window.
Each instance of the Arrow Down has its own Format window. The numbers (if there are 2 or more Arrows in the
same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Arrow Down window.
One can change the settings of the Arrow: its color, style and weight. It is also possible to change the time and price
coordinates of the Arrow.
Setting Style
1. Access the Format Arrow Down window.
To access the Format Arrow Down window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Arrow Down'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Arrow that is to be formatted and click the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Other… button to select the custom color.
4.
From the Style drop-down list select the desired style.
5.
From the Weight drop-down list select the desired weight.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other arrows.
7.
Click OK.
93
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Arrow Down window.
To access the Format Arrow Down window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Arrow Down'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Arrow that is to be formatted and click the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time and date coordinate in the Date field.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate in the Value field.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Arrow Down
To clone Arrow Down:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Arrow Down that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Arrow Up
Arrow Up
Up and Down Arrows are non-analytical drawing tools drawn for the purpose of highlighting the desired segment of
a chart. For instance, Arrows can highlight a specific bar, top or bottom.
Inserting Arrow Up
1.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Arrow Up.
2.
The cursor will change to the Arrow Up
3.
In the Chart Area left click where the Arrow is to be placed.
.
Moving Arrow Up
To move an Arrow:
1.
Point the cursor at the Arrow that is to be moved.
94
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the arrow to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
Formatting Arrow Up
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Arrow Up. All the changes are performed in the Format Arrow Up
window.
Each instance of the Arrow Up has its own Format window. The numbers (if there are 2 or more Arrows in the same
Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Arrow Up window.
One can change the settings of the Arrow: its color, style and weight. It is also possible to change the time and price
coordinates of the Arrow.
Setting Style
1. Access the Format Arrow Up window.
To access the Format Arrow Up window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Arrow Up'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Arrow that is to be formatted and click the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Other… button to select the custom color.
4.
From the Style drop-down list select the desired style.
5.
From the Weight drop-down list select the desired weight.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other arrows.
7.
Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Arrow Up window.
To access the Format Arrow Up window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
95
3. Select Format 'Arrow Up'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Arrow that is to be formatted and click the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time and date coordinate in the Date field.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate in the Value field.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Arrow Up
To clone Arrow Up:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Arrow Up that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Drawing Tools
Ellipse
An Ellipse is a non-analytical drawing tool drawn for the purpose of highlighting the desired segment of a chart. For
instance, Ellipses can highlight a top, bottom, or a group of bars.
Inserting Ellipse
1. Select one of three ways to insert an Ellipse:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Ellipse.
•
Click the Ellipse
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
menu.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Ellipse from the
.
2.
The cursor will change to the Ellipse
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Ellipse is to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Ellipse.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Ellipse
To move an Ellipse without changing its size:
1.
Drag the cursor the Ellipse that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
96
Reshaping Ellipse
To reshape Ellipse (change its size or proportions):
1.
Drag the cursor the Ellipse that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Left-click the Ellipse and 4 small squares will appear on the Ellipse.
4.
Drag one of these till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Formatting Ellipse
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Ellipse. All the changes are performed in the Format Ellipse
window.
Each instance of an Ellipse has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Ellipses in the same Chart
Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Ellipse window.
One can change the settings of an ellipse: the color, style and weight of the border line as well as the color and
pattern of the fill. One can also change the time and price coordinates of the ellipse.
Setting Style
1. Access the Format Ellipse window.
To access the Format Ellipse window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Ellipse that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click. Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Ellipse that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Ellipse'… from the shortcut menu. Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Ellipse that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Line section, using the Color drop-down list, select any of the preset 40 colors for the line or click the
Others… button to select the custom color.
4.
In the Line section, using the Style drop-down list, select the desired style for the line.
5.
In the Line section, using the Weight drop-down list, select the desired weight for the line (available only for
the solid line).
6.
In the Fill section, using the Color drop-down list, select any of the preset 40 colors for the fill or click the
Others… button to select the custom color.
7.
In the Fill section, using the Pattern drop-down list, select the desired pattern for the fill.
8.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Ellipses.
9.
Click OK.
97
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1. Access the Format Ellipse window.
To access the Format Ellipse window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Ellipse that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Ellipse that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Ellipse'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Ellipse that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Ellipse
To clone an Ellipse:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Ellipse that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Equidistant Channel
The Equidistant Channel is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate the support and resistance levels for the price
ranges contained in it. The narrower the Equidistant Channel is, the less volatile is the market. The Equidistant
Channel is represented by parallel equidistant lines and may be of several variations:
•
Parallel Lines - are trend lines used to delineate the Equidistant Channel in which the market trades. The
upper horizontal line is the resistance line. The lower horizontal line is the support line. If either of these lines is
penetrated there may occur a price breakout.
•
Extended Parallel Lines - are the parallel trend lines extended to the left and to the right. They delineate the
Equidistant Channel in which the market trades and show the past and future direction of the price movement.
•
Ray Parallel Lines - are the parallel trend lines extended to the right only. They delineate the Equidistant
Channel in which the market trades and show the possible future direction of the price movement.
•
Horizontal Parallel Lines - are parallel lines used to delineate the Equidistant Channel in which the market
trades, especially when it is a sideway market and there is no significant price movements. The upper horizontal
98
line is the resistance line. The lower horizontal line is the support line. If either of these lines is penetrated there
may occur a price breakout.
Inserting Equidistant Channel
1. Select one of three ways to insert the Equidistant Channel:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Equidistant Channel.
•
Click the Equidistant Channel
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Equidistant Channel
from the menu.
2.
The cursor will change to the Equidistant channel
.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Equidistant Channel is to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the
Equidistant Channel.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Equidistant Channel
To move an Equidistant Channel without changing the distance between the equidistant lines or their slope:
1.
Point the cursor at the Equidistant Channel that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Reshaping Equidistant Channel
To reshape an Equidistant Channel (change the distance between the equidistant lines or the slope of the Equidistant
Channel):
1.
Point the cursor at the Equidistant Channel that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Left-click the Equidistant Channel and 3 small squares will appear on the equidistant lines.
4.
To change the distance between the equidistant lines, drag the square located on the upper line and release
will change into Hand
.
the button.
5.
To change the slope of the Equidistant Channel, drag one of 2 squares located on the lower line and release
the button.
Formatting Equidistant Channel
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Equidistant Channel. All the changes are performed in the Format
Equidistant Channel window.
Each instance of a Equidistant channel has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Equidistant
channels in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Equidistant Channel window.
One can change the settings of the Equidistant Channel: its color, style and weight. It is possible to extend the
equidistant lines to the left or/and to the right. One can also change the distance between the lines and their
99
direction. Moreover, more than 2 lines can be reflected. It is also possible to change the time and price coordinates
of the Equidistant Channel.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Equidistant Channel window.
To access the Format Equidistant Channel window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click. Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Equidistant Channel'… from the shortcut menu. Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Others… button to select the custom color.
4.
From the Style drop-down list select the desired style.
5.
From the Weight drop-down list select the desired weight.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Equidistant
Channels.
7.
Click OK.
Extending Equidistant Channel to Left or Right
1.
Access the Format Equidistant Channel window.
To access the Format Equidistant Channel window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Equidistant Channel'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Extend section check the Left or/and Right check boxes to extend the equidistant lines to the left or/and
right.
4.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Equidistant
Channels.
5.
Click OK.
100
Setting Calculation Properties
1.
Access the Format Equidistant Channel window.
To access the Format Equidistant Channel window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click. Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Equidistant Channel'… from the shortcut menu. Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Channel section enter the desired distance between the lines in the Distance field.
4.
In the Channel section select the desired direction from the Direction drop-down list.
5.
In the Channel section enter the desired number of reflections in the Reflection field or select it.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Equidistant
Channels.
7.
Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Equidistant Channel window.
To access the Format Equidistant Channel window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Equidistant Channel'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Equidistant
Channels.
6.
Click OK.
101
Cloning Equidistant Channel
To clone an Equidistant channel:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines
Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines are an analytical drawing tool used to examine the support and resistance levels
as well as price breakouts. First, a trend line between two extreme points - a trough and opposing peak - is drawn.
Then a series of horizontal lines is drawn. These lines intersect the trend line at the Fibonacci levels or at the selected
distance percentages between the beginning and the end of this trend line. Some of the lines might not be visible,
because of the scale limitations of the chart window.
Inserting Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Retracement Price Lines.
•
•
Click the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar, point to Fibonacci Tools and select
Retracement Price Lines.
2.
3.
The cursor will change to the Fibonacci retracement price lines
.
In the Chart Area click where the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines are to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Retracement Price Lines.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines
To move the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines without changing the shape of the drawing tool:
1.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines to move the drawing tool.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Reshaping Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines
To reshape the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines (change the trend line slope, the distance between the
Retracement Price Lines, or their length):
1.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines to reshape the drawing tool.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
.
102
3.
Left-click the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines and 2 small squares will appear at both ends of the trend line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
Formatting Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines. All the changes are performed
in the Format Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window.
Each instance of a Fibonacci retracement price lines has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more
Fibonacci retracement price lines instances in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format
Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window.
One can change the settings of the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines: the color, style and weight of the trend line
and the Retracement Price lines (up to 12 lines are available). It is possible to specify the desired distance
percentages on which the Retracement Price lines are based or the Fibonacci percentages can be used. One can
extend the Retracement Price lines to the left or to the right. One can also choose to show or not the labels (price
or/and value), select their font, style, size and the character set. It is possible to apply the strikeout or underline
effects to the labels. If shown the labels can be displayed to the left, right or in the middle of the Fibonacci
Retracement Price Lines. It is possible to specify the time and price coordinates.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Format 'Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines'… from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1.
In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2.
Select the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines check or uncheck the corresponding
check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These values determine at
what points the parallel price lines intersect the trend line.
5.
In the Color column using the drop-down lists select any of the preset 40 colors for the lines or click the Others…
button to select the custom colors.
6.
In the Style column using the drop-down lists select the desired styles for the lines.
7.
In the Weight column using the drop-down lists select the desired weights for the lines.
103
8.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Retracement Price Lines.
9.
Click OK.
Extending Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines to Left or Right
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
In the Extend section check the Left or/and Right check boxes to extend the Retracement Price lines to the left
or/and right.
4.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Retracement Price Lines.
5.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be
formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Format 'Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines'… from the shortcut menu. Or
1.
In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2.
Select the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Labels tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
will change into Hand
, then double-click. Or
, then right-click.
104
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
out or/and underlined.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. Check the Show Price or/and Show Percent Value check boxes to show price or/and percent labels.
11. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Retracement Price Lines.
12. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines
To clone a Fibonacci retracement price lines:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs
Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs are an analytical drawing tool used to determine the direction and speed of the
trend reversal and indicate the support/resistance levels. First, a trend line between two extreme points - a trough
and opposing peak - is drawn. Then arcs are created and intersect the speed line at the selected distance percentages
between the beginning and the end of this trend line. The most common percentages are 1/3 and 2/3, but you can
105
draw up to 11 arcs based on any selected distance percentages as well as on the Fibonacci percentages. Some of the
arcs might not be visible, because of the scale limitations of the chart window.
The Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs can indicate the support and resistance levels. Usually the price remains above
the higher arc. If the higher arc is penetrated, prices generally fall to the lower arc, which, in many cases, becomes
the support level. If prices break below the higher arc, fall to the lower arc, and then begin to rise, the lower arc
becomes the resistance level.
Inserting Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Speed/Resistance Arcs.
•
•
Click the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar, point to Fibonacci Tools and select
Speed/Resistance Arcs.
2.
The cursor will change to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs
.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs are to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Arcs.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs
To move the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs without changing their shape:
1.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs to move the drawing tool.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Reshaping Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs
To reshape the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs (change the slope of the trend line or the arcs' radius):
1.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs to reshape the drawing tool.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Left-click the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs and 2 small squares will appear at both ends of the trend line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Formatting Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs. All the changes are performed
in the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs window.
Each instance of a Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more
Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instances in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format
Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs window.
106
One can change the settings of the Speed/Resistance Arcs: the color, style and weight of the trend line and the arcs
( up to 12 arcs are available). It is possible to specify the desired distance percentages on which the arcs are based
or the Fibonacci percentages can be used. The Speed/Resistance Arcs can be extended to the shape of an ellipse or
circle. One can also choose to show or not the labels (price or/and value), select their font, style, size and the
character set. It is possible to apply the strikeout or underline effects to the labels.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs window:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Format 'Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs'… from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1.
In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2.
Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted and press
the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs check or uncheck the corresponding
check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These values determine at
what points the arcs intersect the trend line.
5.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the arcs or click the
Others… button to select the custom colors.
6.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the arcs.
7.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the arcs.
8.
Check the Display Full Arc check box to extend the arcs to the shape of an ellipse or circle (depending on the
Divide Time/Price separately setting).
9.
Check the Divide Time/Price Separately check box to draw the arcs where time and price are independent (
uncheck to create constant radius arcs ).
10. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Arcs.
11. Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be
formatted.
107
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Format 'Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs'… from the shortcut menu. Or
1.
In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2.
Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Labels tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
will change into Hand
, then double-click. Or
, then right-click.
out or/and underlined.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. Check the Show Price or/and Show Percent Value check boxes to show price or/and percent labels.
11. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Arcs.
12. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click. Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs'… from the shortcut menu. Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs
To clone a Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
108
Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan
Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate the support and resistance levels of an
existing trend and the price level at which possible changes (rise or fall) in the trend may occur. First, a trend line
between two extreme points - a trough and opposing peak - is drawn. Then an invisible vertical line is drawn through
the second extreme point. Lines are drawn from the first extreme point and intersect the invisible vertical line at
the selected time/price percentages of the distance between the beginning and the end of this line. The most
common percentages are 1/3 and 2/3, but you can draw up to 11 lines based on any selected distance percentages
as well as on the Fibonacci percentages. Some of the lines might not be visible, because of the scale limitations of
the chart window.
These lines can indicate the support and resistance levels of an existing trend. Usually the price remains above the
higher speed line. If the higher line is penetrated, prices generally fall to the lower speed line, which, in many cases,
becomes the support level. If prices break below the higher speed line, fall to the lower line, and then begin to rise,
the lower speed line becomes the resistance level.
Note. Fibonacci Arcs and Fibonacci Fan lines are sometimes used together to anticipate support and resistance as
the Fibonacci studies may intersect.
Inserting Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Speed/Resistance Fan.
•
•
Click the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar, point to Fibonacci Tools and select
Speed/Resistance Fan.
2.
The cursor will change to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan
.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan is to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Fan.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan
To move a Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan without changing its shape:
1.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Reshaping Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan
To reshape a Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan (change its size or slope of the lines):
1.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
.
109
3.
Left-click the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan and 2 small squares will appear on the trend line.
4.
Drag one of these squares located on the trend line till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
Formatting Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan. All the changes are performed in
the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan window.
Each instance of a Fibonacci speed/resistance fan has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more
Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instances in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format
Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan window.
One can change the settings of the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan: the color, style and weight of the trend line,
squares and the fan lines (up to 8 fan lines are available). It is possible to specify the desired distance percentages
on which the fan lines are based or the Fibonacci percentages can be used. One can also choose to show or not the
labels ( price or/and value), select their font, style, size and the character set. It is possible to apply the strikeout or
underline effects to the labels. It is possible to specify the time and price coordinates.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan insatnce that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click. Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan'… from the shortcut menu. Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan check or uncheck the corresponding
check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These values determine at
what points the fan lines intersect the trend line.
5.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the fan lines or click the
Others… button to select the custom colors.
6.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the fan lines.
7.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the fan lines.
8.
Check the Divide Time check box to draw fan lines based on the height of the trend line. 9. Check the Divide
Price check box to draw fan lines based on the length of the trend line.
10. Check theHide Time check box to hide Divide Time lines.
11. Check the Hide Price check box to hide Divide Price lines.
12. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Fans.
110
13. Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan window:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan insatnce that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Format 'Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan'… from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1.
In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted and press the Format…
button.
2.
Select the Labels tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
out or/and underlined.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Fans.
10. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan window:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Format 'Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan'… from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1.
In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
111
2.
button.
Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted and press the Format…
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan
To clone a Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Fibonacci Time Zones
Fibonacci Time Zones are an analytical drawing tool represented by a series of vertical lines, which are used to
indicate significant price movement near them.
These vertical lines are spaced according to the Fibonacci number sequence (1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89).
Inserting Fibonacci Time Zones
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Fibonacci Time Zones:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Time Zones.
•
Click the Fibonacci Time Zones
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar, point to Fibonacci Tools and select
Time Zones.
2.
The cursor will change to the Fibonacci time zones
.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Fibonacci Time Zones are to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Time Zones.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Fibonacci Time Zones
To move the Fibonacci Time Zones:
1.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Time Zones to move the drawing tool.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
112
Formatting Fibonacci Time Zones
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Fibonacci Time Zones. All the changes are performed in the Format
Fibonacci Time Zones window.
Each instance of a Fibonacci time zones has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Fibonacci
time zones instances in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Fibonacci Time Zones
window.
One can change the settings of the Fibonacci Time Zones: the color, style and weight of the base line and the time
lines. One can also choose to show or not the labels, select their font, style, size and the character set. It is possible
to apply the strikeout or underline effects to the labels. If shown the labels can be displayed at the top, bottom or
in the middle of the time lines. It is possible to specify the time coordinates of the base line.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Time Zones window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Time Zones window:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Format 'Fibonacci Time Zones'… from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1.
In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2.
Select the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Time Zones check or uncheck the corresponding check boxes.
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the BaseLine and time
lines or click the Others… button to select the custom colors.
5.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the lines.
6.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the lines.
Note. One can not change the weight of the BaseLine.
7.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating the Fibonacci
Time Zones in future.
8.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Time Zones window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Time Zones window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
113
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Time Zones'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Labels tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
out or/and underlined.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Time Zones.
11. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Time Zones window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Time Zones window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Time Zones'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinate in the Base Line Date field or use the drop-down
calendar.
4.
Click OK.
114
Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines
Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines is an analytical drawing tool used to predict the future price movements and
examine the support and resistance levels as well as price breakouts. It is represented by a series of vertical lines at
date/time levels that shows probable price corrections in an existing trend. First, a trend line is drawn. Depending
on its length and direction, vertical lines are drawn based on the selected distance percentages or on the Fibonacci
percentages.
Support indicates a low or series of troughs where price activity has not penetrated. Resistance indicates a high or
series of peaks where price activity has not penetrated.
Inserting Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Trend-Based Time Lines.
•
•
Click the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar, point to Fibonacci Tools and select
Trend-Based Time Lines.
2.
The cursor will change to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines
.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines are to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Trend-Based Time Lines.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines
To move the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines without changing the shape of the drawing tool:
1.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines to move the drawing tool.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Reshaping Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines
To reshape the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines (change the slope of the trend line or the distance between the
Trend-Based Time lines):
1.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines to reshape the drawing tool.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Left-click the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines and 2 small square will appear at both ends of the trend line.
4.
Drag one of these till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
115
Formatting Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines. All the changes are performed
in the Format Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines window.
Each instance of a Fibonacci trend-based time lines has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more
Fibonacci trend-based time lines instances in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format
Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines window.
One can change the settings of the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines: the color, style and weight of the trend line
and time lines (up to 11 lines are available). It is possible to specify the desired distance percentages on which the
Trend-Based Time lines are based or the Fibonacci percentages can be used. One can also choose to show or not the
labels (price or/and value), select their font, style, size and the character set. It is possible to apply the strikeout or
underline effects to the labels. Labels can be oriented vertically or horizontally. If shown the labels can be displayed
at the top, bottom or in the middle of the Trend-Based Time lines, horizontally or vertically. It is possible to specify
the time and price coordinates.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines check or uncheck the corresponding
check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These values determine the
distance between the Trend-Based Time lines.
5.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the lines or click the
Others… button to select the custom colors.
6.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the lines.
7.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the lines.
8.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Trend-Based Time Lines.
9.
Click OK.
116
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Labels tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from theFont list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
out or/and underlined.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. From the Orientation drop-down list select the desired orientation to display labels horizontally or vertically.
11. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Trend-Based Time Lines.
12. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines window.
To access the Format Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
117
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Gann Fan
The Gann Fan was developed by the famous trader W. D. Gann who applied a combination of mathematical and
geometric principles to trading. He presupposed that there is a specific relationship between price and time that is
some unit of price equals some unit of time.
A Gann Fan is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate time and price movements from important highs and lows
and identify price breakouts.
To create a Gann Fan the middle line of time relative to price is drawn through two selected points. The first point
is the one from which a series of angled lines extends. And the second point is drawn to the right of the first and
determines the rate of equivalence between time and price. The middle line can be of any angle. The middle line
which has a 45-degree angle is known as the 1x1 price/time line. That is the price unit equals the time unit, so price
and time are in perfect balance.
The angled lines drawn from the first point indicate a price to time relationship that may be relatively fast or
relatively slow, depending on the size of the Gann angle.
These angled lines, relative to an assumed horizontal line and the middle line, subdivide this horizontal line into
eighths (or thirds).
The direction of a Gann Fan should depend on the current trend. To evaluate an upward trend, the Gann Fan should
be drawn upward to the right, starting at a market low. To evaluate a downward trend, the Gann Fan should be
drawn down from the right, starting at a market high.
Inserting Gann Fan
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Gann Fan:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Gann Tools and click Gann Fan.
•
Click the Gann Fan
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar, point to Gann Tools and select Gann
Fan.
2.
The cursor will change to the Gann fan
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Gann Fan is to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Gann Fan.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Gann Fan
To move a Gann Fan without changing its shape:
1.
Point the cursor at the Gann Fan that is to be moved.
118
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
Reshaping Gann Fan
To reshape a Gann Fan (change its middle line slope or distance between the fan lines):
1.
Point the cursor at the Gann Fan that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Left-click the Gann Fan and 2 small squares will appear on the middle line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Formatting Gann Fan
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Gann Fan. All the changes are performed in the Format Gann Fan
window.
Each instance of a Gann Fan has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Gann fan instances in
the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Gann Fan window.
One can change the settings of the Gann Fan: the color, style and weight of the fan lines. One can select the
time/price relationship on which the fan lines are based. One can also choose to show or not the labels (price or/and
value), select their font, style, size and the character set. It is possible to apply the strikeout or underline effects to
the labels. It is possible to specify the time and price coordinates.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Gann Fan window.
To access the Format Gann Fan window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Gann Fan'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Gann Fan check or uncheck the corresponding check boxes.
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the fan lines or click the
Others… button to select the custom colors.
5.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the fan lines.
119
6.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the fan lines.
7. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Gann
Fans.
8.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Gann Fan window.
To access the Format Gann Fan window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Gann Fan'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Labels tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
out or/and underlined.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Gann
Fans.
10. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Gann Fan window.
To access the Format Gann Fan window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click. Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Gann Fan'… from the shortcut menu. Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
120
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate of the origin point of the Gann Fan in the Start
Value field.
5.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired points number in the Points per Bar field.
Note. The price points per bar multiplied by the price is used to calculate the Price/Time Gann Lines as it determines
how much the lines increase for each bar.
6.
Click OK.
Cloning Gann Fan
To clone a Gann Fan:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Gann Fan that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Gann Square
The Gann Square is created by drawing a Gann Fan from each corner of a square. It is drawn to the right or left from
the selected point on a chart which is generally an important high or low.
Inserting Gann Square
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Gann Square:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Gann Tools and click Gann Square.
•
Click the Gann Square
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
Tools icon on the Main toolbar, point to Gann Tools and
select Gann Square.
2.
The cursor will change to the Gann
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Gann Square is to begin.
square .
4. Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Gann
Square.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Gann Square
To move a Gann Square without changing its shape:
1.
Point the cursor at the Gann Square that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
121
Reshaping Gann Square
To reshape a Gann Square (change its size):
1.
Point the cursor at the Gann Square that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Left-click the Gann Square and 2 small squares will appear in the corners.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Formatting Gann Square
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Gann Square. All the changes are performed in the Format Gann
Square window.
Each instance of a Gann square has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Gann square
instances in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Gann Square window.
One can change the settings of the Gann Square: the color, style and weight of the price/time lines. One can choose
the price/time relationship on which the Gann lines are based. One can also choose to show or not the labels (price
or/and value), select their font, style, size and the character set. It is possible to apply the strikeout or underline
effects to the labels. It is possible to specify the time and price coordinates.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Gann Square window.
To access the Format Gann Square window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Gann Square'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Gann square instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Gann Square check or uncheck the corresponding check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These percentages determine
the price/time relationships on which the Gann lines are based.
5.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the Gann lines or click the
Others… button to select the custom colors.
6.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the Gann lines.
7.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the Gann lines.
8.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Gann
Squares.
9.
Click OK.
122
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Gann Square window.
To access the Format Gann Square window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Gann Square'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Gann square instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Labels tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
out or/and underlined.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Gann
Squares.
10. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Gann Square window.
To access the Format Gann Square window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Gann Square'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Gann square instance that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
123
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Gann Square
To clone a Gann square:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be cloned.
2.
3.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
, then right-click.
Horisontal Line
A Horizontal Line is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate price levels as well as the support and resistance
levels. However, you should apply other analysis techniques to confirm price breakouts and make more precise
decisions.
Inserting Horizontal Line
1.
Select one of three ways to insert a Horizontal line:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Horizontal Line.
•
Click the Horizontal Line
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Horizontal Line from
the menu.
2.
The cursor will change to the Horizontal
line .
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Horizontal line to begin.
4.
Release the button.
Moving Horizontal Line
To move a Horizontal Line:
1.
Point the cursor at the Horizontal line that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Formatting Horizontal Line
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Horizontal line. All the changes are performed in the Format
Horizontal Line window.
Each instance of a Horizontal line has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Horizontal lines
in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Horizontal Line window.
One can change the settings of the Horizontal line: its color, style and weight. One can also choose to show or not
the labels, select their font, style, size and the character set. It is possible to apply the strikeout or underline effects
124
to the labels. If shown the labels can be displayed to the left, to the right, or in the middle of the Horizontal line. It
is also possible to change the price coordinate of the Horizontal line.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Horizontal Line window.
To access the Format Horizontal Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Horizontal Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Horizontal line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Others… button to select the custom color.
4.
From the Style drop-down list select the desired style.
5.
From the Weight drop-down list select the desired weight.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Horizontal
lines.
7.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Horizontal Line window.
To access the Format Horizontal Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Horizontal Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Horizontal line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Labels tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
125
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
out or/and underlined.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Horizontal
lines.
11. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Horizontal Line window.
To access the Format Horizontal Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Horizontal Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Horizontal line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate in the Value field.
4.
Click OK.
Cloning Horizontal Line
To clone a Horizontal line:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Recatangle
A Rectangle is a non-analytical drawing tool drawn for the purpose of highlighting the desired segment of a chart.
For instance, Rectangles can highlight a top, bottom, or a group of bars.
Inserting Rectangle
1.
Select one of three ways to insert a Rectangle:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Rectangle.
•
Click the Rectangle
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
126
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Main toolbar and select Rectangle from the menu.
2.
The cursor will change to the Rectangle
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Rectangle is to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Rectangle.
5.
Release the button.
.
Moving Rectangle
To move a Rectangle without changing its size:
1.
Point the cursor at the Rectangle that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Reshaping Rectangle
To reshape Rectangle (change its size):
1.
Point the cursor at the Rectangle that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Left-click the Rectangle and 4 small squares will appear in the corners.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Formatting Rectangle
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Rectangle. All the changes are performed in the Format Rectangle
window.
Each instance of a Rectangle has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Rectangles in the same
Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Rectangle window.
One can change the settings of a rectangle: the color, style and weight of the border line as well as the color and
pattern of the fill. One can also change the time and price coordinates of the rectangle.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Rectangle window.
To access the Format Rectangle window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Rectangle that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Rectangle that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Rectangle'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
127
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Rectangle that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Line section, using the Color drop-down list, select any of the preset 40 colors for the line or click the
Others… button to select the custom color.
4.
In the Line section, using the Style drop-down list, select the desired style for the line.
5.
In the Line section, using the Weight drop-down list, select the desired weight for the line (available only for
the solid line).
6.
In the Fill section, using the Color drop-down list, select any of the preset 40 colors for the fill or click the
Others… button to select the custom colors.
Rectangle
7.
In the Fill section, using the Pattern drop-down list, select the desired pattern for the fill.
8. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other
Rectangles.
9.
Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1. Access the Format Rectangle window.
To access the Format Rectangle window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Rectangle that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Rectangle that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Rectangle'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Rectangle that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Rectangle
To clone a Rectangle:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Rectangle that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
128
Regression Channel
The Regression Channel is an analytical drawing tool used to precisely define a price trend and its boundaries with
regard to the support and resistance levels. To create the Regression Channel two parallel equidistant lines are
drawn above and below a linear regression regression channel that is based on a user specified price (High, Low,
Open, Close). The bottom line is the support level, and the top line - the resistance level. All these channels are
based on the linear regression regression channel.
Prices may extend outside the channel for a short period of time. But if prices stay outside the Regression Channel
for a long period of time, a reversal trend may occur.
The distance of the channel lines from the median regression line is based on either:
1.
The highest point among the peaks and lowest point among the troughs between the points upon which the
median regression line is drawn.
2.
A user specified number of standard deviations above/below the median regression line.
3.
The maximal upward or downward oscillation.
4.
A user specified number of standard errors above/below the median regression line.
Markets tend to have a "balancing point" that is a point towards which prices tend to move. The Regression analysis
allows you to determine this "balancing point". On the other hand, the Standard Error analysis helps determine the
"extreme points".
In MultiCharts there are 4 types of regression channels:
1.
Segment High-Low.
2.
Standard Deviation.
3.
Raff Regression.
4.
Standard Error.
Inserting Regression Channel
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Regression Channel:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Regression Channel.
•
Click the Regression channel
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Regression Channel
from the menu.
2.
The cursor will change to the Regression channel
.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Regression Channel is to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer left or right to position the Regression Channel.
5.
Release the button.
Moving Regression Channel
To move a Regression Channel without changing its period length:
1.
Point the cursor at the Regression Channel that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
will change into Hand
.
129
4.
Release the button.
Reshaping Regression Channel
To reshape a Regression Channel (change its length):
1.
Point the cursor at the Regression Channel that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Left-click the Regression Channel and 2 small squares will appear at both ends of the regression line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape. Keep in mind that the Regression
will change into Hand
.
Channel will dynamically calculate the regression.
5.
Release the button.
Formatting Regression Channel
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Regression Channel. All the changes are performed in the Format
Regression Channel window.
Each instance of a Regression channel has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Regression
channels in the same Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Regression Channel window.
One can change the settings of a Regression Channel: the color, style and weight of the Regression, Upper Channel
and Lower Channel lines. It is possible to extend the Regression Channel to the left or/and to the right. One can
choose to show or not the labels and select their font, its style and size, and the character set. It is possible to apply
the strikeout or underline effects. If shown the labels can be displayed to the left or to the right of the Upper Channel
and Lower Channel lines. One can also select one of 4 calculation types available to compute the Regression Channel
and the price types to compute the regression line. It is also possible to change the time coordinates of the
Regression Channel.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Regression Channel window.
To access the Format Regression Channel window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Regression Channel'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Regression channel that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Data tab.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Regression channel check or uncheck the Regression, Upper Channel or
Lower Channel check boxes.
130
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired colors of the preset 40 colors for the
Regression, Upper Channel or Lower Channel lines or click the Others… button to select the custom colors.
5.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the Regression, Upper Channel or
Lower Channel lines.
6.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the Regression, Upper Channel
or Lower Channel lines.
7.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
8.
Click OK.
Extending Regression Channel to Left or Right
1.
Access the Format Regression Channel window.
To access the Format Regression Channel window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Regression Channel'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Regression channel that is to be formatted and press the Format… button. 2. Select the Data tab.
2.
In the Extend section check the Left or/and Right check boxes to extend the Regression channel to the left
or/and right.
3.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
4.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Regression Channel window.
To access the Format Regression Channel window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Regression Channel'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
131
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Regression channel that is to be formatted and press the Format… button. 2. Select the Labels
tab.
2.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
3.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
4.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
5.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
6.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
out or/and underlined.
7.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
8.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
9.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
10. Click OK.
Setting Calculation Type
1.
Access the Format Regression Channel window.
To access the Format Regression Channel window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Regression Channel'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Regression channel that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Regression Line section, using the Based on drop-down list, select the price on which the regression line
is based.
4.
In the Calculation section select the desired calculation type. There are 4 calculation types:
•
Segment High/Low
•
Raff Regression
•
Standard Deviation
Note. Using this type one should specify the number of standard deviations to plot the Upper and Lower Channel
lines.
•
Standard Error
Note. Using this type one should specify the number of standard errors to plot the Upper and Lower Channel lines.
5.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
132
6.
Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Regression Channel window.
To access the Format Regression Channel window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Regression Channel'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Regression channel that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendar.
4.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
5.
Click OK.
Remain in Drawing Mode
Remain in Drawing Mode allows to create several drawings in a row without the need to click on the drawing icon
on the toolbar every time.
To enable/disable Remain in Drawing Mode in the main menu Select View and click Remain in Drawing Mode
Retracement Calculator
Retracement Calculator
The Retracement Calculator computes the price retracement in percents in order to anticipate future trading
opportunities.
To calculate Percent Retracement three points are selected on a chart: a significant high or low, the opposite to the
first point high or low and an intermediate point between the first two for which the calculations will be performed.
The price range between the first two points is considered to be 100%.
Performing Retracement Calculation
To perform Retracement Calculation:
133
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Retracement Calculator:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Retracement Calculator.
•
Click the Retracement Calculator
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Retracement
Calculator from the menu.
2.
The cursor will change to the Retracement calculator
.
3.
In the Chart Area click a significant high or low, which will be the Price 1.
4.
Click the opposite to the first point high or low, which will be the Price 2.
5.
Click the intermediate point for which the percent retracement should be calculated. This will be the Price 3.
6.
After clicking the third point the Retracement Calculator window will appear with the Retracement
calculations.
7.
Click OK to close the window.
Snap Mode
When Snap Mode is enabled drawings are snapped to the closest open, high, low and close values of the data series
as well as closest plot values.
To enable Snap Mode in the main menu select View and click Snap Mode.
Text (Drawing Tool)
Text is a non-analytical drawing tool used to display text, the user's remarks and so on directly on a chart.
Inserting Text
1.
Select one of three ways to insert the Text:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Text.
•
Click the Text
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
2.
The cursor will change to the Text
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Text is to begin.
4.
The Format Text window will appear.
5.
Type in the desired text.
6.
Click OK.
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Text from the menu.
.
Moving Text
To move a Text:
1.
Point the cursor at the text that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
.
134
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
Formatting Text
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Text. All the changes are performed in the Format Text window.
Each instance of a Text has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Text instances in the same
Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Text window.
One can select the font, its style, size and color of the text that should be entered as well as the character set and
the font back color. It is possible to apply the Strikeout, Underline, Transparent and Framed effects to the text. One
can place the text to the left, right or in the middle of the initial point at which the text is entered that is move the
text along the time axis. One can also move the text along the price axis and place it at the top, bottom or in the
center.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Text window.
To access the Format Text window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Text instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Text instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Text'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Text that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Text field enter the needed text.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout, Underline, Transparent or/and Framed check boxes to
display the text struck out, underlined transparent or/and framed.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Font Back Color drop-down list select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Other… button to select
the custom colors.
Note. The Font Back Color drop-down list is not available if the Transparent effect is applied.
10. From the Font Color drop-down list select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Other… button to select the
custom colors.
11. From the Horizontal Alignment drop-down list select the location of the text along the time axis from the initial
point.
135
12. From the Vertical Alignment drop-down list select the location of the text along the price axis from the initial
point.
13. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when using the text as a
drawing tool in future.
14. Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Text window.
To access the Format Text window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Text instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Text instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Text'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Text that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinate in the Date field or use the drop-down calendar.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate in the Value field.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Text
To clone a Text:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Text that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Time Line
A Time Line is a non-analytical drawing tool used to show on the time axis the desired moment of time, the beginning
or the end of the needed period of time.
Inserting Time Line
1.
Select one of three ways to insert a Time line:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Time Line.
•
Click the Time line
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
136
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
menu.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Time Line from the
.
2.
The cursor will change to the Time line
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Time line to begin.
4.
Release the button.
Moving Time Line
To move a Time line:
1.
Point the cursor at the Time line that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Formatting Time Line
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Time Line. All the changes are performed in the Format Time Line
window.
Each instance of a Time line has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Time lines in the same
Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Time Line window.
One can change the settings of the Time line: its color, style and weight. One can also choose to show or not the
labels, select their font, style, size and the character set. It is possible to apply the strikeout or underline effects to
the labels. If shown the labels can be displayed horizontally or vertically and placed at the top, center or bottom of
the Time line. One can also change the time coordinate of the Time line.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Time Line window.
To access the Format Time Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Time line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Time line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Time Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Time line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Others… button to select the custom color.
4.
From the Style drop-down list select the desired style.
5.
From the Weight drop-down list select the desired weight.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Time lines.
137
7.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
Access the Format Time Line window.
To access the Format Time Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Time line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Time line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Time Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Time line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Labels tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
out or/and underlined.
8.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. From the Orientation drop-down list select the desired orientation to display labels horizontally or vertically.
11. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Time lines.
12. Click OK.
Time Line
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Time Line window.
To access the Format Time Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Time line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Time line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Time Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
138
2. Select the Time line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinate in the Date field or use the drop-down calendar.
4.
Click OK.
Trend Line
A Trend Line is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate the direction of price movement. The upward trend line
is called bullish, the downward trend line is called bearish. A trend reversal may take place if a market moves away
from its current trend. The Trend Line can be represented as a Ray Line or as an Extended Line.
Ray Line - is a trend line that can be extended to the right only. It is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate the
possible future direction of the price movement.
Extended Line - is a trend line that is extended to the left and to the right. It is an analytical drawing tool used to
indicate the past and future direction of the price movement.
Inserting Trend Line
1.
Select one of three ways to insert a Trend line:
•
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Trend Line.
•
Click the Trend line
icon on the Drawing toolbar.
•
Click the arrow next to the Drawing tools
the menu.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Trend Line from
.
2.
The cursor will change to the Trend line
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Trend line is to begin.
4. Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Trend
line.
5.
Release the button.
Note: To create a horisontal or vertical Trend Line hold Ctrl while inserting the Trend Line.
Moving Trend Line
To move a Trend line without changing its slope or length:
1.
Point the cursor at the Trend line that is to be moved.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the Trend line to the desired position.
4.
Release the button.
will change into Hand
.
Reshaping Trend Line
To reshape a Trend line (change its slope or length):
1.
Point the cursor at the Trend line that is to be reshaped.
2.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
.
139
3.
Left-click the Trend line and 2 small squares will appear at both ends of the Trend line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Release the button.
Formatting Trend Line
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Trend Line. All the changes are performed in the Format Trend
Line window.
Each instance of a Trend line has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Trend lines in the same
Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Trend Line window.
One can change the style of the Trend line: its color, style and weight. One can choose any element of the Trend line
to be displayed or hidden. It is possible to extend the Trend line to the left or/and to the right. One can also select
one of 4 calculation types available to compute a Trend line. It is also possible to change the time and price
coordinates of the Trend line.
Setting Style
1.
Access the Format Trend Line window.
To access the Format Trend Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Trend Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Trend line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Others… button to select the custom color.
4.
From the Style drop-down list select the desired style.
5.
From the Weight drop-down list select the desired weight.
6. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Trend
lines.
7.
Click OK.
Extending Trend Line to Left or Right
1.
Access the Format Trend Line window.
To access the Format Trend Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
140
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Trend Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Trend line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Extend section check the Left or/and Right check boxes to extend the Trend line to the left or/and right.
4. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Trend
lines.
5.
Click OK.
Setting Calculation Type
1.
Access the Format Trend Line window.
To access the Format Trend Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
2. Select Format 'Trend Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Trend line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Calculation type section select desired calculation type:
•
Freestyle - allows drawing a trend line in any angle and in any position. Using this calculation type one can
select the desired time and price coordinates.
Note. Both time and price coordinates are available for this calculation type.
•
Extreme - allows drawing a trend line attached to the extreme values of the beginning and ending bars
included in the trend line.
Note. Only time coordinates are available for this calculation type.
•
Fixed Point - allows drawing a trend line attached to a defined price (Open, High, Low or Close) of the
beginning and ending bars included in the trend line. One should select the desired bar price type from the Fixed
point drop-down list.
Note. Only time coordinates are available for this calculation type.
•
Regression - allows drawing a trend line as a linear regression line based on the bar price selected for all bars
included in the trend line. One should select the desired bar price type from the Regression drop-down list to
calculate the linear regression line.
Note. Only time coordinates are available for this calculation type.
141
4.
Click OK.
Setting Coordinates Precisely
1.
Access the Format Trend Line window.
To access the Format Trend Line window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Trend Line'… from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Trend line that is to be formatted and press the Format… button.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Trend Line
To clone a Trend line:
1.
Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be cloned.
2.
The cursor Pointer
3.
Select Clone Drawing from the shortcut menu.
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
Improve Visual Appearance of Drawing Tools
To improve visual appearance of drawing tools in the main menu select File, click Preferences..., select the
Appearance tab and check the Improve visual appearance of drawing tools (no bluriness, but higher CPU usage)
check box.
142
Non-Standard Chart Types
Cumulative Delta
Understanding Cumulative Delta Chart Type
Cumulative Delta is the algebraic sum of the single delta volume values.
In comparison to Volume Delta, Cumulative Delta is not based on
regular bars. When the Cumulative Delta chart type is used, the price
scale of the chart is transformed into volume scale and the formed bars
represent not volume within regular price bars, but accumulated delta
(buy - sell) of the volume per specified resolution. It can be used for
analysis only. Trading directly from this chart type is not supported.
Selecting Cumulative Delta Chart Type
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the New Chart Window
•
Use the Insert key on the keyboard; or:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
Select the Instrument tab.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source list.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can’t find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
Select the Settings tab.
6.
Select Cumulative Delta from the Chart Type list.
7.
Select Resolution for your chart to be based on. It allows you to choose which type of data (for more details
see Tick, Minute and Daily Data) and what detailed resolution will be used for building the bars.
8.
Select Breakdown by:
•
Up Ticks vs Down Ticks method:
•
If the current tick price is higher than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to BUY volume.
•
If the current tick price is lower than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL volume.
•
If the current tick price is the same as the previous tick price, the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with higher than previous
price and volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then another tick comes with the same as previous price, the
volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
•
If a tick is first one in the series, its volume goes to BUY volume.
143
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick trade data from your data source for the specified in chart
settings data range, if Up Ticks vs Down Ticks is selected.
•
Ask Traded vs Bid Traded method:
•
If the current tick price is higher or equals current ASK tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to BUY
volume.
•
If the current tick price is lower or equals current BID tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL
volume.
•
If the current tick price is between ASK and BID prices, then the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with a price higher or equals
current ASK tick price and its volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then another tick comes with a price that is
between ASK and BID prices, the volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick ask and bid data from your data source for the specified in chart
settings data range, if Ask Traded vs Bid Traded is selected.
9.
Check Break on Session if you want to see the session breaks (not available for daily-based resolutions).
10. Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart.
Note: Custom Futures are not supported on Cumulative Delta chart type.
Settings Cumulative Delta Chart Style (Open, High/Low, Close, Up, Wick, Down)
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
•
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
,
right-click and then click Format 'Symbol Name'; or:
•
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
Select one of the 2 available chart types:
•
OHLC Bar
•
Candlestick
•
Histogram
4.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
5.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
create custom colors.
6.
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
144
7.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
8.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
9.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Auto Trading Orders on Cumulative Delta Chart Type
Intra-Bar Order Generation is supported on Cumulative Delta chart type. Bar magnifier is not supported. To learn
how Intra-Bar Order Generation on Cumulative Delta Chart Type, see this page
Backtesting
There is no difference in order generation between Regular and Cumulative Delta chart types with regards to
backtesting. The basis of Cumulative Delta chart is volume, not price, so the orders are executed based on volume,
not on price.
Order Generation in Data Playback
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Cumulative Delta chart types with regards to data
playback. Only As Is type of Data Playback is available] for Cumulative delta chart type.
Real-Time Simulation
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Cumulative Delta chart types with regards to realtime order simulation.
Auto Trading
Auto trading is not allowed for this chart type.
Heikin-Ashi
Understanding Heikin-Ashi Chart Type
The Heikin-Ashi chart type is constructed like a regular candlestick chart
(except with the new values above). The time series is defined by the
user depending on the type of chart desired (daily, hourly, etc.). Instead
of using the open-high-low-close (OHLC) bars like standard candlestick
charts, the Heikin-Ashi technique uses a modified formula:
Close = (Open+High+Low+Close)/4 Open = [Open (previous bar) + Close
(previous bar)]/2 High = Max (High,Open,Close) Low = Min
( Low,Open, Close )
145
Selecting Heikin-Ashi Chart Type
To create a new chart:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the New Chart Window
•
Use the Insert key on the keyboard; or:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
Select the Instrument tab.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source list.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can’t find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
Select the Settings tab.
6.
Select Heikin-Ashi from the Chart Type list.
7.
Enter the Resolution in the corresponding boxes.
8.
Select Break on Session if you want to see the session breaks.
9.
Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Selecting Heikin-Ashi Chart Style
Chart style can be selected from the Format Instrument window:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
•
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
,
right-click and then click Format 'Symbol Name'; or:
•
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
create custom colors.
5.
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
146
Auto trading orders on Heikin-Ashi Chart Type
There are some differences between Regular and Heikin-Ashi chart types with regards to order generation in real
time and backtesting.
Backtesting and Data Playback
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Heikin-Ashi chart types with regards to Backtesting
and Data Playback.
Real-Time simulation
Heikin-Ashi
Type of the
strategy
Regular Chart Type
Heikin-Ashi Chart Type
Buy next bar
at market
Order is placed on the first tick of the
new bar, i.e. on Open of next bar.
Order is placed on Open of Hiekin Ashi bar, when the new tick of this bar is received.
Open of the Hiekin Ashi bar is not equal to the price of the received tick. HA Open = (HA
Open[1] + HA Close[1])/2.
Buy this bar
at close
Order is placed on the last tick of a
bar,
Order is placed on the Close of the current Heikin Ashi bar. Close of the Heikin Ashi bar
is not equal to the price of the tick that closes this bar. HA Close = (Open + High + Low +
Close)/4.
i.e. on the Close of the current bar.
Price orders
Order is placed at the price of the first
tick that satisfies Stop or Limit
conditions.
Order is placed at the price of the first tick that satisfies Stop or Limit conditions.
Auto Trading
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Heikin-Ashi chart types with regards to Auto
Trading.
To learn how Intra-Bar Order Generation and Bar Magnifier work on Point and Figure Chart Type, see this page
Kagi
Understanding Kagi Chart Type
It uses a series of vertical lines to illustrate general levels of supply and
demand for certain assets. Thick lines are drawn when the price of the
underlying asset breaks above the previous high price and is interpreted as
an increase in demand for the asset. Thin lines are used to represent
increased supply when the price falls below the previous low.
Selecting Kagi Chart Type
To create a new chart:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
147
•
Click the New Chart Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
•
Use the Insert key on the keyboard; or:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
Select the Instrument tab.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can’t find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
Select the Settings tab.
6.
Select Kagi from the Chart Type list.
7.
Enter the Reversal and Resolution in the corresponding boxes.
8.
Select Break on Session if you want to see the session breaks.
9.
Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Selecting Kagi Chart Style
Chart style can be selected from the Format Instrument window:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
•
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
,
right-click and then click Format 'Symbol Name'; or:
•
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
create custom colors.
5.
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Auto trading orders on Kagi Chart Type
There are some differences between Regular and Kagi chart types with regards to order generation in real time and
backtesting.
148
Backtesting and Data Playback
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Kagi chart types with regards to Backtesting and
Data Playback.
Real-Time simulation
Type of the
strategy
Regular Chart Type
Kagi Chart Type
Buy next bar
at market
Order is placed on the first tick of the
new bar, i.e. on the Open of next bar.
Order is placed on Open of next column, not on the first tick but only when column’s
status turns from in-progress into fixed*.
Buy this bar
at close
Order is placed on the last tick of the
bar, i.e. on the Close of the current bar.
When a column’s status turns from in-progress into fixed*, the order is placed at the
Close price of the previous column.
Price orders
Order is placed at the price of the first
tick that satisfies Stop and Limit
conditions.
Order is placed either on the last, closing tick of a column or on the Open of the bar
after the column has been closed (if it is guaranteed to be filled) taking into account
Stop or Limit conditions.
* After the resolution time frame has passed.
Auto Trading
Type of the
strategy
Regular Chart Type
Kagi Chart Type
Buy next bar at
market
When the first tick of a new bar comes, the market
order is sent to the broker.
When the next column’s status turns from in-progress into fixed*, a
market order is sent to the broker.
Buy this bar at
close
When the last, closing tick comes, the market order
is sent to the broker.
When the next column’s status turns from in-progress into fixed*, a
market order is sent to the broker.
Price orders
When the auto trading is on, a price order is sent to
the broker.
When the auto trading is on a price order is sent to the broker.
* After the resolution time frame has passed.
149
Line Break
Understanding Line Break Chart Type
The concept of the Line Break chart is similar to Point and Figure charts. It is
made up of a series of vertical blocks called lines that use close prices to
indicate market direction. The Line Break chart looks like a series of rising
and falling lines of varying heights. Each new line, like the X's and O's of a
point and figure chart, constitutes a new column. Using close prices (or
highs and lows), a new rising line is drawn if the previous high is exceeded.
A new falling line is drawn if the price hits a new low.
Selecting Line Break Chart Type
To create a new chart:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the New Chart Window
•
Use the Insert key on the keyboard; or:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
Select the Instrument tab.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can’t find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
Select the Settings tab.
6.
Select Line Break from the Chart Type list.
7.
Enter the Line Breaks and Resolution in the corresponding boxes.
8.
Select Break on Session if you want to see the session breaks.
9.
Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Selecting Line Break Chart Style
Chart style can be selected from the Format Instrument window:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
•
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
,
right-click and then click Format 'Symbol Name'; or:
•
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
150
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
create custom colors.
5.
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Auto trading orders on Line Break Chart Type
There are some differences between Regular and Line Break chart types with regards to order generation in real
time and backtesting.
Backtesting and Data Playback
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Line Break chart types with regards to Backtesting
and Data Playback.
Real-Time simulation
Type of the
strategy
Regular Chart Type
Line Break Chart Type
Buy next
bar at
market
Order is placed on the first tick of the
new bar, i.e. on the Open of the next
bar.
Order is placed at the price of the first received tick, this tick may not be a part of a
box, in this case the order is displayed not on OHLC of the box but on the price level
of the first received tick.
Buy this
bar at close
Order is placed on the last tick of a
bar,
Order is placed on the close of current bar, i.e. when the bar is closed then the order
is placed.
i.e. on the Close of the current bar.
Price
orders
Order is placed at the price of the first
tick that satisfies Stop and Limit
conditions.
Order is placed at the price of the first tick that satisfies Stop and Limit conditions.
Auto Trading
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Line Break chart types with regards to Auto Trading.
151
Point and Figure
Understanding Point and Figure Chart Type
Point and Figure chart type is a chart that plots price movements
without taking into consideration the time period. Point and figure
charts are composed of a number of columns that consist of a series of
stacked Xs or Os. A column of Xs is used to indicate a rising price, while
Os represent a falling price. New Xs or Os are added to the chart once
the price changes by more than a predefined amount. Once the price
moves to the opposite direction by more than a predefined amount, a
new column is plotted.
Selecting Point and Figure Chart Type
To create a new chart:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the New Chart Window
•
Use the Insert key on the keyboard; or:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
Select the Instrument tab.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source list.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can’t find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
Select the Settings tab.
6.
Select Point and Figure from the Chart Type list.
7.
Enter the Box Size, Reversal and Resolution in the corresponding boxes.
8.
Select High/Low Range or Close input from the Input list.
9.
Select Break on Session if you want to see the session breaks.
10. Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Selecting Point&Figure Chart Style
Chart style can be selected from the Format Instrument window:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
•
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
f,
right-click and then click Format 'Symbol Name'; or:
152
•
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
create custom colors.
5.
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Auto trading orders on Point and Figure Chart Type
There are some differences between Regular and Point and Figure chart types with regards to order generation in
real time and backtesting.
Backtesting and Data Playback
Type of the
strategy
Regular Chart Type
Point and Figure Chart Type
Buy next bar
at market
Order is placed on the Open of the next bar.
Order is placed on the Open of the next column.
Buy this bar at
close
Order is placed on the Close of the current bar.
Order is placed on the Close of the current column.
Price orders
Order is placed either on the Open of the next bar (if it is
guaranteed to be filled) or intra bar at Stop or Limit prices.
Order is placed either on the Open of the next bar (if it is
guaranteed to be filled) or intra bar at Stop or Limit prices.
Real-Time simulation
Buy next bar
at market
Regular Chart Type
Point and Figure Chart Type
Buy next bar
at market
Order is placed on the first tick of the
new bar, i.e. on the Open of the next
bar.
Order is placed on the Open of the next column, not on the first tick but only when
column’s status turns from in-progress into fixed*.
Buy this bar
at close
Order is placed on the last tick of the
bar, i.e. on the Close of the current bar.
When the status of the column turns from in-progress into fixed*, the order is placed
at the Close price of the previous column.
Price orders
Order is placed at the price of the first
tick that satisfies the Stop and Limit
conditions.
Order is placed either on the last closing tick of the column or on the Open of the next
bar after the column has been closed (if it is guaranteed to be filled) taking into
account Stop or Limit conditions.
* After the resolution time frame has passed.
153
Auto Trading
Type of the
strategy
Regular Chart Type
Point and Figure Chart Type
Buy next bar at
market
When the first tick of a new bar comes, the
market order is sent to the broker.
When the next column’s status turns from in-progress into fixed*, a
market order is sent to the broker
Buy this bar at
close
When the last, closing tick comes, the market
order is sent to the broker.
When a column’s status turns from in-progress into fixed*, an order is
placed at Close price of the previous column.
Price orders
When the auto trading is on, a price order is sent
to the broker.
When the auto trading is on a price order is sent to the broker.
* After the resolution time frame has passed.
Renko
Understanding Renko Chart Type
A renko chart is constructed by placing a brick in the next column once
the price surpasses the top or bottom of the previous brick by a
predefined amount. Up boxes are used when the direction of the trend
is up, while down boxes are used when the trend is down.
Selecting Renko Chart Type
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following
methods:
•
Click the New Chart Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
•
Use the Insert key on the keyboard; or:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
Select the Instrument tab.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source list.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can’t find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
Select the Settings tab.
6.
Select Renko from the Chart Type list.
7.
Enter the Box Size in the corresponding boxes.
8.
Select whether you wnat the box size based on Fixed Price or Percents from last box open/close.Example: If
the previous box is green and current price is moving upwards, then the fixed price/percent is calculated based on
previous box close (from the right top corner of the box).
If the previous box is red and current price is moving upwards, then the fixed price/percent is calculated based on
previous box open (from the right top corner of the box).
154
If the previous box is green and current price is moving downwards, then the fixed price/percent is calculated based
on previous box open (from the right bottom corner of the box).
If the previous box is red and current price is moving upwards, then the fixed price/percent is calculated based on
previous box close (from the right bottom corner of the box).
9.
Select Resolution for your chart to be based on. It allows you to choose which type of data (for more details
see Tick, Minute and Daily Data) and what detailed resolution will be used for building the boxes.
Note: MultiCharts 8.0 implementation: in real-time no matter what resolution is specified, each next box of t
he specified size will be plotted once privious box is finished.
MultiCharts 8.1 and any further version implementation: depending on the selected resolution the current
box may be huge in real-time and not match your box size, but when the selected in resolution bar (1 day for
instance) is closed, you'll see a lot of boxes of the specified box size instead of that huge one.
10. Uncheck Break on Session if you don't want to see the session breaks (not available for daily-based
resolutions).
11. Uncheck Show 'Phantom' Bars to see gaps between the bars if the was no such price.
12. Check Show Wick box to see wicks of each bar, demonstrating how the price was moving before the bar close.
Note: Wicks will not be shown on chart until the style is changed to Candlesticks.
13. Check Show Real Open to see real open price of the box (in this case the box will trigger not from an angle of
the prvious box).
14. Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Selecting Renko Chart Style (Up Box, Down Box, Current Up Box, Current Down Box)
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
•
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
,
right-click and then click Format 'Symbol Name'; or:
•
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
create custom colors.
5.
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
155
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Auto trading orders on Renko Chart Type
There are some differences between Regular and Renko chart types with regards to order generation in real time
and backtesting.
Backtesting and Data Playback
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Renko chart types with regards to Backtesting and
Data Playback.
Real-Time simulation
Type of the
strategy
Regular Chart Type
Renko Chart Type
Buy next
bar at
market
Order is placed on the first tick
of the new bar, i.e. on the
Open of the next bar.
Order is placed at the price of the first received tick, this tick may not be a part of the box, in
this case the order is displayed not on OHLC of the box but on the price level of the first
received tick.
Buy this bar
at close
Order is placed on the last tick
of the bar, i.e. on the Close of
the current bar.
Order is placed on the Close price of the current box. When the box is closed the order is placed
at the Close of the box. Last tick of the box may be not included in the box itself, in this case the
order is displayed not on in this case price level of the tick but on in this case Close of the box.
Price orders
Order is placed at the price of
the first tick that satisfies Stop
or Limit conditions.
Order is placed at the price of the first tick that satisfies Stop or Limit conditions.
Auto Trading
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Renko chart types with regards to Auto Trading.
To learn how Intra-Bar Order Generation and Bar Magnifier work on Renko Chart Type, see this page
Volume Delta
Understanding Volume Delta Chart Type
Volume Delta chart type provides price and volume activity together on one
data point over a specified time frame. It allows traders to see "within" the
price bar to provide more transparency over a traditional chart. A bar is
divided to equal parts based on minimum price increments for the symbol.
Each box shows ask and bid volume in one of the three ways: ask x bid values,
ask and bid sum or their delta. There are 2 base colors: red and green. A box
is green if delta of ask and bid volume is positive. A box is red if delta of ask
and bid is negative. All boxes within 1 bar are not the same in terms of color.
The darker a red box is, the lower is its delta value. The darker a green box
is, the higher is its delta value. All boxes between these extremes are colored
respectively.
156
Selecting Volume Delta Chart Type
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the New Chart Window
•
Use the Insert key on the keyboard; or:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
Select the Instrument tab.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source list.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the Category tabs to show only a
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can’t find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
Select the Settings tab.
6.
Select Volume Delta from the Chart Type list.
7.
Select the Resolution your chart will be based on. It allows you to choose which type of data (for more details
see Tick, Minute and Daily Data) and what detailed resolution will be used for building the bars.
8.
Select Breakdown by:
•
Up Ticks vs Down Ticks method:
•
If the current tick price is higher than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to BUY volume.
•
If the current tick price is lower than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL volume.
•
If the current tick price is the same as the previous tick price, the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with higher than previous
price and volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then another tick comes with the same as previous price, the
volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
•
If a tick is first one in the series, its volume goes to BUY volume.
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick trade data from your data source for the specified in chart
settings data range, if Up Ticks vs Down Ticks is selected.
•
•
Ask Traded vs Bid Traded method:
If the current tick price is higher or equals current ASK tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to BUY
volume.
•
If the current tick price is lower or equals current BID tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL
volume.
•
If the current tick price is between ASK and BID prices, than the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with a price higher or equals
current ASK tick price and its volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then another tick comes with a price that is
between ASK and BID prices, the volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick ask and bid data from your data source for the specified in chart
settings data range, if Ask Traded vs Bid Traded is selected.
9.
Select Show Volume as:
•
Bid x Ask VolumeExample: 0x56, where 0 is SELL volume and 56 is BUY volume.
•
Total VolumeExample: 56 is the sum of BUY + SELL volume.
•
Delta (Ask – Bid Volume)Example: 56 is the difference between 56 and 0.
157
10. Check Displayed as a percentage to see BUY and SELL volume in %. Available only for Total Volume and Delta
(Ask – Bid Volume).
•
If Total Volume is selected and Displayed as a percentage, the whole bar represents 100% of used volume,
each part of the bar represents a particular % of used volume respectively.
•
If Delta (Ask – Bid Volume) is selected and Displayed as a percentage is checked, then a higher value
between BUY and SELL volume of a particular box is taken, then it is multiplied by 100 and divided by total volume
of this box.Example: BUY volume = 180, SELL volume = 30. The percentage of the box is calculated this way: (180 x
100) / (180 + 30) = 85,71%.
Note that for Delta (Ask – Bid Volume) the percentage is shown for each box individually, not for the whole bar.
11. Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart.
Note: Custom Futures are not supported on Volume Delta chart type.
Settings Volume Delta Chart Style (Up, Wick, Down, Buy Volume, Sell VOlume)
1.
Open the Format Instrument window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
•
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
,
right-click and then click Format 'Symbol Name'; or:
•
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Style tab.
3.
Select one of the 2 available chart types:
•
Volume Delta
•
Profile
4.
In the Chart Style section click on the component element to be changed.
5.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
create custom colors.
6.
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
7.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
8.
To hide BUY and SELL volume values check the Color Only box (unchecked by default).
9.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
10. To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
158
Auto Trading Orders on Volume Delta Chart Type
Intra-Bar Order Generation is supported on Volume Delta chart type. Bar magnifier is not supported. To learn how
Intra-Bar Order Generation on Volume Delta Chart Type, see this page
Backtesting
There is no difference in order generation between Regular and Volume Delta chart types with regards to
backtesting. Though visually a regular chart and volume delta charts are completely different, technically they
consist of the same OHLC bars.
Order Generation in Data Playback
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Volume Delta chart types with regards to data
playback. Only As Is type of Data Playback is available] for volume delta chart type.
Real-Time Simulation
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Volume Delta chart types with regards to real-time
order simulation.
Auto Trading
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Volume Delta chart types with regards to Auto
Trading.
Intra-Bar Order Generation, Bar Magnifier on NonStandard Chart Types
Intra-Bar Order Generation in Backtesting
Intra-Bar Order Generation mode allows generating orders within a bar. In backtesting Intra-Bar Order Generation
is limited by four calculations per bar: Open, High, Low, Close. Historical Intra-Bar calculation of the strategy is
divided into 4 segments:
1.
( Open),
2.
( Open-High),
3.
( High-Low),
4.
( Low-Close ).
Calculation of the “Buy next bar at market” strategy is done as follows:
1.
calculation on the first bar segment (Open) and generation of a market order on Open = Low of the next bar
segment.
2.
calculation on the second bar segment (Open-High) and generation of a market order on Open = High of the
next bar segment.
3.
calculation on the third bar segment (High-Low) and generation of a market order on Open = Low of the next
bar segment.
4.
calculation on the fourth bar segment (Low-Close) and generation of a market order on Open of the next bar.
159
Calculation of the “Buy this bar at Close” strategy is done the same way as with Intra-Bar Order Generation off, i.e.
the orders will be generated on the Close of the current bar.
Calculation of the strategy that generates price orders will be performed the same way, but the generation of price
orders will be limited by Stop or Limit conditions.
Bar Magnifier is essential for more detailed calculation of the strategy on historical data.
Bar Magnifier with Intra-Bar Order Generation ON allows a strategy to be calculated not only four times per bar (
using OHLC data as with only Intra-Bar Order Generation ON), but as many times as there is detailed data.
Intra-Bar Order Generation in Real-Time Calculation
Intra-Bar Order Generation mode allows the strategy to generate orders within the bar. In this case the calculation
of the strategy is made on every tick of the bar.
BackTesting + IOG
BackTest + Bar
Magnifier + IOG
Real-Time + IOG
Regular
As described above
As described above
Strategy calculation is done
on every tick of a bar.
Volume
As described above
As described above
Strategy calculation is done
on every tick of a bar.
X column is specified as: (Open), (Open-Low), (Low-High), (High-Close). O
column is specified as: (Open), (Open-High), (High-Low), (Low-Close).
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Strategy calculation is done
on every tick of a bar.
Kagi
Up-going bar is specified as: (Open), (Open-Low), (Low-High), (High-Close).
Down-going bar is specified as: (Open), (Open-High), (High-Low), ( Low-Close ).
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Strategy calculation is done
on every tick of a bar.
Renko
Up-going bar is specified as: (Open), (Open-Low), (Low-High), (High-Close).
Down-going bar is specified as: (Open), (Open-High), (High-Low), ( Low-Close ).
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Strategy calculation is done
on every tick of a bar.
Line Break
Up-going bar is specified as: (Open), (Open-Low), (Low-High), (High-Close).
Down-going bar is specified as: (Open), (Open-High), (High-Low), ( Low-Close ).
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Strategy calculation is done
on every tick of a bar.
Same as on Regular Chart Type.
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Strategy calculation is done
on every tick of a bar.
Delta
Point &
Figure
Heikin
Ashi
160
Using Charts
Adjusting Chart
It is possible to scroll through charts horizontally, move the data series up or down vertically, adjust horizontal and
vertical scales, and zoom in and out.
Scrolling Horizontally through a Chart
Scrolling horizontally through a chart allows viewing the parts of a data series that extend outside the visible range
of the Chart Window. Make sure that the Chart Window, containing the chart to be scrolled through, is selected as
the active window. A chart can be scrolled through only if the data series extends beyond the visible range.
To scroll through a chart use the scroll bar at the bottom of the Chart Window: position the mouse pointer over the
"bar" of the scroll bar, click and hold the left mouse button, and drag the "bar" to the left or to the right, or click the
left or the right button on the scroll bar; please note that the scroll bar will not appear if it is hidden in the
Appearance settings.
A chart can also be scrolled through horizontally by one of the following methods:
•
Use the mouse wheel to scroll through the chart; or:
•
Click the Scroll Left
•
Position the mouse pointer over a data series; once the Pointer
or the Scroll Right
icon on the Control toolbar; or:
changes into a Hand
, hold the left
mouse button and drag the chart to the right or to the left; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the chart area and press and hold the space bar; once the Pointer
changes into a Horizontal Double-Headed Arrow
, hold the left mouse button and drag the chart to the right
or to the left; or:
•
Use the Arrow Left and Arrow Right keys on the keyboard; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Scroll Left or Scroll Right.
Moving a Data Series Vertically
Make sure that the data series to be moved vertically is selected as the active series.
To move a series vertically in the chart click the Move Up
or the Move Down
icon on the Control toolbar.
A data series can also be moved vertically by one of the following methods:
161
•
Position the mouse pointer over the price scale and press and hold the space bar; once the Pointer
changes into a Vertical Double-Headed Arrow
, hold the left mouse button and drag the series up or down;
or:
•
Use the Arrow Up or the Arrow Down key on the keyboard; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Move Up or Move Down.
Adjusting Chart Scales
Horizontal chart scale can be adjusted by changing the bar spacing, and vertical scale by changing the price scale
compression.
Changing Bar Spacing
Make sure that the Chart Window containing the chart, the bar spacing of which is to be changed, is selected as the
active window.
To change the chart's bar spacing click the Decrease Bar Spacing
or the Increase Bar Spacing
icon on the
Control toolbar.
The chart's bar spacing can also be changed by one of the following methods:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the time scale; hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the right
or to the left (the pointer will change into an Increase Spacing
•
or Decrease Spacing
symbol); or:
Use Ctrl + Plus and Ctrl + Minus hotkey combinations; the numeric pad keys as well as the regular keyboard
keys can be used; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Increase Bar Spacing or Decrease Bar Spacing; or:
•
Set Bar Spacing, in pixels, in the X - Time Scale tab of the Format Appearance window.
Displaying Entire Series
To display the entire data series select Format in the main menu and click Display Entire Series.
Changing Price Scale Compression
Make sure that the data series, the price scale compression of which is to be changed, is selected as the active series.
To change the compression of a series' price scale click the Compress Price Scale
or the Expand Price Scale
icon on the Control toolbar.
The series' price scale compression can also be changed by one of the following methods:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the price scale; hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer up or down
(the pointer will change into an Expand
•
or Compress
symbol); or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Compress Price Scale or Expand Price Scale.
Resetting Scales
Chart scales can be reset, canceling any changes made to the time scale (bar spacing) or the price scale (compression
and series vertical position).
Scales can be reset individually or both at once.
162
Resetting Both Scales
Make sure that the Chart Window containing the chart, the scales of which are to be reset, is selected as the active
window.
To reset both scales of a Chart Window click the Reset Scales
icon on the Control toolbar.
Tip: Both scales can also be reset by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Reset Scales.
Resetting Time Scale (Bar Spacing)
Make sure that the Chart Window containing the chart, the time scale of which is to be reset, is selected as the
active window.
To reset the time scale (bar spacing) of a Chart Window click the Reset Time Scale
icon on the Control toolbar.
The time scale (bar spacing) can also be reset by one of the following methods:
•
Double-click on the time scale; or:
•
Right-click on the time scale and then click Reset Scale; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Reset Time Scale.
Resetting Price Scale
Make sure that the Chart Window containing the chart, the price scale of which is to be reset, is selected as the
active window.
Resetting cancels the price scale compression as well as any vertical displacement of the data series.
To reset a Chart Window's price scale click the Reset Price Scale
icon on the Control toolbar.
The compression of a chart's price scale can also be reset by one of the following methods:
•
Double-click on the price scale; or:
•
Right-click on the price scale and then click Reset Scale; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Reset Price Scale.
Zooming In
To zoom in on a section of a chart:
1.
Click the Zoom In
icon on the Control toolbar, or select Format in the main menu and click Zoom In; the
Pointer
will change into a Magnifying Glass
.
2. Use the mouse pointer to define a rectangular zoom-in area on the chart: position the pointer in one corner of
the rectangle, hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer diagonally across to the opposite corner; the zoomin area borders will be indicated during the selection.
3.
Release the mouse button; the chart will zoom in on the defined rectangle.
There is no limit to the number of times a zoom-in can be performed within the same chart: to zoom in further,
repeat steps 2 and 3; each zoom-in constitutes a "Zoom Step".
Zooming Out
To zoom out one "Zoom Step" click the Zoom Out
icon on the Control toolbar, or select Format in the main
menu and click Zoom Out.
Each zoom-out reverses a single zoom-in step; to zoom out a step further, repeat the zoom-out again.
163
Note: The Zoom Out icon is enabled only if the chart is zoomed in.
Background Dragging
Background Dragging feature is an easy way to scroll the chart horizontally and vertically using the mouse.
1. Enable Background Dragging by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Background Dragging icon
•
In the main menu select and click the Background Dragging.
on the Main toolbar, or:
1. Drag the chart using the mouse.
Note: When Background Dragging is enabled it is active on all charts in all workspaces.
Note: If 2 or more workspaces are loaded and Background Dragging in enabled, when one of the workspaces is
closed, Background Dragging turns off automatically. The same happens if all charts in a workspace are closed. When
MultiCharts is restarted, the Background Dragging is off by default.
Changing Visual Order
When a number of objects are displayed in a single SubChart, the objects are displayed in "layers" – one object is in
the "front", the next is "behind" it, and so on. The order of the layers constitutes the Visual Order of the objects.
The Visual Order can be changed to prevent a thick line in the "front" layer from obscuring a thin line in the "back"
layer.
The Visual order can be changed by two different methods:
•
Right-click on the chart area and then click Visual Order; in the Visual Order window that appears, select an
object and use the order buttons to change its visual order; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over an object; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click, then
point to Visual Order and use the shortcut menu order commands to change the visual order of the object. Visual
Order commands/buttons:
Bring to Front – the object will be placed in the front of all other objects
Send to Back – the object will be placed behind all other objects Bring
Forward – the object will be moved one layer to the front
Send Backward – the object will be moved one layer back
164
Making Screenshot
An image of the active Chart Window can be copied to the clipboard for use in another application, saved as a file,
or sent via e-mail.
An image of the entire application window can also be saved as a file.
Copying Image to Clipboard
To copy an image of the active Chart Window to the clipboard:
Select File in the main menu and click Copy Image to Clipboard.
Tip: The clipboard image can now be pasted in another application.
Saving Image as File
To save an image of the active Chart Window or the entire application window as a file:
1.
Select File in the main menu and click Save as Image.
2.
In the Save as Image window that appears, choose the Active Window or the Application Window radio
button.
3.
In the Reduce Image to drop-down list box select the size of the image to be saved, in percent; reducing the
image lowers the resolution and decreases the image file size.
4.
Check the Show Image check box to display the image file once it has been saved.
5.
Click OK.
6.
In the Save As dialog box that appears, choose the file name and the image format type, and click the Save
button.
7.
If the Show Image check box has been checked, the saved image will be displayed.
Sending Image via E-mail
To send an image of the active Chart Window via e-mail:
Select File in the main menu and click Send Image via E-mail; the computer's e-mail client will be started
and a new e-mail created with the image file already attached.
Printing Charts
Prining Charts
For a print preview:
Select File in the main menu and click Print Preview; page setup can be accessed, and the chart printed, directly
from the print preview window.
To print the chart in the active Chart Window:
Select File in the main menu and click Print, or use the Ctrl + P hotkey combination.
165
For the page setup:
Select File in the main menu and click Page Setup.
Reloading Charts
Occasionally a bad tick, an error, or a gap in the price data causes a chart to plot improperly.
Reloading will redraw the chart based on a fresh set of data from the data source. In the process of reloading, a new
set of data is downloaded from the data feed.
It is possible to reload the entire length of the data series or to reload only a certain number of days back. Any
existing data, for which no replacement data is available from the data source, is retained.
Reloading Charts
Reloading the Entire Data Series
•
Select View in the main menu, select Reload, and select Reload All Data, or
•
Press CTRL+R using the keyboard.
Tip: A chart can also be reloaded by typing .rld into the Command Line toolbar.
Reloading Only a Number of Days Back
1.
Select View in the main menu and select Reload.
2.
Select the number of days back.
Global Reload
In addition to reloading the data for a single chart, all of the data, for some or all of the charts, can be reloaded by
entering a Global Reload command into the Command Line toolbar.
Usage
.rld glob[, res = Resolution]
Parameters inside the square brackets are optional
Where:
.rld – reload command
glob – an optional parameter; specifies a global reload
res – an optional parameter, limits the global reload to charts with the specified resolution only; must be preceded
by a comma
Resolution – an optional parameter, used in combination with the res parameter; specifies the resolution of the
charts that the global reload will be limited to.
Examples
.rld will reload the chart in the active window
.rld glob will reload all charts
.rld glob, res=1minute will reload all charts with a resolution of 1 minute
166
Note: After reloading charts with 1-Tick resolutions, it is necessary to exit and re-start the application. Make sure to
wait at least 30 seconds before restarting the application in order to make sure that all of its processes have ended.
You can also end the processes manually by using the Task Manager.
Note: In some instances it may be necessary to completely restart the computer in order to complete the process
of reloading a chart with a 1-Tick resolution.
Using Pointers
A pointer is a movable marker that indicates a position on the screen and follows the movement of the mouse.
Commands and options can be selected by positioning the pointer over the desired choice and clicking a mouse
button.
Two kinds of markers can be chosen: Conventional (Arrow) Pointer and Cross Pointer.
The pointers can be used in three modes: Hint, Cross, and Tracking.
Pointer
To choose the conventional mouse pointer, click the Pointer
icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The conventional mouse pointer can also be chosen by selecting View in the main menu and clicking Pointer.
Cross Pointer
Cross Pointer looks like the crosshairs of a target sight and is preferred by some users.
To choose the Cross Pointer, click the Cross Pointer
icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Cross Pointer can also be chosen by selecting View in the main menu and clicking Cross Pointer.
Understanding Hint Modes
Chart Hint
A Chart Hint window displays the time, price, and other data specific to the pointer's position on a chart.
To show the Chart Hint window temporarily, click and hold the left mouse button while the mouse pointer is
positioned or dragged over a chart; once the mouse button is let go, the hint window will disappear.
To toggle the Chart Hint window on and off, click the Show Chart Hint
icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Chart Hint window can also be toggled on and off by selecting View in the main menu and clicking Show Chart
Hint.
To toggle Hint windows between transparent and opaque modes select View in the main menu and click
Transparent Hint.
Drawing Hint
A Drawing Hint window appears next to the mouse pointer during the drawing operations, and displays the drawing
tool data specific to the pointer's position on a chart.
167
To toggle the Drawing Hint window on and off select View in the main menu and click Show Drawing Hint.
To toggle Hint windows between transparent and opaque modes select View in the main menu and click
Transparent Hint.
Cross Mode
The Cross mode aids in determining the pointer's position. The perpendicular lines of the "cross" reference the
pointer's exact location in respect to the axes, with the corresponding values displayed in the Labels on each axis.
To toggle the Cross mode on and off click the Show Cross
icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar.
The Cross mode can also be toggled on and off by selecting View in the main menu and clicking Show Cross.
To toggle the Cross mode Labels between transparent and opaque modes select View in the main menu and click
Solid Labels.
Understanding Tracking Modes
Tracking modes can only be used in combination with the Cross mode. Tracking modes replicate the Cross mode
lines in all of the Workspace's Chart Windows in which the lines fall within the range of the chart.
The Labels are displayed in the original window only. A Tracking mode is also known as the Global Cursor.
The Tracking Time and Price mode replicates both Time and Price lines, and the Tracking Time mode replicates only
the Time line.
Tracking Time and Price
In order to use a Tracking mode the Cross mode must first be enabled.
To toggle the Tracking Time and Price mode on and off click the Tracking Time and Price icon on the Chart Analysis
toolbar.
The Tracking Time and Price mode can also be toggled on and off by selecting View in the main menu, then pointing
to Tracking Settings and clicking Tracking Time and Price.
Note: The Tracking Time and Price icon is enabled only if the Cross mode is on.
Tracking Time
In order to use a Tracking mode the Cross mode must first be enabled.
To toggle the Tracking Time mode on and off select View in the main menu, then point to Tracking Settings and click
Tracking Time.
Note: Enabling the Tracking Time mode while the Tracking Time and Price mode is on will switch the mode from
Tracking Time and Price to Tracking Time.
168
Studies
Expert Commentary
Expert Commentary window is a tool allowing to display a dynamically generated commentary from PowerLanguage
script by clicking on any bar.
Open the Expert Commentary window by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Expert Commentary icon
on the Main toolbar, or:
•
In the main menu select View tab and click Expert Commentary
Click on any bar of the chart with a study using Expert Commentary keywords applied to display the commentary in
the Expert Commentary window.
Indicator Scaling
The Scale is located on the left or/and on the right side of the chart, and consists of a vertical line with marks,
indicating values, and identified by Labels. The values on the scale are specific to the indicator plotted on the chart.
The scale represents the value range, within which the indicator is plotted. To determine the value of a point on a
chart, the vertical position of the point is referenced to a value on the scale.
The Range of the scale and the top and bottom Margins can be set. The Labels, identifying scale's marks, can be
customized. A Linear or a Semi-Log (percent-of-change) type of scaling can be chosen.
Setting Scale Range
Four types of the Indicator Scale Range can be selected: Screen, Entire Series, User Defined, or Same as Symbol.
Screen Scale Range
The range of the Screen scale is equal to the range of the plot segment that is actually visible in the Chart Window.
Scrolling the chart along the time axis, so that another plot segment, with a different range, becomes visible, will
cause the range of the Screen scale to be adjusted accordingly.
Scale range can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
169
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scale Range section, click the Screen radio button.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Entire Series Scale Range
The range of the Entire Series scale is equal to the range of the indicator’s entire plot, including any part of the plot
that extends beyond the segment actually visible in the Chart Window. Scrolling the chart along the time axis will
not cause the range of the Entire Series scale to be adjusted. Scale range can be set from the Format Indicator
window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scale Range section, click the Entire Series radio button.
Note: Entire Series scale range can not be used as a default.
User Defined Scale Range
The range of the User Defined scale is set by the user. A part of the plot that falls outside of the defined range will
not be displayed in the Chart Window.
Scale range can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
170
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scale Range section, click the User Defined radio button.
4.
In the Maximum text box enter the maximum value for the range.
5.
In the Minimum text box enter the minimum value for the range.
Scale increments will be determined automatically. The maximum and minimum values may be rounded off.
Note: User Defined scale range can not be used as a default.
Same as Symbol
The range of the Same as Symbol scale is equal to the range of the base symbol's data series price scale:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scale Range section, click the Same as Symbol radio button.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Margins
Margins are the extra spaces between the visual representation of an indicator and the chart's upper and lower
borders, and are set as a percentage of the range of the plot's scale. Margins can not be set for a chart with a User
Defined scale.
Margins are set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In Use Margins section, check the Use Margins check box to add margins; uncheck the box to not add margins.
171
4.
In the Top Margin text box enter the top margin as a percentage of the series price range.
5.
In the Bottom Margin text box enter the bottom margin as a percentage of the series price range.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Scaling Type
Two types of Scaling can be selected: Linear or Semi-Log.
A Linear scale is the conventional, absolute scale. A $10 change in price will always be represented by the same
displacement along the vertical axis, regardless of the base price from which the change took place.
A Semi-Log (percent-of-change) price scale is a percentage-based scale. A 10% change in price will always be
represented by the same displacement along the vertical axis, regardless of the absolute price change. A $5 price
change from a $50 base price (10%) will be represented by the exact same vertical displacement as a $10 price
change from a $100 base price (10%), even though the absolute values of $5 and $10 are not equal.
Important: Margins should not be used with a Semi-Log price scale.
Scaling Type is set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Scaling Type section, click the Linear or the Semi-Log radio button, to select Linear or Semi-Log scale
type, respectively.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Scale Labels
Scale Labels are the numbers that appear next to the marks on the scale that indicate what value the marks
represent.
If a chart contains multiple objects, the object, for which the label values are displayed, can be selected. The object
is selected separately for the right and for the left scales, making it possible to display different label values on the
right than on the left scale of the chart.
The numbers displayed on the labels can be abbreviated, and either the increment (step size) between the labels or
the total number of labels can be set.
172
Selecting Object for Label Values
The object, for which the label values on the scale are displayed, can be selected by right-clicking on the scale and
then clicking the #) Object Name, where # is the number, indicating the order in which the object has been added
to the chart.
Dividing Scale Label Values
The values of some indicators, for example volume, can be rather large, such as 25,000,000,000.
The numbers displayed on the labels can be abbreviated by dividing the values they represent by a set factor. For
example, a label for the value of 25,000,000,000, divided by a factor of 1,000,000,000, will read "25.00". Characters
can also be added to the end of the label, for example a "b", resulting in a label that reads "25.00 b" instead of the
"25,000,000,000".
You can elect to set the division factor automatically or manually.
Dividing Label Values Automatically
The division factor with the corresponding characters is selected automatically. To change the characters, see
Dividing Label Values Manually.
Automatic selection of the division factor can be chosen from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, check Divide Scale Labels check box.
4.
Click the Auto radio button.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Dividing Label Values Manually
The division factor can be set manually, and the corresponding characters assigned, from the Format Indicator
window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
173
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, check Divide Scale Labels check box.
4.
Click the Manual radio button.
5.
In the drop-down list box select the division factor.
6.
In the Displayed as text box enter the characters to be added to the end of the label for the selected division
factor; these characters will also be used when Dividing Label Values Automatically.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Canceling Label Value Division
Label value division is canceled from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, uncheck Divide Scale Labels check box.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
You can choose from three different settings that determine the increment (step size) between labels:
•
Automatic - the increment is optimized dynamically to aid the visual assessment of price levels
•
Set Step Size - the increment between labels is set manually
•
Set Number of Labels - a set number of labels is always displayed
Setting Label Step
In MultiCharts three label increment types are available for studies: Automatic, Fixed Step Size and Fixed number of
Labels:
•
Automatic - displays axis labels with default settings;
•
Fixed step size - displays axis labels with fixed step between labels;
•
Fixed number of labels - displays limited numbers of axis labels.
Automatic
Increment between the labels is set from the Format Indicator window:
174
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, uncheck Set Labels Manually check box.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Set Step Size
Increment between the labels is set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, check Set Labels Manually check box.
4.
Click the Set Step Size radio button.
5.
In the Set Step Size text box enter the increment value (step size), in units displayed on the scale.
Note: A label at each step will only be displayed if there is enough room on the scale.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Set Number of Labels
A fixed total number of labels can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
175
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Scaling tab.
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, check Set Labels Manually check box.
4.
Click the Set Number of Labels radio button.
5.
In the Set Number of Labels text box enter the fixed number of labels desired.
Note: The set number of labels will only be displayed if there is enough room on the scale.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Configuring Fractional Price Scale Format for Studies
To display the price scale of studies in fractional format,
1.
Make sure the price scale of the data series in which the study is based is in fractional format.
2.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
3.
Select the Scaling tab.
4.
In the Scaling Range section, select Same as Symbol.
5.
Click OK.
Indicator Settings
An Indicator is a visual technical analysis tool, used to analyze market conditions and identify and forecast trends
and market patterns. An indicator is a visualization of a mathematical formula, and consists of one or more Plots –
lines, histograms, series of points or crosses, highs and lows, left and right ticks, or a combination of the above.
Indicators are computed using the price, volume, and (occasionally) open interest data.
Each indicator, applied to a chart, is set individually and has its own Format Indicator window. Indicator Title is
displayed in the title bar of the Format Indicator window. Multiple instances of the same indicator can be applied to
the same chart; each instance will have its own Format Indicator window, allowing different settings to be used for
each of the instances.
Basic adjustments to the indicator's logic can be made by changing the Input Values. Indicator Style, Maximum Bars
Back value, and Base Data Series can be set, and the recalculation frequency selected.
176
Setting Input Values
An Input is a constant used in the indicator calculations. Indicators can have one or more inputs, or none at all.
Each input is assigned a name. There are three types of inputs: Numeric, True/False, and String.
Indicators can be modified by changing the input Values.
One of the main advantages of using the inputs is that basic adjustments to the study's logic can be made be simply
changing the input values, without the need to edit the studies' actual code.
Most, but not all, indicators use input values; to learn more see Default Studies Inputs. The inputs can be modified
before as well as after the indicator has been inserted. Indicator Inputs can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the General tab.
3.
In the Inputs section, in the Value column, click on the value of the input that you want to change and enter
the desired value.
Tip: To use these general settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Style
The Type, Color, Style, and Weight of the indicator's plot can be customized; if an indicator consists of multiple
plots, each plot can be set individually.
Changes to indicator style settings will be applied to the Chart Window in real time.
Indicator style can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the General tab.
3.
In the Style section, in the Type column, select the plot type from the drop-down list box.
4.
In the Color column select the plot color from the drop-down palette box.
5.
In the Style column select the plot style from the drop-down list box.
177
6.
In the Weight column select the plot weight from the drop-down list box; the weight can only be selected for
the solid line style.
Tip: To use these general settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Maximum Bars Back
All indicators based on past data use a certain number of bars for their calculations. The number of bars is called
Maximum number of bars a study will reference, or Maximum Bars Back. You can elect to set this value manually,
or to have it set automatically (Auto-Detect).
Auto-Detect Maximum Bars Back
Automatic detection of the Maximum Bars Back value can be chosen from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Maximum Bars Back section click the Auto-Detect radio button.
Tip: To use these general settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Set Maximum Bars Back Manually
Please note that in order for the indicator to be displayed, the number of bars in the data series on which the
indicator is based must be greater than the indicator's Maximum Bars Back setting.
Maximum Bars Back value can be set manually from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Maximum Bars Back section click the User Specified radio button.
178
4.
In the User Specified text box enter a Maximum Bars Back value.
Tip: To use these general settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Selecting Base Data Series
An indicator can be based on any one of the data series in a multi-symbol chart. When applied to a multi-symbol
chart, an indicator is based on the data series with the Data # 1 by default. Indicator's base data series is selected
from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Base Study On section, select the data series that the indicator is to be based on from the drop-down
list box.
Selecting SubChart
An indicator can be placed into a new or an existing SubChart in a chart window. To learn more, see SubCharts. The
SubChart to place the indicator into can be selected from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the SubChart section, in the scrolling list box, select Show On Top or Show On Bottom to place the indicator
into a new SubChart at the top or at the bottom of the Chart Window, respectively, or select a SubChart# to place
the indicator into an existing SubChart.
179
Update on Every Tick
You can elect whether to recalculate an indicator every time a new tick is received, or only at the close of each bar.
One or the other may be more appropriate, depending on the indicator's algorithm. Update on Every Tick option is
enabled by default. Updating a large number of complex indicators on every tick will require substantial system
resources.
Indicator's update rate is set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
Check Update on Every Tick check box to recalculate the indicator on every tick; uncheck the box to recalculate
the indicator on bar close only.
Tip: To use these general settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Last Price Marker
Last Price Marker is a special label displayed on the price scale that indicates the latest value of indicators' plots.
If an indicator (study) has multiple plots then the markers can be displayed for each plot.
The color of each marker is the same as of the corresponding plot.
To turn on/off Last Price Marker for an indicator (study):
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the General tab.
3.
In the Style section, select or deselect the Marker checkboxes.
Tip: To use these general settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Tip: The Last Price Marker can also be used to control how a study is displayed in the Scanner.
180
For example, the RSI study contains three plots, each with its own marker checkbox.
To display the data for only one of the three plots in the Scanner:
1.
Uncheck the other two markers.
2.
Check Use as default.
3.
Click OK.
The next time this study is added to the Scanner, only the plot that was checked will be displayed in the Scanner.
Signal Settings
Signal is a mechanical technical analysis tool, used to systematically specify market entry or exit points according to
a set of trading rules implemented in the signal's algorithm. The trade points are indicated on a chart by ticks and
arrows.
Signals can be viewed as the basic building blocks of strategies. Strategies can easily be constructed by simply
applying a set of signals to a chart window, without the need to combine signal code manually.
Market entry or exit points, specified by the signals, can be used to send orders electronically directly to a broker,
fully automating the trading process. To learn more, see Automated Trade Execution.
Each signal applied to a chart is set individually, and has its own Format Signal window. Signal Title is displayed in
the title bar of the Format Signal window. Multiple instances of the same signal can be applied to the same chart;
each instance will have its own Format Signal window, allowing different settings to be used for each of the
instances. Signal settings are specific to the particular signal, while Strategy Properties settings affect all the signals
applied to a chart. To learn more, see Strategy Properties.
In a multi-symbol chart, signals can only be applied to the series with the Data #1. Signals' execution priority is
assigned according to the order in which they were applied, with signals that were added first having higher priority.
Market entry or exit (buy or sell) points, specified by a signal, are visually indicated on the chart by Arrows Ç or È
and Ticks | or }. Arrows identify the time, and ticks identify the price value of each trade point. Labels, located above
the sell arrows and below the buy arrows, display the signal’s name and the number of contracts traded at each
trade point.
Basic adjustments to the signal’s logic can be made by simply changing the Input Values. Signal's Arrow, Tick, and
Label Style can be set.
Setting Input Values
An Input is a constant used in the signal's calculations. Signals can have one or more inputs, or none at all. Each
input is assigned a name. There are three types of inputs: Numeric, True/False, and String.
Signals can be modified by changing the input Values.
Most, but not all, signals use input values; to learn more see Default Studies Inputs.
One of the main advantages of using the inputs is that basic adjustments to the study's logic can be made be simply
changing the input values, without the need to edit the studies' actual code.
Inputs are also used for Trading Strategy Optimization. The inputs can be modified before as well as after the signal
has been inserted.
181
Signal's Inputs can be set from the Format Signal window:
1.
Open the Format Signal window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and then click Format Signals; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Inputs tab.
3.
In the Value column, click on the value of the input that you want to change and enter the desired value.
Tip: To use these inputs settings as the default for the selected signal, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Style
The market entry or/and exit (buy or/and sell) points are visually indicated on the chart by Arrows Ç or È and Ticks
| or }. Arrows identify the time, and ticks identify the price values of each trade point. Two Labels, located above
the sell arrows and below the buy arrows, display the signal’s name and the number of contracts for each trade
point.
Color, Style, and Size of arrows and ticks can be selected. Color of labels can be selected, or labels can be hidden.
The style of each of the elements for each type of an entry or an exit point can be set individually.
Changes to signal style settings will be applied to the Chart Window in real time.
Signal's style can be set from the Format Signal window:
1.
Open the Format Signal window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and then click Format Signals; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Entries or the Exits tab, for entry or exit points, respectively.
3. In each section, in the Color column, select a color for each of the components from the drop-down palette
box.
4.
In the Style column select the component style from the drop-down list box.
5.
In the Size column select the component size from the drop-down list box; only the size of arrows and ticks can
be set.
182
Tip: To use these style settings as the default for the selected signal, check Use as Default check box.
Intra-Bar Order Generation
You can elect whether to allow the signal to generate orders within a bar, or only at the close of each bar.
A signal contains one or more Order Commands that generate entry or exit orders. A limit to the number of orders
that can be generated within a single bar by each order command or by all of the signal’s order commands can be
set.
Intra-Bar Order Generation is set from the Format Signal window:
1.
Open the Format Signal window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and then click Format Signals; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Intra-Bar Order Generation tab.
3.
Check Enable Intra-Bar Order Generation check box to allow the signal to generate orders within a bar;
uncheck the box to allow the signal to generate orders only at the close of each bar.
4.
Select required mode:
•
To limit each order command in this signal to one entry and one exit per bar, click Limit each order command
in this signal to one entry and one exit per bar radio button.
•
To limit the signal to only one entry in total and only one exit in total per bar, click Limit this signal to one entry
and one exit per bar radio button.
•
To allow the signal multiple entries and exits per bar, click Allow unlimited entries and exits per bar radio
button.
Note: Allowing multiple same-direction entry orders in the Position Limits section of Strategy Properties window
will not override the above settings.
Skip Identical Ticks
Understanding Skip Identical Ticks option
Skip Identical Ticks option allows MultiCharts to skip calculations on ticks with identical price in real-time. It
significantly lowers CPU usage and increases processing speed in real-time calculation.
Many ticks per second may have the same price. If an indicator uses only price data it only makes sense to recalculate
it when the price changes. However, if an indicator uses volume and tick count data, it should be recalculated on
183
every tick and ticks with the same price become vital. The majority of the indicators use only price data therefore
Skip Identical Ticks option is enabled by default.
Note: Skip Identical Ticks option is available for indicators only. "If BarStatus = 0 then..." condition may not be
detected when Skip Identical Ticks option is enabled.
Enabling/disabling the Skip Identical Ticks option
To enable/disable the Skip Identical Ticks option:
1.
Insert an Indicator.
To learn more see Inserting Studiessection
2.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand .
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
3.
Сlick the Format button.
4.
Select the Properties tab.
5.
In the Advanced section, check/uncheck the Skip Identical Ticks checkbox.
Note: Skip Identical Ticks option is enabled by default.
Realtime-History Matching
Understanding Realtime-history matching option
Realtime-history matching option allows MultiCharts to synchronize the calculation of studies based on several data
series. When using several data series calculation on historical data may differ from real-time calculation Realtimehistory matching option makes historical calculation results closer to real-time. When Realtime-history matching
option is enabled the signal/indicator is calculated on the latest bar of the main data series and on the currently
completed bar of the auxiliary data series. If the auxiliary data series stops updating, the final calculation will be
made on the main data series bar that was received immediately after the latest bar of the auxiliary data series. In
this case no further calculation will be performed.
Note: If more than one auxiliary data series is used, the latest bar for the calculation will be the one that was
completed earlier.
When Realtime-history matching option is disabled the signal/indicator is calculated on the basis of the main data
series latest bar and current (completed or not) bar of the auxiliary data series. If the auxiliary data series stops
updating, the calculation will continue on the basis of the latest bar of the main data series and the open bar of the
auxiliary data series.
184
Enabling/disabling the Realtime-History Matching option
Enabling/disabling the Realtime-History Matching option for indicators
To enable/disable the Realtime-History Matching option:
1.
Insert an Indicator.
To learn more see Inserting Studies section.
2.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
3.
Click the Format button.
4.
Select the Properties tab.
5.
In the Advanced section, check/uncheck the Realtime-History Matching checkbox.
Enabling/disabling the Realtime-History Matching option for signals
To enable/disable the Realtime-History Matching option for indicators:
1.
Insert a signal.
To learn more see Inserting Studies section.
2.
Open the Format Signals window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and then click Format Signals; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
3.
Click the Format button.
4.
Select the Properties tab.
5.
In the Advanced section, check/uncheck the Realtime-History Matching checkbox.
Note: The Realtime-History Matching option is enabled by default.
185
Study Templates
Studies can be assembled into sets to create study templates. Once a template is created, an entire set of studies
can be applied to any chart, at any time, with just one click. It is possible to switch between different templates and
to apply several templates at once. Study templates can include indicators as well as signals.
Templates can be Created, Applied, Renamed, and Deleted, set to be Auto-Applied to all new charts, as well as
Exported to or Imported from a file.
Creating Templates
A template is created by saving a set of studies applied to a chart; to learn more see Applying Studies.
A template is saved using the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
Click the Save button.
3.
In the Save Template dialog box that appears, enter a name for the template and click the OK button.
Applying Templates
A template is applied from the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
Select a template by clicking the template's name.
3.
Click the Apply button.
Renaming Templates
A template is renamed in the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
Select a template by clicking the template's name.
3.
Click the Rename button.
4.
In the Rename Template dialog box that appears, enter a new name for the template and click the OK button.
Study Templates
Deleting Templates
A template is deleted in the Format Study Templates window:
186
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
Select a template by clicking the template's name.
3.
Click the Delete button.
4.
In the Remove Study Template confirmation dialog box that appears, click Yes to delete the template.
Auto-Apply Templates
One or more templates can be set to be automatically applied to all new charts.
Auto-Apply is set from the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
Check the check box next to the name of each template to be automatically applied.
3.
Click the Close button; checked templates will be automatically applied to all new charts.
Exporting Templates
A template can be exported to a file with a .tml extension by using the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
Select a template to be exported by clicking the template's name.
3.
Click the Export button.
4.
In the Save As dialog box that appears, choose the name for the template file and click the Save button.
Importing Templates
A template can be imported from a file by using the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
Click the Import button.
3.
In the Open dialog box that appears, navigate to and select the template file, and click the Open button.
187
Using Alerts
Alert is a visual or/and audio notification triggered when the market conditions meet the criteria specified in the
indicator. Audio and visual alerts can be enabled simultaneously.
Alerts can only be used with the indicators containing Alert Triggering Conditions code. Most, but not all, indicators
contain alerts. To learn how to add alerts to indicators' code refer to the PowerLanguage manual. A check for the
alert triggering conditions is performed whenever one of the following events occurs:
•
Workspace is opened
•
Data series (symbol) is replaced with another data series (symbol)
•
A bar is closed or a new tick is received
Enabling Alerts
Alerts can be enabled from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
Check the Enable Alerts check box to enable alerts; uncheck the box to disable the alerts.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
Alert Conditions Check
You can elect whether to check for Alert Triggering Conditions every time a new tick is received, or only at the close
of each bar.
Alert Conditions Check can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
188
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
In the Alert Conditions Check section click the On Bar Close, Every Tick or the Once Per Bar radio button, to
select the alert triggering conditions to be checked at the close of each bar only, every time a new tick is received or
every time a new tick is received once per bar only, respectively.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
Audio Alerts
A PC speaker beep or a sound file played by the PCs sound card can be set as the audio alert type.
Setting Beep Alert
Alerts can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
In the Audio Alert section, check the Audio Alert check box to enable audio alerts; uncheck the box to disable
the audio alerts.
4.
Click the Beep radio button to set the PC speaker beep as the audio alert type.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Sound Alert
Alerts can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
189
3.
In the Audio Alert section, check the Audio Alert check box to enable audio alerts; uncheck the box to disable
the audio alerts.
4.
Click the Sound radio button to select a .wav sound file as the audio alert type.
5.
Enter the path and name of the wave (.wav) sound file to be used into the File text box, or click the ... button
on the right side of the text box for Open dialog box, navigate to and select a sound file, and click the Open button.
6.
Click the Test button to test the alert.
7.
Click the Play Once or the Repeat radio button, for the alerts to be played once or repeatedly, respectively.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
Visual Alert
Alerts can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
In the Visual Alert section, check the Visual Alert check box to enable visual alerts; uncheck the box to disable
the visual alerts.
4.
In the Display Notify Window for drop-down list box select the length of time that the alert notification window
is to be displayed for.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
E-mail Alert
E-mail alerts can be sent when market conditions meet your defined criteria.
This feature can be used to stay informed about market conditions while away from the computer.
To add alert to study:
1.
Make sure the study's PowerLanguage code contains alert code so that alerts will be triggered.
2.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
190
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
3.
Select the Alerts tab.
4.
Check Enable Alerts checkbox to enable alerts.
5.
Check the E-mail Alert checkbox.
6.
Press the Settings button. The E-mail Alert window will appear.
7.
Enter the email addresses of the sender.
8.
Enter the email address of the recipient. To send the email to multiple recipients, separate each email address
with a semi-colon.
9.
Enter the SMTP Server Name or IP address, and Port number into the textboxes. Please get this information
from your email provider.
10. Check the SMTP Server authentication data checkbox if your SMTP server requires authentication to send
emails. Enter the User name and Password.
11. Press the Test button to send a test email.
If the sending process has been successful a message will appear in the pop-up window
If the sending process has been unsuccessful a message will appear in the pop-up window:
Press OK to close the E-mail Alert window.Example of Email Alert Message:
01.10.2008 17:48:50 ( alert time and date )
Source: Bollinger Bands (study that triggered alert)
Symbol: ESZ8 (traded symbol name)
Resolution: 1 Tick Bar (resolution used)
Price: 1157,5000 (price value at the moment when defined conditions has been met)
Message: Price crossing over lower price band (message carrying information about the study condition that has
been met)
Note: Not all e-mail service providers are supported. E-mail alerts configuration should be tested prior to use.
Example:
Gmail SMTP server address: smtp.gmail.com
Gmail SMTP user name: Your full Gmail address (e.g. [email protected])
Gmail SMTP password: Your Gmail password
Gmail SMTP port: 465
Gmail SMTP TLS/SSL required: yes (SSL)
Note: Hotmail.com e-mail service is not supported.
191
Using Studies
Studies are technical analysis tools based on trading concepts and formulas, and assist in evaluating market activity
and making trading decisions.
Over 270 pre-built, customizable studies, covering the most popular trading concepts and indicators, are already
included with the platform, and additional studies can be imported from a variety of sources. Basic adjustments to
studies' logic can be made by simply changing the Input Values.
Studies can be fully customized, or entirely new studies created, using PowerLanguage® scripting in PowerLanguage
Editor.
To learn more see Creating Studies.
Studies can be divided into Indicators and Signals:
•
An Indicator is a visual technical analysis tool, used to analyze market conditions and identify and forecast
trends and market patterns. An indicator is a visualization of a mathematical formula, and consists of one or more
Plots – lines, histograms, series of points or crosses, highs and lows, left and right ticks, or a combination of the
above. Indicators are computed using only price, volume, and (occasionally) open interest data.
•
A Signal is a mechanical technical analysis tool, used to systematically specify market entry or exit points
according to a set of trading rules implemented in the signal's algorithm. The trade points are indicated on a chart
by ticks and arrows. Signals can be viewed as the basic building blocks of strategies.
An indicator is applied to a particular data series, and can be displayed either in the same chart as the series or in
another SubChart. A signal can only be applied to the series with the Data #1 and is displayed in the same chart as
the series. If a parameter, such as symbol or resolution, of the data series on which the study is based, is changed,
the study will be recalculated and redrawn. If the series, on which a study is based, is deleted, the study will be
turned off. Studies can be Inserted (added) into, or Removed from a chart, and turned off and on. A list of all studies,
inserted into a Chart Window, can be viewed according to type. Indicators can be Hidden, Redisplayed, and Moved
between SubCharts. The Visual Order in which the indicators are displayed on the chart can be changed.
Inserting Studies
The number of studies that can be inserted into a chart is limited only by your computer's hardware configuration.
Studies can be inserted from the Insert Study window:
1.
Open the Insert Study window.To open the Insert Study window, click the Insert Study
icon on the Chart
Analysis toolbar.
The Insert Study window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Click the Insert Signal
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Insert Study; or:
icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; or:
-
Use the F7 key; or:
-
Select Insert in the main menu and click Study; or:
-
Select Insert in the main menu and click Signal.
The Insert Study window can also be accessed from the Format Objects window by selecting the Indicators or the
Signals tab and clicking the Add button.
2.
Select the tab corresponding to the type of study to be added.
192
3.
Select a study from the list of available studies; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending
order, by clicking on the column header; several studies can be selected at once by holding down Ctrl or/and Shift
keys on the keyboard while making the selection.
Note: Only the compiled (these with the Ready Status of Yes) studies can be inserted. To learn more see
Compiling Studies.
4.
To format the selected studies prior to inserting them into a chart, check the Format check box; uncheck the
box to insert studies without formatting. To learn more see Default Studies Properties and Default Studies Inputs.
5.
Double-click the selected study or click OK.
Removing Studies
A study can be removed using the Format Objects window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the tab corresponding to the type of study to be removed.
3.
Select the study to be removed and click the Remove button.
Studies can also be removed by one of the following methods:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the study that is to be removed; once the Pointer
changes into a
Hand , right-click and then click Remove Study; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over the study that is to be removed; once the Pointer
changes into a
Hand , click on the study and then press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Study Status Switch
Since MultiCharts 8.7 beta1 all the studies applied to the chart can be toggled on and off by a single click on their
names in the status line.
Removing All Studies
To remove all studies, inserted into a Chart Window, right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Remove
All Studies.
Inserted Indicators List
A list of all indicators, inserted into a Chart Window, can be viewed under the Indicators tab in the Format Objects
window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
193
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
a
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
2.
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
Select the Indicators tab.
The indicators list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking on the column header.
The columns display the following information:
Name – name of the indicator
Input String – input parameters of the indicator; to learn more see Default Studies Inputs and Setting Studies Inputs
Status – current status of the indicator: on – the indicator is turned on, or off – the indicator is turned off
SubChart – the SubChart, in which the indicator is plotted
Base Data # – the data series, to which the indicator is applied
Inserted Signals List
A list of all signals, inserted into a Chart Window, can be viewed under the Signals tab in the Format Objects window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
a
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
2.
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
Select the Signals tab.
The signals list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking on the column header.
The columns display the following information:
Name – name of the signal
Input String – input parameters of the signal; to learn more see Default Studies Inputs and Setting Studies Inputs
Status – current status of the signal: on – the signal is turned on, or off – the signal is turned off
Moving Studies between SubCharts
An indicator in one SubChart can be moved to another existing or a new SubChart within the same Chart Window.
Each SubChart can contain a number of objects. To learn more see Using SubCharts.
The indicator's Base Data # will not be affected by moving the indicator to another SubChart.
A signal can only be applied to the SubChart containing the data series with the Data# 1, and can not be moved to
another SubChart.
Moving Indicator to Existing SubChart
An indicator can be moved using the Format Indicator window:
194
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the SubChart section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select the SubChart# you want to move the indicator
to.
An indicator can also be moved by the following method:
1.
Position the mouse pointer over the over the indicator or the Status Line of the indicator to be moved;
2.
Once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, hold the left mouse button and drag the indicator to another
SubChart.
3.
Release the mouse button to complete moving the indicator.
Moving Indicator to New SubChart
An indicator can be moved using the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the SubChart section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select the Show On Top or Show On Bottom to move
the indicator to a new SubChart at the top or at the bottom of the Chart Window, respectively.
An indicator can also be moved by the following method:
1.
Position the mouse pointer over the indicator or the Status Line of the indicator to be moved;
2.
Once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the upper
or lower border of the Chart Window, or of another SubChart.
3.
Once the pointer changes into the Create New SubChart
symbol, release the mouse button to create a
new SubChart.
195
Hiding Indicators
In some instances displaying an indicator may not be necessary. Hidden indicators retain their full functionality and
continue running. Please note that a signal can not be hidden.
An indicator can be hidden using the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
the indicator; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
.
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and
then click Format Indicator Name
-
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Opening Format Objects Window.
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the SubChart section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select the Hide.
An indicator can also be hidden by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Hide Object
icon on the Control toolbar; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Hide Object.
Redisplaying Hidden Indicators
To redisplay a hidden indicator in a Chart Window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
a
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Indicators tab.
3.
Select the indicator to be redisplayed and click the Format button to display the Format Indicator window.
4.
Select the Properties tab.
5.
In the SubChart section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select Show On Top, Show On Bottom, or SubChart
#n, to redisplay the indicator in a new SubChart at the top, a new SubChart at the bottom, or in an existing SubChart,
respectively.
Turning Studies Off and On
Studies may be turned off or on. A study that is turned off will stop running and become hidden.
When the study is turned back on, it will resume running and re-appear in the original SubChart.
196
An indicator, based on a data series that has been deleted, will be turned off, and can only be turned back on after
it has been reassigned to another, existing data series. To learn more see Setting Base Data Series.
A study can be turned off or on from the Format Objects window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the tab corresponding to the type of study you want to turn off or on.
3.
Select the study that you want to turn off or on, and click the Status button.
4.
The study's status, displayed in the Status column of the Format Objects window, will change.
Changing Visual Order
The Visual Order in which the indicators are displayed can be changed. When a number of objects are displayed in
a single SubChart, the objects are displayed in "layers" – one object is in the "front", the next is "behind" it, and so
on.
The order of the layers constitutes the Visual Order of the objects.
The Visual Order can be changed to prevent a thick line in the "front" layer from obscuring a thin line in the "back"
layer.
The Visual Order can be changed by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click on the chart area and then click Visual Order; in the Visual Order window that appears, select an
object and use the order buttons to change its visual order; or:
•
Position the mouse pointer over an object; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click, then
point to Visual Order and use the shortcut menu order commands to change the visual order of the object. Visual
Order commands/buttons:
Bring to Front – the object will be placed in the front of all other objects
Send to Back – the object will be placed behind all other objects Bring
Forward – the object will be moved one layer to the front
Send Backward – the object will be moved one layer back
197
Trading
Broker Profiles
Broker Profiles Overview
Understanding Broker Profiles
Broker Profile is a set of connection parameters that is used to configure the connection to any of supported brokers.
It is important to understand that in MultiCharts data feed and broker connections are separate types of connection.
Unlike a simple broker connection, Broker Profiles is a convenient way to configure the connection to different
brokers and accounts. It is possible to create multiple profiles for the same broker, in case several accounts are going
to be used.
Example: You have two accounts with Interactive Brokers: a simulation account and a live account. You can create
two different Broker Profiles (i.e. “IB SIM” and “IB LIVE”) to be able to connect to both accounts simultaneously.
It is important to understand that in MultiCharts data feed and broker connections are separate types of connection.
Connection to data provider needs to be set up in QuoteManager, while the broker connection should be configured
in MultiCharts itself.
All information about broker plug-in configuration is stored in a corresponding Broker Profile.
Example: If the chart has data from Interactive Brokers, IB automated trading plug-in is selected by default for this
chart. Connection settings are the same as in the corresponding Broker Profile (except for Default Account settings
for FXCM Broker Profile).
If the instrument on the chart is provided by a data vendor that is not a broker, then the default plug-in for
automated trading will be the same as the first existing Broker Profile on the Trade Bar.
Example: If the first Broker Profile on the Trade Bar is Dukascopy and a new chart is created using eSignal data feed,
then Dukascopy will be selected by default as the broker plug-in for automated trading.
Managing Broker Profiles
By default one can see only 3 Broker Profiles after the installation of MultiCharts: Interactive Brokers, Rithmic 01
and Zen-Fire.
To manage Broker Profiles:
1.
In the main menu select File.
198
2.
Point to Broker Profiles.
3.
Click Manage Broker Profiles...
To add new Broker Profile, click New on the right side of the Broker Profiles window and select a broker from the
list.
To activate or deactivate a Broker Profile, select the profile and click the Activate or Deactivate buttons on the right
side of the Broker Profiles window.
To connect or disconnect a Broker Profile, select the profile and click the Connect or Disconnect buttons on the right
side of the Broker Profiles window.
To remove one of the existing Broker Profiles, select the profile and click the Remove button on the right side of the
Broker Profiles window.
To edit a Broker Profile, select the profile and click the Edit button on the right side of the Broker Profiles window.
Properties <Broker Profile name> window will open.
Broker Profile settings can also be configured by right-clicking the Broker Profile tab on Trade Bar (see Trade Bar) ,
and clicking Edit Broker Profile.
Note: It is possible to review or edit Broker Profile settings while it is profile is connected only using the Manage
Broker Profiles… option.
To rename a Broker Profile, select the profile and click the Rename button on the right side of the Broker Profiles
window.
Connecting/Disconnecting Broker Profiles
Connecting/Disconnecting Broker Profiles using the main menu
In the main menu select File;
1.
Point to Broker Profiles;
2.
Click Connect <Broker Profile Name>.
Connecting/Disconnecting Broker Profiles Using Manage Broker Profiles… Option
1.
In the main menu select File;
2.
Point to Broker Profiles;
3.
Click Manage Broker Profiles...;
4.
Select the Broker Profile and click Connect/Disconnect.
Connecting/Disconnecting Broker Profiles on Trade Bar
1.
Right-click Broker Profile tab on Trade Bar (see Trade Bar) ,
2.
Click Connect/Disconnect Broker Profile.
Connecting/Disconnecting Broker Profiles on Chart Trading Panel
1.
Click the arrow on the Broker Connection button
2.
Select a broker in drop-down menu.
3.
Click the Broker Connection button to connect or disconnect Broker Profile.
Note: If you click the Broker Connection Button without selecting a profile in drop-down list, it will connect the first
available profile (see Understanding Broker Profiles), or last used on this chart profile.
199
Connecting/Disconnecting Broker Profiles in DOM window
1.
Click the arrow on the Broker Connection button;
2.
Select a broker in drop-down menu;
3.
Click the Broker Connection button to connect or disconnect Broker Profile.
Note: Broker Connection indicator can be colored red, yellow or green depending on the connection status.
Note: If you click the Broker Connection Button without selecting a profile in drop-down list, it will connect the
first available profile(see Understanding Broker Profiles), or last used on this chart profile.
Connecting/Disconnecting Broker Profiles Using Auto Trading Execution Button
Click the SA/AA button http://www.multicharts.com/img/ wiki/symbolmapping/6.png / in the left top corner of the
chart to connect the Broker Profile corresponding to auto trading plug-in that is selected for the chart start and auto
trading.
Sound Alerts
Enable/disable sound alerts on Broker Profile connection, order generation and execution by one of the following
methods:
•
Select File in the main menu, click Preferences, select the Trading tab and check/uncheck the Sound Alerts
check box.
•
Right-click on the Chart Trading panel and click Sound Alerts.
Troubleshooting
The log of establishing connection to a broker and connection issues can be viewed on the Logs tab of Order and
Position Tracker window. If there are error lines in red that came from your broker, make all necessary settings
corrections according to the indicated reason or contact your broker.
AvaTrade Broker Profile
If MultiCharts sends any price order (stop/limit) with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed
to be executed) it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such price orders into market
orders.
If a price order (stop/limit) is placed and its price is close to best ask for Buy or to best bid for Sell, the order is
emulated in MultiCharts, but nothing is sent to broker. If the price changes to execution price (best ask for Buy or
to best bid for Sell), the order is converted to market one and sent to broker. If the price moves away from execution
price, the order is sent as a price order (stop/limit). The distance between execution price (order is converted and
sent as a market order) and the price when order is sent as it is (stop or limit order) depends on the symbol and may
vary.
Stop-Limit orders are not supported by the broker.
200
The only available Time-in-Force parameter for orders is GTC, so every order is sent with this Time-in-Force.
Modification of orders in automated trading is not supported. Old order is cancelled, a new modified one is placed.
Modification of orders in manual trading is supported (# of contracts, price). It is not possible to modify order price
to a price that guaranteed immediate order execution.
For FOREX trade size should be equal to the amount of units, not trade lots.
Open position Profit/Loss is provided through AvaTrade API.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is provided through AvaTrade API.
CQG does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up AvaTrade Broker Profile
In the Properties AvaTrade window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by AvaTrade :
Enter Login and Password.
Select type of connection: Demo / Real.
Make sure the currency of the account is specified correctly.
CQG Broker Profile
To connect MultiCharts to CQG/AMP account, it is necessary to have CQG API installed on the computer.
If there are any CQG applications installed on your PC, it is required to delete them prior to installing the supported
version of CQG API:
1.
Windows Start menu
2.
Control Panel
3.
Uninstall a program / Programs and Features
•
Select each of the following applications and uninstall all of them:
•
CQG Trader
•
CQG Auto Upgrade Service
•
CQG Trader API
•
CQGNet
•
MultiCharts API ( with CQG icon )
4.
Not all versions of CQG software are supported.
If you are using MultiCharts 8.5 Release or Release Candidate, install the following version of CQG API:
https://dl.dropbox. com/u/95112551/Multicharts_COMAPI_en-US_production_V4.05. 101_Install. msi
If you are using MultiCharts 8.0 Release or any previous version, install the following version of CQG API: https:/ /
dl.dropbox. com/u/27918922/ Multicharts_COMAPI_en-US_production_V4. 04.542_Install.msi
At the moment it is not possible to use multiple CQG/AMP accounts in MultiCharts. Only one and the same account
should be used for getting data and trading. If different logins and passwords are entered in CQG data source
configuration and broker profile, connection to data source will work, the broker profile will not.
201
AMP accounts originally created for a different software will not work in MultiCharts. Customers need to contact
AMP directly to setup their accounts for MultiCharts or request a demo account here: [1] Open position Profit/Loss
is provided through CQG API. Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is provided through CQG API.
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Note: If a stop order is adjusted manually or by your script to the price equal to current market price or better
(guaranteed to be executed), the order won’t be converted into market order. It will be rolled back.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level is met, then it will be converted into market order.
Stop-Limit orders with stop and limit levels not overlapping each other are rejected by the broker.
When an orders is sent from MultiCharts to CQG broker to be executed on an expired contract, the broker will
automatically redirect the order to the same symbol, but currently active contract.
CQG does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up CQG Broker Profile
In the Properties CQG window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by CQG:
1.
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
Note: By default demo mode is NOT turned on. Check the CQG demo box to turn it on. Demo mode is required to
be on for demo accounts. If you have real account, the box is required to be off
2.
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to CQG is lost.
Note: It is recommended to launch MultiCharts by making a right-click on the icon -> Run as administrator. A
popup dialogue message will appear where you need to allow CQG API to connect to the Internet (That should be
done upon first connection after API installation.
You can start MultiCharts in regular mode after that)
Dukascopy Broker Profile
Dukascopy Broker Profile
FIX API is used for connection between MultiCharts and Dukascopy.
Jforex API is not supported in MultiCharts.
It is important to make sure Dukascopy knows FIX API is required when subscribe to their service.
A customer needs to provide Dukascopy with his/her IP address to register it on their servers.
To trade with Dukascopy from MultiCharts, a customer needs to open an account and, since FIX API is used, such
type of account can be opened only if the balance is more than $ 100 000.
Trade size should be equal to the amount of units, not trade lots.
202
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts. The basis for the calculation is Average Entry Price sent by
Dukascopy.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is not available.
Stop-Limit orders are not supported by Dukascopy.
Dukascopy does not provide account information to MultiCharts and it is not avalable in order and Position Tracker
window on Accounts tab.
Note: Dukascopy does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group
on its end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts
and once one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of
the OCO orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the
second order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCOOrders Risk).
Setting up Dukascopy Broker Profile
In the Properties Dukascopy window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Dukascopy
:
1.
Server IP section: Server IP
2.
Order Connection Settings section: Login, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID
3.
Price Connection Settings section: Login, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID
4.
Reconnection Settings section: Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Dukascopy is lost
FXCM Broker Profile
FXCM Broker Profile
To connect MultiCharts to FXCM broker, it is necessary to have their software installed on the computer.
To download the latest version of FXOrder2Go, follow this link: http:/ / www. fxcorporate. com/ Order2Go/
FXOrder2Go.EXE
Trade size for FOREX: 1 contract = 1 lot (the size of a lot depends on the account type).
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by FXCM broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by FXCM broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Stop-Limit orders are not supported by FXCM.
Market orders are converted into limit ones on broker side.
Price orders (stop/limit) which are to be executed immediately are converted into market ones on MultiCharts side.
Note: FXCM supports native One-Cancels-Others group. Native OCO-group is used when the broker’s plug-in
supports OCO-groups. In this case all OCO orders are sent to the broker directly and unfilled OCO orders will be
cancelled by the broker.
Setting up FXCM Broker Profile
In the Properties FXCM window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by FXCM :
1.
Enter login and password.
2.
Select the type of connection.
203
3.
Enter default account number.
Interactive Brokers Broker Profile
To connect MultiCharts to Interactive Brokers (IB), it is necessary to have IB software installed and launched on the
computer. IB provides two applications that can be used for connection to MultiCharts:
1.
IB Trader Workstation.
2.
IB Gateway.
Note: Java version 7 is strongly recommended for IB software to work correctly.
Though there is choice between web-based and standalone version, standalone version is recommended for
MultiCharts connection. To download Trader Workstation and Gateway, follow this link:
http://individuals. interactivebrokers. com/ en/control/ systemstandalone. php?os=win& ib_entity=llc
For FOREX trade size should be equal to the amount of units, not trade lots.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts as IB API provides Profit/Loss values with a delay.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by Interactive Brokers and displayed in MultiCharts.
Note: Interactive Brokers supports native and simulated One-Cancels-Others group (see Setting up Interactive
Brokers Profile).
Native OCO-group is used when the broker’s plug-in supports OCO-groups. In this case all OCO orders are sent to
the broker directly and unfilled OCO orders will be cancelled by the broker.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Interactive Brokers Profile is already created when MultiCharts is installed. It is not necessary to reconfigure its
settings if only one IB account is going to be used with no subaccounts, but it is Important to set up connection
parameters in IB TWS.
Setting up connection to Interactive Brokers Trader WorkStation
Enable Active X and Socket Clients box should be checked in IB TWS settings:
1.
Click on Configure in main TWS window.
2.
Click on API section. Select Settings.
3.
Check Enable Active X and Socket Clients box.
Note: By default both in IB TWS and IB Broker Profile in MultiCharts Port (Socket port) number is 7496. If more than
one IB TWS are going to be used, then separate Broker Profile should be created per each additional IB TWS and set
their Port numbers accordingly, but each IB Broker profile should have unique Port number, that corresponds to one
IB TWS.
It is recommended to add 127.0.0.1 to Trusted IP Addresses.
204
Setting up connection to Interactive Brokers Gateway
IB API option should be selected when logging in to IB Gateway.
1.
Click on Configure in main TWS window.
2.
Click on API section. Select Settings.
Note: By default in IB Gateway Socket port number is 4001. In IB Broker Profile in MultiCharts default Port (Socket
port) number is 7496.
It is recommended to add 127.0.0.1 to Trusted IP Addresses.
Setting up Interactive Brokers Profile
In the Properties Interactive Brokers window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by
Interactive Brokers.
In the pop-up window there are 2 tabs: Settings and Financial Advisor Settings.
On the Settings tab the following parameters are available:
General Settings section
IP address and Port number Client ID. “0” by default. If there is another trading platform running on your computer
that is connected to IB TWS, it is recommended to change the corresponding value in that piece of software.
Default Order Settings section
Time in Force:
•
DAY
Order is canceled if it is not executed by the close of the trading day. DAY is set as default; or: •
GTC ( Good-Till-Canceled )
Order remains active until it is cancelled.
•
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel)
Any portion of an order that is not filled is to be canceled as soon as it becomes available in the market.
Settling Firm.
Clearing Account.
Default Account.
All or None Execution. An order waits for a specified number of contracts at broker. Either all are filled or none of
them.
•
Entry Orders; or:
•
Exit Orders
Outside RTH tag
This tag is applicable for stocks on real trading accounts – when it’s enabled order can be placed and (orders can get
executed outside regular trading hours) directly to the exchange outside of regular market hours. If it’s disabled, IB
will return an error saying that it’s impossible to get to the exchange. It’s enabled by default in the broker profile for
IB.
205
OCO Group section
Use Native OCO Group Turn on this function to use native OCO group realized by Interactive Brokers, otherwise,
OCO group is emulated by MultiCharts.
Reduce Size OCO
When one order of the OCO group is partially filled, the size of other orders in this group is reduced proportionally.
Example: Three buy stop orders with the size of 2 are sent in OCO group. One of the orders is partially filled (1
contract). The size of the two other orders is reduced by 1.
Overfill Protection Turn on to send only one order of an OCO group to the exchange. Other orders of this OCO
groups will be held and monitored in TWS. If this option is disabled all orders of the OCO group are sent to the
broker.
Connection Settings section
Disable auto trading after X seconds on the connection loss.
In case of the connection loss turns auto-trading off after the specified period of time if the connection is not reestablished.
Financial Advisor Settings
To set up Financial Advisor account, select the Financial Advisor Settings tab.
There are 3 options to select:
•
Automatic Allocation
Group: a group of accounts should be created in TWS and the name of the group should be put to this field.
Method: a method of allocation for the group should be specified.
Percentage: percentage of allocation should be specified.
•
Manual Allocation
Profile: a profile in IB TWS should be created, where all the settings are set up and the profile name should be put
to this field; or:
•
Single Account Allocation
Account: only 1 account of the group should be specified to send all the orders directly on this account.
How stop orders work
•
Native OCO enabled, Overfill protection enabled.
For orders sent in the OCO group:
All Limit orders (entry and exit) are blue (on broker). All
Stop orders (entry and exit) are blue (on broker).
Limit orders sent not in the OCO group:
All Limit orders (entry and exit) are green (on exchange).
•
Native OCO enabled, Overfill protection disabled.
Limit entry order-blue (on broker).
Limit exit order-green (on exchange).
All Stop orders (entry and exit) are blue (on broker).
206
•
Native OCO disabled.
All limits (entry and exit) are green (on exchange). All
Stops (entry and exit) are blue (on broker).
Note: On IB Live account you can send Stop orders directly to the exchange (green in TWS).
Enable "Use outside RTH tag" to do that. In order to send multiple orders directly to the exchange "Use Native OCO
Group" should also be disabled.
IWBank Quick Trade Broker Profile
To connect MultiCharts to IWBank broker, it is necessary to have their software installed and launched on the
computer.
To download the latest version of IW Quick Trade, follow this link: http:/ / www. iwbank. it/ piattaformaprofessionale-iwquicktrade-trader.html
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated in MultiCharts.
IWBank supports native One-Cancels-Others group. Native OCO-group is used when the broker’s plug-in supports
OCO-groups. In this case all OCO orders are sent to the broker directly and unfilled OCO orders will be cancelled by
the broker.
Setting up IWBank Quick Trade Broker Profile
In the Properties IWBank window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter your User ID on Connection tab.
Select your Account on Account Settings tab.
Select Time in force of orders on the Default Order Settings tab.
•
DAY
Order is canceled if it is not executed by the close of the trading day. DAY is set as default.
•
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled)
Order stays within the system and in the marketplace till it gets executed or canceled. GTC orders are automatically
cancelled under the following conditions.

IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel)
Any portion of an order that is not filled is to be canceled as soon as it becomes available in the market.
•
GTD (Good Till Date)
IWBank Quick Trade Broker Profile
Order is placed and it is active up to a specified date. Once GTD Time-In-Force parameter is selected, the Good Till
Date field appears allowing to specify a number of days.
207
LMAX Broker Profile
Stop orders are not supported by LMAX. Stop orders are emulated by MultiCharts. Once the stop price is reached, a
market order is sent.
Stop-Limit orders are not supported by the LMAX.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by LMAX broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by LMAX broker and displayed in MultiCharts once in 10 seconds.
LMAX does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up LMAX Broker Profile
In the Properties LMAX window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by LMAX :
1.
Select type of connection: demo / real
URL is selected automatically according to your type of connection.
2.
Enter Login and Password.
MB Trading Broker Profile
To connect MultiCharts to MB Trading broker, it is necessary to have MB Trading software installed on the computer.
To download the latest version of MBT Desktop, follow the link: http://www.mbtrading.com/mbtDesktop. aspx.
To get latest version of MBT Desktop PRO, follow the link: http://www. mbtrading.com/mbtDesktopPro. aspx MB
Trading software should be installed, but one can’t use it simultaneously with MultiCharts.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts as it is not provided by MB Trading API.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated in MultiCharts.
For FOREX trade size should be equal to the amount of units, not trade lots.
MB Trading does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its
end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and
once one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the
OCO orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second
order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders
Risk).
Setting up MB Trading Broker Profile
In the Properties MB Trading window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by MB Trading:
1.
Authority section
208
Enter Login and Password.
2.
Connection Settings section
Configure timer to reconnect if link to MB Trading is lost.
3.
Default Order Settings section
It is possible to reset default order Routes.
4.
Unrealized Profit Calculation Mode section
Select one of the two modes to calculate unrealized profit: using Best Bid & Best Ask or Last Trade.
Open E Cry Broker Profile
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Note: If you manually drag Stop orders to the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be
executed), they won’t be converted into market orders.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level is met, then it will be converted into market order.
Stop-Limit orders for FOREX are not supported by Open E Cry.
Stop-Limit orders with stop and limit levels not overlapping each other are rejected by the broker.
Trade size for FOREX: 1 contract = 1 lot (size of a lot depends on the type of account).
Price and volume adjustment for orders is not supported on FOREX instruments.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by Open E Cry broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by Open E Cry broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Open E Cry supports Native One-Cancels-Others group, however, it is limited to only 2 orders with the same number
of contracts. Therefore, MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO
orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once one of the orders is filled, other orders
from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO orders is filled MultiCharts sends a
command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order may also be filled if price reaches
its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up Open E Cry Broker Profile
In the Properties Open E Cry window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Open E Cry:
1.
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
2.
Connectivity section.
Check the Server Name and Port number.
3.
Connection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if the connection to Open E Cry is lost.
209
Patsystems Broker Profile
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by Patsystems broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by PasSystems broker and displayed in MultiCharts. Instead of
Account open
Profit/Loss Patsystems returns Total Profit/Loss.
Patsystems does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its
end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and
once one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the
OCO orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second
order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders
Risk).
Note: Patsystems Transaction Server may perform daily Forced Logout of your Patsystems API. As per API
instructions, should the logout happen, shut down and restart MultiCharts and all related applications to re-establish
connection to Patsystems.
Setting up Patsystems Broker Profile
In the Properties Patsystems window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Patsystems:
Connection Settings tab
1.
Common Settings section.
The Demo Mode box: check it to disable the profile settings and turn on demo mode. In this mode orders are not
sent to the broker.
Enter Login and Password.
License (default value is FBD653F002), Environment, Application ID and Application Version parameters are
configured by default; however the broker may provide different settings. Enter these settings into appropriate
fields.
2.
Transport Settings section.
Enter Trade Server, Data Server and Port numbers.
3.
SSL section.
To use SSL certificate provided by Patsystems, check the Use SLL and enter its name.
4.
Advance Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Patsystems is lost.
Default Trading Account tab
It is obligatory to select 1 account in drop-down menu after clicking the Check For Accounts button.
On Default Order Settings tab select one of the two available Time-in-Force order parameters:
•
DAY
Order is canceled if it does not get executed by the close of the trading day. DAY is set as default; or:
•
GTD (Good Till Date)
Order is placed and it is active up to a specified date. Once GTD Time-In-Force parameter is selected, the Good Till
Date field appears allowing to specify a number of days. The grayed-out field nearby indicates the date.
210
Note: Patsystems connection can be established only after the API download is complete. Please go to Order and
Position Tracker -> Logs tab and make sure that you have received the following message: "API has completed
downloading data from server"
Rithmic 01 Broker Profile
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level or both stop and limit levels are met, then it will
be converted to limit order.
Buy Stop-Limit orders with Stop level higher than Limit level and Sell Stop-Limit orders with Stop level lower than
Limit level are rejected by the broker.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by Rithmic broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by Rithmic broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Rithmic does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up Rithmic 01 Broker Profile
Rithmic Broker Profile is created when MultiCharts is installed.
In the Properties Rithmic 01 window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Rithmic:
1.
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
SSL certificates path is set up by default.
2.
Connectivity section.
Make sure that the selected deployment is Rithmic 01.
Don’t adjust anything else in this section.
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct settings.
3.
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Rithmic is lost.
Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile
Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile
To connect Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile it is necessary to have set up connection to Rithmic/Zen-Fire data feed
in QuoteManager (see Built-in Data Sources)
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated in MultiCharts.
211
Note: It is not possible to connect Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile and Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile
simultaneously.
Setting up Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile
In the Manage Broker Profiles … window (see Managing Broker Profiles) click New and select Rithmic Local Sim.
Rithmic Local Sim will be added to the list of Broker Profiles.
In the Simulator Options window:
1.
Simulation Option section.
Specify range for Communication Delay. Milliseconds are used.
Specify range for Execution Delay. Milliseconds are used.
Specify Initial Balance.
Select Execution method.
2.
Margin Requirements Calculation section.
Select Margin calculation method.
The Reset button becomes active only when the profile is connected. Click Reset to reset the settings to default.
New settings are applied only when the profile is reconnected.
Trading Technologies Broker Profile
FIX API is used for connection between MultiCharts and Trading Technologies.
Trading Technologies doesn’t provide information on the list of accounts, equity and balance.
Entry Price is returned by the broker as Average Entry Price for day.
Market orders are converted into Limit ones on broker end.
Stop orders are converted into Stop-Limit ones. If at the moment an order is sent its stop level is met, then it will be
rejected by the broker. All executed stop orders in the end are transformed into limit ones.
Stop-Limit orders with stop and limit levels not overlapping each other will be rejected by the broker. If at the
moment an order is sent its stop level is met, then it will be rejected by the broker.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts as it is not provided by TT FIX API.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated in MultiCharts as it is not provided by TT FIX API.
There are also following broker limitations:
•
There is price ceiling for stop orders. Any orders beyond this limit are rejected by broker.
•
On some exchanges (for example: SGX), a stop order and stop prices of a stop-limit order cannot be modified.
This may influence auto trading.
•
There are exchanges, which don’t support stop orders.
Trading Technologies does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO
group on its end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by
MultiCharts and once one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts.
When one of the OCO orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note
that the second order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker
(see OCO-Orders Risk).
212
Setting up Trading Technologies Broker Profile
In the Properties Trading Technologies window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by
Trading Technologies
Connection settings tab
1. Order Connection Settings section.
Server IP, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID. 2. Price
Connection Settings section.
Server IP, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID.
3. Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Rithmic is lost.
Trading Accounts tab
1.
Trading section.
Account number
Clearing Account number
FFT2 tag
Agent Account tag.
Trading Technologies Broker Profile
2.
Unrealized Profit Calculation section
Select one of two modes to calculate unrealized profit: using Best Bid & Best Ask or Last Trade.
3.
If the account requires enabling multiple gateways feature, check the Use Multiple Exchange Gateway (Tag
18203) box.
ZenFire Broker Profile
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level or both stop and limit levels are met, then it will
be converted to limit order.
Note: If you manually drag Stop orders to the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be
executed), they won’t be converted.
Buy Stop-Limit orders with Stop level higher than Limit level and Sell Stop-Limit orders with Stop level lower than
Limit level are rejected by the broker.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by ZenFire broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by ZenFire broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
ZenFire does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
213
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up Zen-Fire Broker Profile
In the Properties Zen-Fire window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Zen-Fire
1.
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password
SSL certificates path is configured by default.
2.
Connectivity section
Make sure that the selected deployment is Zen-Fire
Don’t adjust anything else in this section
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct settings.
3.
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Zen-Fire is lost.
Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile
ZenFire Local Sim Broker Profile
To connect Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile it is necessary to have set up connection to Rithmic/Zen-Fire data feed
in QuoteManager (see Built-in Data Sources)
It is not possible to connect Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile and Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile simultaneously.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated in MultiCharts.
Setting up Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile
In the Manage Broker Profiles … window (see Managing Broker Profiles) click New and select Zen-Fire Local Sim.
Zen-Fire Local Sim will be added to the list of Broker Profiles.
In the Simulator Options window:
1.
Simulation Option section.
Specify range for Communication Delay. Milliseconds are used.
Specify range for Execution Delay. Milliseconds are used.
Specify Initial Balance.
Select Execution method.
2.
Margin Requirements Calculation section.
Select Margin calculation method.
The Reset button becomes active only when the profile is connected. Click Reset to reset the settings to default.
New settings are applied only when the profile is reconnected.
ZenFire/Rithmic Server Sim Broker Profile
214
ZenFire/Rithmic Server Sim Broker Profile
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level or both stop and limit levels are met, then it will
be converted to limit order.
Buy Stop-Limit orders with Stop level higher than Limit level and Sell Stop-Limit orders with Stop level lower than
Limit level are rejected by the broker.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by ZenFire/Rithmic broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by ZenFire/Rithmic broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
ZenFire does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to the broker. Note that the second
order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders
Risk).
Setting up ZenFire Server Sim Broker Profile
Zen-Fire Broker Profile is created when MultiCharts is installed.
In the Properties ZenFire/Rithmic Server Sim window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information
provided by Zen-Fire/Rithmic.
1.
Authority section
Enter Login and Password
SSL certificates path is set up by default.
2.
Connectivity section
Make sure that the selected deployment is Zen-Fire Server/Rithmic Sim
Do not change anything else in this section.
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct settings.
3.
Reconnection Settings section
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Zen-Fire/Rithmic is lost.
215
Manual Trading
Chart Trading
The chart trading panel allows placing manual orders directly from a chart. The chart is cursor-sensitive, so rightclicking on the chart will create an order at the price level you clicked on. Orders can be also dragged and dropped
directly to a specific price on the chart.
You can send single orders and entire strategies using the methods described above. MultiCharts supports simple
single orders, One-Cancels-Other order groups (OCO), as well as automated entry and exit strategies. The Entry
Automation and Exit Automation strategies can be applied by drag-and-drop or by right-clicking to individual orders,
and entire positions.
Orders can be changed or cancelled by right-clicking them and choosing the appropriate option in the shortcut
menu or from the Chart trading panel itself. Strategy levels (such as profit target and stop loss) can also be easily
changed and moved around. Strategy names are shown on the appropriate levels, showing where the orders came
from.
Active orders are shown in a bright color, while dependent inactive orders (wait for the active order to be filled
before becoming active) are shown in transparent colors. Changing the size, or the price, of the parent order will
automatically recalculate and update the dependent orders.
216
Show/Hide Chart Trading Panel
To show/hide chart trading panel, click the Chart Trading Panel button
at the top-right corner of the chart.
Full and Compact Modes
To switch to Full/Compact Mode, right-click on the chart trading panel and click Switch to Full/Compact Mode.
Selecting Broker
To select a broker, click the arrow on the Broker Connection button
For more info see Broker Profiles Overview
and select a broker in drop-down menu.
Connecting / Disconnecting Broker Profile
When a broker is selected, click the Broker Connection button
For more info see Broker Profiles Overview
to connect or disconnect it.
Selecting Account
Select the account number in the Account Selector box
PnL and Current Position
Current Position and Profit and Loss are indicated in the PnL and Current position box on the Chart Trading Panel
and on the PnL Marker on the chart. Positive value (profit) is colored green, negative value (loss) is colored red.
Profit and Loss can be indicated in: Ticks
, percents
and dollars
.
To change indication type, click the PnL and Current position box. Current Ask and Bid prices are indicated below.
On the chart the Profit and Loss can be also indicated in: Dollars ,
Percent
, Ticks
.
Click the PnL Marker to change indication type.
Current Position is marked with red or blue color. Long position is colored blue. Short position is colored red.
One-click order placing
Chart Trading panel provides the opportunity of one-click order placing.
Buy or Sell Market orders can be sent by pressing Buy Mkt and Sell Mkt buttons. Buy Ask, Buy Bid & Sell Ask, Sell Bid
buttons send buy and sell limit orders at ask and bid prices respectively.
217
Place Order
Place Order menu allows you to place Stop, Limit and Stop-Limit orders as well as to automate certain methods of
entering or exiting positions (see Orders and Strategies). It’s perfect for avoiding repetitive tasks, increasing your
productivity and focusing on trading. Automation is especially useful when you need to apply an order pair quickly.
Place Order menu strategies give you competitive advantage over other traders: they allow you to exit the position
faster than others. They also reduce the risk of two orders execution and would be especially useful for traders who
use pyramiding strategies. Each strategy is an OCO group – if one order is filled, the other is canceled.
Note: Not all brokers support server-based OCO groups. Consequently, there is no 100% guarantee that only one
order will be executed (See OCO-Orders Risk)
Orders and Entry Strategies are shown as icons on the Chart Trading panel and can be easily applied to the chart.
You can visually change the order levels, which saves a lot of time when managing your orders.
The icons are rearranged automatically: the last used icon is displayed in the top left corner of the menu.
To expand or collapse the Place Order menu, use the Expand/Collapse buttons.
To scroll icons in the Place Order menu, use the Scroll buttons.
To select Exit Strategies Average Open Position Price calculation mode:
1.
Select File in the main menu, click Preferences, select the Trading tab
2.
Enable the recived from broker button to use the price received from broker or the calculated based on
order(s) execution price button to use the price calculated by MultiCarts based on entry order(s) execution price.
Exit Orders Management
Exit strategies applied to an open position change the number of contracts according to the current position size.
Exit strategies applied to active orders do not change number of contracts regardless of the open position size (do
not "jump" onto the active position after the parent order was filled). They remain active and keep protecting
orders that were generated by the parent order.
Number of contracts for exit strategies applied to the open position changes taken into account strategies applied
to filled orders and their effect on the overall position. In other words, strategies applied to the position protect
the remainder that is not protected by strategies applied to individual orders.
If a position was opened by an order that has an exit strategy attached from a flat position, then this strategy is
applied to the entire position and “protects” it (see Eaxmple 2 below).
Exit strategies applied to positions and strategies applied to orders are visually different on both on the chart and in
the DOM: exits strategies applied to positions have “p” letter to the left of the number of contracts.
Example 1 - Shows exit strategy attached to an individual order:
Open position is -1 contract.
Sell limit order for 1 contract is sent to broker.
Profit Target exit strategy is attached to the sell limit order.
218
Sell limit order is filled. Profit Target becomes active. Open position is -2 contracts. Profit Target size is 1 (
attached to the order, not the position ).
Sell market order for 2 contracts is sent to broker.
Sell market order is filled. Open position is -4 contracts. Profit Target size is 1.
Example 2 - Shows exit strategy auto-attached to an order opening the position from a flat position:
Open position is flat.
Buy market order for 100 contracts with a Master Strategy auto attached to it is sent to broker.
Buy market order is filled. Master Strategy becomes active. Open position is +100 contracts. Master Strategy
size is 100.
Buy stop order for 200 contracts is sent to broker.
Buy Stop order is filled. Open position is +300 contracts. Master Strategy size is 300 (protects entire position
since the position was opened by an order that has an exit strategy attached from a flat position).
Example 3 - Shows both exit strategy attached to the entire position and exit strategy attached to an individual order:
Open position is +10 contracts.
Stop-Loss #1 exit strategy is applied to the open position. Stop-Loss #1 size is 10.
Buy stop order for 5 contracts is sent to broker.
Stop-Loss #2 exit strategy is applied to the buy stop order. Stop-Loss #2 size is 5.
Buy stop order is filled. Stop-Loss #2 becomes active. Open position is +15 contracts. Stop-Loss #1 size is 10.
Stop-Loss #2 size is 5.
Buy market order for 10 contracts is sent to the broker.
Buy market order is filled. Open position is +25 contracts. Stop-Loss #1 size becomes 20 (attached to the
position). Stop-Loss #2 size is 5 (attached to the order, not the position).
Example 4 - Shows exit strategy attached to the entire position
Open position is +50 contracts.
Buy market order for 100 contracts with a Master Strategy auto attached to it is sent to broker.
Buy market order is filled. Master Strategy becomes active. Open position is +150 contracts. Master
Strategy size is 100 (attached to the order, not the position).
Buy stop order for 200 contracts is sent to broker.
Buy Stop order is filled. Open position is +300 contracts. Master Strategy size is 300(attached to the
position).
OCO-Orders
One Cancels Other (OCO) orders are the price orders sent in a group. When any of OCO orders is filled or partially
filled, the system cancels or reduces size of other orders in this OCO-group.
Note: Reduce size functionality is supported by Interactive Brokers only: if one order in OCO group is partially filled,
others are reduced in size proportionally.
All Entry Strategies are placed with OCO-orders. There are two types of OCO-groups in MultiCharts: Native and
Simulated.
219
Native OCO-group is used when the broker’s API supports OCO-groups. In this case all OCO orders are sent to the
broker directly and unfilled OCO orders will be cancelled by the broker. (Native OCO-group is supported by
Interactive Brokers and FXCM).
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders will be sent to the broker, but once one of them is filled, other
orders from this OCO group will be cancelled by MultiCharts. In this case, when one of the OCO orders is filled,
MultiCharts will send a command to cancel or reduce size of the second OCO order to the broker.
Please note that in case of high market volatility there may be not enough time to cancel the order and therefore
both orders may be filled. Both orders also may be filled in the unlikely event of crash or connection loss.
All OCO-orders of the same group will have the same OCO-ID. You may check it in the Orders tab of the Order and
Position Tracker window.
Setting Order Quantity
Set order quantity by one of the following methods:
• Type in order quantity in Order Quantity box
.
• Click the Trading Calculator button
in Chart Trading; or:
Calculator automatically increases the current trade size setting by one, e.g. if you had 1 in order quantity field,
calculator would automatically make it 2.
You can modify the number of contracts by pressing +1, +2, +5 etc. buttons. Zero button resets the number of
contracts to zero.
Buttons on the right side of the calculator contain 6 last values.
You may set this number of contracts by pressing those buttons. To apply the modifications click OK, to cancel the
modifications click Cancel.
Setting Time in Force
To set time in force of the order, use the Time in Force box in Chart Trading panel.
•
DAY – Good for one day
•
GTC – Good ‘Til Cancelled
•
GTD – Good To Date
•
IOC – Immediate or Cancel Order
Order Modification
Order modification allows adjusting price level and changing the quantity of the order that has not been filled yet.
Adjusting price levels
To modify order price, drag the order marker on the chart and drop it to the desired price level.
When you drag the order with the mouse, it shows the difference between the actual position of the cursor and Bid
or Ask price while you hold left button.
If you move the order somewhere between Bid and Ask on the price scale, it shows you current spread value
changing dynamically.
To cancel the price level adjustment, press Esc before releasing left mouse button.
To modify the length of the line connecting order marker and price label on the price scale see Chart Trading Settings.
220
Changing Quantity
Change quantity of the order by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the order marker on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Change Quantity and select the
quantity; or:
•
Click on volume value on order marker on the chart and modify the quantity in Trading Calculator (see Trading
Calculator)
Note: Unlike DOM, in Chart Trading the orders with the same price levels can be moved and modified separately (
without joining the orders into one group) by drag-and-drop. If you want to cancel the price level adjustment, press
Esc before releasing left mouse button.
Cancelling orders
Cancel separate threads or the order/strategy completely by one of the following methods:
•
Click on the Close button on order/strategy marker; or:
•
Right-click the order marker on the chart to see the shortcut menu and select Cancel Order.
To cancel multiple orders at a time orders use Cancel Asks, Cancel Bids and Cancel All buttons.
The Cancel Asks button cancels all pending buy orders. The Cancel Bids button cancels all pending sell orders. The
Cancel All button cancels all pending orders.
Close position
Close the position by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the order marker on the chart to see the shortcut menu and click Close Position; or:
•
Click on the Close button on Chart Trading Panel;or:
•
Click on the Close button on the position marker.
Closing the current position cancels all pending orders.
Reverse position
Reverse the position by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the order marker on the chart to see the shortcut menu to call context menu and select Reverse
Position; or:
•
Click the Reverse button on Chart Trading panel; or:
•
Click the Reverse button at the right side of position marker on the chart.
Reverse closes the current position with market order, cancels all pending orders and sends market order to open
the position in opposite direction for the same number of contracts.
Chart Trading Settings
To configure Chart Trading Settings:
•
Open Format Chart Trading window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu, then click Format Chart Trading…; or
•
Right-click on the Chart Trading panel to see the shortcut menu, then click Format Chart Trading…; or
•
Click the Format tab in the main menu and then click Chart Trading.
•
Select Common Settings tab
221
Require Order confirmation – when enabled, the confirmation window will be shown every time you place an order
Show Open Positions – enables/disables active positions indication on the chart
Show Historical Orders – enables/disables historical orders indication on the chart
Show Active orders – enables/disables active orders indication on the chart
Show Trade Panel – shows/hides Trade Panel
Show Best Bid & Best Ask – enables/disables indication of Best Bid & Best Ask in Trade Panel
Stop Limit Offset – allows setting default Stop Limit offset with spin-box
PnL Display Unit – allows selection of PnL indication type (Currency, Point, Percent)
Use as Default – saves the settings as Default. All subsequently created charts will use the same settings
Appearance
To configure visual parameters of Chart Trading orders:
•
Open Format Chart Trading window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu, then click Format Chart Trading…; or
•
Right-click on the Chart Trading panel to see the shortcut menu, then click Format Chart Trading…; or
•
Click the Format tab in the main menu, then click Chart Trading.
•
Select Historical Orders tab or Active Orders and Positions tab
Historical Orders
Select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click Other to use custom colors for the key components
of historical orders markers.
Change the style and the size of the components using 28 custom vertical and horizontal arrows and 7 custom sizes.
Connecting Line Length - modifies the length of the line connecting order marker and price label on the price scale.
To configure order markers size you should change Status Line font size.
To change Status Line font size right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu, click Format Window, select the
Status Line tab and modify Font Size.
Active Orders and Positions
Select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click Other to create custom colors for the Active Orders
and Positions.
Change style and weight of connecting lines using 5 custom line types and 7 custom weights.
Default Active Order Colors
222
Accessing Performance Report
To access a Strategy Performance Report:
•
Apply a strategy to a chart.
•
In the menu select View then click Strategy Performance Report.
To access a Trading Performance Report:
•
Connect a Broker Profile.
•
Make sure that the chart shows historical trades.
•
In the menu select View then click Strategy Performance Report.
Chart Trading Orders and Strategies
Stop Order
A Stop Order will buy or sell a security when its price surpasses a particular level defined by the trader, thus ensuring
a greater probability of achieving a predetermined entry or exit price. Stop order becomes a market order when the
price reaches the predefined level.
Appearance
Stop Order is displayed as sienna marker on the chart connected to the
order price label on the price scale with a dotted line.
Default Stop Order marker color and connecting line length can be
modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
Creating Stop Order
To create Stop Order:
Stop Orders on the chart
• Drag-and-drop the Stop Order icon
; or:
• Right-click at the desired price level to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click Buy / Sell Stop…;
or:
• Right-click the Stop Order icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply Strategy
(Buy Stop order at Ask price will be created).
• Double-click the Stop Order icon
in the Place Order menu (Buy Stop order at Ask price will be created).
Note: Chart is context-sensitive and allows creating Buy or Sell orders depending on the price level at which you click
on the chart. If you right-click above current price level, Buy Stop option will be available in the shortcut menu. If
you right-click below current price level, Sell Stop option will be available in the shortcut menu. Right-clicking on the
current price level makes both Buy Stop and Sell Stop options available.
223
Stop Order Parameters
Order Size is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity).
Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force) When
placing Stop order the Place Order confirmation window appears.
Click Yes to create the order or Cancel to abort the operation.
Check the Do not ask me again check box to disable Place Order confirmation window.
Note: When Require Order confirmation option is disabled no confirmation window will appear.
Limit Order
A Limit Order will buy or sell a set number of shares at a specified price
or better.
Appearance
Limit Orders on the chart
Limit Order is displayed as lime marker on the chart connected to the
order price label on the price scale with a dotted line.
Default Limit Order marker color and connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
Creating Limit Order
To create Limit Order:
• Drag-and-drop the Limit Order icon
to the chart; or:
• Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click Buy
/ Sell Limit…; or:
• Right-click the Limit Order icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click
Apply Strategy ( Buy Limit order at Bid price will be created ).
• Double-click the Limit Order icon
in the Place Order menu (Buy Limit order at Bid price will be created).
Limit Order Parameters
Order Size is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity).
Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force) When
placing Limit order the Place Order confirmation window appears.
Click Yes to create the order or Cancel to abort the operation.
Check the Do not ask me again check box to disable Place Order confirmation window.
224
Note: When Require Order confirmation option is disabled no confirmation window will appear.
Stop Limit Order
Stop Limit Order combines the features of stop order with those of a
limit order. A stop-limit order will buy or sell a set number of shares at
a specified price (or better) after a given stop price has been reached.
Once the stop price is reached, the stop-limit order becomes a limit
order to buy (or sell) at the limit price or better.
Stop Limit Orders on the chart
Appearance
Default Stop Limit Order marker color and connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
Creating Stop Limit Order
To create Stop Limit order:
• Drag-and-drop the Stop Limit order icon
to the DOM window; or:
• Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Buy / Sell Stop Limit…; or:
• Right-click the Stop Limit order icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
Strategy ( Buy Stop Limit order at Ask price will be created ).
• Double-click the Stop Limit Order icon
in the Place Order menu (Buy Stop Limit order at Ask price will be
created).
Note: Chart is context-sensitive and allows creating Buy or Sell orders depending on the price level at which you click
on the chart. If you right-click above current price level, Buy Stop Limit option will be available in the shortcut menu.
If you right-click below current price level, Sell Stop Limit option will be available in the shortcut menu. Right-clicking
on the current price level makes both Buy Stop Limit and Sell Stop Limit options available.
Stop Limit Order Parameters
Order Size is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity).
Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force)
When placing Stop Limit order the Place Order confirmation window appears allowing to modify Limit price.
Click Yes to create the order or Cancel to abort the operation.
Check the Do not ask me again check box to disable Place Order confirmation window
Note: When Require Order confirmation option is disabled no confirmation window will appear and Limit Price will
be based on Stop Limit Offset set in Format Chart Trading menu. Stop Limit offset value is set to 1 tick by default.
Modification of Stop Limit Order offset
To modify Stop Limit offset:
1.
Open Format Chart Trading window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu and then click Format Chart Trading; or:
•
Right-click on the Chart Trading panel to see the shortcut menu, and then click Format Chart Trading; or:
225
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Chart Trading….
2.
Select the Common Settings tab.
3.
Modify the offset in the Stop Limit Offset box.
4.
Click OK to save changes.
Breakout Strategy
A breakout is usually defined as a sudden and significant price
movement through the support and resistance levels, usually followed
by large trading volume and increased volatility. A breakout trader will
buy if the price goes up through the resistance level and sell if the price
Breakout Strategy on the chart
goes down through the support level, assuming that the motion will continue.
The Breakout Strategy will place two stop orders at the prices (distance) specified, in order to catch the breakout
when it happens. A buy stop order will be placed above the current price and a sell stop order below the current
price.
Appearance
Breakout Strategy orders are displayed as medium purple markers on the chart connected to the order price labels
on the price scale with a dotted line.
Default Breakout Strategy order markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format Chart Trading
menu.
Creating Breakout Strategy orders
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakout Strategy icon
to the chart; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Breakout Strategy; or:
•
Right-click the Breakout Strategy
icon in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click
Apply Strategy.
•
Double-click
the
Breakout
Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu.
Breakout Strategy Parameters
To modify default Breakout Strategy parameters:
1.
Right-click the Breakout Strategy icon http:/ / www. multicharts. com/ img/ wiki/ strategies/ 12. png in the Place
Order menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify breakout and breakdown values in Breakout At and Breakdown At boxes.
Breakout/Breakdown levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either Breakout/Breakdown level
or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated in ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
226
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Breakout Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save
as Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Breakout parameters.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Choose the Breakout Template
5.
Enter Breakout template name.
6.
Click OK.
icon.
Fade Strategy
Fading is usually defined as trading against the trend, a ‘mirror-image’
of the breakout. If the market goes up, fading traders will sell, hoping
that the price will go down. Similarly, fading traders will buy if the price
Fade Strategy on the chart
goes down.
The Fade Strategy will place two limit orders at the prices (distance) specified, so fading can start when the price
moves. A buy limit order will be placed below the current price and a sell limit order above the current price.
Appearance
Fade Strategy orders are displayed as olive drab markers on the chart connected to the order price labels on the
price scale with a dotted line.
Default Fade Strategy order markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format Chart Trading
menu.
Creating Fade Strategy orders
To create Fade strategy orders:
•
Drag-and-drop the Fade Strategy icon
to the chart; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Fade Strategy; or:
•
Right-click the Fade Strategy
icon in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click
Apply Strategy.
•
Double-click
the
Fade
Strategy icon in the Place Order menu.
Fade Strategy Parameters
To modify default Fade strategy parameters:
227
1.
Right-click the Fade Strategy icon
2.
Click Edit.
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu.
3.
Modify upper and lower limits values in Upper Limit At and Lower Limit At boxes.
Upper and lower limits levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Fade parameters.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Choose the Fade Template icon.
5.
Enter Fade template name.
6.
Click OK
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy
This strategy is a combination of the breakout and fade strategies
defined above, and it is used when the trader expects the price will go
up. This strategy will place a buy stop above the current price and a buy
limit order below the current price. The breakout can be activated if it
Breakout Strategy on the chart
happens, but also catch the fade if the price falls.
Appearance
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy orders are displayed as sienna markers on the chart connected to the order price labels
on the price scale with a dotted line.
Default Breakout up/fade strategy order markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format Chart
Trading menu.
Creating Breakout Up/Fade Strategy orders
To create Breakout up/fade strategy orders:
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy icon
to the chart; or:
228
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy; or:
•
Right-click the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy
icon in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu
and click Apply Strategy.
•
Double-click
the
Breakout
Up/Fade
Strategy icon in the Place Order menu.
Breakout up/fade Strategy Parameters
To modify default Breakout up/fade strategy parameters:
1.
Right-click the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify Breakout and Lower limit values in Breakout At and Lower Limit At boxes.
Breakout and lower limit levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Breakout Up/Fade strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then
click Save as Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Breakout Up/Fade parameters.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Choose the Breakout Up/Fade Template icon.
5.
Enter Fade template name.
6.
Click OK.
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy
This strategy is a combination of the breakout and fade strategies
defined above, and it is used when the trader expects the price will go
down. This strategy will place a sell stop order below current price and
buy limit above current price. The breakout can be activated if it
Breakout Strategy on the chart
happens, but also catch the fade if the price rises.
Appearance
Breakout down/fade strategy orders are displayed as dark cyan markers on the chart connected to the order price
labels on the price scale with a dotted line.
229
Default Breakout down /fade strategy order markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format
Chart Trading menu.
Creating Breakout Down/Fade Strategy orders
To create Breakout down /fade strategy orders:
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakout Down/Fade Strategy icon
to the chart; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy; or:
•
Right-click the Breakout Down/Fade Strategy
icon in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut
menu and click Apply Strategy.
•
Double-click the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy
icon in the Place Order menu.
Depth of Market (DOM)
Depth-of-Market window displays market depth, PnL, current positions as well as pending orders and provides oneclick trading features. Entry and exit automation can be set up directly in the DOM window making it a unique and
self-sufficient tool for manual trading (see Chart_Trading_Orders_and_Strategies).
MultiCharts DOM displays up to 10 levels of market depth. 10 levels is the limit, if the broker provides less data,
DOM displays fewer levels of market depth.
Ask and Bid Size is shown in Buy and Sell columns respectively.
Best Bid and Best Ask are marked with white color. Last trade price and size are highlighted in yellow in Price column.
Those are default colors that can be changed.
Note: Please check if you have a subscription for depth-of-market data for the particular symbol that you are going
to use in the DOM. Dukascopy and FXCM brokers cannot be used for DOM trading since they do not support depthof-market.
230
231
Dynamic and Semi-Static Modes
MultiCharts DOM has two modes: dynamic and semi-static.
Dynamic DOM mode means the DOM window will automatically re-center after each new tick (price update)
received. This mode is very useful for scalping strategies.
To enable Dynamic mode right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for Buy, Price & Sell columns and control
elements to see the shortcut menu and check Dynamic Price Scale.
If Dynamic Price Scale option is disabled, DOM operates in semi-static mode.
Semi-static DOM mode means the DOM window will re-center once the current price hits the upper or lower
boundary of the window. A 5 second countdown precedes re-centering.
Static DOM has been patented by Trading Technologies: absolutely static DOM, no auto-recentering. MultiCharts
DOM is semi-static meaning that it will move without input from the user (i.e. if the price goes off the screen), which
creates the possibility of making an error during input. It was implemented this way in order not to violate the
patent.
Regardless of the DOM mode that is selected, to center last trade price double click on the Price column.
Creating New DOM Window
Open a new DOM window by one of following methods:
•
Click the New DOM Window icon
on the Main toolbar, or:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click DOM Window, or:
•
Use Ctrl+Alt+Ins keys combination on the keyboard
Selecting Broker
To select a broker, click on the arrow next to the Broker Connection button
For more info see Broker Profiles Overview.
and select a broker from the list.
Connecting / Disconnecting Broker Profile
When a broker is selected, click on the Broker Connection button
to connect/disconnect it. When MultiCharts
is establishing the connection with the broker, the Broker Connection button is yellow. Once the connection is
established, it becomes green.
You can also right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for Buy, Price & Sell columns and control elements to
see the shortcut menu and click Connect / Disconnect Broker Profile.
For more info see Broker Profiles Overview.
232
Selecting Account
Select the account number in the Account Selector box
Selecting Instrument
To select the instrument you want to trade with:
•
Type in the symbol name into the Instrument Selector field and press Enter; or:
•
Click on the Lookup button to select the necessary symbol from the database.
Note: To be able to trade the instrument in the DOM, you should add it to the Quote Manager (see Operating Symbol
List).
PnL and Current Position
PnL and Current Position box indicates Current Position and Profit and Loss. Positive value (profit) is colored green,
negative value (loss) is colored red.
Profit and Loss can be indicated in: Dollars
, Ticks
and Percent
.
To change indication type, click on PnL and Current position box.
AvgEntry Price of the position is highlighted in white in Price column.
One-Click Order Placing
DOM window allows you to place Market, Stop, Limit and Stop-Limit orders with just one click.
Require Order Confirmation
To enable order confirmation, right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for Buy, Price & Sell columns and
control elements to see the shortcut menu and check the Require Order Confirmation check box.
When Require Order Confirmation check box is checked you will see Place Order confirmation window every time
you place an order. Check the Do not ask me again check box to disable order confirmation.
Placing Market Orders
To place Market orders ,use the Buy Mkt and the Sell Mkt buttons under the price ladder. Order Size is defined by
Quantity field, Time In Force (TIF) is defined by the value set in the Time In Force field.
Placing Limit Orders
Place a Limit order by one of the following methods:
•
Click on price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column (buy order) or Ask Size column (sell order).
Order Volume is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (TIF) is defined by the value set in
Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force); or:
Note: If you click below Best Ask price in Sell column or above Best Bid price in Buy column, a Stop order will be sent
by default. To send Sell limit orders below Best Ask price or Buy limit orders above Best Bid price hold Shift button
and click on the price at which you want to send an order.
233
•
Drag-and-drop Limit order icon to the price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column (buy order) or
Ask Size column (sell order).
Note: If you drag and drop limit order icon above Best Ask price, a Sell Limit order will be placed regardless of the
column where you drag the order to (Buy or Sell). If you drag and drop limit order icon below Best Bid price, a Buy
Limit order will be placed regardless of the column where you drag the order to (Buy or Sell).
•
Hold the Ctrl (or Shift) key on the keyboard and click Buy Bid/ Buy Ask or Sell Bid/Sell Ask buttons.
Note: When the Ctrl key is held, the Buy Mkt and the Sell Mkt buttons will become Buy Bid and Sell Bid buttons
respectively. When the Shift key is held, the Buy Mkt and the Sell Mkt buttons will become the Buy Ask and the Sell
Ask buttons respectively.
Placing Stop Orders
Place a Stop order by one of the following methods:
•
Click on price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column (buy order) or Ask Size column (sell order).
Order Volume is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In Force
field(see Setting Time in Force) ; or:
Note: If you click above Best Ask price in Sell column or below Best Bid price in Buy column, a Limit order will be sent
by default. To send Sell Stop orders above Best Ask price or Buy limit orders below Best Bid price hold Ctrl button
and click on the price at which you want to send an order.
•
Drag-and-drop of Stop order icon to the price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column (buy order)
or Ask Size column (sell order). Order Volume is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (
TIF) is defined by the value set in the Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force ).
Note: If you drag and drop Stop order icon above Best Ask price, a Buy Stop order will be placed regardless of the
column where you drag the order to (Buy or Sell). If you drag and drop limit order icon below Best Bid price, a Sell
Stop order will be placed regardless of the column where you drag the order to (Buy or Sell).
Placing Stop-Limit Orders
Place a Stop-Limit order by one of the following methods:
•
Click on price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column or Ask Size column while holding Ctrl+Shift
buttons. Order Volume is defined by Qty field(see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In
Force field (see Setting Time in Force).
•
Drag-and-drop of Stop-Limit order icon to the price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column or Ask
Size column. Order Volume is defined by Qty field(see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (TIF) is defined by the
value set in the Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force).
Note: When Require Order Confirmation check box is checked, Stop Limit price level can be customized in
confirmation window. When Require Order Confirmation check box is unchecked, Stop Limit price level will
correspond to the level where it is placed (see Require Order Confirmation).
Place Order
Place Order menu allows you to place Stop, Limit and Stop-Limit orders as well as to automate certain methods of
entering or exiting positions. It’s perfect for avoiding repetitive tasks, increasing your productivity and focusing on
trading. Automation is especially useful when you need to apply an order pair quickly (see Orders and Strategies).
234
Place Order menu strategies give you competitive advantage over other traders: they allow you to exit the position
faster than others. They also reduce the risk of two orders execution and would be especially useful for traders who
use pyramiding strategies. Each strategy is an OCO group – if one order is filled, the other is canceled.
Note: Not all brokers support server-based OCO groups. Consequently, there is no 100% guarantee that only one
order will be executed (See OCO-Orders Risk)
Orders and Entry Strategies icons are rearranged automatically: the last used icon is displayed in the top left corner
of the menu.
To expand or collapse the Place Order menu, use the Expand/Collapse buttons.
To scroll icons in the Place Order menu, use the Scroll buttons.
To select Exit Strategies Average Open Position Price calculation mode:
1.
Select File in the main menu, click Preferences, select the Trading tab
2.
Enable the recived from broker button to use the price received from broker or the calculated based on
order(s) execution price button to use the price calculated by MultiCarts based on entry order(s) execution price.
Exit Orders Management
Exit strategies applied to an open position change the number of contracts according to the current position size.
Exit strategies applied to active orders do not change number of contracts regardless of the open position size (do
not "jump" onto the active position after the parent order was filled). They remain active and keep protecting orders
that were generated by the parent order.
Number of contracts for exit strategies applied to the open position changes taken into account strategies applied
to filled orders and their effect on the overall position. In other words, strategies applied to the position protect the
remainder that is not protected by strategies applied to individual orders.
If a position was opened by an order that has an exit strategy attached from a flat position, then this strategy is
applied to the entire position and “protects” it (see Eaxmple 2 below).
Exit strategies applied to positions and strategies applied to orders are visually different on both on the chart and in
the DOM: exits strategies applied to positions have “p” letter to the left of the number of contracts.
Example 1 - Shows exit strategy attached to an individual order:
1.
Open position is -1 contract.
2.
Sell limit order for 1 contract is sent to broker.
3.
Profit Target exit strategy is attached to the sell limit order.
4.
Sell limit order is filled. Profit Target becomes active. Open position is -2 contracts. Profit Target size is 1
(attached to the order, not the position).
5.
Sell market order for 2 contracts is sent to broker.
6.
Sell market order is filled. Open position is -4 contracts. Profit Target size is 1.
235
Example 2 - Shows exit strategy auto-attached to an order opening the position from a flat position:
1.
Open position is flat.
2.
Buy market order for 100 contracts with a Master Strategy auto attached to it is sent to broker.
3.
Buy market order is filled. Master Strategy becomes active. Open position is +100 contracts. Master Strategy
size is 100.
4.
Buy stop order for 200 contracts is sent to broker.
5.
Buy Stop order is filled. Open position is +300 contracts. Master Strategy size is 300 (protects entire position
since the position was opened by an order that has an exit strategy attached from a flat position).
Example 3 - Shows exit strategy attached to the entire position:
1.
Open position is +50 contracts.
2.
Buy market order for 100 contracts with a Master Strategy auto attached to it is sent to broker.
3.
Buy market order is filled. Master Strategy becomes active. Open position is +150 contracts. Master Strategy
size is 100 (attached to the order, not the position).
4.
Buy stop order for 200 contracts is sent to broker.
5.
Buy Stop order is filled. Open position is +300 contracts. Master Strategy size is 300(attached to the position).
Example 4 - Shows both exit strategy attached to the entire position and exit strategy attached to an individual
order:
1.
Open position is +10 contracts.
2.
Stop-Loss #1 exit strategy is applied to the open position. Stop-Loss #1 size is 10.
3.
Buy stop order for 5 contracts is sent to broker.
4.
Stop-Loss #2 exit strategy is applied to the buy stop order. Stop-Loss #2 size is 5.
5.
Buy stop order is filled. Stop-Loss #2 becomes active. Open position is +15 contracts. Stop-Loss #1 size is 10.
Stop-Loss #2 size is 5.
6.
Buy market order for 10 contracts is sent to the broker.
7.
Buy market order is filled. Open position is +25 contracts. Stop-Loss #1 size becomes 20 (attached to the
position). Stop-Loss #2 size is 5 (attached to the order, not the position).
OCO-Orders
One Cancels Other (OCO) orders are the price orders sent in a group. When any of OCO orders is filled or partially
filled, the system cancels or reduces size of other orders in this OCO-group.
Note: Reduce size functionality is supported by Interactive Brokers only: if one order in OCO group is partially filled,
others are reduced in size proportionally.
All Entry Strategies are placed with OCO-orders. There are two types of OCO-groups in MultiCharts: Native and
Simulated.
236
Native OCO-group is used when the broker’s API supports OCO-groups. In this case all OCO orders are sent to the
broker directly and unfilled OCO orders will be cancelled by the broker. (Native OCO-group is supported by
Interactive Brokers and FXCM).
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders will be sent to the broker, but once one of them is filled, other
orders from this OCO group will be cancelled by MultiCharts. In this case, when one of the OCO orders is filled,
MultiCharts will send a command to cancel or reduce size of the second OCO order to the broker.
Please note that in case of high market volatility there may be not enough time to cancel the order and therefore
both orders may be filled. Both orders also may be filled in the unlikely event of crash or connection loss.
All OCO-orders of the same group will have the same OCO-ID. You may check it in the Orders tab of the Order and
Position Tracker window.
Setting Order Quantity
Set order quantity by one of the following methods:
•
Type in order quantity in Order Quantity box
•
Click the Trading Calculator button.
in DOM window; or:
Calculator automatically increases the current trade size setting by one, e.g. if you had 1 in order quantity field,
calculator would automatically make it 2.
You can modify the number of contracts by pressing +1, +2, +5 etc. buttons. Zero button resets the number of
contracts to zero.
Buttons on the left side of the calculator contain 6 last values.
You may set this number of contracts by pressing those buttons. To apply the modifications click OK, to cancel the
modifications click Cancel.
Setting Time in Force
To set time in force of the order, use the Time in Force box in DOM window.
• DAY – Good for one day
• GTC – Good ‘Til Cancelled
• GTD – Good To Date
• IOC – Immediate or Cancel Order
Order status types
MultiCharts DOM indicates different order statuses with different colors.
• Order status – Sent
• Order status – Submitted
• Order status – Inactive (Tot Triggered)
• Order status – PreCancelled, PreModified
Order Modification
Order modification allows modifying price level and changing the quantity of the active order that has not been filled
yet.
Modifying price levels
237
To modify an order price, drag and drop the order marker to desired price level.
To cancel price adjustment, press the Esc button before you release left mouse button.
Changing Quantity
Change quantity of the order by one of the following methods:
•
Click on the order marker on the chart to call context menu, select Modify Quantity and select the quantity;
or:
•
Click on volume value on order marker on the chart and modify the quantity in Trading Calculator (see Trading
Calculator).
Managing Multiple Orders with the same price
If you place two or more orders of the same type at the same price level, they will be displayed as one order with
the actual number of orders shown in brackets. Unlike Chart Trading panel, if you drag and drop such group of orders
in DOM, all orders will be replaced.
To modify quantity or cancel every single order in such group, right-click on the orders group in DOM to see the
shortcut menu, select Modify Quantity or Cancel Order and click on the order ID. To cancel all orders in a group,
click Cancel All Orders in this Cell.
If you place two or more orders of the same type at the same price level, they will be displayed one above the other
showing bottom order color at the right side of the displayed order. To switch between the orders click on this color
marker at the right side of the displayed order.
238
In case of Entry and Exit strategies to switch between different strategies click on the Switch button.
Reverse position
To reverse current position:
•
Click the Reverse button; or:
•
Right-click on the Average Entry Price highlighted in white to see the shortcut menu and click Reverse Position.
Close Position
Close the position by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Close button
on Chart Trading Panel;or:
•
Click on the X on order/strategy marker; or:
•
Right-click on the Average Entry Price highlighted in white to see the shortcut menu and select Close Position.
Closing the current position cancels the orders associated with it. It also cancels all pending orders.
Cancelling orders
Cancel separate threads or the order/strategy completely by one of the following methods:
•
Click on the X button on order/strategy marker; or:
•
Right-click the order to see the shortcut menu and select Cancel Order.
To cancel all Buy orders, click on the Cancel
button at the left of Buy Mkt button.
To cancel all Sell orders, click on the Cancel button
at the right of Sell Mkt button.
Resizing DOM
DOM window height can be customized. To resize the whole DOM window or change the depth, drag the bottom
of the scale.
Compact Mode and Extended Mode
Extended mode stretches DOM from top to bottom of your screen, and Compact mode shows a more compact trade
panel.
To switch between Compact and Extended Mode in Depth Of Market Window
239
•
Right click on any free space of the DOM window and click Switch To Compact/Full Mode; or:
•
Click the Switch To Compact/Full Mode button
.
Always Show Entire Number option
Always Show Entire Number feature affects the type of volume numbers indication.
When Always Show Entire Number feature is enabled, volume quantity in Bid and Ask price scales will be indicated
as is, i.e. full-length.
When Always Show Entire Number feature is disabled, and volume quantity in Bid and Ask price scales is more than
999, the quantity will be indicated rounded or abbreviated.
Examples
To enable/disable Always Show Entire Number feature, right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for Buy,
Price & Sell columns and control elements to see the shortcut menu, then check/uncheck Always Show Entire
Number feature.
How to Change Font Size
Font settings can be easily customized in select font… menu. Right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for
Buy, Price & Sell columns and control elements to see the shortcut menu and click Select Font…
Default Order Colors
How to Customize DOM Colors
Right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for Buy, Price & Sell columns and control elements to see the
shortcut menu and select Format Colors…, then click on the color to customize it.
Select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to choose custom colors.
240
Manual Trading and Automated Trading on the
Same Instrument at the Same Time
Strategy trading on a chart has nothing in common with manual trading on the same instrument even if the same
chart is used. Auto Trading Engine doesn't have access to information of what manual orders are placed, it works
only with the strategy on chart. The following information should help customers who place orders manually
when auto trading is turned on to synchronize their actions with strategy calculation and correct chart or broker
positions.
Example: Market position at broker = 0. Market position on chart = 0. If your strategy on chart generates 1 contract
long entry and it is executed, then the strategy assumes that the position has changed to +1. If 1 contract short
market order is placed manually by a customer, then chart doesn't know about it. So the strategiy continue trading
individually on the charts, assuming that the chart position is still +1 long. However, since the instrument at broker
is the same, the market position at broker on the instrument is the net position of the orders sent from both charts.
In this example the position will be flat after 1 generated by the script order and 1 manual order.
Among prebuilt standard signals in MultiCharts there are 2 scripts that were introduced specifically for comparing
market positions at broker and on chart to synchronize one of them with the other if they differ. Essentially there
are 2 possible expected scenarios when market positions can get out of synch (only SA mode of autotrading is
considered):
1.
Placing manual orders when a strategy is auto trading (the same broker, account, instrument)
2.
Auto trading from one chart window when a strategy is auto trading on a different chart (the same broker,
account, instrument)
Note: If AA mode of auto trading is used, one should not expect matching of chart position and broker position in
any case.
Depending on the direction of synchronization you need to use one or the other synchronizer script:
! From Broker To Strategy MP Synchronizer !
The strategy checks the market position at broker and then checks chart market position. If the positions are
different, then the signal generates an emulated order with the number of contracts and average entry price as on
broker end to match the broker position. The order is not sent to broker, so it affects only market position on chart
for the strategy. It is displayed on the chart, but it is not shown in Order and Position Tracker window.
! From Strategy To Broker MP Synchronizer !
The strategy checks the market position at broker and then checks chart market position. If the positions are
different, then the signal generates a market order with the number of contracts to match the chart position. The
order is sent to broker, but the strategy itself is not aware of market position change, so it affects only broker
position.
Note: !From Strategy To Broker MP Synchronizer! sends real orders to broker so you need to be careful when
using it with a Live account.
241
Place Order Option
Place Order Menu
There are several ways an order can be placed manually:
•
On Trade Bar
•
In Depth of market (DOM)
•
From Chart Trading Panel
There is one more way to place an order:
1.
Make a right-click on chart and the select the first option Place Order.
2.
In the dropdown list there are several options for entries and exits:
Note: There are 2 requirements for the Place Order option to appear when you make a right-click on the chart:
1.
A connected Broker Profile
2.
Correctly set up Symbol Mapping
If you don't see the Place Order option, then one of the requirements is not fulfilled.
Entry Orders
•
Place a Buy/Sell Limit order for a specified number of contracts at the clicked price level
•
Place a Buy/Sell Stop order for a specified number of contracts at the clicked price level
•
Place a Buy/Sell Stop Limit order for a specified number of contracts at the clicked price level
Exit Orders
•
Breakout Strategy
•
Fade Strategy
•
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy
•
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy
Note: The number of contracts should be specified in the Setting Order Quantity field on Chart Trading Panel. Setting
the number of contracts in Trade Bar will not affect Place Order option.
Bracket
Bracket Exit Strategy orders on the chart Bracket Exit
Bracket in MultiCharts is a One-Cancel-Other (OCO) order group,
with one limit order and one stop order. This exit strategy is a
one-click combo of the stop loss and profit target. If one of these
orders is filled, the other one will be cancelled by MultiCharts.
Targets placed separately from stop losses, provide more
Strategy orders in the DOM window
flexibility, but they also come with the responsibility of cancelling
orders no longer needed.
242
Appearance
Bracket Strategy is displayed as green and maroon markers on the chart connected to the order price label on the
price scale with a dotted line and as green and maroon markers in the DOM window.
For the chart window, Connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, Default Bracket Strategy order markers color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Note: When Bracket Strategy is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered yet, inactive orders are
indicated as semi-transparent.
Applying Bracket Exit Strategy
Apply Bracket Exit Strategy to an active order or open position by one of the following methods:
•
Drag-and-drop the Bracket icon
to an active order or open position on the chart; or:
•
Drag-and-drop the Bracket icon
to an active order or open position on the DOM window; or:
•
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Strategy and click Bracket.
•
Right-click on the active order or open position on the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
Exit Strategy and click Bracket.
•
Right-click on the Bracket icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply To
Open Position.
Bracket Parameters
To modify default Bracket Parameters:
1.
Right-click the Bracket icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit…
3.
Modify profit target and stop loss values in Profit Target and Stop Loss boxes.
Profit target and stop loss levels can be both set as price levels or offsets. Click the Price Level button or the Offset
button to switch between entry modes.
Offset values can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Time In Force field (see Time in Force section) and Stop Loss type buttons.
Stop Loss type buttons allow to choose the type of the Stop Loss order: Stop Market or Stop Limit with adjustable
Bracket offset.
To save custom parameters, click Save.
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Bracket Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Bracket icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check Auto Attach
to Orders; or:
•
Double-click the Bracket icon in the Exit Strategy menu; or:
243
•
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Bracket exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach
feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Bracket icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Bracket parameters.
3.
Click Save
4.
Choose the Bracket Template icon .
5.
Enter Bracket Template name.
6.
Click OK
Breakeven
Breakeven
Breakeven is a conservative exit strategy for exiting the market
without losing any money (counting your transaction costs). If a
long position is held, then the strategy will place a sell stop; and
vice versa, if a short position is held, then it will place a buy stop.
Define the profit needed to trigger this order, and once it
triggers it will become active. If the price is reached, then the
order will be executed.
Appearance
Breakeven Exit Strategy is displayed as yellow marker on the chart
connected to the order price label on the price scale with a dotted
line and as yellow marker in the DOM window.
For the chart window, connecting line length can be modified in
Format Chart Trading menu.
244
For the DOM window, default Breakeven Exit Strategy order marker color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Note: When Breakeven Strategy is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered yet, inactive orders are
indicated as semi-transparent.
Applying Breakeven Exit Strategy
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakeven icon
to an active order or open position on the chart; or:
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakeven icon
to an active order or open position in the DOM window; or:
•
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Strategy and click Breakeven.
•
Right-click on the active order or open position in the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
Exit Strategy and click Breakeven.
•
Right-click on the Breakeven icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply
To Open Position.
Breakeven Strategy Parameters
To modify default Breakeven Parameters:
1.
Right-click the Breakeven icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit…
3.
Modify activate at profit and transaction costs values in Activate at Profit and Transaction Costs boxes.
Activate at Profit level defines the profit level needed to trigger breakeven. It may be set in ticks or percent.
Transaction costs level defines the level of the breakeven order taking into account the transaction
costs/commission that should be paid in order to exit the market without losing any money. Transaction Costs
level can be set in ticks or percent.
To change level indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More parameters >> to show Time In Force box (see Time in Force section) and Stop Loss type buttons.
Stop Loss type buttons allow to choose the type of the Stop Loss order: Stop Market or Stop Limit with adjustable
offset.
To save custom parameters, click Save.
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Breakeven Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Breakeven icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check Auto
Attach to Orders; or:
•
Double-click the Breakeven icon
in the Exit Strategy menu; or:
•
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Breakeven exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Breakeven icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Breakeven Parameters.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Choose the Breakeven Template icon .
5.
Enter Breakeven Template name.
6.
Click OK.
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy
This strategy is a combination of the breakout and fade strategies
defined above, and it is used when the trader expects the price will go
down. This strategy will place a sell stop order below current price and
sell limit above current price. The breakout can be activated if it
happens, but also catch the fade if the price rises.
Breakout Strategy on the chart
Appearance
Breakout down/fade strategy orders are displayed as dark cyan
markers on the chart connected to the order price labels on the price
scale with a dotted line and as dark cyan markers in the DOM window.
For the chart window, default Breakout down /fade strategy order
Breakout Strategy in the DOM window
markers color and connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart
Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Breakout down /fade strategy order markers color can be modified in Format Colors
menu.
Creating Breakout Down/Fade Strategy orders
Create Breakout down /fade strategy orders by one of the following methods:
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakout Down/Fade Strategy icon
to the chart; or:
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakout Down/Fade Strategy icon
to the DOM window; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy; or:
246
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Place Strategy and then click Breakout Down/Fade Strategy; or:
•
Right-click the Breakout Down/Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut
menu and click Apply Strategy.
•
Double-click the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu.
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy Parameters
To modify default Breakout Down/Fade strategy parameters:
1.
Right-click the Breakout Down/Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify Breakdown and Upper limit levels in Upper Limit At and Breakdown At boxes.
Breakdown and Upper limit levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Breakout Down/Fade strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu,
then click Save as Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Breakout Down/Fade parameters.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Choose the Breakout Down/Fade Template icon.
5.
Enter Fade template name.
6.
Click OK.
247
Breakout
A breakout is usually defined as a sudden and significant price
movement through the support and resistance levels, usually followed
by large trading volume and increased volatility. A breakout trader will
buy if the price goes up through the resistance level and sell if the price
goes down through the support level, assuming that the motion will
continue.
Breakout Strategy on the chart
The Breakout Strategy will place two stop orders at the prices
( distance) specified, in order to catch the breakout when it happens. A
buy stop order will be placed above the current price and a sell stop
order below the current price.
Appearance
Breakout Strategy in the DOM window
Breakout Strategy orders are displayed as medium purple markers on
the chart connected to the order price labels on the price scale with a dotted line and as medium purple markers in
the DOM window.
For the chart window, default Breakout Strategy order marker color and connecting line length can be modified in
Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Breakout Strategy order marker color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Breakout Strategy
Creating Breakout Strategy orders
Create Breakout Strategy orders by one of the following methods:
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakout Strategy icon
to the chart; or:
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakout Strategy icon
to the DOM window; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Breakout Strategy; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Place Strategy and then click Breakout Strategy; or:
•
Right-click the Breakout Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click
Apply Strategy.
•
Double-click the Breakout Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu.
Breakout Strategy Parameters
To modify default Breakout Strategy parameters:
1.
Right-click the Breakout Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify breakout and breakdown values in Breakout At and Breakdown At boxes.
248
Breakout/Breakdown levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either Breakout/Breakdown level
or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated in ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Breakout Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save
as Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Breakout parameters.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
Choose the Breakout Template icon
Enter Breakout template name.
6.
Click OK.
.
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy
Breakout UP/Fade Strategy
This strategy is a combination of the breakout and fade strategies
defined above, and it is used when the trader expects the price will go
up. This strategy will place a buy stop above the current price and a
buy limit order below the current price. The breakout can be activated
if it happens, but also catch the fade if the price falls.
Breakout Strategy on the chart
Appearance
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy orders are displayed as sienna markers on
the chart connected to the order price labels on the price scale with a
dotted line and as sienna markers in the DOM window. For the chart
window, default Breakout up/fade strategy order
Breakout Strategy on the chart markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format Chart Trading
menu.
For the DOM window, default Breakout up/fade strategy order markers color can be modified in Format Colors
menu.
249
Creating Breakout Up/Fade Strategy orders
To create Breakout up/fade strategy orders:
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy icon
to the chart; or:
•
Drag-and-drop the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy icon
to the DOM window; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Place Strategy and then click Breakout Up/Fade Strategy; or:
•
Right-click the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu
and click Apply Strategy.
•
Double-click the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu.
Breakout up/fade Strategy Parameters
To modify default Breakout up/fade strategy parameters:
1.
Right-click the Breakout Up/Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify Breakout and Lower limit values in Breakout At and Lower Limit At boxes.
Breakout and lower limit levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Breakout Up/Fade strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then
click Save as Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Breakout Up/Fade parameters.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Choose the Breakout Up/Fade Template icon.
5.
Enter Fade template name.
6.
Click OK.
250
Fade Strategy
Fading is usually defined as trading against the trend, a ‘mirror-image’
of the breakout. If the market goes up, fading traders will sell, hoping
that the price will go down. Similarly, fading traders will buy if the price
goes down.
The Fade Strategy will place two limit orders at the prices (distance)
specified, so fading can start when the price moves. A buy limit order
will be placed below the current price and a sell limit order above the
current price.
Appearance
Fade Strategy orders are displayed as olive drab markers on the chart connected to the order price labels on
the price scale with a dotted line Fade Strategy in the DOM window and as olive drab markers in the DOM window.
For the chart window, default Fade Strategy order marker color and connecting line length can be modified in
Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Fade Strategy order marker color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Creating Fade Strategy orders
Create Fade strategy orders by one of the following methods:
•
Drag-and-drop the Fade Strategy icon
to the chart; or:
•
Drag-and-drop the Fade Strategy icon
to the DOM window; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Fade Strategy; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Place Strategy and then click Fade Strategy; or:
•
Right-click the Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
Strategy.
•
Double-click the Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu.
Fade Strategy Parameters
To modify default Fade strategy parameters:
251
1.
Right-click the Fade Strategy icon
2.
Click Edit.
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu.
3.
Modify upper and lower limits values in Upper Limit At and Lower Limit At boxes.
Upper and lower limits levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Fade Strategy icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Fade parameters.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Choose the Fade Template icon.
5.
Enter Fade template name.
6.
Click OK
Limit Order
A Limit Order will buy or sell a set number of shares at a specified
price or better.
Appearance
Limit Orders on the chart
Limit Order is displayed as lime marker on the chart connected to the
order price label on the price scale with a dotted line and as lime
marker in the DOM window .
For the chart window, default Limit Order marker color and
connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Limit Order marker color can be
Limit Orders in the DOM window
modified in Format Colors menu.
Creating Limit Order
Create Limit Order by one of the following methods:
•
Drag-and-drop the Limit Order icon
to the chart; or:
252
•
Drag-and-drop the Limit Order icon
to the desired price level in Sell or Buy columns of the DOM
window; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Buy / Sell Limit…; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Buy / Sell Limit…; or:
•
Right-click the Limit Order icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
Strategy (Buy Limit order at Bid price will be created).
•
Double-click the Limit Order icon
in the Place Order menu (Buy Limit order at Bid price will be created).
Limit Order Parameters
Order Size is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity).
Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force) When
placing Limit order the Place Order confirmation window appears.
Click Yes to create the order or Cancel to abort the operation.
Check the Do not ask me again check box to disable Place Order confirmation window.
Note: When Require Order confirmation option is disabled no confirmation window will appear.
Master Strategy
The Master Exit Strategy is a multi-level strategy where all components interact closely
with one another. Multiple bracket levels, trailing stops, breakevens, and all levels may
be set so they are constantly synced with one another. It’s an essential tool for scalingin and scaling-out of positions and for pyramiding positions.
Appearance
The appearance of the Master Strategy in the DOM window and on the chart depens
on the selected type of orders to be used in it. Master Strategy can include visual
markers of the Bracket, Breakeven and Trailing Stop strategies.
For the chart window, connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading
menu.
For the DOM window, default Breakeven Exit Strategy order marker color can be
modified in Format Colors menu.
253
Note: When Master Strategy is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered
yet, inactive orders are indicated as semi-transparent.
Applying Master Strategy
•
Drag-and-drop the Master Strategy icon
•
Drag-and-drop the Master Strategy icon
or:
•
to an active order or open position on the chart; or:
to an active order or open position on the DOM window;
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Strategy and click Master Strategy.
•
Right-click on the active order or open position in the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
Exit Strategy and click Master Strategy.
•
Right-click on the Master Strategy icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check
Apply To Open Position.
Master Strategy Parameters
To modify default Master Strategy Parameters:
1.
Right-click the Master Strategy icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit…
3.
Set the desirable Number of Levels in the Number of Levels box. Master strategy allows using up to 4 levels.
4.
Modify profit target and stop loss values for each level in Profit Target and Stop Loss boxes.
Click the Price Level button or the Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Offset values can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
For each master strategy level the strategy type can be selected:
Master Strategy
•
Check Breakeven check box (see Breakeven Strategy) to apply this strategy type to a particular level.
•
Check Trailing Stop check box (see Trailing Stop Strategy) to apply this strategy type to a particular level. • If
both these types are unchecked, the Master Strategy level will work as a Bracket Strategy (see Bracket Strategy).
Contracts quantity can be set in percents of total contracts or directly in numbers of contracts. To change
quantity type, click on the Qty button.
Click More parameters >> to show Time In Force box (see Time in Force section) and Stop Loss type buttons.
Stop Loss type buttons allow to choose the type of the Stop Loss order: Stop Market or Stop Limit with adjustable
offset.
To save custom parameters, click Save.
254
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Master Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Master Strategy icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check Auto
Attach to Orders; or:
•
Double-click the Master Strategy icon
in the Exit Strategy menu; or:
•
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Master Strategy exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Master Strategy icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save
as Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Master Strategy Parameters.
3.
Click 'Save.
4.
Choose Master Strategy Template icon.
5.
Enter Master Strategy Template name.
6.
Click OK.
Profit Target
A profit target is a limit order placed ahead of time to define how much profit must be attained before the position
is closed and the profit is realized (i.e. contracts either bought or sold to reduce or close the position).
Appearance
Profit Target Strategy is displayed as green marker on the chart connected to the order price label on the price scale
with a dotted line and as green marker in the DOM window.
For the chart window, Connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Profit Target order marker color can be modified
in Format Colors menu.
255
Note: When Profit Target is auto attached to an order and has not been
triggered yet, inactive orders are indicated as semi-transparent.
Applying Profit Target Exit Strategy
Apply Profit Target Exit Strategy to an active order or open position by one
of the following methods:
•
Drag-and-drop the Profit Target icon
open position on the chart; or:
to an active order or
•
Drag-and-drop the Profit Target icon to an active order or open position
on the DOM window; or:
•
Profit Target order on the chart
Profit Target order in the DOM window
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the
shortcut menu, select Attach Exit Strategy and click Profit Target.
•
Right-click on the active order or open position on the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
Exit Strategy and click Profit Target.
•
Right-click on the Profit Target icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply
To Open Position.
Profit Target Parameters
To modify default Profit Target Parameters:
1.
Right-click the Profit Target icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit…
3.
Modify amount of profit in the Amount of Profit box.
Amount of Profit can be set as a fixed price or an offset indicated as ticks or %.
•
To set the Profit Target at a fixed price level:
1.
Click the N/A button
2.
Enter the price for a Profit Target order;
•
Click the Save button to save the settings.
•
To set the amount of Profit at a fixed offset:
1.
Click the N/A button
to activate the offset input field (if it is unavailable);
2.
Click the Tick/Percent button
/
3.
Enter the offset value;
4.
Click the Save button to save the settings.
to activate the price input field (if it is unavailable);
to select the offset type;
Note: In real-time trading Profit target values are based on the average entry price provided by the broker
((execution price + commission) / position size). Some brokers may not include the commission. If the price does
not conform to the minimum price variation Profit Target value is rounded up.
Click More Parameters >> to show Time In Force field (for more info see Time in Force section).
To save custom parameters, click Save.
256
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Profit Target Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Profit Target icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, the Auto
Attach to Orders; or:
•
Double-click the Profit Target icon
in the Exit Strategy menu; or:
•
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Profit Target exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach
feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Profit Target icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Profit Target parameters.
3.
Click Save
4.
Choose the Profit Target Template icon .
5.
Enter Profit Target Template name.
6.
Click OK.
Stop Limit Order
Stop Limit Order combines the features of stop order with those of a limit
order. A stop-limit order will buy or sell a set number of shares at a specified
price (or better) after a given stop price has been reached. Once the stop
price is reached, the stop-limit order becomes a limit order to buy (or sell) at
Stop Limit Orders on the chart
the limit price or better.
Appearance
For the chart window, default Stop Limit Order marker color and connecting
line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
Stop Limit Orders in the DOM window
For the DOM window, default Stop Limit Order marker color can be modified
in Format Colors menu.
257
Creating Stop Limit Order
Create Stop Limit order by one of the following methods:
•
Drag-and-drop the Stop Limit Order icon
to the chart; or:
•
Drag-and-drop the Stop Limit order icon
to the DOM window; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Buy / Sell Stop Limit…; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Buy / Sell Stop Limit…; or:
•
Right-click the Stop Limit order icon
in Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
Strategy ( Buy Stop Limit order at Ask price will be created ).
•
Double-click the Stop Limit Order icon
in the Place Order menu (Buy Stop Limit order at Ask price will
be created).
Note: Chart is context-sensitive and allows creating Buy or Sell orders depending on the price level at which you click
on the chart. If you right-click above current price level, Buy Stop Limit option will be available in the shortcut menu.
If you right-click below current price level, Sell Stop Limit option will be available in the shortcut menu. Right-clicking
on the current price level makes both Buy Stop Limit and Sell Stop Limit options available.
Stop Limit Order
Stop Limit Order Parameters
Order Size is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity).
Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force)
When placing Stop Limit order the Place Order confirmation window appears allowing to modify Limit price.
Click Yes to create the order or Cancel to abort the operation.
Check the Do not ask me again check box to disable Place Order confirmation window
Note: When Require Order confirmation option is disabled no confirmation window will appear and Limit Price will
be based on Stop Limit Offset set in Format Chart Trading menu. Stop Limit offset value is set to 1 tick by default.
Modification of Stop Limit Order offset
To modify Stop Limit offset on the chart:
1.
Open Format Chart Trading window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu and then click Format Chart Trading; or:
•
Right-click on the Chart Trading panel to see the shortcut menu, and then click Format Chart Trading; or:
•
Select Format in the main menu and click Chart Trading….
2.
Select the Common Settings tab.
3.
Modify the offset in the Stop Limit Offset box.
258
4.
Click OK to save changes.
To modify Stop Limit offset in the DOM window:
1.
Open Format Chart Trading window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for Buy, Price & Sell columns and control elements to see
the shortcut menu and check Require Order Confirmation check box; or:
•
When Require Order Confirmation check box is checked, you may customize Stop Limit offset in confirmation
window when placing the Stop Limit Order on the chart.
2.
Customize the offset in the Stop Limit Offset box.
3.
Click OK to save changes.
Stop Loss
Stop order specifies a price at which to buy or sell. It is called a Stop Loss
because it is used to define how much loss is tolerable before a position will
be exited. When the specified price is reached the order becomes a market
Stop Loss Order on the chart
order, and the broker executes the order.
Appearance
Stop Loss Strategy is displayed as maroon marker on the chart connected to
the order price label on the price scale with a dotted line and as maroon
marker in the DOM window.
Stop Loss Order in the DOM window
For the chart window, Connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Stop Loss order marker color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Note: When Stop Loss is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered yet, inactive orders are indicated as
semi-transparent.
Applying Stop Loss Exit Strategy
Apply Stop Loss Exit Strategy to an active order or open position by one of the following methods:
1.
Drag-and-drop the Stop Loss icon
to an active order or open position on the chart; or:
2.
Drag-and-drop the Stop Loss icon
to an active order or open position on the DOM window; or:
3.
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Strategy and click Stop Loss; or:
4.
Right-click on the active order or open position in the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
Exit Strategy and click Stop Loss; or
5.
Right-click on the Stop Loss icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply To
Open Position.
259
Stop Loss Parameters
To modify default Stop Loss Parameters:
1.
Right-click the Stop Loss icon
in Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit…
3.
Modify amount of loss in the Amount of Loss box.
Amount of Loss can be set as a fixed price or an offset indicated as ticks or %.
•
To set the Stop Loss at a fixed price level:
1.
Click the N/A button
2.
Enter the price for a Stop Loss order;
•
Click the Save button to save the settings.
•
To set the amount of Stop Loss at a fixed offset:
to activate the price input field (if it is unavailable);
Stop Loss
1.
Click the N/A button
to activate the offset input field (if it is unavailable);
2.
Click the Tick/Percent button
/
3.
Enter the offset value;
4.
Click the Save button to save the settings.
to select the offset type;
Note: In real-time trading Stop loss values are based on the average entry price provided by the broker ((execution
price + commission) / position size). Some brokers may not include the commission. If the price does not conform
to the minimum price variation Stop loss value is rounded down.
Click More Parameters >> to show Time In Force field (for more info see Time in Force section).
Stop Loss Type buttons allow choosing the type of the Stop Loss order: Stop Market or Stop Limit with adjustable
offset.
To save custom parameters, click Save.
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Stop Loss Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Stop Loss icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check Auto
Attach to Orders; or:
•
Double-click the Stop Loss icon
in the Exit Strategy menu; or:
•
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Stop Loss exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach
feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
260
Saving as Template
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Stop Loss icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
•
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Stop Loss parameters.
3.
Click Save
4.
Choose the Stop Loss Template icon .
5.
Enter Stop Loss Template name.
6.
Click OK
Stop Order
Stop Order
A Stop Order will buy or sell a security when its price surpasses a particular
level defined by the trader, thus ensuring a greater probability of achieving a
predetermined entry or exit price. Stop order becomes a market order when
the price reaches the predefined level.
Appearance
Stop Order is displayed as sienna marker on the chart connected to the order
Stop Orders on the chart
price label on the price scale with a dotted line and as sienna marker in the
DOM window.
For the chart window, default Stop Order marker color and connecting line
length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Stop Order marker color can be modified in
Format Colors menu.
Stop Orders in the DOM window
Creating a Stop Order
Create Stop Order by one of the following methods:
•
Drag-and-drop the Stop Order icon
to the chart; or:
261
•
Drag-and-drop the Stop Order icon
to the desired price level in Sell or Buy columns of the DOM
window; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level in Sell or Buy columns of the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, then
select Buy / Sell Stop …; or:
•
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Buy / Sell Stop…; or:
•
Right-click the Stop Order icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
Strategy (Buy Stop order at Ask price will be created).
•
Double-click the Stop Order icon
in the Place Order menu (Buy Stop order at Ask price will be created).
Note: Chart is context-sensitive and allows creating Buy or Sell orders depending on the price level at which you click
on the chart. If you right-click above current price level, Buy Stop option will be available in the shortcut menu. If
you right-click below current price level, Sell Stop option will be available in the shortcut menu. Right-clicking on the
current price level makes both Buy Stop and Sell Stop options available.
Stop Order Parameters
Order Size is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity).
Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force) When
placing Stop order the Place Order confirmation window appears.
Click Yes to create the order or Cancel to abort the operation.
Check the Do not ask me again check box to disable Place Order confirmation window.
Note: When Require Order confirmation option is disabled no confirmation window will appear.
Trailing Stop
A trailing stop is a ‘smart’ stop order that recognizes that losing only a
certain % of money is acceptable, and a hard price level isn’t always
appropriate. A trailing stop will effectively follow the current position’s
profit, and it will execute if the price goes in the opposite direction.
However, if the trailing stop is set too tight, in a volatile market a position
can be closed before it really is desirable.
Trailing Stop Exit Strategy on the chart
Trailing Stop Exit Strategy in the DOM window
262
Appearance
Trailing Stop Strategy is displayed as orange marker on the chart connected to the order price label on the price
scale with a dotted line and as orange marker in the DOM window.
For the chart window, connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Trailing Stop Exit Strategy order marker color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Note: When Trailing Stop is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered yet, inactive orders are indicated
as semi-transparent.
Applying Trailing Stop Exit Strategy
•
Drag-and-drop the Trailing Stop icon
to an active order or open position on the chart; or:
•
Drag-and-drop the Trailing Stop icon
to an active order or open position on the DOM window; or:
•
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Strategy and click Trailing Stop.
•
Right-click on the active order or open position on the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
Exit Strategy and click Trailing Stop.
•
Right-click on the Trailing Stop icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply
To Open Position.Trailing Stop
Trailing Stop Exit Strategy Parameters
To modify default Trailing Stop Parameters:
1.
Right-click the Trailing Stop Strategy icon
in Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Edit…
3.
Set the desirable Number of Levels and amounts of profit and stop loss in the Number of Level box.
4.
Modify amounts of profit and stop loss values for each level in Amount of Profit and Stop Loss boxes.
Trailing Stop Strategy may contain up to 5 levels.
Amount of Profit and Stop Loss offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the
Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Time In Force box (see Time in Force section) and Stop Loss type buttons.
To save custom parameters, click Save.
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Trailing Stop Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Trailing Stop icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check
Auto Attach to Orders; or:
•
Double-click the Trailing Stop icon
•
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
in the Exit Strategy menu; or:
263
Note: When Trailing Stop exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Open Strategy Parameters window by one of the following methods:
•
Right-click the Trailing Stop icon
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
•
Click the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
Modify default Trailing Stop Parameters.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Choose the Trailing Stop template icon.
5.
Enter Trailing Stop Template name.
6.
Click OK.
264
Trade Bar
Trade Bar allows navigating between the brokers and trading with a few clicks. It contains a series of tabs that shows
all the brokers for which you have created broker profiles, this allows you to click on the appropriate broker tab and
execute trades to that broker.
Trade Bar also shows you which broker connections are currently active by showing a green light next to broker
name and which ones are offline by showing a red light. It is a very convenient tool for placing orders without plotting
charts or using DOM windows.
The main advantage is that you can see all of the currently connected brokers and place orders through several
brokers at the same time. For example, you may have one broker for Forex and another one for futures, and place
orders on both without logging in or out.
How to Show/Hide Trade Bar
Trade Bar can be shown or hidden. Show/hideTrade Bar by one of the following methods:
•
Select View In the main menu and enable/disable Show Trade Bar feature; or:
•
Press Ctrl+Shift+T on the keyboard.
Alternatively you can click X on the Trade Bar to hide it.
Connecting / Disconnecting Broker Profile
To connect /disconnect the broker profile that you want to trade with, right-click the Broker Profile tab to see the
shortcut menu and then click Connect / Disconnect.
Note: Broker Connection indicator
on the Trade Bar shows Broker Profile connection status which is not the
same as Data Feed connection status. For more info see and
Selecting Account
Select the account number in the Account Selector box
Selecting Instrument
To select the instrument you want to trade with:
•
Type in the symbol name into the Instrument Selector field
•
Click on the Lookup button
and press Enter; or:
to select the necessary symbol from your database.
265
Note: To be able to trade the instrument from Trade Bar, you should add it to the Quote Manager (see Operating
Symbol List).
Setting Order Quantity
Set order quantity by one of the following methods:
•
Type in order quantity in Order Quantity box
•
Click the Trading Calculator button
on Trade Bar; or:
.
Calculator automatically increments the current trade size setting by one, e.g. if you had 1 in order quantity field,
calculator would automatically make it 2.
You can adjust the number of contracts by pressing +1, +2, +5 etc. buttons. Zero button resets the number of
contracts to zero.
Buttons on the left side of the calculator contain 6 last values.
You may set this number of contracts by pressing those buttons. To apply the modifications click OK, to cancel the
modifications click Cancel.
Price Level Selector
Price Level Selector
allows you to set the price of your order with just a few clicks. It also shows Bid
and Ask prices without opening charts or DOM windows.
By default Price Level Selector shows an average price of bid and ask.
Click on the arrow at the right of Price Level Selector to see the range of prices. Three colored prices are: pink price
at the top is ask, blue price at the bottom is bid, green price in the middle is an average price of bid and ask.
Scroll the list of prices up or down, using up and down arrows. To set the price for Limit, Stop or Stop-Limit order
just click the price that you need.
Setting Time in Force
To set time in force of the order, use the Time in Force box on the Trade Bar.
•
DAY – Good for one day
•
GTC – Good ‘Til Cancelled
•
GTD – Good To Date
•
IOC – Immediate or Cancel Order
266
One-click order placing
Market, stop, limit and stop limit orders can be sent directly from Trade Bar. Choose the order type in the Order
Type box
When the order type is chosen, place an order by pressing the Buy Mkt / LMT / STP / STL
Mkt / LMT / STP / STL
or the Sell
buttons on the Trade Bar.
Order Size is defined by Qty field, Time In Force is defined by the value set in the Time In Force field (see Setting
Order Quantity and Setting Time In Force).
If the market type of order is selected then the market price is chosen by default.
If the limit/stop/stop limit type of order is selected then limit/ stop/ stop limit price box comes up where you can
set stop and limit prices.
Select the price by one of the following methods:
•
Enter the price manually in the Limit/Stop/Stop Limit Price box; or:
•
Choose the price using the Price selector
Note: if you do not see the order on the chart/in DOM window and/or do not see any change in your current position
(in case of a market order), please check the Logs tab of Order and Order_and_Position_Tracker for error messages
( e.g. Order Breaks Limits ).
267
Strategy Trading
Auto Trading
Auto Trading Tab
Require Order Confirmation
It is possible to manually confirm or reject strategy order transmission to the order execution gateway. Order
Confirmation is set in the Auto Trading tab of the Strategy Properties window: Require Order Confirmation
To learn more, see Setting Up Auto Trading in MultiCharts
With Order Confirmation selected, each time that one or more orders are generated, a New Order dialog box
displaying the orders will appear in the center of the desktop. To confirm order transmission, click Transmit Orders,
and to prevent order transmission, click Ignore Orders.
•
When more than one order is displayed in the New Order dialog box, it is not possible to transmit one order
and ignore another; ether all of the orders are transmitted, or all of the orders are ignored.
•
If neither Transmit Orders or Ignore Orders is selected before a new Market order or set of Market orders is
generated, or before a new bar is started, the previous order or set of orders is ignored and not sent to the
execution gateway.
Note: Order transmission confirmation affects only the transmission of the strategy order to the execution gateway;
once the order has been transmitted, execution of the order by the broker is subject to market conditions.
Replace to Market Partially Filled Orders
If the option is turned on, the unfilled part of any partially filled price order remaining unfilled by the end of the
current bar will be converted into market order and will be sent on open of next bar.
Note: If conditions for order generation are met on the next bar, the unfilled part of the order will not be converted
into market one, it will be sent as original order but with number of remained unfilled contracts.
Show Order Execution Status
If the option is turned on, status of any order placed from this chart will be displayed in a pop-up alert message in
the right bottom corner of the screen.
Note: Since MultiCharts 7.0 all standard alerts are disabled by default. It means that the checkbox won't work until
the required flag in registry in on: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\TS
Support\MultiCharts\TraderServer\GlobalMessenger\ShowAlerts.
268
Optimize Order Flow
If One-Cancel-Others group is emulated in MultiCharts the situation when more than one order is filled is possible
One Cancels Other (OCO) orders are the price orders sent in a group. When any of OCO orders is filled or partially
filled, the system cancels or reduces size of other orders in this OCO-group.
Note: Reduce size functionality is supported by Interactive Brokers only: if one order in OCO group is partially filled,
others are reduced in size proportionally.
There are two types of OCO-groups in MultiCharts: Native and Simulated. Native OCO-group is used when the
broker’s API supports OCO-groups. In this case all OCO orders are sent to the broker directly and unfilled OCO orders
will be cancelled by the broker. (Native OCO-group is supported by Interactive Brokers, FXCM and IWBank).
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders will be sent to the broker, but once one of them is filled, other
orders from this OCO group will be cancelled by MultiCharts. In this case, when one of the OCO orders is filled,
MultiCharts will send a command to cancel or reduce size of the second OCO order to the broker.
In case of high market volatility there may be not enough time to cancel the order and therefore both orders may
be filled. Both orders also may be filled in the unlikely event of crash or connection loss.
Optimize Order Flow optimizes the process of sending orders to broker in order to avoid overfill.
Example 1: You are flat. Strategy generates 3 buy limit orders. Position limits are set to 2 entry orders in the same
direction as the currently held position. MultiCharts will send to broker only 2 orders with the prices more likely to
be filled depending on the current market price.
Example 2: The position at broker is +3. Strategy generates 3 sell limit orders and 3 sell stop orders. MultiCharts will
send to broker 3 OCO group in the following sequence:
MC sends 1 stop order and 1 limit order with the prices most likely to be filled.
When one of these 2 orders is filled, the other is cancelled.
MC sends 1 stop order and 1 limit order with the prices most likely to be filled (among the rest 2 stops and 2
limits).
When one of these 2 orders is filled, the other is cancelled.
MC sends the last 2 orders: 1 stop order and 1 limit order.
When one of these 2 orders is filled, the other is cancelled.
Example 3: You are flat. Strategy generates 2 sell market orders: order #1 and order #2. Position limits are set to 2
entry orders in the same direction as the currently held position. MultiCharts will send to broker 1 sell market order
with the size = size of the order #1 + size of the order#2
Cancel Market Orders as Obsolete If not Filled Within X Seconds
This option sets the timeout to cancel market orders not filled within specified time. If the option is not enabled any
market order will be cancelled in 40 seconds automatically
Audio Alert
If the feature is turned on, it triggers a sound alert when an order placed by a strategy from the chart is filled. Once
the box is checked, the File field becomes active and allows you to locate a sound file to play when an order is filled.
To select the file, click the "..." button. It is possible to specify if the sound file should be played once or repeated by
selecting one of these options below the File field. After the file is specified, one can try it by clicking the Test button.
Note: Only .wav file format is supported.
269
Unfilled Strategy Order Replacement
There 2 checkboxes in this sections. If they are checked:
1.
The first one converts unexecuted limit/stop only entry orders to market orders after X seconds.
2.
The second one converts unexecuted limit/stop only exit orders to market orders after X seconds.
Note: If one of the described boxes is checked, then an entry/exit order maybe converted into a market order almost
at once simply because price hit its level, but the order queue is too long and the order fails to be filled.
Recalculate on Broker Events
The option can be used to force the strategy to be recalculated after a certain event during live trading. One can
check the following events:
1.
When Market Position Changes.
2.
When an Order is Filled.
Note: Without enabled Intra-Bar Order Generation (IOG) the strategy will be recalculated, but it will place no new
orders intrabar because of this setting.
Note 2: If strategy generates both entry and exit orders at the same time when there is no market position opened,
only the entry order will be sent. When the market position is opened, the exit orders will be placed intrabar even
without enabled Intra-Bar Order Generation (IOG), no matter if this feature is used or not.
Get Real-Time Data from
This option affects special orders monitoring and defining the moment to convert price orders into market ones.
Note: Special trailing stop order (SetDollarTraling) will be calculated based on the distance from the entry price
order to the real-time price. The entry price is defined by the broker. In MC this price is the real price of order fill. It
doesn't depend on trading mode or the source of real time.
i_OpenEquity, OpenPositionProfit keywords are not affected by this option, they are always calculated from chart
prices.
Example: Autotrading mode is Async. (see Understanding Automated Trade Execution) , Get Real-Time from Chart
is selected, there is an executed entry and a trailing stop is sent. The trailing order price is calculated based on the
entry order fill price at the broker and the real-time price from the chart.
1.
From Broker: Asks and Bids are taken from the connected broker.
2.
From Chart: depends on the BackTesting Mode:
a)
If it is Classic Backtesting, then the data is taken from the data series 1;
b)
If it is Extended Backtesting (see Precise Backtesting) , then the data is taken from the Ask and Bid subseries.
Mode Selection
Automated execution from chart can be turned on in one of two available modes: synchronous and asynchronous:
•
In synchronous mode [SA] one can see the same open market position and active orders on the chart as at
broker. All orders generated by historical calculation during are wiped out from the chart when auto execution is
turned on. Executed order is displayed only if it has been executed at broker and the final status of the order has
been received by MultiCharts.To use synchronous mode for auto trading select Entries/Exits are based on the
execution confirmation by the broker (Sync)
Note: Chart market position and broker market position are in synch only if no more than one chart is auto
trading without any manual orders on a particular symbol connected a particular broker account, assuming that at
270
the moment the automation was turned the broker market position was flat or, if it was not flat at broker,
assigned manually on start of auto trading in MC to match it (see Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker
Settings). If more than 1 chart is auto trading in [SA] mode and/or manual trading is used as the same time on the
same symbol at broker, chart can easily get out of synch. To learn more, see Trading from Multiple Charts on One
Instrument.
•
In asynchronous mode [AA] the strategy on the chart starts auto trading based on the historically calculated
orders and open position, displaying all generated by the script orders on chart even if an order was not executed
at broker. In AA strategy on chart acts separately from broker.
To use asynchronous mode for auto trading select Entries/Exits are independent of the execution status at the
broker (Async)
Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker Settings
Whenever automated trading is turned on a srtrategy starts working with a particular market position. Depending
on the mode of auto trading the position can vary. In [SA] mode it is always flat on chart when you turn it on, but in
[ AA] mode it can be short, flat or long, depending on what was generated in backtesting (to learn more see Mode
Selection). This option allows you to control the initial market position for the strategy to start calculation and order
generation when you turn on automated trading.
Two options are available:
•
Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker Dialogue
By default it this variant is selected. If market position on the chart is not flat and automation is turned on, than
the Assign the Initial Market Position Dialogue window will pop up. There the direction of current market position,
number of open contracts, average entry price and maximum position profit amount can be put.
Note: The Show Always box should be checked to get the Assign the Initial Market Position Dialogue every time
the automation is enabled, no matter what is the strategy position by that moment. It is extremely important for
[SA] mode, because it is always flat when automation is turned on in [SA].
•
Do not Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker Dialogue When this variant is selected it
opens two sub variants:
•
Assume the Initial Market Position at the Broker is always FLAT when automation is enabled.Example:
Assume that according to your backtesting the current position is 1 contract long and your real broker position is 1
contract short. With this option you will have +1 on your chart, flat for auto trading engine within the software and
-1 short at broker, when the automation is turned on.
•
Assume the Initial Market Position at the Broker is the SAME AS on the CHART when automation is
enabled.
Select Broker Plug-in
Each chart has a Broker Plug-in selected for it by default when it is created. Broker Plug-ins are similar to Broker
Profiles. All information about broker plug-in configuration is stored in a corresponding Broker Profile.
Example: If the chart has data from Interactive Brokers, IB automated trading plug-in is selected by default for this
chart. Connection settings are the same as in the corresponding Broker Profile (except for Default Account settings
for FXCM Broker Profile).
If the instrument on the chart is provided by a data vendor that is not a broker, then the default plug-in for
automated trading will be the same as the first existing Broker Profile on the Trade Bar.
271
Example: If the first Broker Profile on the Trade Bar is Dukascopy and a new chart is created using eSignal data feed,
then Dukascopy will be selected by default as the broker plug-in for automated trading.
To change a Broker Plug-in for a particular chart, click the arrow in the Broker Plug-in field to get a dropdown list
and choose the required one.
Settings of the Plug-in can be adjusted and become different from the corresponding Broker Profile settings. Not all
the settings are the same, to learn more about particular Broker Plug-ins, see here Broker Plug-ins.
Distinguished Features of Auto Trading
Auto Trading Status Switch
The Auto Trading Status Switch is a button on the chart that lets the user turn on auto trading quickly. The button
will be labeled either SA or AA depending on whether the user selected synchronous auto trading or asynchronous
auto trading mode for the strategy.
By default, the location of this button is on the top left corner of the chart. However, it is possible to move it to a
different location by doing the following:
1.
Select Format from the main menu.
2.
Select Window.
3.
In the Format Window dialogue box, select the Status Line tab.
4.
In the list box, find Automate Order Execution Switch.
5.
it.
Click on Move Up or Move Down to change the order and the location. To remove it from the chart, deselect
Automatic Termination of Auto Trading
Auto Trading is stopped automatically if any of the following occurs:
•
Any changes are made to the symbol chart or charts, to which the strategy is applied: chart reload, adding,
removing, changing any of the symbols or their request parameters that result in the strategy's recalculation (not to
be confused with receiving historical data).
•
Any of the strategy signals are turned on or off
•
Any of the strategy signal inputs are changed
•
Any of the strategy signals are recompiled
•
Any signals are removed from or added to the strategy
•
Any strategy parameters are changed
•
Any Auto Trading parameters are changed
•
Connectivity between MultiCharts and the execution gateway has been lost and the disconnection time
exceeded the specified acceptable level.
Pending Order Cancellation upon Termination of Auto Trading
If any orders are pending when Auto Trading is terminated, an Auto Trading Warning – Do you want to cancel the
order? window appears.
A list of pending orders is displayed in the window.
To cancel some or all of the pending orders, select the check boxes to the left of the orders that are to be canceled,
and clear the check boxes to the left of the orders that are not to be canceled, and click Cancel Order(s) .
To not cancel any of the pending orders, click Do Not Cancel Order(s) .
272
Closing of Open Positions upon Termination of Auto Trading
If any positions are open when Auto Trading is terminated, an Auto Trading Warning – Do you want to close
position? window appears. A list of open positions is displayed in the window.
To close open positions, click Close Position.
To leave the positions open, click Do Not Close Position.
Auto Trading the Same Symbol from Multiple Charts
If the same symbol is traded from multiple charts, market position for each chart is tracked separately. For detailed
review of such situation, please read Trading from Multiple Charts on One Instrument.
Tracking Market Position from the Broker During Auto Trading
In auto trading, there can be a de-synchronization between the market position of the strategy and the actual filled
position from the broker. The de-synchronization is usually caused by orders that are submitted but not filled. In
such cases, the user may want to have the strategy adjust calculations based on the actual filled position instead of
adjusting the calculations manually.
PowerLanguage keywords are available to track the actual filled positions during auto trading. The user can use
these keywords to enable hands free trading.
The following keywords are available:
i_MarketPosition_at_Broker
i_MarketPosition_at_Broker_for_The_Strategy
MarketPosition_at_Broker
MarketPosition_at_Broker_for_The_Strategy
273
Auto Trading Status Messages
In automated trading, informational messages and order execution status messages are displayed in a pop-up
window in the lower right-hand corner of the screen.
These messages can be generated by either MultiCharts or the execution gateway.
Order Execution messages only can be disabled in the Auto Trading tab of the Strategy Properties window.
Status Messages are displayed on following events:
•
Connection to order execution gateway has been established
•
Connection attempt to order execution gateway has not been successful
Note: If you get this message, please make sure that you have enabled API connections in your order execution
gateway. Please refer to your gateway's documentation.
• Connection to order execution gateway has been lost
Note: Once the connection to order execution gateway is restored, the Connection to order execution
gateway has been established message will be displayed.
• An order has been Filled
• An order has been Rejected
274
Note: An order can be rejected if the symbol was not set up correctly in QuoteManager. If this message appears,
please verify that the Price Scale, Min Movement, and Big Point Value settings for the symbol are AutoTrading Status
Messages
correct in QuoteManager. To learn more, see Setting Properties
• An order has been Canceled
• Automated Order Execution has been turned off
Note: Please see Automatic Termination of Auto Trading for an explanation of when auto trading is
automatically turned off.
•
MultiCharts is disconnecting from the execution gateway
Note: This message is displayed when the last auto trading enabled chart is closed.
Getting Started with Auto Trading
Setting Up AutoTrading in MultiCharts
1.
Determine the symbol to plot on a chart. In QuoteManager, verify that that the Price Scale, Min Movement,
and Big Point Value settings for the symbol are correct. MultiCharts will have the correct settings for most of the
symbols, but it is not possible to cover every symbol. If these settings are not correct, then the chart will not plot
properly and orders may be rejected by the execution gateway. To learn more, see Setting Properties.
2.
Create a chart of the necessary symbol. To learn more, see Creating Charts.
3.
Add the necessary signals to the chart. To learn more, see Using Studies.
4.
Set signal and strategy properties. To learn more, see Signal Settings and Strategy Properties.
5.
Open the Strategy Properties window.
To open the Strategy Properties window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
275
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click Properties to open the Strategy Properties window.
6.
Select the Auto Trading tab.
7.
Select the Require order confirmation check box to have the opportunity to confirm or reject each order before
it is sent to the execution gateway.
8.
Select Replace to Market Partially Filled Orders check box to automatically convert the remaining portion of a
partially filled limit order into a market order. For example, there is a sell limit order above the market price for 10
contracts. The trading price touches the sell limit price, but pulls back. Six of the contracts are filled and the remaining
four contracts are unfilled. MultiCharts will convert the sell limit order for the remaining contracts to a sell market
order at the close of the bar. (e.g., If the chart is plotting 5 minute bars, then the remaining portion of the limit order
will be converted to a market order at the close of the 5 minute bar.)
Note: As long as there is a partially filled order, MultiCharts will always convert the order as described in this step
regardless of any settings that are in Unfilled Strategy Order Replacement. If the order was not partially filled and
Unfilled Strategy Order Replacement was turned on, then MultiCharts will convert the order according to the
settings in Unfilled Strategy Order Replacement.
9.
Select the Show order execution status check box to have a status message displayed every time an order is
sent, canceled, filled, or rejected, or any other informational message is received from the gateway application.
10. Select the Audio Alert check box and choose a sound file to activate an audio alert every time a notification
window appears.
Selecting an Alert Sound File:
1.
Enter the path and name of the wave (.wav) sound file to be used into the File text box, or click the ... http://
www. multicharts. com/ img/ wiki/ portfolio/ ellipse. gif button on the right side of the text box for Open dialog box,
navigate to and select a sound file, and click the Open button.
2.
Click the Test button to test the alert.
3.
Select Play Once or Repeat for the alerts to be played once or repeatedly, respectively.
In the Mode Selection section, there are two options: synchronous and asynchronous mode.
1.
Select Entries/Exits are based on the execution confirmation by the broker (Sync) option for synchronous
auto trading mode (SA).
2.
Select Entries/Exits are independent of the execution confirmation by the broker (Async) option in the
Mode Selection section for Asynchronous auto trading mode (AA). If AA is selected, two group boxes become
available.
Unfilled Strategy Order Replacement
This feature gives the strategy the ability to automatically convert limit orders or stop orders into market orders
after a certain period of time.
276
•
Select Convert unexecuted limit or stop entry orders to market orders check box to convert unexecuted
limit or stop entry orders to market after a specified number of seconds. Enter the number of seconds in the list
box.
•
Select Convert unexecuted limit or stop exit orders to market orders check box to convert unexecuted limit
or stop exit orders to market after a specified number of seconds. Enter the number of seconds in the list box.
Note: The waiting period for converting unfilled limit or stop orders to market orders must be less than the
duration of a single bar.
Note: As long as the order is completely unfilled, MultiCharts will always convert the order as described in this step
regardless of any settings under Replace to Market Partially Filled Orders. If there is a partially filled order and
Replace to Market Partially Filled Orders was turned on, then MultiCharts will convert the order according to the
settings in Replace to Market Partially Filled Orders.
Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker Settings
To learn more, see Synchronization of Market Position in Auto Trading Mode.
•
Select Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker radio button to display a dialog box to input
the initial position and average entry price. This dialog box will appear when auto trading is turned on in the chart
(see last step).
•
Select Do not show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker radio button to set the initial
position here instead of in the dialog box. There are two choices:
•
Select Assume the initial market position at the broker FLAT to set the initial position to 0.
•
Select Assume the initial market position at the broker the SAME AS on the CHART to set the initial position
to the position that's on the chart.
Note: Synchronization of the Market Position in the Auto Trading Mode may not work correctly if pyramiding was
used in the strategy. It may also not work correctly if more than one active entry was generated on a chart when
auto trading is launched. The reason for this limitation is that dialog window is set up to define only one active entry.
12. Choose the broker/gateway from the list box in the Select Broker Plug-in section.
13. Click Settings.
14. Input the settings for the appropriate broker/gateway.
1.
Turn on auto trading. There are two ways to do this.
•
Turning on auto trading on the chart
•
SA Mode
1.
Select the Auto Trading Status Switch and select Automate Order Execution.
2.
Read the disclaimer and click Yes.
3.
The button will turn green which means auto trading is on.
•
AA Mode
1.
Select the Auto Trading Status Switch and select Automate Order Execution.
2.
Read the disclaimer and click Yes.
3.
If Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker dialogue was selected earlier, then a dialog box
will appear.
Enter the initial market position and average entry price. Then select Yes.
4.
The button will turn green which means auto trading is on.
•
Turning on auto trading from main menu
277
•
SA Mode
1.
Select Format from the main menu.
2.
Select Automate Order Execution.
3.
Click on the switch and select Automate Order Execution.
4.
Read the disclaimer and click Yes.
5.
The button will turn green which means auto trading is on.
•
AA Mode
1.
Select Format from the main menu.
2.
Select Automate Order Execution.
3.
Click on the switch and select Automate Order Execution.
4.
Read the disclaimer and click Yes.
5.
If Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker dialog was selected earlier, then the dialog box
will appear. Input the initial market position and average entry price. Then select Yes.
6.
The button will turn green which means auto trading is on.
2.
Turn off auto trading. There are two ways to do this.
•
Turning off auto trading from the chart
1.
Select the Auto Trading Status Switch and deselect Automate Order Execution.
2.
If there are orders pending, a dialog box will appear to ask if pending orders should be cancelled. Select Cancel
Orders or Do Not Cancel Orders to proceed.
3.
If there are open positions, a dialog box will appear to ask if open positions should be closed. Select Close
Positions or Do Not Close Positions to proceed.
4.
The Auto Trading Status Switch will turn gray which means auto trading is turned off.
•
Turning off auto trading from the main menu
1.
Select Format and deselect Automate Order Execution.
2.
If there are orders pending, a dialog box will appear to ask if pending orders should be cancelled. Select Cancel
Orders or Do Not Cancel Orders to proceed.
3.
If there are open positions, a dialog box will appear to ask if open positions should be closed. Select Close
Positions or Do Not Close Positions to proceed.
4.
The Auto Trading Status Switch will turn gray which means auto trading is turned off.
Note: If the workspace (or MultiCharts) was closed while auto trading mode was enabled on one or several charts,
a dialogue asking you if you want to enable auto trading on these charts on restart. Click Yes to enable auto trading
or No to open charts with auto trading disabled.
Trading on One Instrument From Multiple Charts
Since hedging is not supported in MultiCharts it is extremely important to understand all possible circumstances
clearly to find your own correct way for auto trading from multiple charts on the same instrument. Below one can
find useful information of how MultiCharts may behave in such situation.
General Understanding of the Situation
278
When a customer uses 2 or more separate charts and auto trade from these charts on the same instrument on the
same account of the same broker, then the strategies that are used on the charts are not connected in anyway (if
global variables are not used in their scripts to pass values between them). Even if MarketPosition_at_broker is used,
it simply can get the real position from broker, but the actual position on chart may differ in this case. The following
example can demonstrate a simple possible scenario of trading from 2 charts on the same instrument:
Example:
Market position at broker = 0. Market position on each chart = 0.
If your strategy on chart A generates a long entry, then the strategy on chart B doesn't know about it.
If the strategy on Chart B goes short, then chart A also doesn't know about it.
So the strategies continue trading individually on their charts, preserving their chart positions.
However, since the instrument at broker is the same, the market position at broker on the instrument is the net
position of the orders sent from both charts. In this example the position will be flat after 1 order from each chart.
If the chart A sends short entry order after this, which is reverse in fact, then the broker receives 2 contracts order
from MC at this moments: 1 contract is to close open +1 long position (chart A assumes that it is still open) that is in
fact an order to sell 1 contract; and another 1 contract is to open -1 short position.
If we take into consideration that the real broker position by that moment is 0, then it gets sell 1 contract and sell
another 1 contract, the actual position at broker for this instrument becomes -2.
The chart B still assumes that the position is -1 meanwhile. Similar scenario but in the opposite direction would have
taken place if the reverse order had been sent from chart B.
The main thing one should keep in mind trading from different chart windows by script on the same broker
instrument is that the real broker position in most cases does not match chart positions.
Strategy Synchronizers for Multiple Chart Windows and Manual Orders During
Enabled Auto Execution
Among prebuilt standard signals in MultiCharts there are 2 scripts that were introduced specifically for comparing
market positions at broker and on chart to synchronize one of them with the other if they differ. Essentially there
are 2 possible expected scenarios when market positions can get out of synch (only SA mode of autotrading is
considered):
1.
Placing manual orders when a strategy is auto trading (the same broker, account, instrument )
2.
Auto trading from one chart window when a strategy is auto trading on a different chart (the same broker,
account, instrument)
Note: If AA mode of auto trading is used, one should not expect matching of chart position and broker position in
any case.
Depending on the direction of synchronization, the strategy works in 2 different ways:
! From Broker To Strategy MP Synchronizer !
The strategy checks the market position at broker and then checks chart market position. If the positions are
different, then the signal generates an emulated order with the number of contracts and average entry price as on
broker end to match the broker position. The order is not sent to broker, so it affects only market position on chart
for the strategy. It is displayed on the chart, but it is not shown in Order and Position Tracker window.
279
! From Strategy To Broker MP Synchronizer !
The strategy checks the market position at broker and then checks chart market position. If the positions are
different, then the signal generates a market order with the number of contracts to match the chart position. The
order is sent to broker, but the strategy itself is not aware of market position change, so it affects only broker
position.
Note: !From Strategy To Broker MP Synchronizer! sends real orders to broker so you need to be careful when
using it with a Live account.
Understanding Automated Trade Execution
After developing a strategy, the next step is to have the strategy actually send the orders. MultiCharts automated
trading platform can automate the trading process and seamlessly integrate with the following order execution
gateways: FXCM, Interactive Brokers, Patsystems, Rithmic Trader, Trading Technologies, and Zen-Fire.
Implementing automated trade execution involves using a program that serves as the order execution gateway on
the computer and configuring the link between MultiCharts and the gateway program. Orders, generated by a
trading strategy in MultiCharts, are passed to the gateway program for execution. The gateway program is also often
used to provide the data feed for MultiCharts, although it is possible and sometimes advantageous to use a different
data source.
Automated trading has two primary benefits: convenience and speed. The trader can let his strategy trade
automatically without having to constantly monitor the strategy and enter the orders himself. Automated trading
can also send the orders much quicker. Certain strategies require orders to be sent as quickly as possible without
delay. With auto trading, the trader does not have to manually type the order into the gateway. The trades are
submitted automatically and the chances of delay are reduced.
In addition to the obvious advantages of convenience, automated trading makes possible the execution of highfrequency trading strategies such as arbitrage, where the acceptable response time for placing orders is too quick
for manual order entries.
Both, Synchronous and Asynchronous auto trading modes are deployed in MultiCharts. These two modes are
profoundly different. Select the mode that better suits the strategy on the chart. Synchronous mode makes it
possible to show a position on the chart that matches the actual filled position. However there is no guarantee that
the order will get filled. When using the Asynchronous mode, every order generated on the chart is filled, although
the actual execution time and price can be different from the time and price shown on the chart.
Synchronous Mode for Auto Trading
The synchronous auto trading mode (SA) is a mode where entry/exit arrows are plotted on the chart only after
orders have been executed at the broker.
The synchronous auto trading mode ensures avoiding discrepancies between the market position on the chart and
the market position at the broker. The following conditions must be met in order for the synchronous auto trading
mode to work properly:
1.
The same symbol can be traded from more than one chart but it may cause a market position conflict between
the charts. For more information see Trading from Multiple Charts on One Instrument section.
280
2.
The market position at the broker must be 0 at the time when auto trading is launched.
3.
A trader must not trade the symbol directly through the broker's platform while trading the same symbol
through MultiCharts platform.
4.
At the moment of connection loss, the broker did not send notifications about complete order filling or
cancellation.
Understanding Automated Trade Execution
Asynchronous Mode for Auto Trading
The asynchronous auto trading mode (AA) is the mode where entry/exit arrows are plotted on the chart when the
price value meets the strategy conditions.
However, order execution by the broker is not guaranteed if the conversion of unexecuted limit/stop entry orders
is disabled. It may cause a market position conflict between the chart and the broker.
Enabling order conversion guarantees that an order will be filled at the broker, although the executed order price
value could be different from the order price plotted on the chart.
Comparison of Synchronous and Asynchronous Mode
Mode
Pro
Con
Synchronous
Only orders filled at the broker will be displayed on
the chart with the exact same price value as at the
broker.
Possibility of non‑execution of entry
orders at the broker such as Limit or
Stop as a result of not meeting
theoretical conditions set on the
chart.
Asynchronous
An ability to convert entry orders such as Limit or
Stop to Market orders if the defined price mark was
not met within indicated amount of time. Market
orders ensure that the order will be filled at the
broker and market position will stay the same on
the chart and the broker, but they don't guarantee
the price at which the order will be executed.
If order converting is disabled, then
orders that will be generated on the
chart may never be filled at the
broker. Thus, the actual position at
the broker may not be the same as
the position shown on the chart.
Strategy Properties
Strategy properties are separate from the individual signals' settings, affect all the signals applied to a chart, and
regulate the actions of a group of signals as a whole.
Strategy properties include Costs/Capitalization, Maximum bars back, Position limits, and Trade size sections.
Setting Costs/Capitalization
Cost/Capitalization section includes Commission, Slippage, and Initial Capital and Interest Rate settings.
Strategy properties are set from the Properties tab of the Strategy Properties window:
1.
Open the Strategy Properties window.
To open the Strategy Properties window:
281
1. Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the chart
and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click Properties to open the Strategy Properties window.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Costs/Capitalization section, in the Commission Rule list, select the Commission Rule;
•
Click Manage Rules... to change existing rules or add a new one. Click here to learn ho to operate Commission
Rules Manager.
4.
In the Slippage box, enter the slippage;
•
Click per Trade to select slippage per trade.
•
Click per Share/Contract to select slippage per share/contract
5.
In the Initial Capital box, enter the Initial Capital, and in the Interest Rate box, enter the interest rate to be
used in the performance ratio calculations.
Setting Maximum Bars Back
All signals based on past data use a certain number of bars for their calculations. The number of bars is called
Maximum number of bars a study will reference, or Maximum Bars Back.
Maximum Bars Back value is set from the Properties tab of the Strategy Properties window:
1.
Open the Strategy Properties window.
To open the Strategy Properties window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click Properties to open the Strategy Properties window.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Maximum Bars Back box enter the maximum number of bars the signals will reference.
Note: The Maximum Bars Back value should not exceed the actual number of bars plotted on the chart.
282
Setting Position Limits
Position limits section allows setting the maximum number same-direction entry orders and maximum number of
shares/contracts per position.
Strategy properties are set from the Properties tab of the Strategy Properties window:
1. Open the Strategy Properties window.
To open the Strategy Properties window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click Properties to open the Strategy Properties window.
2.
Select the Properties tab.
3.
In the Position limits section:
•
To allow multiple same-direction entry orders (known as pyramiding):
1. Check the Allow up to N entry orders in the same direction as the currently held position checkbox.
Strategy Properties
2.
Enter the maximum number of entries into the entry orders box.
3.
Select when the order is generated by a different entry order to limit entries to one per each entry order, or
select regardless of the entry that generated the order to allow multiple entries by the same entry order.
•
To prevent multiple same-direction entry orders, clear the Allow up to N entry orders in the same direction as
the currently held position checkbox.
4.
In the Maximum shares/contracts per position box, enter the maximum position limit.
Setting Trade Size
Trade size settings set the size of each trade, either by the number shares/contracts or by currency value.
Trade size settings select the number shares/contracts or the currency value per each trade.
Please note that these settings are ignored if trade size is specified by the signal.
Trade size settings are set from the Properties tab of the Strategy Properties window:
1. Open the Strategy Properties window.
To open the Strategy Properties window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
283
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click Properties to open the Strategy Properties window.
2. Select the Properties tab. 3. In the Trade size section:
•
Select Fixed Shares/Contracts to specify the trade size by number of shares or contracts, and enter the number
of shares or contracts into the box, or:
•
Select Dollars per Trade to specify the trade size by currency value of the transaction, and enter the currency
value in to the box.
To round the number of shares or contracts down to the nearest number of lots of certain size, enter the lot size in
the Round down to nearest shares/contracts box.
To specify a minimum number of shares/contracts (lot) to trade, enter the lot size in the Minimum number
shares/contracts box.
Note: if the amount entered in Dollars per Trade box is not sufficient to trade the minimum number of
shares/contracts, the trade will not be executed.
To use current strategy properties settings for all new charts of, check the Use as Default check box.
Commission Rules
Commission settings in Strategy properties are designed to make backtesting and real-time simulation more realistic.
They also affect strategy order prices calculation in auto trading (i.e. trailing stops, profit targets) as well as Stategy
and Trading Performance Reports. Flexible commission settings templates are based on major broker commissions
allowing to configure auto trading the way you each user needs.
Selecting Commission Rules
To access Commission Rules settings:
1.
Open the Strategy Properties window.
To open the Strategy Properties window:
1. Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the chart
and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click Properties to open the Strategy Properties window.
284
2. Select the Properties tab.
In the Costs/Capitalization section, in the Commission Rule list, select the Commission Rule.
The default rule is No Commission. Other prebuilt Commission Rules are:
•
0.01$ per Contract. Commission is set to $0.01 per contract regardless of the trade size.
•
0.01% per Contract. Commission is set to 0.01% of trade value regardless of the trade size.
•
1$ per Trade. Commission is set to $1 per trade regardless of the trade size.
•
Tiered per Month. Commission is set to 0.01% of trade value if trade size is less than 9999, 0.005% of trade
value if trade size is between 10000 and 99999, 0.0025% of trade value if trade size is equal or higher than 100000.
Every template parameter can be changed. In most cases default templates should be enough. However, if it is not
the case custom templates can be created.
Commission Rules Manager
Click Manage Rules to open Commission Rules Manager.
To create a new rule:
1. Click New Rule....
2. Enter the rule name in the Rule Name.
3. Select volume measurement unit from the Volume in list.
4. Select the accumulation period from the Reset Volume Counter list.
1. After every trade. Volume used for commission calculation is reset after every trade.
2. Monthly. Volume used for commission calculation is reset at the end of the calendar month.
5. Select calculation mode from the Calculate Commission list.

in real-time. Commission is calculated in real-time, after every filled contract inside one order. If your
order falls on two or more commission levels, commission will be calculated for each portion and
then added.
Example 1:
After every trade is selected in the Reset Volume Counter list.
Commission rules:
0-99 $0.05 per Contract
100-999 $0.03 per Contract
>=1000 $0.01 per Contract
The strategy buys 60 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 60 = $3
The strategy sells 150 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 99 + $0.03 * 51 = $6.48
The strategy buys 3000 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 99 + $0.03 *900 + $0.01 * $2001 = $51.96
Example 2:
285
Monthly is selected in the Reset Volume Counter list.
Commission rules:
0-99 $0.05 per Contract
100-999 $0.03 per Contract
>=1000 $0.01 per Contract
First day
The strategy buys 60 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 60 = $3
The strategy sells 150 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 39 + $0.03 * 111 = $5.28
The strategy buys 3000 contracts - commission = $0.03 *789 + $0.01 * 2211 = $45.78
First day ends: accumulated volume for the month = 60 + 150 + 3000 = 3210
Second day
The strategy sells 100 contracts - commission = $0.01 * 100 = $1
...
First day of the next month: accumulated volume for the month = 0
The strategy sells 50 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 50 = $2.5
The strategy sells 50 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 49 + $0.03 * 1 = $2.48

after every trade. Commission is calculated after the entire order is processed. If your order falls on
two or more commission levels, commission level corresponding to the entire order size will be
applied.
Example 3:
After every trade is selected in the Reset Volume Counter list.
Commission rules:
>0 $1 per Trade
>=100 $1.25 per Trade
>=1000 $1.5 per Trade
The strategy buys 60 contracts - commission = $1
The strategy sells 150 contracts - commission = $1.25
The strategy buys 3000 contracts - commission = $1.5
286
Example 4:
Monthly is selected in the Reset Volume Counter list.
Commission rules:
>0 $1 per Trade
>=100 $0.75 per Trade
>=1000 $0.5 per Trade
First day: accumulated volume for the month = 0
The strategy buys 10 contracts - accumulated voume = 10 - commission = $1
The strategy sells 20 contracts - accumulated voume = 30 - commission = $1
The strategy buys 100 contracts - accumulated voume = 130 - commission = $0.75
The strategy buys 100 contracts - accumulated voume = 230 - commission = $0.75
First day ends: accumulated volume for the month = 10 + 30 + 100= 230
Second day
The strategy sells 100 contracts - accumulated voume = 330 - commission = $0.75
...
First day of the next month: accumulated volume for the month = 0
The strategy sells 50 contracts - accumulated voume = 50 - commission = $1
The strategy sells 50 contracts - accumulated voume = 100 - commission = $0.75

once per day. Commission is calculated based on the number of contracts traded from the first
calendar day of the month till the end of the previous calendar day for all orders processed during
the current day.
Note: Once per day option is available only when Monthly accumulation period is selected in the
Calculate Commission list..
Example 5:
Commission rules:
>0 $1 per Trade
>=100 $0.75 per Trade
>=1000 $0.5 per Trade
First day: accumulated volume for the month = 0
The strategy buys 10 contracts - accumulated volume = 0 - commission = $1
287
The strategy sells 20 contracts - accumulated volume = 0 - commission = $1
The strategy buys 100 contracts - accumulated volume = 0 - commission = $1
The strategy buys 100 contracts - accumulated volume = 0 - commission = $1
First day ends: accumulated volume for the month = 10 + 20 + 100 + 100 = 230
Second day: accumulated volume for the previous period = 230
The strategy sells 100 contracts - accumulated volume = 230 - level 2 - commission = $0.75
...
First day of the next month: accumulated volume for the month = 0
The strategy sells 50 contracts - accumulated volume = 0 - level 1 - commission = $1
The strategy sells 50 contracts - accumulated volume = 0 - level 1 - commission = $1
Click Add... to add new Fixed Commission Rule
1.
Enter the volume value into the Volume field.
2.
Enter the commission value into the Commission Value field.
3.
Select commission measurement unit from the list:
- Cash per Contract;
- Cash per Trade;
- Percent of Trade Value;
- (FX) Basis Points of Trade Value;
- (FX) % % Basis Points of Trade Value.
4.
Check the Commission Limits check box to enable commission maximum and minimum values.
1.
Check the Min Value check box, setup the minimum commission value and select per
Contract / per Trade calculation mode.
2.
Check the Max Value check box, setup the maximum commission value and select per
Contract / per Trade calculation mode.
Example 6: Commission rule is set to $0.1 per contract. Min Value is set to $1 per trade and Max
Value is set to 5$ per trade. If the strategy sells 5 contracts, the commission will be $1. If the
strategy buys 100 contracts, the commission will be $5.
5.
Click OK to save the Fixed Commission Rule or Cancel to cancel the operation.
6.
To edit an existing Fixed Commission Rule select a rule with the mouse and click Edit...'.
7.
To delete a Fixed Commission Rule select a rule with the mouse and click Delete'.
8.
Click OK to save the rule or Cancel to cancel the operation.
Note: Trade means a filled order.
To modify an existing rule, select the rule by clicking it with the mouse and click Edit.
288
To clone an existing rule, select the rule by clicking it with the mouse click Clone....
To delete a rule, select the rule by clicking it with the mouse click Delete.
To save the changes and close Commission Rules Manager click OK
To exit Commission Rules Manager without saving any changes to the rules click Cancel.
Understanding Strategies
A strategy is a set of signals, applied to a chart.
Signals systematically specify market entry or exit points according to a set of trading rules implemented in the
signals' algorithms, and can be viewed as the basic building blocks of strategies.
While signals can be based on the same formulas as indicators, signal calculations are substantially more complex
and take in to account a far greater number of factors, such as trading costs, order generation priorities, and strategy
performance measurements, that affect market entry and exit conditions. Signal algorithms utilize price action
models and make use of backtesting concepts. Signal logic can make assumptions about price movement within bars
that allow appropriate market entry and exit points to be determined when intra-bar data is not available. Signals
compile strategy performance data and support backtesting and Automated Trade Execution.
Over 100 pre-built, customizable signals, covering the most popular trading concepts, are already included with the
platform, and additional signals can be imported from a variety of sources.
Signals can be fully customized, or entirely new signals created, using PowerLanguage® scripting in PowerLanguage
Editor. Strategies are constructed by simply applying a set of signals to a chart window, without the need to combine
signal code manually.
To learn about applying signals to a chart, see Using Studies
To learn about signal settings, see Signal Settings
Market entry or exit points, specified by the signals, can be used to send orders electronically directly to the broker,
fully automating the trading process.
To learn more, see Automated Trade Execution
Strategy Properties, separate from the individual signals' settings, regulate the actions of a group of signals as a
whole.
An essential part of developing a trading strategy is Strategy Backtesting. To learn more, see Backtesting
Strategy Alerts
Alert is a visual or/and audio notification triggered when the market conditions meet the criteria specified in the
signal. Audio and visual alerts can be enabled simultaneously.
Alerts can only be used with the signals containing Alert Triggering Conditions code. Most, but not all, signals contain
alerts. To learn how to add alerts to signals' code refer to the PowerLanguage manual. A check for the alert triggering
conditions is performed whenever one of the following events occurs:
289
•
Workspace is opened
•
Data series (symbol) is replaced with another data series (symbol)
•
A bar is closed or a new tick is received
Enabling Alerts
Alerts can be enabled in the Strategy Properties window.
To enable alerts:
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
Check the Enable Alerts check box to enable alerts; uncheck the box to disable the alerts.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
Alert Conditions Check
You can elect whether to check for Alert Triggering Conditions every time a new tick is received, or only at the close
of each bar.
Alert Conditions Check can be set from the Strategy Properties window:
To enable alerts:
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
In the Alert Conditions Check section click the On Bar Close, Every Tick or the Once Per Bar radio button, to
select the alert triggering conditions to be checked at the close of each bar only, every time a new tick is received or
every time a new tick is received once per bar only, respectively.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
Audio Alerts
A PC speaker beep or a sound file played by the PCs sound card can be set as the audio alert type.
Setting Beep Alert
Alerts can be enabled in the Strategy Properties window.
To enable alerts:
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
In the Audio Alert section, check the Audio Alert check box to enable audio alerts; uncheck the box to disable
the audio alerts.
4.
Click the Beep radio button to set the PC speaker beep as the audio alert type.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Sound Alert
Alerts can be enabled in the Strategy Properties window.
To enable alerts:
290
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
In the Audio Alert section, check the Audio Alert check box to enable audio alerts; uncheck the box to disable
the audio alerts.
4.
Click the Sound radio button to select a .wav sound file as the audio alert type.
5.
Enter the path and name of the wave (.wav) sound file to be used into the File text box, or click the ... button
on the right side of the text box for Open dialog box, navigate to and select a sound file, and click the Open button.
6.
Click the Test button to test the alert.
7.
Click the Play Once or the Repeat radio button, for the alerts to be played once or repeatedly, respectively.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
Visual Alert
Alerts can be enabled in the Strategy Properties window.
To enable alerts:
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
In the Visual Alert section, check the Visual Alert check box to enable visual alerts; uncheck the box to disable
the visual alerts.
4.
In the Display Notify Window for drop-down list box select the length of time that the alert notification window
is to be displayed for.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
E-mail Alert
E-mail alerts can be sent when market conditions meet your defined criteria.
This feature can be used to stay informed about market conditions while away from the computer.
To add alert to signal:
1. Make sure the signal's PowerLanguage code contains alert code so that alerts will be triggered.
Alerts can be enabled in the Strategy Properties window. To enable alerts:
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
Select the Alerts tab.
3.
Check Enable Alerts checkbox to enable alerts.
4.
Check the E-mail Alert checkbox.
5.
Press the Settings button. The E-mail Alert window will appear.
6.
Enter the email addresses of the sender.
7.
Enter the email address of the recipient. To send the email to multiple recipients, separate each email address
with a semi-colon.
8.
Enter the SMTP Server Name or IP address, and Port number into the textboxes. Please get this information
from your email provider.
9.
Check the SMTP Server authentication data checkbox if your SMTP server requires authentication to send
emails. Enter the User name and Password.
291
10. Press the Test button to send a test email.
If the sending process has been successful a message will appear in the pop-up window
If the sending process has been unsuccessful a message will appear in the pop-up window:
11. Press OK to close the E-mail Alert window.Example of Email Alert Message:
292
Broker Plug-ins
CQG Broker Plug-in
To connect MultiCharts to CQG data feed, it is necessary to have their software installed on the computer. CQG has
2 programs that can be used for connection MultiCharts to CQG :
1.
http://www.cqg.com/Support/ Getting-Started/CQGT.aspx
2.
http://www.cqg.com/Products/CQG-API.aspx
Note: CQG software and MultiCharts should not be launched simultaneously.
Open position Profit/Loss is provided through CQG API.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is provided through CQG API.
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Note: If a stop order is adjusted manually or by your script to the price equal to current market price or better
(guaranteed to be executed), the order won’t be converted into market order. It will be rolled back.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level is met, then it will be converted into market order.
Stop-Limit orders with stop and limit levels not overlapping each other are rejected by the broker.
When an orders is sent from MultiCharts to CQG broker to be executed on an expired contract, the broker will
automatically redirect the order to the same symbol, but currently active contract.
CQG does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up CQG Broker Plug-in
In the Properties CQG window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by CQG:
1.
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
Note: By default demo mode is NOT turned on. Check the CQGT demo box to turn it on. Demo mode is required to
be on for demo accounts. If you have real account, the box is required to be off
2.
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to CQG is lost.
3.
Default Order Settings section.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
293
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
•
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
•
FOK (Fill or Kill Orders); or:
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
•
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled); or:
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
•
AON - All Or None; or:
A condition used on a buy or sell order to instruct the broker to fill the order completely or not at all. Read more:
http://www.investopedia. com/terms/a/aon.asp#ixzz22Dg5BBG7
•
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel)
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
Dukaskopy Broker Plug-in
The settings of Dukascopy Broker Plug-in for auto trading are the same as settings of the coresponding Broker Profile.
For more details see Dukascopy Broker Profile
FXCM Broker Plug-in
The settings of FXCM Broker Plug-in for auto trading are the same as settings of the coresponding Broker Profile.
For more details see FXCM Broker Profile
Interactive Brokers Broker Plug-in
The settings of Interactive Brokers Broker Plug-in for auto trading are the same as settings of the coresponding
Broker Profile.
For more details see Interactive Brokers Broker Profile
IWBank Quick Trade Broker Plug-in
The settings of IWBank Quick Trade Broker Plug-in for auto trading are the same as settings of the coresponding
Broker Profile.
294
For more details see IWBank Quick Trade Broker Profile
LMAX Broker Plug-in
The settings of LMAX Broker Plug-in for auto trading are the same as settings of the coresponding Broker Profile.
For more details see LMAX Broker Profile
MB Trading Broker Plug-in
To connect MultiCharts to MB Trading broker, it is necessary to have MB Trading software installed on the computer.
To download the latest version of MBT Desktop, follow the link: http://www.mbtrading.com/mbtDesktop. aspx.
To get latest version of MBT Desktop PRO, follow the link: http:/ / www. mbtrading. com/ mbtDesktopPro. aspx MB
Trading software should be installed, but one can’t use it simultaneously with MultiCharts.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts as it is not provided by MB Trading API.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated in MultiCharts.
MB Trading does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its
end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and
once one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the
OCO orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second
order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders
Risk).
Setting up MB Trading Broker Plug-in
In the Properties MB Trading window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by MB Trading:
1.
Authority section
Enter Login and Password.
2.
Connection Settings section
Configure timer to reconnect if link to MB Trading is lost.
3.
Default Order Settings section
It is possible to reset default order Routes.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Default order Routes can be reset in this section.
4.
Unrealized Profit Calculation Mode section
Select one of the two modes to calculate unrealized profit: using Best Bid & Best Ask or Last Trade.
295
Open E Cry Broker Plug-in
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Note: If you manually drag Stop orders to the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be
executed), they won’t be converted into market orders.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level is met, then it will be converted into market order.
Stop-Limit orders for FOREX are not supported by Open E Cry.
Stop-Limit orders with stop and limit levels not overlapping each other are rejected by the broker.
Trade size for FOREX: 1 contract = 1 lot (size of a lot depends on the type of account).
Price and volume adjustment for orders is not supported on FOREX instruments.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by Open E Cry broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by Open E Cry broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Open E Cry supports Native One-Cancels-Others group, however, it is limited to only 2 orders with the same number
of contracts. Therefore, MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO
orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once one of the orders is filled, other orders
from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO orders is filled MultiCharts sends a
command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order may also be filled if price reaches
its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up Open E Cry Broker Profile
In the Properties Open E Cry window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Open E Cry:
1.
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
2.
Connectivity section.
Check the Server Name and Port number.
The Allow Remoting box: if it is checked, it is possible to launch MultiCharts and Open E Cry software
simultaneously. However it is recommended to leave it unchecked and run MultiCharts only when Open E Cry
Software is closed.
3.
Connection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if the connection to Open E Cry is lost.
4.
Default Order Settings section.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of 4 available Time In Force order parameters:
•
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
•
FOK (Fill or Kill Orders); or:
296
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
•
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled); or:
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
•
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel); or:
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
Patsystems Broker Plug-in
The settings of Patsystems Broker Plug-in for auto trading are the same as settings of the coresponding Broker
Profile.
For more details see Patsystems Broker Profile
Rithmic 01 Broker Plug-in
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level or both stop and limit levels are met, then it will
be converted to limit order.
Buy Stop-Limit orders with Stop level higher than Limit level and Sell Stop-Limit orders with Stop level lower than
Limit level are rejected by the broker.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by Rithmic broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by Rithmic broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Rithmic does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up Rithmic 01 Broker Profile
Rithmic Broker Profile is created when MultiCharts is installed.
In the Properties Rithmic 01 window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Rithmic:
1.
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
SSL certificates path is set up by default.
2.
Connectivity section.
Make sure that the selected deployment is Rithmic 01.
Don’t adjust anything else in this section.
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct settings.
297
3.
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Rithmic is lost.
4.
Default Order Settings section.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
•
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
•
FOK (Fill or Kill Orders); or:
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
•
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled); or:
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
•
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel); or:
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
Rithmic Local Sim Broker Plug-in
To connect Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile it is necessary to have set up connection to Rithmic/Zen-Fire data feed
in QuoteManager (see Built-in Data Sources)
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated in MultiCharts.
Note: It is not possible to connect Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile and Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile
simultaneously.
Setting up Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile
In the Manage Broker Profiles … window (see Managing Broker Profiles) click New and select Rithmic Local Sim.
Rithmic Local Sim will be added to the list of Broker Profiles.
In the Simulator Options window:
1.
Simulation Option section.
Specify range for Communication Delay. Milliseconds are used.
Specify range for Execution Delay. Milliseconds are used.
Specify Initial Balance.
Select Execution method.
2.
Margin Requirements Calculation section. Select Margin calculation method.
3.
Default Order Settings section.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
298
•
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
•
FOK (Fill or Kill Orders); or:
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
•
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled); or:
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
•
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel); or:
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
The Reset button becomes active only when the profile is connected. Click Reset to reset the settings to default.
New settings are applied only when the profile is reconnected.
Trading Technologies Broker Plug-in
Trading Technologies Broker Plug-in
FIX API is used for connection between MultiCharts and Trading Technologies.
Trading Technologies doesn’t provide information on the list of accounts, equity and balance.
Entry Price is returned by the broker as Average Entry Price for day.
Market orders are converted into Limit ones on broker end.
Stop orders are converted into Stop-Limit ones. If at the moment an order is sent its stop level is met, then it will be
rejected by the broker.
Stop-Limit orders with stop and limit levels not overlapping each other will be rejected by the broker. If at the
moment an order is sent its stop level is met, then it will be rejected by the broker.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts as it is not provided by TT FIX API.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated in MultiCharts as it is not provided by TT FIX API.
There are also following broker limitations:
•
There is price ceiling for stop orders. Any orders beyond this limit are rejected by broker.
•
On some exchanges (for example: SGX), a stop order and stop prices of a stop-limit order cannot be modified.
This may influence auto trading.
•
There are exchanges, which don’t support stop orders.
Trading Technologies does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO
group on its end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by
MultiCharts and once one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts.
When one of the OCO orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note
that the second order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker
(see OCO-Orders Risk).
299
Setting up Trading Technologies Broker Profile
In the Properties Trading Technologies window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by
Trading Technologies
Connection settings tab
1. Order Connection Settings section.
Server IP, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID. 2. Price Connection Settings section.
Server IP, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID.
3. Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Rithmic is lost.
Trading Accounts tab
1.
Trading section.
Account number
Clearing Account number
FFT2 tag
Agent Account tag.
2.
Unrealized Profit Calculation section
Select one of two modes to calculate unrealized profit: using Best Bid & Best Ask or Last Trade.
Trading Technologies Broker Plug-in
3.
If the account requires enabling multiple gateways feature, check the Use Multiple Exchange Gateway (Tag
18203) box.
Order Settings tab
Time In field.
Select one of 4 available Time In Force order parameters
•
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
•
FOK (Fill or Kill Orders); or:
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
•
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled); or:
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
•
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel); or:
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
•
ATO (At the opening); or:
An order specifying that a trade is to be executed at the opening of the market, otherwise it's canceled.
•
GTD (Good Till Date)
Order is placed and it is active up to a specified date. Once GTD time-in-force parameter is selected, the Good Till
Date field occurs to specify number of days for order to stay active. The inactive field nearby indicates the date.
300
ZenFire broker Plug-in
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level or both stop and limit levels are met, then it will
be converted to limit order.
Buy Stop-Limit orders with Stop level higher than Limit level and Sell Stop-Limit orders with Stop level lower than
Limit level are rejected by the broker.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by ZenFire broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by ZenFire broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
ZenFire does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Zen-Fire Broker Plug-in
Setting up Zen-Fire Broker Profile
In the Properties Zen-Fire window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Zen-Fire
1.
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password
SSL certificates path is configured by default.
2.
Connectivity section
Make sure that the selected deployment is Zen-Fire
Don’t adjust anything else in this section
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct settings.
3.
Reconnection Settings section
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Rithmic is lost.
4.
Default Order Settings section.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
•
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
•
FOK (Fill or Kill Orders); or:
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
•
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled); or:
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
•
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel); or:
301
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
ZenFire Local Sim Broker Plug-in
To connect Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile it is necessary to have set up connection to Rithmic/Zen-Fire data feed
in QuoteManager (see Built-in Data Sources)
It is not possible to connect Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile and Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile simultaneously.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated in MultiCharts.
Setting up Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile
In the Manage Broker Profiles … window (see Managing Broker Profiles) click New and select Zen-Fire Local Sim.
Zen-Fire Local Sim will be added to the list of Broker Profiles.
In the Simulator Options window:
1.
Simulation Option section.
Specify range for Communication Delay. Milliseconds are used.
Specify range for Execution Delay. Milliseconds are used.
Specify Initial Balance.
Select Execution method.
2.
Margin Requirements Calculation section. Select Margin calculation method.
3.
Default Order Settings section.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
•
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
•
FOK (Fill or Kill Orders); or:
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
•
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled); or:
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
•
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel); or:
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
The Reset button becomes active only when the profile is connected. Click Reset to reset the settings to default.
New settings are applied only when the profile is reconnected.
ZenFire/Rithmic Server Sim Broker Plug-in
302
ZenFire/Rithmic Server Sim Broker Plug-in
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level or both stop and limit levels are met, then it will
be converted to limit order.
Buy Stop-Limit orders with Stop level higher than Limit level and Sell Stop-Limit orders with Stop level lower than
Limit level are rejected by the broker.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated by ZenFire/Rithmic broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is calculated by ZenFire/Rithmic broker and displayed in MultiCharts.
ZenFire does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to the broker. Note that the second
order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders
Risk).
Setting up ZenFire Server Sim Broker Profile
Zen-Fire Broker Profile is created when MultiCharts is installed.
In the Properties ZenFire/Rithmic Server Sim window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided
by Zen-Fire/Rithmic.
1.
Authority section
Enter Login and Password
SSL certificates path is set up by default.
2.
Connectivity section
Make sure that the selected deployment is Zen-Fire Server/Rithmic Sim Do not change anything else in this section.
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct settings.
3.
Reconnection Settings section
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Zen-Fire/Rithmic is lost.
4.
Default Order Settings section.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
•
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
•
FOK (Fill or Kill Orders); or:
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
•
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled); or:
303
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
•
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel); or:
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
Backtesting vs Live Trading
304
Order and position Tracker
Order and Position Tracker provides detailed summary of orders, positions, and accounts across all brokers being
used for trading. You can cancel or modify pending orders, or even flatten entire positions, directly from this
window. All information can be sorted and filtered to see the details. Contents of Order and Position Tracker can
also be exported into Excel for further analysis.
Open Order and Position Tracker Window by one of the following methods:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click Order and Position Tracker Window; or:
•
Click on the Order and Position Tracker icon on the Main toolbar.
Accounts Tab
Accounts tab shows the following information:
•
Profile – shows Broker Profile name;
•
Account – shows the account number;
•
Balance – shows balance of the account;
•
Equity – shows equity of the account;
•
Open P/L – shows open profit and loss of the account.
•
Daily P/L - shows daily profit and loss of the account.
Broker
Account Balance
Equity
Open P/L
Daily P/L
FXCM
+
+
+
+
-
Interactive Brokers
+
+
+
+
-
Patsystems
+
Calculated by MultiCharts +
+
-
Trading Technologies -
-
-
-
-
Open E Cry
+
+
+
+
-
Zen-Fire
+
+
+
+*
-
Rithmic
+
+
+
+
-
PFG Best
+
+
+
+**
-
MBTrading
+
-
Calculated by MultiCharts Calculated by MultiCharts +
•
+ - information received from broker API
•
- - not available
•
* Requested every second.
•
** Requested every 5 minutes and calculated by MC in-between.
305
Orders Tab
Orders tab shows the orders generated by the strategy or created manually.
The following information is available:
•
Generated – shows the time and date when the order was generated;
•
Filled/Cancelled – shows the time when the order was filled or cancelled;
•
Instrument – shows the instrument on which the order was placed;
•
Resolution – shows the resolution of the instrument (if applicable);
•
Order Name – shows the name of the order that was generated;
•
Order Type – shows the type of the order that was generated;
•
Order Category – shows the category of the order that was generated;
•
Action – shows an action that was made (Sell or Buy);
•
Quantity – shows the size of the order that was generated;
•
Quantity Filled – shows the quantity of contracts filled;
•
Quantity Left - shows the quantity of contracts left;
•
State – shows the state of orders (sent, submitted, pre-cancelled, cancelled, partially filled, filled, rejected);
•
Stop – shows the stop price at which the order was placed;
•
Limit – shows the limit price at which the order was placed;
•
Filled – shows the execution price at the broker;
•
TIF – shows the Time In Force setting of the order;
•
Profile – shows Broker Profile name;
•
Account – shows the account number;
•
Broker Order ID – shows the ID of the order at the broker;
•
OCO ID – shows the ID of the One Cancel Other group;
•
Strategy Name – shows the name of the strategy that has generated the order
•
Workspace – shows the name of the workspace where the order was generated
The information in Orders tab can be filtered by Profile, Account, Source, Instrument, State and Date (From… To).
Order Modification
To cancel the order right-click on the order to see the shortcut menu and click Cancel Order.
To cancel all active orders for all symbols right-click on one of the orders to see the shortcut menu and click
Cancel All Orders.
To cancel all active orders for the particular symbol right-click on one of the orders to see the shortcut menu and
click Cancel All Orders for This Symbol.
To cancel all active orders and close all open positions right-click on one of the orders to see the shortcut menu
and click Flatten Everything.
To change the price of an active order right-click on the order to see the shortcut menu and then click Change
Stop Price /Change Limit Price.
To change the size of an active order right-click on the order to see the shortcut menu and then click Change
Order Quantity.
306
Open Positions Tab
Open Positions tab provides the information about the open positions.
The following information is available:
•
Profile – where you can see the broker profile that is connected;
•
Account – shows an account number that is used;
•
Instrument – shows the instrument on which the position is open;
•
Position – shows position that is currently open;
•
Quantity – shows the size of the position in contracts;
•
Average Price - average price of executed entry orders that have created this position;
•
Open P/L – shows open profit and loss for this position;
The information in Open Positions tab can be filtered by Profile, Account, Source, Instrument.
Position Modification
To close a particular position right-click on the position to see the shortcut menu and click Close this “Instrument”
position at Account #.
To cancel all active orders and close all open positions right-click on one of the orders to see the shortcut menu
and click Flatten Everything.
Broker
Account Instrument Position Quantity Average Price
Open P/L
FXCM
+
+
+
+
+
+
Interactive Brokers
+
+
+
+
+
Calculated by MC
Patsystems
+
+
+
+
+
+
Trading Technologies +
+
+
+
+
Calculated by MC
MBTrading
+
+
+
+
+
Calculated by MC
Open E Cry
+
+
+
+
+
+
Zen-Fire
+
+
+
+
+
+*
Rithmic
+
+
+
+
+
+
PFG Best
+
+
+
+
+
+**
MBTrading
+
+
+
+
+
Calculated by MC
•
+ - information received from broker API
•
* Requested every second.
•
** Requested every 5 minutes and calculated by MC in-between.
Strategy Positions tab
Strategy positions tab shows the positions that were opened by your strategy as a result of automated trading.
307
Note: only orders that were generated by a strategy are showed in Strategy Positions tab. The orders that were
placed manually or sent from another program are not showed.
After the position is closed the corresponding line in the Strategy Positions tab is removed.
The following information is available:
•
Broker Position – shows a broker position for a particular instrument and account;
•
Positions Match – shows you if the strategy position and position at broker are the same. True (position at
broker matches the strategy position) or False (position at broker does not match the strategy position) status;
•
Average Price – shows the average price of executed entry orders of the strategy at broker;
•
Instrument – shows the instrument on which the order was placed;
•
Resolution – shows the resolution of the chart where the strategy is applied;
•
Strategy Open P/L – shows open profit and loss of the strategy;
•
Profile – where you can see the broker profile that is connected;
•
Strategy Name – shows the name of the strategy that has generated this position;
•
Workspace – shows the name of the workspace with the chart where the strategy is applied is situated.
The information in Strategy Positions tab can be filtered by Instrument.
Positions History Tab
Positions History tab provides the information about the positions that were opened in the past.
The following information is available:
•
Date/Time – shows the date and time when the position was opened;
•
Profile – where you can see the broker profile that is connected;
•
Account – shows an account number that is used;
•
Instrument – shows the instrument on which the position is open;
•
Position – shows position that is currently open;
•
Quantity – shows the size of the position in contracts;
•
Average Price - average price of executed entry orders that have created this position;
•
Open P/L – shows open profit and loss for this position;
The information in Positions History tab can be filtered by Profile, Account, Source, Instrument and Date (From… To).
Note: We display all updates coming to MultiCharts from your broker. Unfortunately the updates of avg entry
price and current market position come asynchronously from your broker. MultiCharts doesn’t filter them,
otherwise it can lose some information. Symbol Mapping can also affect number of the duplicated lines (depends
on the number of lines with ереу same instrument in Symbol Mapping window) in Position History tab.
Logs tab
Logs tab shows the information on the trading events and messages received from broker.
•
Date/Time – shows the date and time of the event;
•
Category – shows the category of the message;
•
Profile – shows the broker profile that is connected;
•
Strategy Name – shows the name of the strategy that has generated the order;
308
•
Message
–
shows
information
on
connecting/disconnecting
broker
profiles,
placing/cancellation/execution/rejection of orders, warnings from brokers, error messages, and market position
change.
The information in Logs tab can be filtered by Profile, Strategy, Instrument, Category (Information, Warning,
Error) and Date (From… To).
Alerts Tab
Alerts tab shows the alerts generated by the scripts.
The following information is available:
•
Date/Time – shows the date and time when the alert was triggered;
•
Study - name of the study that generated the alert; •
•
Message - alert message.
Price - price level at which the alert was triggered
The information in Alerts tab can be filtered by Profile and Date (From… To).
Managing columns
To show/hide a column, right-click on the column heading and check/ uncheck the column name check boxes.
To move one of the columns drag it to the left or right.
To change the alignment of a column, right-click on the column heading, point to Alignment and select the option
that you need.
To be able to highlight rows by numbers right-click on the column heading and check the Show Row Selector
check box.
To change the column width right-click on the column heading and click Fit to Text.
Exporting Data to Excel
To export data from the active tab in the main menu select File and click Export to Excel.
An Excel file will pop up automatically.
Note: the Excel file is not saved automatically. In order to store the information in Excel format you need to save
the file in Excel.
Note: In order to export data to excel make sure that Microsoft Office 2003 and higher is installed on your
machine ( Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) must be supported ).
Changing Themes of Order and Position
To change themes of Order and Position Tracker: click the View tab in the main menu of MultiCharts , point to
Themes and choose one of the themes available in the list.
Currency
To select the currency to display values in the Accounts tab select File in the main menu, click Preferences, select
the Trading tab and select the currency from the Preferred Currency list.
309
Symbol Mapping
Symbol Mapping is a universal symbol name translation tool between data feeds and brokers. Very often data
feeds and brokers have different names for the same symbol and orders can get rejected because of incorrect
symbol reference. Thanks to Symbol Mapping tool it is possible to use any combination of data feeds and brokers.
It helps to route your order to the broker, and to receive order status.
How Symbol Mapping Works
Data Source = Broker
Symbol mapping is automatically correct if the data on chart comes from a data source that is your broker at
the same time. Examples: IB, CQG, LMAX and so on. A mapping line is created in a broker profile when there is
plotted chart, the chart trading panel is opened and a broker profile is connected. The important point is to add
symbols through symbol lookup and not manually. If a symbol is added through symbol lookup, then it has all
correct parameters, so this symbol on chart and the symbol at broker end will match. As the result, mapping is
correct.
Data Source ≠ Broker
Symbol mapping is not automatically correct if the data on chart comes from a data source that is not your
broker. It should be adjusted manually. Examples: IQFeed, eSignal, TradeStation on charts and IB, CQG, LMAX
etc. as brokers. A mapping line is created in a broker profile when there is plotted chart, the chart trading panel
is opened and a broker profile is connected. The important point is to add symbols through symbol lookup and
not manually. If a symbol is added through symbol lookup, then it has all correct parameters, so this symbol on
chart and the symbol
at broker end will match. As the result, mapping is correct.
310
Symbol Mapping Example #1
Chart Symbol is EURUSD.FXCM from IQFeed. The broker is PFGBest. Default Symbol Mapping is not correct:
Broker Symbol name should be changed.
Click the Lookup button
in the Broker Symbol column to select the correct symbol.
311
Symbol Mapping Example #2
Chart symbol is MSFT from IQFeed. The broker is Interactive Brokers. Correct Symbol Mapping configuration:
When you select the Chart Symbol and the Broker Symbol they can have different exchange settings.
In this example, SMART is the exchange where MultiCharts sends orders. The rest of the exchanges are potential
exchanges where the order can be executed. Order statuses are received from one of the exchanges in the Broker
Symbol column.
Configuring Symbol Mapping
To configure Symbol Mapping
•
Access Symbol Mapping Settings Window by one of the following methods:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to Broker Profiles and click Symbol Mapping…
•
Right-click on one of the Broker Profiles on the Trade Bar to see the shortcut menu and click Symbol
Mapping…
•
Right-click on the DOM at the right or at the left of the price ladder to see the shortcut menu and click Symbol
Mapping…
•
Right-click on the Chart Trading Panel to see the shortcut menu and click Symbol Mapping…
•
Click on the arrow at the left of the SA/AA button
•
Choose the broker profile in the Broker Profile box (ссылка на Broker Profiles )
•
To add a new line in the Symbol Mapping window click Add.
•
To delete an existing line from the Symbol Mapping window click Remove
to call context menu and click Symbol Mapping…
Note: Symbol mapping lines can be deleted and will not re-appear if there are no plotted charts, opened DOM
windows with the same symbols, the symbol is not entered in the trade bar and there are no open position on
the symbols at broker end.
312
Configure Chart Symbol
Chart Symbol column on the left side of the Symbol Mapping window allows managing data source symbols.
To choose the Chart Symbol:
•
Click on the Lookup button
in the Chart Symbol column.
•
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
•
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Instruments tab, or use the category tabs to list only
a particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by
clicking on the column header. Double-click the symbol, or click OK to select the symbol.
•
If there is no instrument you are looking for in the list, click the Add button. Insert Symbol Into Portfolio
window will be opened. It is important to add instrument From Data Source with predefined correct settings. If
the data vendor doesn't support wizard for adding symbols, a warning message "Please run QuoteManager to
add the symbol manually." pops up. To find out more about adding instruments, see Adding symbols to database.
Configure Broker Symbol
Broker Symbol column on the right side of the Symbol Mapping window allows to choose a symbol at the broker.
To choose the Broker symbol:
•
Click on the Lookup button
in the Broker Symbol column.
•
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Instruments tab, or use the category tabs to list only
a particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by
clicking on the column header. Double-click the symbol, or click OK to select the symbol.
•
If there is no instrument you are looking for in the list, click the Add button. Insert Symbol Into Portfolio
window will be opened. It is important to add instrument From Data Source with predefined correct settings. If
the data vendor doesn't support wizard for adding symbols, a warning message "Please run QuoteManager to
add the symbol manually." pops up. To find out more about adding instruments, see Adding symbols to database.
•
To edit a broker symbol click the Edit button
•
Broker Symbol can be configured automatically using the Chart Symbol settings in the Quote Manager by
clicking the Auto button
on the right side of the Broker Symbol column.
on the right side of the Broker Symbol column.
Note: Automatic configuration should be enough when data feed and broker are the same, but may require
some modification if data source and broker are different. If you use Interactive Brokers, or Trading Technologies
as your broker make sure that you add symbols From Data Source in Quote Manager (see Operating Symbol List).
•
To save your symbol mapping configuration you should click Apply or OK.
313
Backtesting
Backtesting vs Live Trading
Understanding Backtesting limitations
Backtesting (strategy calculation on historical data) is an essential tool for a certain type of strategies. However, it
has some limitations as every simulator has.
When you are trading live, the market always responds to your actions. Your trades and submitted orders always
have impact regardless of how small your trade size is. The orders that you submit change market depth and you
can see these changes in real-time. This can never be simulated in backtesting as no algorithm is able to recreate
market reaction on market depth change.
Moreover, there is always broker latency (exchange latency, internet connection latency). This latency is a dynamic
constantly changing value. It can be 400 milliseconds in one moment of time and 1 millisecond 10 seconds later.
Consequently, it cannot be compensated in backtesting by setting a fixed latency time (e.g. 400 milliseconds).
It is important to understand that every trading strategy type needs different simulation: scalping strategies require
one simulation type, position trading needs another one etc.
Example: A scalping strategy with average profit per trade = 1 pip (strategy 1) will produce less realistic results in
backtesting than a position strategy with 300 pips average profit per trade (strategy 2) as 1 or 2 pip variations
between backtesting and real trades will make a little impact on strategy 2 while strategy 1 backtesting performance
may be completely different from live trading due to these variations.
Broker latency can be negligible for position trading while it should be taken into consideration when the position
holding time is relatively small.
Example : Strategy 1 average position holding time is 30 minutes. Strategy 2 average position holding time is several
seconds (scalping). In the first case latency factor is negligible, so strategy 1 backtesting results will be more or less
the same as live trading performance. However, in case of strategy 2, broker latency can change live trading
performance dramatically compared to backtesting.
Generally, the higher average profit per position and average position holding time are, the more accurate
backtesting results are.
Backtesting vs Live Trading
Here are the potential reasons why you may see orders not filled in real-time strategy calculation or real-time
strategy trading compared to Backtesting results.
314
Live Trading
Backtesting
In real-time trading the order is filled according to market
dynamics on Bid and Ask prices taking Volume into account.
The order may not be filled in real-time trading because of
insufficient volume at the broker.
In Backtesting and real-time strategy calculation (real-time simulation or data
playback) the order is filled on the main data series price without taking Volume
into account. In order to calculate order execution in Backtesting at Ask and Bid
prices Precise Backtesting option should be used
In real-time trading, a strategy will monitor and respond to
real-time data on tick-by-tick basis.
Historical data available for backtesting will, in most cases, be in the form of
time-based bars (minute, daily etc.) based on a group of ticks, with only Open,
High, Low, and Close prices available.
While it is not possible to get information on the actual price movement within
each bar from these four values, in MultiCharts Backtesting accuracy is improved
by incorporating Intra-bar Price Movement Assumptions logic.
As real-time and historical data comes from different servers
(even if the same data vendor is used) there can be
differences in real-time data and historical data that affect
the strategy calculation results.
A single tick difference between real-time and historical backfilled data can
generate completely different looking charts. This in turn would impact the
calculations of your strategy.
The difference between real-time and historical calculation is especially seen on
certain chart types (e.g. Point and Figure) than others due to their inherent
nature in bar formation (see Intra-Bar Order Generation, Bar Magnifier on NonStandard Chart Types).
Backtesting Options
Backtesting provides you with a general idea of how your strategy can behave. This information is not to be solely
relied on for making decisions. The features to bring your Backtesting results closer to the real-time strategy
behavior are:
• Precise Backtesting
• Intra-Bar Order Generation
• Bar Magnifier
Note: Different backtesting and strategy calculation methods can be selected which will produce different results.
Backtesting, optimization, and forward testing (real-time simulation) provide an insight into potential performance
of your strategy in “ideal world”. This information should be analyzed to get a range of possible scenarios. It is up to
trader to decide if this range is acceptable for live trading or not.
Bar Magnifier
The Bar Magnifier backtest feature is important for precise backtesting. Bar magnifier can be considered as a
replay of the way a bar was formed. The user can choose a replay frequency that is based on number of ticks or
number of minutes.
There is a tradeoff between the level of precision in a replay and memory requirements. Tick-by-tick replay is the
most precise, but it also requires the most memory. If the strategy does not require high precision, then replays
based on n-ticks or n-minutes may be sufficient.
315
For example, Bar Magnifier is helpful when both the profit target and stop loss occurred on the same bar. In this
situation, it is unclear whether the profit target or the stop loss occurred first. With Bar Magnifier, MultiCharts is
able to see how the bar was formed to determine whether the profit target or the stop loss occurred first.
Note: We suggest to use tick because most precise To use the feature:
1.
Open the Strategy Properties window.
To open the Strategy Properties window:
1. Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the chart
and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click Properties button to open the Strategy Properties window.
2.
Select the Backtesting tab.
3. In the Backtesting Precision section, select the Use Bar Magnifier checkbox.
Bar Magnifier
4.
MultiCharts will break down each bar into a series of lower resolution bars so that it can look to see how the
bar was formed:
•
Select the Tick radio button if the chart has tick-based resolution. Enter the number of ticks for the lower
resolution bars. The number of ticks must be at a lower resolution than the chart resolution, or
•
Select the Intra-day radio button if the chart has minute resolution or daily resolution. Enter the number of
minutes for the lower resolution bars. The number of minutes must be at a lower resolution than the resolution of
the chart, or
•
Select the Daily radio button if the chart has weekly resolution or higher. MultiCharts will break down each bar
into daily bars to see how the bar was formed.
5.
Check the Skip ticks with identical prices checkbox for faster backtesting. MultiCharts will skip ticks with
identical prices when it constructs the lower resolution bars.
6.
Check the Enable access to intra-bar time for calculation in Intra-Bar Order Generation mode checkbox to
make intra-bar time available from PowerLanguage script (Date, Time and Time_s keywords).
Note: If a strategy is based volume, then selecting this box may disrupt the volume calculations.
Intra-Bar Price Movement Assumptions
Strategy Backtesting on historical data often requires making assumptions about price movement within bars.
In real-time trading, a strategy will monitor and respond to a data feed on tick-by-tick basis. However, the historical
data available for backtesting will, in most cases, be in the form of bars based on a group of ticks, with only Open,
High, Low, and Close prices available.
316
While it is not possible from these four values to infer the actual price movement within each bar, the Backtesting
Engine improves the backtesting accuracy by incorporating intra-bar price movement assumption logic:
1.
An order could be executed at every valid price level throughout the entire range of the bar.
2.
If the opening price is closer to the high of the bar than to the low, the intra-bar price movement is assumed
to be in the order of Open-High-Low-Close.
3.
If the opening price is closer to the low of the bar than to the high, or if the opening price is exactly in between
the high and the low of the bar, the intra-bar price movement is assumed to be in the order of Open-Low-HighClose.
The first assumption implies that a Stop or a Limit order will execute at the Stop or the Limit price.
The second and third assumptions are significant when there are multiple orders active at the same time. If both a
Stop Loss and a Profit Target prices are reached within the same bar, the order of price movement within the bar
will determine which one of these orders will be executed.
For example, with a Stop Loss at 1340
and a Profit Target at 1360:
Intra-bar Price Movement Assumptions
•
In a bar with an Open of 1355, a High of 1360, a Low of 1340, and a Close of 1345, the Profit Target will be
assumed to have executed first (Assumption 2).
•
In a bar with an Open of 1345, a High of 1360, a Low of 1340, and a Close of 1355, the Stop Loss will be assumed
to have executed first (Assumption 3).
Limit Order Execution Assumptions
Limit orders are filled at a specific price or better (for long better = lower, for short better = higher). In backtesting
MultiCharts works:
•
Either with all prices between Open, High, Low, Close of a bar, assuming that all these prices are real;
•
Or with specific prices only, when 1 tick resolution is chosen or Bar Magnifier is used.
Limit order execution behavior for backtesting can be modified in the Backtesting tab of Strategy Properties
window.
There are 4 different variants:
1.
Chart resolution is 1 tick or Bar Magnifier of any resolution is enabled. Backtesting Assumptions is set to Fill
limit order when trade takes place at limit price or better.Example: Generated order: sellshort limit @ 121;
available prices: 120, 122, 125, ...; order is filled @ 122.
317
2.
Chart resolution is 1 tick or Bar Magnifier of any resolution is enabled. Backtesting Assumptions is set to Fill
limit order when trade price goes beyond limit price by 3 points.Example: Generated order: sellshort limit @ 121
; available prices: 120, 122, 125, ...; order is filled @ 125.
1.
Chart resolution is not 1 tick and Bar Magnifier is not enabled. Backtesting Assumptions is set to Fill limit
order when trade takes place at limit price or better.Example: Generated order: sellshort limit @ 121; order is
filled @ 121 or better if 121 (or better) is between High and Low of the bar.
2.
Chart resolution is not 1 tick and Bar Magnifier is not enabled. Backtesting Assumptions is set to Fill limit
order when trade price goes beyond limit price by 3 points.
Example: Generated order: sellshort limit @ 121; order is filled @ 121 if 124 price is between High and Low; order
is not filled at all if there is not 124 price between High and Low of the bar.
Order Linking
Order Linking
Strategy signals are visually shown on the chart using arrows. If a strategy uses several different entry signals, then
it can be difficult to see clearly which entry signal was exited.
Order Linking draws a line from the entry signal to the exit signal so that it is possible to visually match an entry
signal with its exit signal.
Order linking also makes it clear which trades are profitable or not profitable on the chart.
The lines are color coded. The default colors for the lines are as follows:
Green: profitable trade
Red: unprofitable trade
To change the settings:
1.
Open the Format Signal window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels; double-click once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
, right-click and then click Format Signals; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Signal tab.
3.
Select the strategy and select the Format button. A window to format the strategy will appear.
4.
Select the Connecting Line tab.
5.
Check the Show Connecting Line checkbox to show the connecting lines.
6.
In the drop-down lists, select the setting for the Line Style, Line Weight, Profitable Line Color, and Unprofitable
Line Color.
7.
Select the OK button.
318
Precise Backtesting
Understanding Precise Backtesting
Depending on the strategy, Precise Strategy Back Testing can give the user a more realistic emulation during back
testing. To back test high frequency strategies like statistical arbitrage, the user may need take into account the
historical bid/ask data in addition to the historical trade data.
With Precise Back Testing, the user can load the historical bid data series and the historical ask data series into
MultiCharts. MultiCharts will use the ask data series to fill buy market orders and buy stop orders. Similarly,
MultiCharts will use the bid data series to fill sell market orders and sell stop orders.
Consider a situation where a market order to buy 1 contract and a market order to sell 1 contract are submitted at
the same time at the close of a bar. If the user only uses the trade data series, then there is only one price for the
close. The back test will show that these two orders were filled at the same price, and the profit/loss is zero. In
reality, there's a bid/ask spread. If the price quote doesn’t move suddenly, then these two orders will undoubtedly
generate an instantaneous loss due to the bid/ask spread. That's why it’s more precise to back test with a bid data
series and an ask data series.
Consider another situation where the trade price doesn't occur on either the bid or the ask. Due to liquidity or other
reasons, the historical data series may show that the trade price was either in between or outside the bid/ask. In
this situation, the user may want to be conservative and assume fills at the bid/ask instead of at the trade price.
Consider a third situation where there is sufficient liquidity and the trades do occur on the bid/ask. The strategy uses
10 minute bars. The strategy buys 1 contract at 10:00am and exits the position at 11:00am. The PowerLanguage
code for such a strategy is as follows:
If Time=1000 Then Buy 1 Contract This Bar on Close;
<br>If Time=1100 Then Sell 1 Contract This Bar on Close;
If this strategy was back tested on simply a data series of historical trade prices, then the back test will assume that
the trades were filled at the close prices of the bars. However, it's unclear whether the trades would have been filled
at the close prices, because the close prices could have been on either the bid or the ask.
If the close price was an ask price and the strategy was buying, then the fill price was realistic. However, if the close
price was a bid price and the strategy was buying, then the fill price was unrealistic.
If the close price was a bid price and the strategy was selling, then the fill price was realistic. However, if the close
price was an ask price and the strategy was selling, then the fill price was unrealistic.
With Precise Back Testing, users can load two separate data series onto the chart. The first data series is for historical
bid prices. The second data series is for historical ask prices. MultiCharts will use these two data series to determine
realistic fill prices. The bar's close will have a bid and an ask price associated with it. MultiCharts will use the ask
price to fill a market buy order and the bid price to fill a market sell order.
Using Precise Backtesting
To use Precise Strategy Back Testing:
1.
Make sure the symbol contains historical bid and ask data.
2.
Add the symbol into a chart window.
3.
Designate this chart as the Ask data series:
319
1.
Open the Format Instrument window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Quote Field drop-down list, select Ask.
4.
Select OK.
4.
Add the same symbol into the same chart window. The chart window now has two charts.
5.
Designate this chart (the second chart) as the Bid data series:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
;
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
changes into a Hand
right-
click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button;
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Quote Field drop-down list, select Bid.
4.
Select OK.
6.
Apply the strategy to the Ask data series, which is the first chart. It does not matter if the strategy is applied to
the Ask data series or the Bid data series. It only matters that the strategy is applied to the first chart.
1.
Open the Strategy Properties window.
To open the Strategy Properties window:
1. Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the chart
and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
changes
320
into a Hand
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click Properties to open the Strategy Properties window.
2.
Select the Backtesting tab.
3.
Select the Extended. The strategy backtesting engine emulation based on bid & ask series data radio button.
4.
In Use for ask series data, select the ask series data.
5.
In Use for bid series data, select the bid series data.
6.
Click OK.
Understanding Backtesting
A strategy is a set of Signals applied to a chart. Each signal is a mechanical technical analysis tool, used to
systematically specify market entry or exit points according to a set of trading rules implemented in the signal's
algorithm.
Note: A strategy has separate Properties, separate from signals' settings.
Once a strategy is applied to a chart, the backtesting process starts. During the backtesting process, the strategy
places trades where they would have occurred the past, according to the set of rules applied. The trades are placed
throughout the entire available period of historical data. If strategy is applied to real-time chart, the strategy
continues to place new trades as the real-time data is received.
A Performance Report can be generated, based on the trades placed by the strategy and containing statistics and
performance measurements.
Note: New trades, placed by the strategy after the performance report has already been generated, will not be
added to the performance report in real time. To incorporate the new trades into the performance report should
be generated again.
Understanding Report-Chart Synchronization
MultiCharts allows the user to visually match the trades from a Strategy Performance Report with their signals on
the chart. For strategies that have hundreds of trades over a long data series, it may be cumbersome to manually
match a trade in the Strategy Performance Report to the chart.
The user would have to use the scroll button to find the trade in the data series. Report-Chart Synchronization
simplifies this process. Trades on the chart are automatically highlighted when the user hovers his mouse over a
trade in the Strategy Performance Report.
To learn more about this feature, see Setting Display Properties
Understanding Intra-Bar Orders Calculations
Strategy Order Calculation in Real-Time
Each time a new real-time tick is received, MultiCharts evaluates the data to determine if entry or exit order
conditions of the strategy are met on that tick. If the conditions are met, the appropriate order is issued. In some
321
cases it may be possible that both the entry and the exit orders will be executed based on the same tick. For a
detailed description see Order Execution Priority
Strategy Order Calculation for Historical Data
Historical data available for backtesting will, in most cases, be in the form of bars based on a group of ticks, with
only Open, High, Low, and Close prices available.
While it is not possible from these four values to infer the actual price movement within each bar, the Backtesting
Engine improves the backtesting accuracy by incorporating intra-bar price movement assumption logic.
For a detailed description of the movement assumption logic, see Intra-Bar Price Movement Assumptions
In some cases it may be possible that both the entry and the exit orders will be executed based on the same bar.
For a detailed description see Order Execution Priority
Using Performance Report
Basing on the trades placed in the chart the performance report can be calculated to comprehensively analyze the
strategy performance measures as well as trades list and statistics. There over 100 performance indices are available
for analysis including about 30 charts.
Attention: The new trades occurred are not being included in the Strategy Performance Report in realtime. To
include the new trades occurred the performance report should be re-opened again.
Attention: In case signals were added or deleted the Strategy Performance Report should be re-opened again.
Note: Only one performance report can be opened at a time.
Accessing Performance Report
To access a Strategy Performance Report:
1.
Apply a strategy to a chart.
2.
In the main menu select View then click Strategy Performance Report.
To access a Trading Performance Report:
1.
Connect a Broker Profile.
2.
Make sure that there historical trades on the chart.
3.
In the mainenu select View then click Trading Performance Report.
Viewing Performance Report
In MultiCharts the Performance Report features a tri-panel design.
Left panel is a navigation structure while the upper right one displays performance data.
Tip: Upon left-clicking on any performance index its description will appear in the lower right panel.
Viewing Performance Indices
To view performance indices:
1.
In the left panel select a performance indices section
to review.
322
2.
In the right side move cursor on a performance index required. The cursor will change into Description
cursor then left-click.
3.
In the lower right panel a text description will appear. Click Close
4.
Use Back
and Forward
button to close the description panel.
toolbar buttons to move between the Performance Report sections.
Viewing Performance Charts
To view performance charts:
1.
In the left panel select a performance char
2.
Click Zoom In
or Zoom Out
to review.
toolbar buttons for zooming charts in an out respectively. Click Reset
Zooming
to reset a zoomed chart.
3.
Use Pan
or Cross
4.
Use Back
cursor modes for moving charts or precise reviewing chart values respectively.
and Forward
toolbar buttons to move between the Performance Report sections.
Understanding Report-Chart Synchronization
MultiCharts allows the user to visually match the trades from a Strategy Performance Report with their signals on
the chart.
For strategies that have hundreds of trades over a long data series, it may be cumbersome to manually match a
trade in the Strategy Performance Report to the chart.
The user would have to use the scroll button to find the trade in the data series.
Report-Chart Synchronization simplifies this process. Trades on the chart are automatically highlighted when the
user hovers his mouse over a trade in the Strategy Performance Report. To learn more about this feature, see Setting
Display Properties
Setting Performance Report Properties
It is possible in MultiCharts to set financial and display settings for the Performance Report.
Financial settings allow to better analyze the strategy performance with different costs, statistic and risk level
settings.
Display settings allow to configure visual setting for the report. It is possible to display the report figures in dollars
or in a regional currency, set number of decimals to use and smoothing for charts. It is also posiible to display trades
with partial exits basing on entries or on exits.
Setting Financial Properties
To set financial properties:
1.
In the Strategy Performance Report window click Settings
toolbar button.
2.
Select the Financial tab.
3.
Set appropriate properties or click Default to set back to the default settings.
More Information:
Point value – review Big Point Value definition.
Initial capital - Initial capital to start strategy performance calculations with.
Commission - the amount supposed to be paid to broker for trades execution. The commission can be set on "per
contract" or on "per trade" basis.
323
With Per Contract option, the Commission value is multiplied for the each trade by the double number of contracts
in the trade (i.e. for Entry and Exit).
With Per Trade option, the Commission value value is multiplied for each trade by the 2 (i.e. for Entry and Exit).
The default Commission value is zero.
Slippage - the amount reserved for differencies between the expected and actual order execution price. The
commission can be set on "per contract" or on "per trade" basis.
With Per Contract option, the Slippage value is multiplied for the each trade by the double number of contracts in
the trade (i.e. for Entry and Exit).
With Per Trade option, the Slippage value is multiplied for each trade by the 2 (i.e. for Entry and Exit).
The default Slippage value is zero.
Margin per contract - the amount to be borrowed when trading on a margin account. This number is used in some
report indices calculation.
Interest rate - the rate used in some report indices calculation. Usually the Treasury Bill rate is used.
No. of standard deviations – the number of standard deviations is used in some report indices calculation. The
default is 1.
Minimal acceptable rate of return – reference point for Sortino Ratio (See "Performance Ratios" section in the
Performance report)
Degree of risk aversion of the investor - reference point for Fouse Ratio (See "Performance Ratios" section in the
Performance report)
4. Click OK.
Setting Display Properties
To set display properties:
1.
In the Strategy Performance Report window, click the Settings
toolbar button.
2.
Select the Display tab.
3.
Select USD to display the report in U.S. dollars or select Regional Currency to display the report in another
currency. If Regional Currency is selected, enter the exchange rate in the USD/$ rate textbox.
4.
Set No. of digits after decimal to the required precision level.
5.
In the Performance & Quality section, select the appropriate smoothing.
6.
Select the Enable Strategy Performance Report – Chart Synchronization check box to visually match the trades
in the performance report to the signals in the chart.
Two additional options become available if this checkbox is selected:
•
Select the Entry-based radio button to match the trade in the performance report to its entry signal in the
chart.
•
Select the Exit-based radio button to match the trade in the performance report to its exit signal in the chart.
To use this feature, in the Strategy Performance Report:
1.
Expand Trade Analysis in the tree view pane.
2.
Select List of Trades.
3.
Hover the mouse pointer over any trade on the list. The trade on the list will be matched with the signal for
this trade in the chart. The signal on the chart will be highlighted.
324
2.
Select Recalculate the Report on each new order checkbox to update the Strategy Performance Report in
real-time with each new trade. If a new trade is made while the Strategy Performance Report is open, the Strategy
Performance Report will be updated immediately with the new trade.
If this checkbox is unchecked, then the Strategy Performance Report will be updated with the new trade only after
closing and reopening the Strategy Performance Report.
3.
Click OK.
Saving Performance Report
To save the Performance Report:
1.
In the Strategy Performance Report window click Save
toolbar button.
2.
In the Save As dialog window appeared navigate to the required file location.
3.
In the File Name field type in the file name.
Note: The file name with symbol name included in it is supplied automatically.
4.
In the Type field select the file type. There are 2 types available: *.XLS (MS Excel) and *.XML (XML RINA).
5.
Click Save.
Attention: To save data in an .XLS format a full version of Microsoft Excel must be installed on the computer. Once
saved the .XLS file may be read by any Excel compatible application.
Note: In the *.XLS file the entire report will be saved (including charts).
Printing Performance Report
It is possible in the Performance Report to print a selected section or chart.
To print a selected section or chart:
1.
In the left panel of the Strategy Performance Report select a section or a chart to be printed.
2.
Click Print
3.
The standard print dialog will appear.
4.
Click OK.
toolbar button.
or
1.
In the left panel of the Strategy Performance Report select a section or a chart to be printed.
2.
Click Print Preview
3.
Use Magnify Mode
4.
Click Print
5.
Click Close button to close the window.
toolbar button. The Print Preview dialog will appear.
or Whole Page
toolbar buttons to preview the page.
toolbar button to access the print dialog.
325
Optimization
Performing Optimization
Once a strategy has been applied to a chart, strategy optimization can be performed.
Running Exhaustive Search
Optimization is performed from the Format Objects window:
To perform Exhaustive Search optimization:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
a
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click the Optimize button.
4.
In the Select Optimization Method dialog box that appears, select Exhaustive Search.
5.
In the Exhaustive Search Properties window that opens, select the Optimizable Inputs tab.
6.
Check/uncheck the check box to the left of the signal name and input name to enable/disable optimization for
this input or check the check box to the left of the Signal Name column heading to enable optimization for all inputs
( at least one input should be selected to perform optimization ).
7.
The Current Value column shows input values that are currently selected for the signals applied on the chart.
8.
In the Start Value column, enter the desired starting values for each of the inputs.
9.
In the End Value column, enter the desired ending values for each of the inputs.
10. In the Step column, enter the desired step size, for each of the inputs.
11. The Step Count column shows current amount of steps for an input.
12. Select the Optimization Criteria tab.
13. Select the Use Limitation checkbox to limit the output to a defined number of the best results; unselect the
checkbox to list all the results in the optimization report.
14. When Use Limitation checkbox is checked Optimization dialog window shows current best results for selected
сriteria during optimization.
15. Enter the desired number of best results in the Show N best results box.
16. Select the best results criteria in the best results for list box.
17. Select criteria:
326
1.
Select Standard Criteria.
2.
Select the criteria from the drop-down list. Read more about Standard Criteria. or:
1.
Select Custom Criteria.
2.
Click Edit... button.
3.
Write the script for the custom criteria. Read more about Custom Criteria.
4.
Click OK.
18. Select Ascending or Descending option to sort the output in ascending or descending order, respectively.
19. Click OK to run the optimization and generate the Optimization Report.
Running Genetic Algorithm Search
Note: For detailed information on Genetic Algorithm properties, see Understanding Genetic Algorithm
Optimization
Optimization is performed from the Format Objects window:
To perform Genetic Algorithm optimization:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
a
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab.
3.
Click the Optimize button.
4.
In the Select Optimization Method dialog box that appears, select Genetic Algorithm.
5.
In the Genetic Algorithm Properties window that opens, select the Optimizable Inputs tab.
6.
Check/uncheck the check box to the left of the signal name and input name to enable/disable optimization for
this input or check the check box to the left of the Signal Name column heading to enable optimization for all inputs
( at least one input should be selected to perform optimization ).
7.
The Current Value column shows input values that are currently selected for the signals applied on the chart.
8.
In the Start Value column, enter the desired starting values for each of the inputs.
9.
In the End Value column, enter the desired ending values for each of the inputs.
10. In the Step column, enter the desired step size, for each of the inputs.
11. The Step Count column shows current amount of steps for an input.
12. Select the Algorithm-specific Properties tab.
13. Select criteria:
1.
Select Standard Criteria.
2.
Select the criteria from the drop-down list. Read more about Standard Criteria. or:
1.
Select Custom Criteria.
2.
Click Edit... button.
3.
Write the script for the custom criteria. Read more about Custom Criteria.
327
4.
Click OK.
14. Select Ascending or Descending option to sort the output in ascending or descending order, respectively.
15. An optimum population size value is automatically placed into the Population Size box; if a different value is
desired, enter the value into the box.
16. In the Crossover Probability box, enter the desired crossover probability; value range is 0.95-0.99, with a
default of 0.95.
17. In the Mutation Probability box, enter the desired mutation probability; value range is 0.01-0.05, with a default
of 0.05.
18. In the Convergence Type drop-down list, select Number of Generations or Proximal Convergence.
19. In the Maximum Number of Generations box, enter the desired maximum number of generations.
20. If Proximal Convergence was selected, enter the desired minimum number of generations and convergence
rate into the respective boxes. A value, approaching 1 is usually selected for the convergence rate; the default value
is
0.990000.
21. In the Genetic Algorithm Subtype drop-down list, select Basic or Incremental algorithm subtype.
22. If Basic algorithm subtype was selected, select Yes or No for Use Elitism option.
23. If Incremental algorithm subtype was selected, select the Replacement Scheme and Offspring Number
(number of “children”).
24. Click OK to run the optimization and generate the Optimization Report.
25. Optimization dialogue window shows Average fitness value for current population during optimization.
Standard Criteria
Standard Criteria lets the user select a criterion from a pre-defined list.
For example, if the user selects Net Profit, the optimization will find the parameters that generate the highest Net
Profit.
Custom Criteria
Custom Criteria lets the user create his own criteria. Instead of choosing from a pre-defined list like in Standard
Criteria, the user can script his own criteria. E.g., suppose the user wants to find the parameters that maximize the
Net Profit / Max Drawdown ratio. This ratio isn't pre-defined under Standard Criteria, so it won't be in the dropdown list. However, this ratio can be created using Custom Criteria.
It is also possible to add additional criteria such as number of trades and winning percentage.
E.g., it is possible to specify: the result have more than 300 trades and a winning percentage that's greater than
50%.
The scripting language is JavaScript.
Code Example
The code below creates the Net Profit / Max Drawdown ratio:
if (StrategyPerformance.MaxStrategyDrawDown != 0)
return StrategyPerformance.NetProfit / (-
{
StrategyPerformance.MaxStrategyDrawDown);
}
328
Besides NetProfit and MaxStrategyDrawdown, there are many other properties that can be referenced. The table
below shows the available properties.
For example, to reference the number of trades, simply use StrategyPerformance.TotalTrades. To reference winning
percentage, simply use StrategyPerformance.PercentProfitable.
Name of property in the object
Description
Available in MultiCharts
StrategyPerformance
Available in Portfolio
Optimization
NetProfit
Net Profit
Yes
Yes
GrossProfit
Gross Profit
Yes
Yes
Gross Loss
Gross Loss
Yes
Yes
TotalTrades
Total Trades
Yes
Yes
Percent Profitable
% Profitable
Yes
Yes
Winning Trades
Winning Trades
Yes
Yes
LosingTrades
Losing Trades
Yes
Yes
AvgTrade
Avg Trade
Yes
No
AvgWinningTrade
Avg Winning Trade
Yes
No
AvgLosingTrade
Avg Losing Trade
Yes
No
WinLossRatio
Win/Loss Ratio
Yes
No
MaxConsecWinners
Max Consecutive
Yes
No
Winners
MaxConsecLosers
Max Consecutive Losers
Yes
No
AvgBarsInWinningTrades
Avg Bars in Winner
Yes
No
AvgBarsInLosingTrades
Avg Bars in Loser
Yes
No
MaxStrategyDrawDown
Max Intraday
Drawdown
Yes
Yes
ProfitFactor
Profit Factor
Yes
No
ReturnOnAccount
Return on Account
Yes
No
Understanding Optimization
A strategy is created by implementing trading concepts, ideas, and observations of historical market behavior, into
a trading system. The very idea of a trading system implies a degree of optimization to market behavior.
The process of strategy optimization further enhances and automates this process. Strategy optimization is the
search for the set of optimum parameters for the defined criteria. By testing a range of signal input values,
optimization aids in selecting the values that correspond, based on historical data, to the best strategy performance.
Optimization aids in better understanding of strategy's characteristics and in creating new criteria for entries and
exits.
329
Different traders use different criteria to define strategy performance. Some traders use the highest net profit, while
other traders use the lowest drawdown. MultiCharts lets the trader define his own criteria.
Optimization can have detrimental effects if the user searches for the combination of inputs based solely on the
best performance over a period of historical data and focuses to much on market conditions that may never occur
again. This approach is known as over-optimization or curve-fitting. Performance will not be the same in real trading,
since historical patterns are highly unlikely to be repeated.
Optimization Methods
There are two optimization methods: Exhaustive Search and Genetic Algorithm.
Understanding Exhaustive Search Optimization
Exhaustive, also called Brute-Force, optimization systematically goes through all the potential combinations in
search for the best solution. The advantage of this approach is every single combination will be checked and the
absolute optimum solution identified.
The length of time required for Exhaustive optimization is proportional to the total number of all possible solutions.
The drawback of this approach is that, unless relatively few parameters are involved, the period of time required to
reach a solution may turn out to be unacceptably long. Thus, exhaustive optimization may only be suitable when
there is a limited number of possible solutions.
Understanding Genetic Algorithm Optimization
Genetic Algorithms optimization evaluates only the more promising combinations, finding near-optimum solutions
in a fraction of time that would be required by the brute-force approach, making Genetic Algorithms optimization
powerful enough to analyze strategies with hundreds of parameters. Genetic Optimizer settings add flexibility to
this technique.
GA-based search algorithms utilize methods that mimic a biological evolution. The algorithms start by testing a
number of random combinations, select the combinations with the most potential, and then further combine and
modify them to finally arrive at the best input combinations. Instead of mechanically checking every conservable
combination, genetic algorithms quickly narrow down the number of potential winners, finding and focusing on the
areas that are most profitable and most stable. Thus, genetic algorithms avoid superfluous calculations in the lowest
net profit potential zones. GA approach is well known and accepted in many fields where optimization is required.
The drawback of the GA approach is that the solution found will be a solution approaching the absolute optimum
solution, but not necessarily the absolute optimum solution itself. This drawback, however, is handsomely offset by
the processing power and time savings in cases with a large number of possible solutions.
In general, GA's work is primarily about two abstracts: an Individual (or Genome) and an Algorithm (i.e. Genetic
Algorithm itself). Each Genome instance represents a single unique inputs combination, while GA itself defines how
the evolution should take place. The GA uses a given trading strategy to determine how 'fit' a genome is for survival,
e.g. how much Net Profit does an inputs combination generates in case Net Profit was selected as an Optimization
Criteria.
Here are some GA definitions that help in understanding the process:
Fitness - the overall performance of an individual (e.g. Net Profit ).
Genome (Individual) - a unique combination of strategy input values.
Gene - one of the input variables of a given strategy.
Chromosome - a set of genes, usually related in function.
330
Crossover - a procedure for generating a “child” from two “parent” genomes. Crossover involves multiple genomes.
Mutation - a process when a gene is changed and receives a value that is neither from the "mother" or the "father".
Mutation involves only a single genome each time.
Generation (Population) - a group of individuals (genomes), all “born” at about the same time.
Convergence - the extent of improvement in the average fitness between two consecutive generations; as the
degree of improvement is decreasing, the generations are said to be converging.
In brief, the optimization process works as follows:
•
Based on a multitude of inputs combinations provided, a population of genomes is created.
•
The fitness of each individual is evaluated.
•
The fittest members are retained, and the least fit members gradually discarded.
•
A new population of individuals is generated from the remaining members of the previous population by
applying the crossover and mutation operations, as well as selection and/or replacement strategies (built into the
GA).
•
The fitness of these new individuals is evaluated, the fittest members retained, and the least fit members
gradually discarded
•
The process is repeated, until the specified degree of convergence or generation number is reached (depends
on GA setting selected).
Detailed Description of GA Process
In detail, the optimization process works as follows:
1.
After a number of all possible combinations is determined, an optimal number of individuals is selected.
2.
Each individual is selected at random. These individuals form the first Generation. The optimal number of
individuals is automatically placed in Population Size field and can be changed manually.Tip: An excessively large
Population Size value will result in an increase in calculation time, while an overly small Population Size value will
result in a decrease in calculation accuracy.
Note: MultiCharts' GA support artificially exclusive population. This means that identical individuals cannot exist
inside the same population, and thus the population size can not exceed the total number of input combinations.
The population size is constant for each generation.
3.
The fitness of each individual is evaluated and the least fit individuals discarded.
4.
A new population of individuals is generated from the remaining members of the previous population by
applying the crossover and mutation operations, as well as selection and/or replacement strategies that depend
on the GA subtype:
Crossover and Mutation
MultiCharts uses the so-called Array Uniform Crossover. With this Crossover type, each of the child’s genes can come
from each of the parents with equal probability.
In the Crossover Probability field, the probability of a crossover for each individual is specified; the usual value range
is 0.95-0.99, with the default value of 0.95.
MultiCharts uses the so-called Random Flip Mutation. With this Mutation type, each gene can be replaced with any
other possible gene on random basis.
In the Mutation Probability field, the probability of a mutation for each individual is specified; the usual value range
is 0.01-0.05, with the default value of 0.05.
Tip: An excessively large Mutation Probability value will cause the search to become a primitive random search.
331
GA Subtypes and Replacement Schemas
GA subtype defines the way that GA creates new individuals and replaces old individuals when creating next
generations.
GA subtype can be set in the Genetic Algorithm Subtype drop-down list.
Two GA subtypes are available: Basic and Incremental.
Basic subtype is the standard so-called “simple genetic algorithm”. This algorithm uses non-overlapping generations
and Elitism mode (optional). For each generation, the algorithm creates an entirely new population of individuals (if
the Elitism option is selected, the most fit individuals move on to the next generation).
Elitism
Elitism mode, available for the Basic GA subtype only, allows the fittest individuals to survive and produce "children"
over a span of multiple generations.
Incremental subtype does not create an entirely new population for each generation. It simply adds only one or two
children to the population each time the next generation is created. These one or two children replace one or two
individuals in the previous generation. The individuals to be replaced by the children are chosen according to the
Replacement Schemas used.
Replacement Schemas
Replacement Schemas are available for Incremental subtype only. Schemas define how a new generation should be
integrated into the population. There are three schemes available: Worst, Parent, and Random.
Worst – least fit individuals are replaced
Parent – parent individuals are replaced
Random – individuals are replaced randomly
Offspring Number
Offspring Number is the number of children to be added each time that a new generation is created. One or Two
children can be added.
5.
The fitness of each individual is evaluated and the least fit individuals discarded.
6.
The process is repeated, until the specified degree of convergence or generation number is reached (depends
on GA setting selected).
GA Convergence Type
Genetic Algorithms optimization process has no implicit final result and thus can proceed forever. Therefore, an
"ending-point" must be specified, indicating when the optimization process must come to an end.
Two GA optimization "ending-point" criteria types can be selected: Terminate-Upon-Generation and TerminateUpon-Convergence.
Terminate-Upon-Generation will stop the optimization process once the specified Maximum Number of
Generations is reached.
Terminate-Upon-Convergence will stop the optimization process once the defined Convergence Rate is reached, or
once the defined Maximum Number of Generations is reached.
GA optimization "ending-point" criterion is selected in the Conversion Type drop-down list.
The desired Maximum Number of Generations, Minimum Number of Generations, and Conversion Rate can be set
in the corresponding text boxes.
332
Convergence Rate
Convergence Rate of generations is the ratio between the Convergence value of the two most recent generations
and the Convergence value of the current generation and the generation N generations ago.
GA calculation is stopped after meeting С [x – N] / C [x] >= P condition where : x –
ordinal number of the current generation;
С[x] – convergence value of the two most recent generations;
N – defined minimal number of the generations;
P - convergence rate; values used are usually close to 1, with the default value of 0.99.
Note: Convergence Rate is not calculated for generations that have an ordinal number less than the defined minimal
number of the generations.
Further Reading
This is only a brief introduction to genetic algorithms. We recommend that you learn more about GA on the Internet,
e.g. Wikipedia .
Using Optimization Report
After an optimization process is complete then a detailed Strategy Optimization Report is available for reviewing.
The Strategy Optimization Report allows to review the results of all the test combinations tested (in tabular view).
Columns represent 18 strategy performance fields as well as all the inputs which were optimized during the current
run for each inputs combination tested.
Each row represents a set of test results for a given inputs combination.
Tip: The data in any column can be selected as the optimization criteria.
Note: The Strategy Optimization Report contains the results of the last optimization run only.
Note: Only one optimization report can be opened at a time.
Accessing Optimization Report
To access a Strategy Optimization Report:
1.
Apply a strategy to a chart.
2.
Run an optimization.
3.
In the menu select View then click Strategy Optimization Report.
Strategy Optimization Report Fields
The list of performance indices available is as following:
Net Profit
Gross Profit
Gross Loss
Total Trades
% Profitable
333
Winning Trades
Losing Trades
Avg Trade
Avg Winning Trade
Avg Losing Trade
Win/Loss ratio
Max Consecutive Wins
Max Consecutive Losses
Avg # of Bars in Winners
Avg # of Bars in Losers
Maximum Intraday Drawdown
Profit Factor
Return on Account
Input Values
Note: The performance indices are identical to those in the Performance Report.
Using Optimization Report
Sorting the Strategy Optimization Report
It is possible to sort out the Optimization Report by any combination of 3 main criteria in either Descending or
Ascending order.
To modify the sorting order:
1.
In the Optimization Report set the criterion and sorting order from the Sort by drop-down list.
2.
Repeat for the second drop-down list.
3.
Repeat for the third drop-down list.
Applying an Inputs Combination to a Chart
It is possible to apply the inputs combination that produced the best results during the current optimization run to
the strategy.
To apply the best inputs combination:
1.
Double-click required row in the report.
2.
Click Yes in the confirmation window appeared.
Saving the Strategy Optimization Report
To store optimization report data for every chart through any chart copy or workspace save operations after being
generated, click Preferences, select the Workspaces tab and check the Store Optimization Report check box.
Note: Store Optimization Report option may consume considerable amount of resources and is disabled by default.
334
Exporting the Strategy Optimization Report
It is possible to export the Optimization Report to a comma-separated file, which is preferred for importing into a
spreadsheet application for further analysis.
To export the Optimization Report:
1.
In the Optimization Report click Export… button.
2.
In the Save As dialog window appeared navigate to the required file location.
3.
In the File Name field type in the file name.
Note: By default the file name includes date and time information.
4.
Click Save.
Note: The entire report information will be saved to the file.
Walk Forward Optimization
Walk Forward Optimization is an optimization process that addresses the issue of curve fitting in strategy
development.
Walk Forward Optimization segregates the data series into multiple segments, and each segment is divided into an
in-sample (IS) portion and an out-of-sample (OOS) portion.
Parameter optimization for the strategy is performed using the IS portion of the first segment. The same parameters
are then used to back test the strategy on the OOS portion of the same segment. The process is repeated for the
remaining segments.
The OOS performance results from each of the segments are considered "real" instead of "curve-fit" because the
parameters that produced the OOS results were generated from IS data.
Walk Forward Optimization (not anchored)
Suppose a data series has 220 bars, and it is divided into five segments of 100 bars per segment.
The first 70 bars of each segment are the IS portion and the remaining 30 bars are the OOS portion.
The table below shows the segmentation details.
Segment
IS
Segment
1
1-70
Segment
2
# of Bars per Segment
OOS
71-100
100
31-100
101130
100
Segment
3
61-130
131160
100
Segment
4
91-160
161190
100
Segment
5
121190
191220
100
335
Step 1: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 1's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 1's OOS data.
Step 2: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 2's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 2's OOS data.
Step 3: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 3's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 3's OOS data.
Step 4: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 4's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 4's OOS data.
Step 5: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 5's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 5's OOS data. The walk forward optimization is complete.
There are OOS performance results for bars 71-220. Walk Forward Optimization considers the OOS performance
results "real" instead of "curve-fit" because the parameters that produced the OOS results were generated from IS
data.
As shown, the starting point of each subsequent segment begins 30 bars after the starting point of the previous
segment. The starting point of each segment steps forward. Hence, this type of walk forward optimization is said to
be not anchored. The reason the step is 30 bars is because that's the length of the OOS portion.
Walk Forward Optimization
Note: The significance of OOS results from Walk Forward Optimization is debatable. For more information, please
see additional literature about this subject.
Walk Forward Optimization (anchored)
Anchoring means the starting point of all segments is the same as the starting point of the first segment.
The starting points do not step forward. Hence, this type of walk forward optimization is said to be anchored.
The effect is that the IS portion of each subsequent segment is longer than IS portion of the previous segment, and
therefore the total length of each subsequent segment is also longer than the total length of the previous segment.
The table below shows the segmentation details.
Segment
IS
# of Bars per Segment
OOS
Segment
1
1-70
71-100
100
Segment
2
1100
101130
130
Segment
3
1130
131160
160
Segment
4
1160
161190
190
Segment
5
1190
191220
220
336
The rest of the anchored walk forward optimization process is the same as not-anchored walk forward optimization.
Using Walk Forward Optimization
To use Walk forward Optimization:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
chart and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Select Format in the main menu and click Signal.
-
Double-click any one of the signal's labels on the chart.
a
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
, right-click the label and then click Format Signals.
2.
Select the Signals tab and select the signal in the box.
3.
Click the Optimize button. The Select Optimization Method box will appear.
4.
Select either Exhaustive or Genetic radio button for the type of optimization. (Both will work with Walk
Forward Optimization.)
5.
Select the Walk Forward check box.
6.
Enter the number of bars/days for the IS portion of a segment into the IS textbox.
7.
Enter the number of bars/days for the OOS portion of a segment into the OOS textbox.
8.
Check the Anchored checkbox to use anchoring. Uncheck the Anchored checkbox to not use anchoring.
9.
Click the OK button.
10. Select the Optimizable Inputs tab. Input start and end values for the inputs.
11. If performing an Exhaustive optimization, select the Optimization Criteria tab and complete inputs.
If performing a Genetic optimization, select the Algorithm-specific Properties tab and complete inputs. For
more information, see Performing Optimization
12. Click the OK button.
337
Data Playback
Understanding Data Playback
Data Playback is a useful tool for traders wishing to stream data step-by-step data backward and forward in order
to see how their strategy would behave in real-time. It allows playback of market data with the specified speed and
resolution.
Playback in MultiCharts has a number of distinctive features making it a unique simulation tool:
•
Jump to Bar Mode allowing you to set the start point with just one click.
•
Possibility to choose Playback Resolution: tick by tick, second by second, minute by minute etc.
•
Flexible Playback Speed: per bar (as is) or x updates per second.
•
Step Backward/Forward allowing you to move forward or backward on the time scale without losing
indicators/signals values.
Data Playback on the Chart
1. Set the starting point of Data Playback by one of the following methods:
•
Click on the Jump To Bar button
•
Set the date and time in the Playback Start Date/Time box
button
2.
on the Data Playback Toolbar and click on the chart; or:
and click the Jump To Time
on the Data Playback Toolbar.
Set the Playback Resolution (As is – bar per bar, tick by tick etc.) by one of the following methods:
•
Select the resolution from the Playback Resolution list
Toolbar; or:
on the Data Playback
•
In the main menu select Format, then point to Data Playback, Playback Resolution and select the resolution.
3.
Set playback speed using the Playback Speed slider
4.
Start Data Playback by one of the following methods:
•
•
Click the Pause/Resume Playback button
on the Data Playback toolbar; or:
In the main menu select Format, then point to Data Playback and click Play.
on the Data Playback toolbar.
To terminate Data Playback:
•
Click the Go To Realtime button
on Data Playback toolbar; or:
•
In the main menu select Format, then point to Data Playback and choose Go To Realtime
Note: If you try to place a manual order during data playback when a broker profile is connected, the order will be
sent to the broker with the current market price. That is not possible to place simulated orders during the data
playback for testing purposes. All orders are sent to the currently connected broker.
Data Playback in Market Scanner
Playback Start Date/Time box allows choosing the starting point for Data Playback in the market scanner.
338
To set starting time and date, input the necessary date and time into Playback Start
Date/Time box
and click the Jump To Date button DP_jump_to_time_btn on the Data
Playback toolbar. When the starting point is set, the playback is set to Pause mode by default.
Note: Not all Data Playback resolutions are available for market scanner (See Data Playback Limitations)
Step Backward/Forward Playback
Step Backward/Forward feature allows step-by-step playback of the data without losing indicators/signals values.
Click the Step Backward or Forward Playback button to move backward or forward on the time scale.
Set the step size by one of the following methods:
•
Click the arrow near the Step Backward
or Forward Playback button
and then select the step
size from the list; or:
•
In the main menu select Format, then point to Data Playback, point to Step Forward/ Step Backward and
choose the step size.
Data Playback Modes
Data Playback has two modes: Local and Global
When the Local mode is selected, the bars are played independently on each chart or scanner window, where the
Data Playback feature has been enabled. Each window will have its own starting point of the playback. When the
playback is enabled on one window, other windows with Data Playback disabled will receive the real-time data from
the data source.
Data Playback
When the Global mode is selected, all the data series on all opened windows of all the workspaces of one
MultiCharts instance will be played. In this case the starting point of the playback will be the same for all charts and
scanner windows.
Note: In the Global mode, all the charts are played back within their own time zone.
If the time zones of the charts differ, the time of the playback starting points for those charts will still be the same.
Select Global playback mode by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Global mode button; or:
•
In the main menu select Format, then point to Data Playback and click Global mode in the list.
Note: If Global mode is not selected, Local mode is used.
Data Playback Limitations
Only the following playback resolutions are available on the chart with multiple data series, in market scanner and
in the Global mode:
•
Second by Second
•
Minute by Minute;
•
Hour by Hour;
339
•
Day by Day.
Note: If the playback resolution is lower than the resolution of the data series on the chart, additional detailed data
will be downloaded from the data source. In this case status line indicates “Waiting for Detailed Data”.
Data series, indicators and strategies markers will disappear at the right side of the playback starting point. They will
appear once Data Playback starts.
All the drawings remain in their original place. They can disappear when the starting point is set. When the playback
reaches the place where the drawing was put, the drawing appears.
If a study require more data for calculation than there are at the starting point, the calculation will start when the
playback reaches the required bars number.
The real-time data is downloaded and collected while Data Playback is active.
When the playback reaches its end, real-time data is displayed on the chart
Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard Shortcuts allow configuring custom key combinations to execute frequently used commands.
Editing Keyboard Shortcuts
To edit Keyboard Shortcuts:
1.
Select File in the Main menu and click Keyboard Shortcuts…
2.
Select shortcuts category from the Category list.
3.
Double-click on the command.
4.
Press desired key combination. If this combination is already in use the associated command will be displayed
in the Shortcut currently used by: field.
5.
Click Assign.
6.
Click OK.
To delete the shortcut for the selected command click Clear.
Click Reset to Defaults to revert custom changes.
Custom Commands
Trading.Custom category allows to create custom orders and assign custom key combinations to them.
Click <<Click for New Custom Order>> to setup a custom order, click OK and follow the steps to edit a Keyboard
Shortcut.
Charting.Custom and Scanner.Custom categories allow to assign custom key combinations to a particular study
applied to a chart or scanner window.
Click <<Click for New CustInsert Study>> to select a study, click OK and follow the steps to edit a Keyboard Shortcut.
Note: Custom key combinations should consist of Shift and/or Ctrl and/or Alt key plus a letter key, a number key or
a function key (F1, F2 etc.) Other keys that can be used are: Insert, Home, Page Up, Delete, End, Page Down and
function keys (F1, F2 etc.).
340
Order Confirmation
To enable/disable order confirmation window for orders placed/cancelled using Keyboard Shortcuts select File in
the main menu, click Preferences, select the Trading tab and check/uncheck the Show order confirmation dialog
when placing/cancelling orders using keyboard shortcuts check box.
341
Real-Time Market Scanner
Understanding real-Time Market Scanner
The Real-Time Market Scanner (also known as "Screener" or "Quote Window") is a data grid (quote sheet) which
can display quotes, market data, and indicator data in spreadsheet format.
The Scanner is indispensable for monitoring, screening, searching, and organizing many symbols according to user
defined criteria. The Scanner can accept symbols from different data feeds.
The Scanner can also plot charts automatically without having to manually add the chart via a new chart window.
Symbols can also be sorted by user-defined criteria.
The Scanner is used to:
•
Monitor real-time market data in different resolutions (ticks, minutes, days, etc)
•
Find trading opportunities based on customizable criteria and sorting
•
Plot studies that are either newly built or imported from other sources Scanner features:
•
5 ,000 symbols per Scanner window
•
200+ built-in studies
•
Multiple-core and multiple CPU support
•
Symbol sorting either on a per-second basis or based on a timer
•
Ability to mix different data feeds within the same Scanner window
•
Ability to use different resolutions for each symbol
•
Ability to use all resolutions available in MultiCharts
•
Ability to handle both real-time and end-of-day data
•
Access to locally stored data
•
Ability to handle different custom sessions for different symbols
•
Ability to link symbols within a Scanner to a chart
•
Ability to create a chart directly from the Scanner with a mouse click
•
Ability to choose the number of bars/days back for study calculations
•
Visual, audio, and e-mail alerts
•
Direct access to PowerLanguage Editor to view and modify study scripts
•
Script-driven text generation in the Scanner cells
•
Customizable text and background colors
•
Dedicated market trend histogram
Working with Scanner Windows
A Scanner window with all the settings is always created and then being saved in a Workspace.
Note: When the window position is detached it can be visually located outside of the Workspace.
The number of windows that can be added to workspaces is limited only by computer's hardware configuration.
342
To create a new Scanner window:
1.
Click on the New Scanner Window
icon on the Main Toolbar, or
2.
Select File in the main menu, then point to New and click on New Scanner Window, or
3.
Use CTRL+SHIFT+INSERT hot key combination, or
4.
Right-click on the empty area of the workspace and select Scanner Window.
You can copy a symbol or symbols from the Real-Time Market Scanner or from some other source and then paste it
into the Real-Time Market Scanner.
To copy and paste symbols within the Real-Time Market Scanner:
1.
Highlight a symbol or symbols that you need with the help of CTRL or/and SHIFT buttons on your keyboard
2.
Right click on the highlighted space and select Copy from the dropbox below, or
3.
Press CTRL+C to copy selected symbols
4.
Right click on the cell where you want to paste it and select Paste from the dropbox below, or
5.
Press CTRL+V to paste selected symbols.
To create a Group of symbols in the Real-Time Market Scanner:
1.
Right click on the cell in the Real-Time Market Scanner where you want to create it
2.
Select Insert Group from the dropbox below, or
3.
Go to the main menu of MultiCharts Insert
4.
Select Group, or
5.
Press F8 on your keyboard.
To rename Group:
1.
Right click on the Group line
2.
Select Rename
3.
Enter the name of the group
4.
Click Enter.
To hide/extend the symbols in Group:
1.
Right click on the Group line
2.
Select Toggle, or
3.
Click on “+” / “-“.
Working with Grid
The Scanner is a data grid that can display quotes, market data, and indicator data in spreadsheet format. Each row
always includes the following columns:
Symbol ( first column )
Resolution ( second column )
Trend ( third column )
The positions of the columns above are fixed and cannot be moved.
Ten additional data columns can be added. Each data column can have ten sub-columns.
For example, the Data column counts as one data column with seven sub-columns.
343
Selecting an Active Cell within the Scanner Window
It is possible to use the mouse or the keyboard to navigate an active cell within the Scanner window:
Using the mouse:
1.
Select the cell to make it active.
2.
Use the scroll bars located at the bottom and the right side of the Scanner window for viewing the cells that
extend outside the visible range of the window.
Using the keyboard:
•
Arrow Keys - moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow key
•
HOME – returns the active cell position to beginning of the row
•
END – returns the active cell position to the end of the row •
PAGEUP – moves the active cell position one
page down
•
PAGEDOWN – moves the active cell position one page up
•
CTRL+HOME – returns the active cell position to the top left corner
•
CTRL+END – returns the active cell position to the bottom right corner
•
F2 – edits the current cell
•
F7 – Insert Study
•
TAB - moves the cursor to the next column
Making Column Width Fit to Text
To fit column width to text:
1.
Move a mouse pointer to the right border of a column header (e.g. Study title or Plot title).
2.
Double click when the pointer shape is changed to Horizontal Resize http:// www. multicharts. com/ img/wiki/
cursors/HResize.gif.The column width will be fitted to the text in the column.
Moving Study Columns Position
To move a Study column:
1. Drag this Study header to a new location.
Note: Symbol, Resolution, and Trend columns cannot be moved.
Creating Chart Directly from a Scanner Window
To plot a chart directly from a Scanner window:
•
Right-click on the symbol name and select Create Chart. A chart will be plotted in a new chart window.
or:
•
Double-click on the symbol's Trend cell. A chart will be plotted in a new chart window.
Note: Indicators from the scanner will be applied to the new chart automatically.
Changing the Scanner Theme Colors
To change the Scanner's theme colors:
1.
Select View from the main menu.
2.
Select Themes to choose the theme.
344
To change indicators values color to the inverted background color:
1.
Select View from the main menu.
2.
Select Themes and check the Invert Default Colors check box.
Working with Studies
Studies can be added, formatted, removed, and customized.
A study script can be accessed directly from the Scanner.
It is possible to change settings for multiple studies at once.
Indicated plots of a study can be hidden or displayed when necessary. Audio, visual and E-mail alerts can be enabled.
Adding Studies
1.
Open the Insert Study window.
•
Press the F7 button, or
•
Select Insert in the main menu and select Study, or
•
Right-click on any cell in the Scanner window and select Insert Study.
2.
Select either an individual study or multiple studies. To select multiple studies, hold down the CTRL button and
select each study.
A study's color is defined in its PowerLanguage Script.
To edit the colors, use the reserved words SetPlotColor and SetPlotBGColor.
Formatting Studies
To format a study:
•
Double-click on the symbol's cell in the study's column, or
•
Right-click on the symbol's cell in the study's column. Select Format Study.
The Format Study dialog window will appear. If a study has two or more plots, then formatting will be applied to all
the plots for that particular study.
Setting Inputs Values
An Input is a constant used in the study's calculations. Studies can have one or more inputs, or none at all. Each
input is assigned a name.
There are three types of inputs: Numeric, True/False, and String. Studies can be modified by changing the input
Values. Most, but not all, studies use input values.
Learn more about Default Studies Inputs.
One of the main advantages of using inputs is that the study's logic can be changed by simply changing the input
values. Editing the study's code is not required. The inputs can be modified before and after the study has been
inserted.
345
Setting the Symbol Properties
Study properties can be different for all symbols in the Scanner window. Study properties include Number Format
and Update On Every Tick sections. To define the number of decimals to display for all the study plots of the specified
symbol,
•
Select Same as Symbol radio button to use the same number of decimals as the symbol, or
•
Select Show radio button and enter the number of decimals.
To recalculate study on every tick, select the Update On Every Tick check box.
Note: Even with this check box checked, updates are still limited to two updates in one second.
Note: If the Use as Default check box is selected, then the current Properties settings will be used for every newly
added symbol.
Enabling the Alerts
Visual, audio, or e-mail alerts can be sent when market conditions meet the criteria specified in the study.
To enable alerts,
1.
Select the Enable Alerts check box under the Alerts.
2.
In the Alert Conditions Check section, select whether the alerts will be triggered On Bar Close or Every Tick.
Audio Alert
To enable Audio alerts,
1.
Select the Audio Alert check box.
2. Select the Beep radio button for a standard beep sound, or select the Sound radio button to play a custom
sound.
If Sound is selected, select the .wav sound file.
3.
Press the Test button to test the sound.
4.
Select Play Once to play selected sound once or Repeat to play it continuously.
Note: The computer must be equipped with a Sound Card to support the Audio Alert function.
Visual Alert
To enable Visual alert:
1.
Select the Visual Alert check box.
2. In the Display Notify Window for drop-down list, select the period of time for the alert message to be
displayed.
To enable E-mail alert:
1.
In the E-mail Alert section, select the E-mail Alert check box.
2.
Press the Settings button to access to the E-mail Alert settings window.
3.
Enter the email addresses of the sender.
4.
Enter the email address of the recipient. To send the email to multiple recipients, separate each email address
with a semi-colon.
5.
Enter the SMTP Server Name or IP address, and Port number into the textboxes. Please get this information
from your email provider.
346
6.
Check the SMTP Server authentication data checkbox if your SMTP server requires authentication to send
emails. (Usually, if your email account requires a login and password, you need to check this box.) 7. Enter the User
name and Password. (This is usually your email login and password.)
8. Press the Test button to send a test email.
If the sending process has been successful a message will appear in the pop-up window:
If the sending process has been unsuccessful
a message will appear in the pop-up window:
9. Press OK to close the E-mail Alert window.
Example of Email Alert Message
01.10.2008 17:48:50 ( alert time and date )
Source: Bollinger Bands (study that triggered alert)
Symbol: ESZ8 (traded symbol name)
Resolution: 1 Tick Bar (resolution used)
Price: 1157,5000 (price value at the moment when defined conditions has been met)
Message: Price crossing over lower price band (Message carrying information about the study condition that has
been met)
Note: To use these alert settings as the default for all new indicators, select Use as Default check box.
Displaying Studies with Two or More Plots
It is possible to hide/display plots of studies, in case a study has more than one plot. To hide/display plots of a study,
1.
Right-click on a cell in the study's column or on the study title.
2.
Select Show Plots.
3.
Select or deselect the plots to be displayed/hidden.
Formatting a Study for All Symbols
Formatting a Study for All Symbols makes it possible to modify settings for all symbols at the same time.
To format a Study for all symbols:
1.
Right-click anywhere within the Study's column, excluding the header.
2.
Select Format 'Study Title' Study for All Symbols. The Format Study window will appear.
The settings for all existing studies will be changed. However newly added symbols will not inherit these settings.
Learn more about Formatting Studies.
Removing Studies
To remove a study:
1.
Right-click on any cell within the Study's column, excluding the header.
347
2.
Select Remove 'Study Title' Study.
Accessing Scripts
To access a script from a Scanner window:
1.
Right-click on any cell within the Study's column, excluding the header.
2.
Select Open 'Study Title' Script. A PowerLanguage Editor window will appear.
3.
Customize the study script in the PowerLanguage Editor.
Learn more about Working with Studies in PowerLanguage Editor.
Working with Symbols
In the Scanner it is possible to add, format, and remove symbols.
Symbols can be added from diverse data feeds and have different settings.
Linking of the symbols to the chart or multiple charts makes it possible to plot charts in considerably small time
period.
Symbols can be sorted according to the defined criteria with possibility to use a timer.
Adding a Symbol
To add a new symbol to the Scanner window:
1.
Access Format Instruments dialog window:
•
Press F5 key on the keyboard, or
•
Select Symbol in the main menu then select Symbol, or
•
Double-click on any cell in any empty row, or
•
Right-click on any cell and select Insert Symbol....
2.
Select the Symbol tab.
3.
Select a data feed in the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Delete the text, if any, in the Symbol/Description drop-down list.
The text is used to filter available symbols. If there is text, then only symbols that contain the text will be available.
Learn more about Adding Symbols to QuoteManager Symbol List
5.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab.
Tip: Use the category tabs to list only a particular category of symbols.
Tip: The list can be sorted by any column. To sort, click on the column header.
It is also possible to add multiple symbols at the same time. To highlight multiple symbols use one of the following
methods:
•
Click on the symbol to begin with and while holding SHIFT key click on the last necessary symbol. All symbols
in the range between these two will be selected; or:
•
Use CTRL in combination with the mouse to select/deselect symbols one by one. While holding CTRL, a single
click will select the symbol and second click on the same symbol will deselect it; or:
•
While holding SHIFT use the UP ARROW and the DOWN ARROW keys to select a group of neighbor symbols;
or:
348
•
While holding CTRL, use the UP ARROW and the DOWN ARROW keys in combination with the SPACE key to
select symbols.
•
Using the Ctrl+A keyboard shortcut to select all symbols.
6.
Сlick OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Read more about Formatting Symbols
Note: The order of the symbols in the scanner may be different from the order of the symbol selected in the Format
Instruments window if automated sorting is turned on.
Note: The maximum number of symbols per one Scanner window is 5,000.
Tip: Symbols can also be copied and pasted from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or text file to the Scanner.
Formatting Symbols
To format a symbol in the Scanner window:
1.
Access the Format Instruments dialog window using one of the following methods:
•
Select Scanner in the main menu and click on Format Instruments…, or:
•
Double-click on the necessary symbol in the symbol list, or:
•
Right-click on the necessary symbol and select Format Instruments...
2.
Modify appropriate symbol settings if needed:
Symbols
Chart Resolution
Quote Field
Sessions
Build Volume On
Time Zone
Fractional Price Scale Format for Symbols
3.
Modify Data Range settings if needed (Using Custom Data Range):
1.
Select the Use Custom Data Range check box to set the number of bars/days back for indicators applied to this
symbol. Clear the check box to use the default bars/days back.
2.
Enter a number in the text box (from 1 to 100000) and select either Bars Back or Days Back in the drop-down
list.
3.
Select the most recent date from which to calculate Bars Back or Days Back range.
Note: By default, current date is set for the initial value.
4.
Click OK.
Formatting All Symbols
To edit resolution for all the symbols at the same time:
1.
Right-click on any cell in the Resolution column.
2.
Select Format Resolutions for All Symbols....
3.
Format Resolution (All symbols) dialog window will appear.
Learn more about Chart Resolution.
Note: Resolution settings will be applied to all existing symbols; however newly added symbols will not inherit these
settings.
349
To change the custom data range for all the symbols at the same time:
1.
Right-click on any cell in the Resolution column.
2.
Select Format Resolution for All Symbols....
3.
Select the Use Custom Data Range check box.
4.
Enter a number in the text box (from 1 to 100000) and select either Bars Back or Days Back in the drop-down
list.
5.
Select the most recent date from which to calculate Bars Back or Days Back range.
Note: By default, current date is set for the initial value.
Removing a Symbol
To remove a symbol from the Scanner use one of the following methods:
•
Click on the symbol name and use the DELETE button, or •
Select Edit in the main menu and click on Remove Symbol,
or
•
Right-click on the symbol and select Remove Symbol.
Removing All Symbols
To remove all symbols from the Scanner:
1.
Select Edit in the main menu.
2.
Click on Remove All Symbols. A confirmation window will appear.
3.
Click Yes to remove all symbols, or No to cancel.
Sorting Symbols
Sorting makes it possible to quickly locate and monitor best trading opportunities defined by customizable criteria.
The market data lines in the Scanner can be sorted based on any column.
To sort based on a single criterion:
Double-click on the column header. The market data lines will be sorted based on ascending or descending order.
Tip: Double-click on the same header will switch from the ascending to the descending order of sorting.
To sort based on multiple criteria (up to three),
1.
Right-click on any market data line and select Sort. The Sorting Settings window will appear.
2.
Select the first criteria to sort by using the Sort by drop-down list. Then press the Ascending/Descending
button to sort by ascending or descending order.
3.
Select the second criteria to sort by using the Then by drop-down list. Then press the Ascending/Descending
button to sort by ascending or descending order.
4.
Select the third criteria to sort by using the Then by drop-down list. Then press the Ascending/Descending
button to sort by ascending or descending order.
To sort automatically:
Select the Sort Data Every check box and enter the time period in seconds.
350
Linking Symbols
Symbols in the Scanner can be linked to a chart plot. After linking, the selected symbol in the Scanner can be easily
plotted by simply clicking on the symbol in the Scanner. The symbol will plot automatically in the chart.
To link a Scanner symbol to a chart plot:
1.
Create a Chart window using any symbol.
2.
Create a Scanner window within the same or different workspace.
3.
Select the Instrument Link
button on the Instrument column header in the Scanner. Select a color.
4. Select the Instrument Link
button on the Status Line of the Chart window to be linked. Select the same
color as the color chosen in the Scanner.
Note: The Instrument Link
button will not appear if it is hidden in the Status Line settings.
5. In the Scanner window select a cell that contains a symbol's ticker. The chart for the symbol will be plotted in
the Chart window.
Note: The symbol name is linked to the Chart window. The other settings, such as Resolution of the Chart, Quote
field, Time Zone, Build Volume on, and Sessions will not be affected.
To unlink a chart from the scanner:
Click the Instrument Link
button on the chart and change it to Not Linked
.
Note: All studies or signals previously applied to the chart will be recalculated after linking.
Note: All manually placed drawings will stay in their original locations.
Note: Objects based on formula calculations (e.g., signal arrows, etc.) may disappear if the formula calculation on
the new data series does not generate an object.
351
Time and Sales
Time & Sales information is used by professional traders to monitor the current price movements at its most detailed
level. Time & Sales shows each individual trade as it occurs, and is displayed as a scrolling list. Time & Sales shows
the exact price that each trade occurs at, and also whether the trade occurred at the bid or ask. This information
shows whether there are currently more buyers or sellers, and also what prices they are buying and selling at. Also,
Time & Sales shows the amount of volume that each trade includes (the number of contracts that were traded). This
shows whether there are more contracts being bought or sold, and at which prices the largest amounts of volume
trading.
1. Time & Sales Instrument Selector,
are
2. Time & Sales Status Line,
3. Time & Sales Column Header,
4. Time & Sales Scrolling List.
Creating New Time& Sales Window
Open a new Time& Sales window by one of following methods:
•
Click the New Time& Sales Window icon
on the Main toolbar, or:
•
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click Time& Sales Window.
352
Selecting Instrument
To select the instrument you want to trade with:
•
Type the symbol name into the Instrument Selector field and press Enter; or:
•
Click on the Lookup button
to select the necessary symbol from the database.
Linking Time & Sales Window
When the symbol for any one chart of the linked group is changed, the
changes will automatically be applied to the rest of the linked
windows (Chart, DOM window, Scanner window, Time&Sales
Window).
•
To link a Time & Sales Window by symbol, click the Instrument
Link button on the Instrument Selector of the Time & Sales Window
and select desired linking color;
•
.
To un-link a Time & Sales Window, select Not Linked
Adjusting Time & Sales Window
Full and Compact Modes
Compact Mode hides Instrument Selector, Status Line and Column
Header of the Time & Sales Window. To switch between Full and
Compact Modes of Time & Sales Window:
1. Right click on the Time & Sales Scrolling List; 2. Select
Switch to Compact Mode or Switch To Full Mode Or:
1.
Right click on the Time & Sales Scrolling List;
2.
Select Filter data...;
3.
Check/Uncheck Full Mode check box.
Formatting Columns
To adjust columns that are to be indicated on Time & Sales Window:
1.
Right click on the Column Header;
2.
Check/Uncheck the columns names that should be indicated;
Or:
1.
Right click on the Time & Sales Scrolling List;
2.
Navigate the mouse pointer to Format Columns; 3.
Check/Uncheck the columns names that should be indicated;
To align text in columns:
1.
Right click on the Time & Sales Scrolling List;
353
2.
Navigate the mouse pointer to Format Columns;
3. Navigate the mouse pointer to Alignment;
4. Select one of three types of alignment:
•
Left
•
Center
•
Right
Formatting Time & Sales Window Appearance
Appearance of Time & Sales Window can be adjusted in Appearance
settings window. To open Appearance settings window:
1.
Right click on the Time & Sales Scrolling List;
2.
Select Appearance....
Changing Colors
Colors used in Time & Sales Window can be adjusted under Colors
section of the Appearance settings window.
1.
Filled At column contains the levels where the trades were
executed.
2.
Foreground column. Select the color of the text to be used for an each level in Time & Sales Window.
3.
Backgound column. Select the color of the background to be used for an each level in Time & Sales Window.
Changing Background Color
Background Color of Time & Sales Window can be adjusted under Bachground color section of the Appearance
settings window.
Select one of 40 pre-defined colors or define a custom color by clicking the Other... button.
Changing Font
Font, Font Size and Font Style used in Time & Sales Window can be adjusted under Font section of the Appearance
settings window.
Appearance Defaults
To save the current settings as default check Use as Default check box.
To reset configuration to default settings click the Reset to Defaults button.
Note: The configuration indicated on a screenshot nearby is pre-defined Default settings of Time & Sales Window
appearance.
Filtering Time & Sales Window Data
To apply filters to the data used in Time & Sales Window:
1.
Right click on the Time & Sales Scrolling List;
2.
Select Filter Data....
354
Changing Number Of Rows
Number of Rows used in Time & Sales Window can be adjusted under
Number of Rows section of the Filter Data settings window:
•
Auto. Select this mode to make the number of rows be auto-
adjusted.
•
Manual. Select this mode and set the number of rows to be fixed
in Time & Sales Window.
Changing Update Time
Frequency of data updates in Time & Sales Window can be adjusted
under Update Data section of the Filter Data settings window.
Note: Available time range for the updates is 0.1 - 1.0 s.
Changing Direction of Latest Updates
The latest updates of the data can be indicated on the top or at the bottom of the Time & Sales Scrolling List.
Direction of the latest updates can be selected under Add Data section of the Filter Data settings window.
Aggregation of Similar Ticks
It is possible to group the ticks with the same price and make them be indicated as one line. In this case, the number
of ticks with the same price will be indicated near the price in Time & Sales Scrolling List.
Aggregation of Similar Ticks can be enabled in Filter Data settings window.
Indication of Price Change
If the price of the current tick differs from the price of the previous one, an arrow showing directoin of price change
can be shown at the Time & Sales Scrolling List.
Indication of Price Change can be enabled in Filter Data settings window.
Filtering Time & Sales Data
Time & Sales Data can be filtered by:
•
Date
•
Time
•
Price
•
Volume
•
Execution Level (Filled At)
To apply a filter to Time & Sales data:
1.
Right click on the Time & Sales Scrolling List;
2.
Select Filter Data...;
3.
Check the necessary filter;
4.
Set comparison condition (=, >, <, >=, <= , != (not equal));
5.
Set comparison value;
6.
Click OK to apply the filter.
Filter Defaults
355
To save the current settings as default check Use as Default check box.
To reset configuration to default settings click the Reset to Defaults button.
Note: The configuration indicated on a screenshot nearby is pre-defined Default settings of Time & Sales Window
filters.
356
QuoteManager
Managing Data
Data Cache
The subsequent loading of previously created charts with multi-tick count-based resolutions is drastically
accelerated by use of "Cache" technology.
Whenever the basic tick data is converted to a complex count-based resolution (for example, to 64-tick bars), the
converted data is stored in the cache for future use.
As much of the stored data segment as possible is used when another chart with the same resolution is plotted.
When a previously created chart is reloaded, the stored data is also used.
The cache can be cleared, forcing a fresh set of data to be loaded and used.
To clear the Cache:
1.
Open the QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
Right-click on the symbol, for which the cache must be cleared, and then click Clear Cache.
3.
In the dialog box that appears, click OK to clear the cache for that symbol, or click Cancel to cancel the
operation.
Editing Data
This QuoteManager tool is necessary to review and edit data. It helps to quickly find and correct the bad ticks as
well as add or delete new data.
Operating with Data
It is possible to modify data settings, add, insert, delete and find the necessary data. All these arrangements are
performed in the Edit Data window.
357
Accessing Edit Data Window
There are 3 ways to access the Edit Data window:
1.
In the Edit menu click Edit Data…
2.
Right-click on the selected symbol and select Edit Data…
3.
Use the Ctrl+R combination of hotkeys.
Modifying Data Settings
To load the data from the data storage one should define the data settings in the Edit Data window.
It is possible to select the desired resolution type, field and time zone.
One can also specify the start date/time and the end date/time for the loaded data.
When the data is loaded it is possible to change the data values.
To modify data settings:
1.
In the Data Settings section, select the necessary resolution type from the Resolution drop-down list.
2.
In the Data Settings section, select the necessary field from the Field drop-down list.
Note: In the field section only those fields are displayed for which the data is collected.
3.
In the Data Settings section, select the necessary time zone from the Time Zone drop-down list. 3 time zones
are available: Local, GMT and Exchange.
4.
In the Data Range section, enter the necessary date in the Start field or use the drop-down calendar. Then
enter the necessary time.
Note: The time field is available with the tick and minute resolutions only.
5.
In the Data Range section, enter the necessary date in the End field or use the drop-down calendar. Then enter
the necessary time.
Note: The time field is available with the tick and minute resolutions only.
6.
Press the Load button and the loaded data will be displayed in the Data section.
Note: For the quotes with the tick resolution there will be displayed the Date, Time, Price and Volume values.
Note: For the quotes with the minute resolution there will be displayed the Date, Time, Open, High, Low, Close, Up
Volume, Down Volume, Unchanged Volume, Total Volume, Up Ticks, Down Ticks, Unchanged Ticks and Total Ticks
values.
Note: For the quotes with the day resolution there will be displayed the Date, Time, Open, High, Low, Close, Up
Volume, Down Volume, Unchanged Volume, Total Volume, Up Ticks, Down Ticks, Unchanged Ticks, Total Ticks and
Open Interest values.
Adding New Data
To add a new quote:
In the Edit Data window press the Add button to add a new quote. Each new quote will be added to the end of the
quote list.
Note: The difference between the Add and Insert buttons is that by pressing the Add button a quote is added to the
end of the quote list and by pressing the Insert button - at the beginning of the quote list.
358
Inserting New Data
To insert a new quote:
At the beginning of the quote list press the Insert button in the Edit Data window.
If the distance between the quotes is more than minimal increment for the given resolution type, it is possible to
insert a new quote between these quotes.
Note: Only in this case, the Insert button becomes active.
Deleting Data
To delete a quote or several quotes:
In the Data section select the necessary quote or quotes and press the Delete button.
Finding Data
To find the necessary quote or quotes:
1.
Press the Find… button and the Find and Goto window will appear.
2.
Select the Find tab.
3.
On the Find tab select from the 1st drop-down list according to what value the necessary quote or quotes
should be found.
4.
On the Find tab select from the 2nd drop-down list the necessary condition of the search.
5.
Enter in the field (s) the necessary number (or percent) corresponding to the selected condition.
6.
To find quote by quote, press the Find button. The Find button will change in the Find Next button, if you want
to find more than one quote with the selected conditions.
7.
To mark all the quotes corresponding to the selected conditions, press the Mark All button.
8.
Press the Close button to close the Find and Goto window.
Editing Data
Going to Data
To go to the necessary quote:
1.
Press the Find… button and the Find and Goto window will appear.
2.
Select the GoTo tab.
3. On the GoTo tab select from the 1st drop-down list according to what value the necessary quote should be
found.
4.
On the GoTo tab in the 2nd field enter the necessary date or use the drop-down calendar.
5.
On the GoTo tab enter the necessary time.
Note: The time field is available with the tick and minute resolutions only.
6.
Press the GoTo button to go to the necessary quote.
7.
Press the Close button to close the Find and Goto window.
Selecting All Quotes
Press the Select All button to mark all the quotes.
It is useful when all the quotes should be deleted.
359
Exporting Data
The quotes saved in the storage can be exported to a text file (ASCII) or a .qmd file (MultiCharts data format).
The program allows the user to specify the necessary data columns and their order as well as the start/end
date/time.
How to export data
To export data for all instruments into an .qmd file (MultiCharts data format):
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:


2.
click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
In QuoteManager main menu select File, then point to Export Data and click Export All Instruments… ;or Click
the Export Data
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select necessary options
4.
Click Next
5.
Enter the name of the *.qmd file and choose the path where it will be located.
6.
Click Next
7.
Click Finish.
To export data for a particular instrument / group of instruments into an .qmd file (MultiCharts data format):
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

2.
click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select a symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section). The program always uses the symbol's Price
Scale when exporting.
3.
In QuoteManager main menu select File, then point to Export Data and click Export Instruments… ;or Click the
Export Data
icon on the toolbar.
4.
Select necessary options
5.
Click Next
6.
Enter the name of the *.qmd file and choose the path where it will be located.
7.
Click Next
8.
Click Finish.
Exporting Data
To export data into an ASCII file:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
360
2.

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select a symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section). The program always uses the symbol's Price
Scale when exporting.
3.
On the File menu, click Export Data, or click the Export Data
icon on the toolbar.
4.
Select ASCII or press Ctrl+E.
5.
Select the Resolution and Field.
6.
In the Time Expressed in indicate the time zone for the quotes date/time.
7.
To select the time period for exporting data set the Start Date/Start Time and End Date/End Time.
8.
To change column order, click the header and keep down the left mouse button as you drag the column to its
desired place.
Import Symbol List
Import Symbol List enables the user to import a text file that contains a list of symbols and their parameters.
The feature allows the user to import a list of symbols into QuoteManager quickly instead of manually adding the
symbols one by one.
Preparing the Text File
The text file should contain four fields per row: Symbol Name, Description, Exchange, and Category. Of the four
fields, only the Symbol field is required. QuoteManager will prompt the user for the missing information during the
import process. The missing fields can also be entered manually into QuoteManager one by one after the symbol is
imported.
Each field should be separated by a delimiter. The delimiter can be a comma, semi-colon, space, tab, or other
character.
An example of the contents of a text file is shown below:
Symbol Name, Description, Exchange, Category
XYZ, XYZ Corporation, NYSE, Stocks
ABC, ABC Company, NASDAQ, Stocks
ESU9, S&P E-mini, GLOBEX, Futures
…
The order of the columns do not matter. However, each column must contain the same type of data.
In the example above, the second field of every row must be the “Description” field. The third field of every row
must be the "Exchange" field.
Import Symbol List
Importing a Symbol List
To import a list of symbols:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
361

2.
click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select File in the main menu and then select Import Symbol List. The Import Symbols Wizard window will
appear.
3.
Use the Browse button to select the text file. Select Next.
4.
In the Start Import at Row number box, enter the row number to start the import. Select Next.
For example, if the first row of the text file contains header names instead of symbol data, then start the import at
row 2.
5.
In Set Data Delimiters, select the type of delimiter used in the text file.
6.
Select the Treat Consecutive Delimiters as One checkbox to consider consecutive delimiters the same as one
delimiter. If this box is checked, consecutive delimiters will not be considered as an empty field.
7.
Choose the text qualifier from the Text Qualifier drop down list. Select Next.
For example, if a text field can have double quotes around it (e.g., “MSFT”) . If the double quote text qualifier is
selected, then MultiCharts will recognize that the user wishes to import MSFT without the quotes.
8.
Use the drop down lists to assign the column names to the columns in the text file. Select Next.
9.
In the Select Data Source drop down list, select the data source for the symbols.
10. If the Exchange and Category columns were not previously assigned to a column in the text file, then use the
Exchange and Category drop-down lists to specify the information.
11. Select Finish. The symbols will be imported into QuoteManager.
Importing Data
Importing .qmd data (MultiCharts data format)
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
In QuoteManager main menu select File, then point to Import Data and click Import Instruments…
3.
Select the file location and click
4.
Click Next
5.
Select the instruments to import
6.
Click Next 7. Click Finish.
Importing ASCII data
The program supports importing from most known text (ASCII) files. The principal requirement for the file is a clear
structure, data integrity and absence of logical errors.
See Invalid ASCII files section for information on the most common file faults.
The program is based on analyzing several hundreds of quote files, most in unique formats, which served as
principles for file structure analysis. Despite successful automatic recognition of over 95% of files, there are still
362
situations requiring the user to interfere, mostly because of improper file structure or if the program cannot make
up a conclusion on its structure.
Note: For more information on known import limitations see ASCII Import Limitations section. Be careful when
importing files.
How to import ASCII data
To import data:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
•
see how
2.
Select a symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section). If the selected symbol contains quotes with
the same timestamp as in the file, they'll be overwritten without warning. Make sure the symbol's price scale
matches the price scale of the input data file. The program always uses the symbol's price scale when importing.
3.
Make sure the file you wish to import is a 1 Tick, Minutes or 1 Day. If a file contains bars, but has no static
time increment, this is a Tick\Volume Bar file and must be processed using ASCII Mapping. 4. On the File menu,
click Import Data, or click the Import Data
icon on the toolbar.
5.
Select ASCII or press Ctrl+I.
6.
Indicate the Path. The path can be typed in, pasted from the clipboard or selected using the mouse. The
selected path persists after converting the file so on next operation the previous path will be used by default. If it is
necessary to move up a level, click the Up icon. To change the method of displaying files click the rightmost icon
Views and select an option from the drop down menu.
7.
Select the desired file from the indicated folder.
8. If the Contents of the selected file field the information is garbled, choose the proper encoding in the File
origin.
9.
Make sure the Resolution is valid. If the value is not correct, the possible causes may be the reason: •
The Date field is not defined or not properly defined To set date:
1.
Click the Date column heading.
2.
Select Date and the corresponding template.
3.
Click Custom if there is no such template.
4.
Create a template. If the number of symbols in the date changes, use an asterisk * to replace the symbol,
e.g. 9/9/2004 changed to 10/9/2004. The number of symbols changes from 6 to 7.
•
Allowed symbols in template for Date: m - month, d - day, y - year;
•
* sign means that length of chunk is undefined;Example: To convert date 1 Feb 2002 (2/1/2002) type *d mmm
yyyy in the template field.
5. Apply the created template by selecting it from the list.
•
The Time filed is not defined or not properly defined To
set time:
1.
Click the Time column heading.
2.
Select Time and the corresponding template.
3.
If the template does not exist, click Custom.
4.
Create a template. If the number of symbols in the date changes, use an asterisk * to replace the symbol,
e.g. 8:30 changes to 10:10. The number of symbols changes from 4 to 5.
•
Allowed symbols in template for Time: h - hour, m - minute, s - second, t - time modifier AM/PM.
363
•
* sign means that length of chunk is undefined;
•
@ sign splits the whole template and time modifier PM lexem.Example: To convert time 9:20 PM type *h:*m
[email protected] in the template field.
Note: Templates are stored in recognition engine's local settings. Time modifier can be in any language
supported by current operating system.
5. Apply the created template by selecting it from the list.
•
Wrong detection of the starting line of quotes
To set Start at Row You should indicate how many lines to skip.
After those parameters have been properly set, the program analyses the file again and sets the proper Resolution.
10. Select Field Ask, Bid or Trade to define what king of data the file contains.
11. In the Time Zone please select the time zone of the quotes' origin.
12. If the price or volume needs to be multiplied or divided, select a proper factor in Price Multiplier or Volume
Multiplier.
13. To select the time period for importing data set the Start Date/Start Date Time and End Date/End Date Time.
Invalid ASCII files
In most cases the invalid files are lacking the required fields, lacking data in some column, mixed up time and dates,
irregular bar intervals. The program filters most faults and informs the user of them, but it is not possible in each
and every case. Please see the analysis of typical invalid files below.
Invalid structure
Example 1. Two of the four necessary bar components are missing:
05-12-69 46.4 33.9
12-12-69 51.7 34.5
19-12-69 55.2 31
Example 2. Date is missing:
1.2061,
1.2065,
1.2061,
1.2065
1.2065, 1.2069, 1.2065, 1.2069
1.2069, 1.2070, 1.2066, 1.2066
Incomplete data
Example 1. File has a damaged string:
2 /28/2002 10:45 31505 31530 31480 31480 125
/28/2002 10:50 31480 31505 31480 31500 44
86 2
42
2 /28/ 20
Example 2. File has variable number of columns:
СС12-D,10/01/1995,3.51,3.53,3.5,3.5,0,2643200,,,
СС12-D,11/01/1995,3.44,3.53,3.43,3.44,0,501600,0,,
СС12-D,12/01/1995,3.45,3.5,3.41,3.45,0,1545600,0.017544,,
СС12-D,13/01/1995,3.34,3.47,3.34,3.44,0,2353600,-0.038184,,
СС12-D 16/01/1995,3.39,3.41,3.34,3.35,0,1897600,-0.023325,,
СС12-D,17/01/1995,3.47,3.5,3.38,3.41,0,7425600,-0.011461,,
СС12-D,18/01/1995,3.45,3.5,3.41,3.5,0,766400,0.002903,-3.518377,
364
Logical errors
Example 1. The file has a 60 minute interval, but with 1759 instead of 1800:
<TICKER>,<PER>,<DTYYYYMMDD>,<TIME>,<OPEN>,<HIGH>,<LOW>,<CLOSE>
EURUSD,I,19980420,160000,1.1005,1.1010,1.1005,1.1010
EURUSD,I,19980420,170000,1.1003,1.1003,1.1003,1.1003
EURUSD,I,19980420,175900,1.1012,1.1012,1.1012,1.1012
EURUSD,I,19980420,200000,1.1012,1.1016,1.1009,1.1015
EURUSD,I,19980420,210000,1.1017,1.1020,1.1000,1.1006 Example
2. Time is not ordered chronologically:
GBPUSD,19890627,0,2200,15457,B,N,N
GBPUSD,19890627,0,2200,15462,A,N,N GBPUSD,19890627,1,0100,15485,B,N,N
GBPUSD,19890627,1,0100,15493,A,N,N
ASCII Import Limitations
Important: Local data storage saves the following resolution types: 1 Tick, 1 Minute, 1 Day. All other resolutions are
sampled from those.
Other data types may not be added to the database - use ASCII Mapping to process such files.
Mapping ASCII
Sometimes importing data to the database is extremely complicated or outright impossible.
In such a case ASCII mapping is the solution; there are two principal reasons for using ASCII mapping:
1.
If one or several ASCII files constantly used are periodically updated. Even if there are just a few updates per
day, re-importing hundreds of symbols is difficult or just not feasible;
2.
If tick/volume bars must be displayed on a chart.
When mapping, the file path and format is indicated once, and every time a chart is created the program finds the
file automatically, converts it into the necessary format based on the preset configuration and displays the data.
How to map ASCII files
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

2.
click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the File menu, click Map ASCII.
3.
Click Browse to indicate the path containing the files to be mapped.
4.
In the Get Symbol From indicate File Name for the program to extract the symbol name from the filename. If
along with quotes the file contains the symbol name as one of the columns, indicate File's Field.
5.
Use Get name from to characters, if a part of the word must be used.
6.
If the symbol name needs to be edited manually, click the corresponding cell.
365
7.
Make sure the program has correctly defined the Resolution for every file you intend to map. If you see an
error, click the hyperlinked file name. In the window that appears check:
•
The Date field is not defined or not properly defined To
set date:
1.
Click the Date column heading.
Mapping ASCII
2.
Select Date and the corresponding template.
3.
Click Custom if there is no such template.
4.
Create a template. If the number of symbols in the date changes, use an asterisk * to replace the symbol,
e.g. 9/9/2004 changed to 10/9/2004. The number of symbols changes from 6 to 7.
5. Apply the created template by selecting it from the list.
•
The Time filed is not defined or not properly defined To
set time:
1.
Click the Time column heading.
2.
Select Time and the corresponding template.
3.
If the template does not exist, click Custom.
4.
Create a template. If the number of symbols in the date changes, use an asterisk * to replace the symbol,
e.g. 8:30 changes to 10:10. The number of symbols changes from 4 to 5.
5.
To set a time template, e.g. 5:22 PM, the template must look like H:MM [email protected], where tt means the postfix
placeholder and after @ the PM value stands.
6.
Apply the created template by selecting it from the list.
•
Wrong detection
starting line of quotes
of
the
To set Start at Row You should indicate how many lines to skip.
•
Wrong sequence of columns To
change the sequence:
1.
Click the column heading.
2.
From the drop-down field select the correct filed.
3.
Repeat for all improperly defined columns.
After those parameters have been properly set, the program analyses the file again and sets the proper Resolution.
The program will automatically apply the edited template for all files with the same structure, so the user does not
have to edit every file manually.
8.
Indicate the Category, Exchange, Field, TimeZone, Price and Volume Multiplier for all symbols. If the same
value is to be used in several cells, the program supports copying and multi-pasting.
9.
Make sure the check box is checked for files to be mapped. If all fields are filled, the program checks the check
box on the left, indicating that the file is ready for mapping.
10. Click OK to complete the procedure.
Online Mode Data Collection
366
Online Mode Data Collection
Online mode allows to collect data without any chart creating. The unlimited number of symbols can be connected
to a data feed and the received quotes are stored in the database.
The symbol's connection status as well as the number of the quotes received is displayed in the Realtime Status
column.
Connecting symbols
1. Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

2.
click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select a symbol or several symbols.
Note: Use Ctrl and (or) Shift buttons to select several symbols.
3.
Right-click and select Fields to collect… or in the menu select Edit and click Fields to collect….
or use Ctrl + Alt + S hotkey combination
4.
In the Settings window select the fields and the resolution type to collect.
Note: Click the Check all button to select all the fields and resolution types.
5.
Check the Apply to all symbols check box to apply these settings to all symbols.
Note: If several symbols are selected this check box will not be available.
6.
Click OK.
7.
Right-click anywhere on selected symbol(s) and select Connect Symbol(s) or in the menu select Edit and click
Connect Symbol(s).
Disconnecting symbols
1. Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

2.
3.
click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select the symbol(s) to be disconnected.
Right-click anywhere on selected symbol(s) and select Disconnect
Symbol(s) or in the menu select Edit and click Disconnect Symbol(s).
367
Setting Data Sources
Data Sources Overview
Understanding Data Sources
MultiCharts is a data feed neutral trading platform, it doesn’t come with any prebuilt real-time data feed. We believe
that our customers should be able to choose a data provider that suits their needs best. The only data feed available
right after the installation is Free Quotes, free end-of-day historical daily data coming from Yahoo, Google and MSN
(see Free Quotes). To connect to a live data feed a customer needs to have an account with any of the supported
data providers.
Since MultiCharts supports multiple data vendors and multiple brokers it is important to understand that in
MultiCharts data feed and broker connections are separate. To establish connection to a broker one should set up
the corresponding broker profile in MultiCharts (see Broker Profiles). Data feed connection settings are configured
in QuoteManager.
Note: When MultiCharts and QuoteManager are launched simultaneously it is important to make sure that
MultiCharts is in online mode:
In the Main Menu select File, then click Preferences, go to the Data Server Mode tab, and check Online check box.
One is not able to receive data from a data vendor if the Offline mode is selected.
In the Offline mode neither MultiCharts, nor QuoteManager are able to receive data from a data source.
Operating Data Sources
This tool is used for managing data sources. It allows adding/removing data sources, editing their settings, names
and abbreviations, receiving data source information, their states and versions.
Adding Data Sources
Data sources are added automatically. The system auto-adds a data source as soon as the data feed's DLL is placed
in the DataFeeds folder.
This data source appears in the data sources list but it is still inactive.
To activate the data source press Activate button (see Activating Data Sources section).
Contact us to receive further information concerning the API for developers.
Activating Data Sources
Activation/deactivation is used to set the list of daily used data sources or for activating a newly added data source.
For full access the data source must be activated. If the data source is present in the list but marked in red, this data
source must be activated.
To activate a Data Source:
368
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click Activate. The data source is now marked in green
and the Settings, Name and Abbr parameters can now be edited.
Deactivating Data Sources
If a data source is not used, it can be deactivated. In this case, it will not be displayed in the list of available data
sources when a symbol is added; if necessary, the data source can be reactivated later.
To deactivate a data source:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:


click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click Deactivate. The data source is now marked in
red and the Settings, Name and Abbr parameters cannot be edited.
Configuring Data Sources
Most data sources have unique parameters, e.g. server IP address, port, user name/login information, etc. See the
Built-in Data Sources section for more detailed descriptions.
All the parameters for the integrated data sources are described there.
To edit a data source's settings:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:


click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click the Settings button.
Cloning Data Sources
To use a data source with different sets of settings it must be cloned. Cloning creates a virtual copy of the data
source with modified parameters.
For instance, to receive data from several DDE data vendors one needs to have several DDE templates.
In this case for every DDE data feed a unique data source must be created. If there are two DDE data feeds, Universal
DDE and Universal DDE 2 must be created and a DDE template selected for each.
369
To clone a data source:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:


click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click the Clone button.
4.
Enter a Data Source Name ( up to 3 characters ).
5.
Enter a Data Source Abbr ( up to 3 characters ).
Note: Only Universal DDE data source can be cloned with different from original Universal DDE settings. All other
data vendors will be simply duplicated and use the same connection settings.
Editing Data Sources
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:


click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click the Edit button.
Deleting Data Sources
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:


click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click the Delete button.
Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List
To start working with a symbol, the symbol must be added to the symbol list. Adding can be done manually or from
a list, downloaded from the data vendor.
Adding symbols manually is appropriate when the exact symbol name is known and the list of symbols is not
available from the data vendor. For instance, with DDE there is no way to download a list, and the user is supposed
to know the exact name for the query.
In all other cases, adding symbols manually is not recommended, as parameters in addition to the symbol name may
be required by the data vendor. When a symbol is added from a list, provided by the data vendor, all required
parameters are set automatically.
For details on specific data vendor symbols, see Built-in Datafeeds
370
Adding Symbols in Manual Mode
To add a symbol:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
On the Symbol menu, select Add Symbol, then click Manually, or Click the Add Symbol
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select a Data Source from the list. If the desired data vendor is not listed, it could be that the vendor is not
installed. See Data Sources for additional information.
4.
Enter the Symbol name.
5.
Select the Category from the list.
6.
Select the Exchange from the list. If the desired exchange is not listed, see the Exchanges section.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Enter the symbol Root.
Tip: Stock root is the same as the stock's name.
9.
Click OK to add symbol with current properties or set Symbol Properties.
Adding Symbol from Data Vendor Supplied List
To add a symbol:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:


click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Symbol menu, select Add Symbol.
3.
Select From Data Source.
4.
Choose a data source from the Data Source list; the Insert Symbols into Portfolio window will open. If a data
vendor is not in the list:
•
data source does not support a symbol list (the symbol must be added manually)
•
data source is currently deactivated (the data source should be activated)
•
data source is not supported (Built-in Datafeeds should be used).
5.
Select a tab, corresponding to the type of symbol to be added.
6.
Enter all or part of the symbol name into the Symbol box and click Lookup.
Note: Additional search options may be available depending on data source selected.
7.
Select the desired symbol(s).
8.
Click Add. A message that you have added it to your database should appear.
Note: If there is a message “You must create *** exchange first”, it means that a symbol that is added has an
exchange that is not in the list of exchanges in QuoteManager. All that you need to do is to add the required
exchange to the list with correct corresponding abbreviation (see Setting Exchanges & ECNs).
9.
Click Close or continue to search for symbols.
Note: If necessary, Symbol Properties can be changed (not recommended).
371
Insert Symbols into Portfolio Window
Depending on the categories of instruments provided by a data vendor, the number of Category tabs in the Insert
Symbols Into Portfolio window for each data source may vary.
If Stock/Index/Future/Bond/Commodity/Spread tab is selected, type the name of an instrument in the
Symbol/Root field and click the Lookup button to find desired instrument.
If Option/Fund tab is selected, there is an extra field Category available. For options Stock Options or Futures
Options can be selected. For funds Mutual Funds or Money Market Funds can be selected.
Note: It is possible to put * in search field and click the Lookup button to get all available instruments from server
when you add instruments from: Dukascopy, eSignal, GlobalServer, IQFeed, IWBank QuickTrade, LMAX, MetaStock,
Open E Cry (for Futures and Forex only), PFGBEST, Patsystems, Rithmic 01, TradeStation (for Forex only), Zen-Fire.
Unique Features of Specific Data Sources in Insert Symbols into Portfolio Window
Interactive Brokers
When adding instruments from Interactive Brokers there is Cash tab instead of Forex. Enter the first currency of the
instrument to search for all pairs starting with this currency. One can also specify the second currency of the symbol
in Currency field on the tab to get the specific currency pair.
When adding futures contracts from Interactive Brokers, you can check Include Expired Contracts box to get expired
individual contracts to create Custom Futures in MultiCharts (see Custom Futures).
IWBank QuickTrade
When adding Instruments from IWBank QuickTrade, you should enter the symbol name in the Symbol field, specify
Category, select an Exchange from the list and click Search. There is no All Exchanges option in the Exchange list for
IWBank QuickTrade.
TradeStation
When adding futures contracts from TradeStation, you can check Include Expired Contracts box to get expired
individual contracts to create Custom Futures in MultiCharts (see Custom Futures).
When adding futures contracts from TradeStation, you can check Show Electronic Contracts Only box.
When adding stocks/indexes/futures/options/funds from TradeStation, you can check select All Countries, United
States or Germany in Country field.
Zen-fire/Rithmic 01
In Search Options field Symbol, Symbol Root or Description can be selected. It is also possible to specify the
Exchange, however it is not recommended since exchange names on data source end and in MultiCharts may slightly
differ.
Troubleshooting
Establishing connection and processing data requests can be reviewed in the Event Log window of QuoteManager
when a chart is plotted or data is requested from QuoteManager or Portfolio Backtester.
Event Log is located at the bottom of QuoteManager by default. One can show/hide it by clicking View in
QuoteManager main window and selecting Event Log.
If you experience any issues with incoming data, the first step is to check Event Log messages.
372
Built-in Data Sources
ASCII Mapping
ASCII Mapping is a useful tool to get data from a bunch of ASCII files that are constantly updated (e.g. by a third
party software). See Mapping ASCII for details.
To add an instrument with ASCII Mapping as the data source manually, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
AvaTrade
To Set up AvaTrade data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select AvaTrade in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window:
•
Enter Login and Password.
•
Select type of connection: demo / real.
Make sure the currency of the account is specified correctly.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Barchart
To set up Barchart data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Barchart in the list of supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The Barchart Data Feed
Configuration window will open.
3.
In the opened up window:
•
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
•
Connectivity section.
Default Settings are recommended to be used. If Barchart provided specific custom settings, click the Custom
Settings button. Price, Port and Historical URL fields become active.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
373
CQG
To connect MultiCharts to CQG data feed, it is necessary to have CQG API installed on the computer. Also, please
make sure that your PC meets CQG requirements and technical specifications http:/ / www. cqg. com/ Docs/
CQGTraderSystemSpecs. pdf
If there are any CQG applications installed on your PC, it is required to delete them prior to installing the supported
version of CQG API:
1.
Windows Start menu
2.
Control Panel
3.
Uninstall a program / Programs and Features
4.
Select each of the following applications and uninstall all of them:
•
CQG Trader
•
CQG Auto Upgrade Service
•
CQG Trader API
•
CQGNet
•
MultiCharts API ( with CQG icon )
5.
Not all versions of CQG software are supported.
If you are using MultiCharts 8.5 Release or Release Candidate, install the following version of CQG API:
https://dl.dropbox. com/u/95112551/Multicharts_COMAPI_en-US_production_V4.05. 101_Install. msi
If you are using MultiCharts 8.0 Release or any previous version, install the following version of CQG API: https:/ /
dl.dropbox. com/u/95112551/ Multicharts_COMAPI_en-US_production_V4. 04.542_Install.msi
At the moment it is not possible to use multiple CQG/AMP accounts in MultiCharts. Only one and the same account
should be used for getting data and trading. If different logins and passwords are entered in data source
configuration and CQG broker profile, connection to data source will work, the broker profile will not.
AMP accounts originally created for a different software will not work in MultiCharts. Customers need to contact
AMP directly to setup their accounts for MultiCharts or request a demo account here: [1]
Indexes are available in MultiCharts 8.5 beta 1 or higher. Indexes data is available for Live CQG/AMP accounts only.
At the moment only real-time data is available for CQG Indexes, no historical backfill from data source. To learn how
to store real-time data locally, read this article.
To set up CQG data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources window. Select CQG in the list of
all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
2.
In the opened up window enter Login and Password.
Note: By default demo mode is turned on. Uncheck the CQG demo box to turn it off. Demo mode is required
to be on for demo accounts. If you have real account, the box is required to be off.
Note 2: It is recommended to launch MultiCharts by making a right-click on the icon -> Run as administrator.
A popup dialogue message will appear where you need to allow CQG API to connect to the Internet (That
374
should be done upon first connection after API installation. You can start MultiCharts in regular mode after
that)
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
CSI
To connect MultiCharts to CSI data feed, it is necessary to have their software installed and launched on the
computer.
In order to receive data in MultiCharts, the data should be loaded first in CSI software.
To download CSI software, please, contact CSI directly: http://www.csidata. com/ ?page_id=21
To set up CSI data feed connection, in the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
Select CSI in the list of all supported data vendors and make sure that is active.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Dukascopy
FIX API is used for connection between MultiCharts and Dukascopy. Jforex API is not supported in MultiCharts.
Limitation: does not provide historical data.
It is important to make sure that Dukascopy is informed FIX API is required when subscribe to their service. A
customer needs to provide Dukascopy with his/her IP address to register it on their servers.
Note: To receive data and trade with Dukascopy in MultiCharts, a customer needs to open an account, but since FIX
API is used, such type of account can be opened only if the balance is more than $100 000.
To set up Dukascopy data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Dukascopy in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The Dukascopy Data
Feed Configuration window is opened.
3.
In the opened up window enter information provided by Dukascopy:
•
Server IP section.
Server IP.
•
Order Connection Settings section.
Login, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID. • Price
Connection Settings section.
Login, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID.
•
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if link to Dukascopy is lost.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
375
ESignal
To connect MultiCharts to eSignal data feed, it is necessary to have eSignal software (Data Manager) installed and
launched on the computer.
When the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up eSignal software automatically when data is
requested.
To download the latest version of eSignal software, follow this link: http:// www. esignal. com/products/ download.
aspx
To set up eSignal data feed connection in the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources,
find eSignal in the list of all supported data vendors and make sure that is active.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
FreeQuotes
Free Quotes data feed is configured correctly by default and one can plot a chart using a number of prebuilt symbols
from Free Quotes. That is free end-of-day historical daily bars coming from Yahoo, Google and MSN. Only Stocks
and Indexes are available from this data source in MultiCharts.
To set up Free Quotes data feed connection
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources, find Free Quotes in the list of all
supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The Free Quotes Data Feed Configuration window is
opened.
2.
In the opened up window:
•
One can check/uncheck Yahoo, Google and MSN servers to receive data from.
•
One can move Yahoo, Google and MSN servers by selecting any of them and clicking the Up and Down buttons
to change the priority of receiving data.
•
One can disable Yahoo, Google and MSN servers by selecting any of them clicking the Disable button.
•
One can edit number and timeout of attempts to request data from Yahoo, Google and MSN servers by editing
Retry and Timeout columns for corresponding server.
To add an instrument manually, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
GlobalServer
MultiCharts provides seamless integration with Global Server (Global Server is used as an external database)
meaning that you will see every tick from your Global Server in MultiCharts. This can be a very useful solution for
longtime users of TradeStation 2000i.
To connect MultiCharts to Global Server (TradeStation 2000i) data feed, it is necessary to have Global Server installed
and launched on the computer.
376
When the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up Global Server software automatically when data is
requested.
To set up Global Server (TradeStation 2000i) data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources. Select Global Server in the list of
all supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The Global Server Data Feed Configuration window is
opened.
2.
In the opened up window:
•
Data Vendor section.
Global Server Program Directory and Vendor DLL are specified automatically.
•
Settings section.
Uncheck the Get data from local GlobalServer box – for users of TSDataHub as an adapter that is used for Global
Server on multiple computers.
•
To save data from Global Server in MultiCharts database check the Save data to local database box.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Interactive Brokers
To connect MultiCharts to Interactive Brokers (IB) data feed, it is necessary to have IB software installed and
launched on the computer.
When the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up IB software automatically when data is requested. IB
has 2 applications that can be used for connection MultiCharts to IB:
1.
IB Trader Workstation. (requires 1 logout per 24 hours)
2.
IB Gateway.
Note: Java version 7 is strongly recommended for IB software to work correctly.
Though there is choice between web-based and standalone version, standalone version is recommended to use.
To download IB Trader Workstation and IB Gateway, follow this link: http://individuals. interactivebrokers. com/
en/control/systemstandalone. php?os=win& ib_entity=llc
To set up connection in Interactive Brokers Trader WorkStation:
Enable Active X and Socket Clients box should be checked in IB TWS settings:
1.
Click on Configure in main TWS window.
2.
Click on API section. Select Settings.
3.
Check Enable Active X and Socket Clients box.
Note: By default both in IB TWS and IB data source in QuoteManager Port (Socket port) number is 7496.
4.
It is recommended to add 127.0.0.1 to Trusted IP Addresses.
To set up connection in Interactive Brokers Gateway:
IB API should be selected when one logins to IB Gateway.
1.
Click on Configure in main TWS window.
2.
Click on API section. Select Settings.
377
Note: By default in IB Gateway Socket port number is 4001. In IB data source in QuoteManager default Port (Socket
port) number is 7496. The ports should be the same.
It is recommended to add 127.0.0.1 to Trusted IP Addresses.
To set up Interactive Brokers data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools, then click Data Sources and click on Interactive Brokers.
2.
In the popped up window choose whether you have a standalone installed on your PC version of IB TWS / IB
Gateway or a web-based one. Standalone version is recommended to use.
3.
Click Ok.
4.
Once you clicked Ok, the Interactive Brokers Data Feed Configuration window is opened. It is recommended to
use default settings.
•
Connectivity section.
Make sure the Server IP Address and Port numbers are correct.
IB TWS can be launched automatically by MultiCharts on attempt to add a symbol from IB data source; once a
chart, DOM, Market Scanner window with IB instrument is open. To enable this option check Launch Trader
Workstation at start box.
•
Historical data section.
There is no need to reconfigure settings in this section. It is set up by default. ==Advanced users can check/uncheck
the following options.==
•
Download historical data.===
•
Regular Trading Hours. Check the box to have standard trading session for daily-based charts.
•
Do not request ticks for intervals that has no minute data.
If the box is checked, MultiCharts assumes that the interval that has no minute data from server also doesn’t have
tick data.
•
Filter bars with zero volume box.
•
Filter bars with zero price box.
•
TWS bar timestamp.
It is not recommended to check this function to avoid possible problems with mixing session settings and missing
bars on chart.
•
Simultaneous loading of Historical Data across all symbols/charts.
If the box is checked the data is requested for all symbols simultaneously, not in a particular order.
•
Utilization of cache for real-time price data.Example: historical minutes are requested as minutes from server
up to the latest one. The latest historical is plotted from ticks up to the present moment. All the data that is collected
in real-time (ticks) is used to build minutes
•
Plot ticks either from 1 second snapshots or 5 second snapshots from server.
•
Plot minutes either from 1 minute snapshots or 15 minute snapshots bars.
•
Real-Time section.
There is no need to reconfigure it. It is set up by default.
•
Use server timestamps.
Time of Trades is taken from IB servers. Does not apply to Ask and Bid data for Forex symbols. It is not recommended
to check this function to avoid potential problems with session settings and missing bars on chart.
378
•
Generate a new tick if total volume changes.
Turn on this function if you need total volume for the session. By default it is turned off. When turn on, the Trade
Tick Volume = current TotalVolume – previous TotalVolume. This option also helps to avoid spikes coming from IB
API in real-time feed.
•
Click the Reset button to restore default settings.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
IQFeed
To connect MultiCharts to IQFeed data, it is necessary to have IQFeed software installed and launched on the
computer. When the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up IQFeed software automatically when data
is requested. To download the latest version of IQFeed client click here.
To set up IQFeed data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources. Select IQFeed in the list of all
supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The IQFeed Data Feed Configuration window is opened.
2.
In the opened up window:
•
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
•
Historical Data section.
Check the Build minute and daily bars based on tick data box to request only tick data from IQfeed server and
build all other resolution charts out of tick data.
Note: IQFeed provide less tick data comparing to minute or daily data.
•
Real-Time section.
Check the Generate a new Ask/Bid tick if Trade changes box to make snapshots of Ask/Bid streams and show them
in MultiCharts only at the moment when a new Trade comes.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
IWBank Quick Trade
To connect MultiCharts to IWBank QuickTrade data feed, it is necessary to have IWBank software installed and
launched on the computer.
When the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up IWBank QuickTrade software automatically when
data is requested.
To download the latest version of IW Quick Trade, follow this link: http:/ / www. iwbank. it/ piattaformaprofessionale-iwquicktrade-trader.html
To set up IWBank QuickTrade data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select IWBank QuickTrade in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
379
3.
In the opened up window enter your User ID and click Ok.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
LMAX
To Set up LMAX data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select LMAX in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window:
•
Select type of connection: demo / real.
According to your type of connection URL is set up automatically.
•
Enter Login and Password.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Since MultiCharts 8.7 beta 1 it is possible to cache historical data downloaded from LMAX to speed up data
backfilling. To enable caching downloaded data:
1.
Open QuoteManager,
2.
Click Tools in main menu,
3.
Select Data Sources,
4.
Highlight LMAX,
5.
Click Settings,
6.
Check Cache downloaded quote files,
7.
Click OK to apply the settings.MB Trading.
MB Trading
To connect MultiCharts to MB Trading data feed, it is necessary to have their software installed on the computer.
1.
To download the latest version of MBT Desktop, follow this link: http:/ / www. mbtrading. com/ mbtDesktop.
aspx.
2.
To get latest version of MBT Desktop PRO, follow this link: http://www.mbtrading.com/mbtDesktopPro. aspx
Note: MB Trading software and MultiCharts should not be launched simultaneously.
To set up MB Trading data feed connection:
1.
On the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources window. Select MB Trading in the
list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
2.
In the opened up window enter your Login, Password and click Ok.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
380
MCFX (MultiCharts Forex Data)
This data feed provides FOREX data from FXCM. In MultiCharts FXCM data is available only through our servers.
Note: Only Ask and Bid quote field is provided. No Trade quote field data.
We provide MultiCharts Forex Data (up to 10 years of FXCM data) for $99 per month. This subscription is separate
from MC license. MCFX data feed is not installed automatically with MultiCharts. To install this data vendor and find
out more about subscription, please contact our support. To set up MCFX data feed connection:
1.
Contact our support to install the data source for MultiCharts.
2.
In the Data Sources window select MCFX in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window enter your User Name, Password in Authority section.
4.
In the Connectivity section make sure that the Server is 74.200.223.66 and Port is 10000 and click OK.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Metastock
To connect MultiCharts to Metastock data feed, it is necessary to have their database files on the computer.
Limitation: 65000 bars per symbol limitation To set up Metastock data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources window. Select Metastock in the
list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
2.
In the opened up window locate the path to Metastock files by clicking the Add… button. You can also delete
the location by clicking the Delete button. Up and Down buttons can be used to change the priority of requests to
the file locations.
3.
Specify the time zone of data in Metastock files.
4.
There are 2 options for Resolution Detection:
•
Automatic.
•
Manual.
One can specify the resolution types in the files to build greater resolutions in MultiCharts from them: minute and
daily bars.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
381
MIG Bank
To set up MIG Bank data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources window. Select MIG Bank in the
list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The MIG Bank Data Feed Configuration window is
opened.
2.
In the opened up window:
•
Session Settings section.
Server IP, Username, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID.
•
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Mig Bank is lost.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Open E Cry
Does not provide expired futures contracts.
Since MultiCharts 8.0 beta 3 UUID connection type has been implemented. UUID connection greatly improves
reliability using OEC Trader and MultiCharts at same time with same username.
Important Information:Existing OEC customers need to enable third party software at Open E Cry web page .
Introducing brokers (such as Global Futures) clients should use this link: Open E Cry Portal web page.
If MultiCharts is not enabled on Open E Cry web page, the connection will not be established.
To set up Open E Cry data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Open E Cry in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window:
•
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
•
Connectivity section.
Make sure that the Server Name and Port number are correct.
•
Historical Data section.
•
Simultaneous loading of Historical Data across all symbols/charts.
If the box is checked the data is requested for all symbols simultaneously, not in a particular order.
•
Utilization of cache for real-time price data.Example: Historical minutes are requested as minutes from server
up to the latest one. The latest historical is plotted from ticks up to the present moment. All the data that is collected
in real-time (ticks) is used to build minutes.
•
Real-time Data section.
382
Generate a new tick if total volume changes.
Turn on this function if you need total volume for the session. By default it is turned off. When turn on, the Trade
Tick Volume = current TotalVolume – previous TotalVolume.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Patsystems
To set up Patsystems data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Patsystems in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window:
•
Common Settings section.
The Demo Mode box: check it to enable Patsystems data feed demo mode. In this mode Internet connection is not
required, the data is generated randomly and orders are not sent to the broker.
Enter Login and Password.
License (default value is FBD653F002), Environment, Application ID and Application Version fields are filled by
default; however if the broker provides different settings, enter them into these fields.
•
Transport Settings section.
Enter Trade Server, Data Server and Port numbers.
•
SSL section.
To use SSL certificate provided by Patsystems, check the Use SLL and enter its name.
•
Advance Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if link to Patsystems is lost in Reconnection Settings section.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Rithmic 01
To set up Rithmic 01 data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Rithmic 01 in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window:
•
Authority section.
•
Enter Login and Password.
SSL certificates path is set up by default.
•
Connectivity section.
Make sure that the selected deployment is Rithmic 01 if you have real account. If you have simulation account,
select Zen-Fire/Rithmic Server Sim.
Do not change default connection settings in this section.
383
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct connection settings.
•
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Rithmic is lost.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
TradeNode
FIX API is used for connection between MultiCharts and TradeNode. To connect MultiCharts to TradeNode data
feed, it is necessary to have TradeNode Gateway installed and launched on the computer. More about installation
TradeNode software follow this link: http://support. tradenode. com
To download the latest version of TradeNode software, follow this link: http://support. tradenode. com
To set up TradeNode data feed connection in the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data
Sources, find TradeNode in the list of all supported data vendors and make sure that is active.
For More Information about TradeNode follow this link http:/ / tradenode. com To add an instrument manually or
from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
TradeStation
Tradestation
To connect MultiCharts to TradeStation data feed, it is necessary to have their software installed and launched on
the computer.
If the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up TradeStation software automatically when data is
requested.
To download the latest version of TradeStation, follow the link and login to TradeStation Client Center: https:/ /
clientcenter.tradestation. com
To set up TradeStation data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select TradeStation in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window:
•
Data Vendor section.
Select the version of TradeStation installed on your computer from the TradeStation versions list.
•
Settings section.
Check the Save data to database box if you want to store the data in QuoteManager and not to request it from
TradeStation next time you plot the same instrument.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
384
Trading Technologies
FIX API is used for connection between MultiCharts and Trading Technologies.
Limitation: does not provide histporical data.
To set up Trading Technologies data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Trading Technologies in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window enter:
•
Order Connection Settings section.
Server IP, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID.
•
Price Connection Settings section.
Server IP, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID.
•
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Trading Technologies is lost.
If your account is provided by Advantage Futures, check the Treat Gateways As Exchanges (for Advantage Futures)
box.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Universal DDE
DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) is a widely used protocol for exchanging data between applications in the MS
Windows environment.
Please see the Developer's website for more detailed information on DDE.
Features and limitations
Features
•
User-definable DDE Server/Topic/Item for Trade Price, Trade Volume, Bid Price, Bid Size, Ask Price, Ask Size
•
Rapid creation, editing and application of DDE Templates
•
Testing the functionality of a DDE server or a newly created template
•
Support for various server types. Some DDE servers contradict the Microsoft specifications.
For maximal user convenience the program has a set of deeply customizable options (not described here).
•
Automatic reconnection in case the connection to the DDE server is lost
Limitations
•
Presently the following field types are not supported: Time, Open, High, Low, Close, Total Volume, Change
•
The program receives ticks only and assigns the current system time to them. Sometimes the tick's real time
may differ from the assigned one due to delay
•
The Status Bar is not displayed on the chart as there aren't enough fields to chart it
385
Setting up
1.
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources.
2.
Select Universal DDE and click Settings.
3.
Indicate a template name in Template ( up to 20 characters long ).
4.
Indicate the DDE Links in the corresponding sections (the sections include Trade, Bid and Ask. The Price and
Volume/Size must be indicated in each section; if Volume/Size cannot be used (e.g for Forex), indicate Price instead.
Since for every price the program queries for a volume, this field will never be empty as the program will be waiting
for volume data to form a new tick.
5.
Before creating DDE links in Universal DDE make sure they are functional in Excel.
After that, copy the link to the corresponding field in Universal DDE and replace the static symbol name with the
asterisk symbol *.
For instance, replace =WINROS|LAST!MSFT with =WINROS|LAST!*. After that the program will automatically use
the symbol name for which the given template is used. Do the same for all fields.
6.
To make sure that the created template is functional, click Test. Enter the symbol name in Symbol and click
OK. If the DDE Server is running, the template is properly created and the queried symbol is accessible, you'll see
the current value for each field and the number of updates. If quotes do not arrive, check the template and symbol
name.
If fixing them does not resolve the problem, please send an e-mail to [email protected] [2] and indicate the
DDE Server, symbol and template names, confirm that an identical template functions in Excel and share any other
information you deem important.
To create a symbol using Universal DDE as the Data Source see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol list section for more
detailed information.
To use several DDE servers at once You should clone the Universal DDE and assign new settings.
See Cloning Data Sources section for more detailed information.
ZenFire
Zen-Fire provides a very limited amount of historical data; historical tick data is only available for the current session,
though minute date is available over a somewhat longer time span. To set up Zen-Fire data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Zen-Fire in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window:
•
Authority section.
Enter Login and Password.
SSL certificates path is set up by default.
•
Connectivity section.
Make sure that the selected Deployment is Zen-Fire if you have real account. If you have simulation account, select
Zen-Fire/Rithmic Server Sim.
Do not change default connection settings in this section.
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct settings.
386
•
Reconnection Settings section.
Configure timer to reconnect if connection to Rithmic is lost.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
387
Setting Exchanges
Setting Exchanges & ECNs
This tool allows adding/removing Exchanges/ECNs and editing their parameters.
The Exchanges/ECNs parameters are inherited by the symbols, so the better are the Exchanges/ECNs tuned in, the
higher will be the overall quality of the system performance.
Sometimes the Exchange/ECN settings aren't the same for all the symbols traded on a given Exchange/ECN.
So the user is able to edit settings on a symbol-by-symbol basis, although in the majority of cases the Exchange/ECN
settings are exactly the same as the individual symbol settings.
Adding an Exchange/ECN
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
On the Tools menu, click Exchanges & ECNs, or click the Exchanges & ECNs
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Click Add.
4.
Enter the Exchange/ECN name. This name must be informative for convenience and consist of the full
exchange name, up to 50 characters long. This full name will not be used on the Symbol list and in the symbol
settings.
5.
Enter the Abbr. This short name, up to 7 characters long will be used for exchange identification, use the
standard abbreviations as they will be used for symbol searches.
6.
Select the Holiday List. See Holidays section for more information; if you do not want to use the Holiday List,
select None.
7.
Select a Price Scale corresponding to most symbols traded at the selected Exchange/ECN.
8.
Enter the Daily Limit.
9.
Enter the Min. Movement.
10. Enter Big Point Value.
Setting Exchanges & ECNs
11. Add the sessions in the Sessions section. Use the Add/Delete buttons to add or remove them; the sessions
must be set in the local time of the corresponding exchange.
388
12. On the Time Zone tab set the exchange's time zone. This can be done either using From System Options or
Custom options. Selecting From System Options will set the OS time zone settings, which is usually correct; you
might have to set the time zone and daylight savings settings by using Custom.
Removing the Exchange/ECN
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
On the Tools menu, click Exchanges & ECNs, or click the Exchanges & ECNs
3.
Click Delete.
icon on the toolbar.
Editing the Exchange/ECN
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
On the Tools menu, click Exchanges & ECNs, or click the Exchanges & ECNs
3.
Click Edit.
icon on the toolbar.
Cloning the Exchange/ECN
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
On the Tools menu, click Exchanges & ECNs, or click the Exchanges & ECNs
3.
Select the Exchange/ECN the settings of which you'd like to clone.
4.
Click the Clone button.
5.
Adjust the necessary settings.
icon on the toolbar.
Example: If you need to add NASD exchange, you can simply clone NASDAQ exchange settings and change the
abbriviation (Abbr) to NASD.
Setting Holidays
This tool is used to indicate the days when the exchanges do not work to avoid gaps on the charts.
The holidays are divided into holiday lists so one select holidays by nation or other parameter.
389
Adding Holidays
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
On the Tools menu, click Holidays, or click the Holidays
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the desired holiday list from the Holiday List' list.
4.
Click the Add... button.
5.
Enter the holiday name in the Description field, select the date and click Ok.
Editing Holidays
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
On the Tools menu, click Holidays, or click the Holidays
3.
Select the desired holiday list from the Holiday List' list.
icon on the toolbar.
4.
Select the holiday you want to edit.
5.
Click the Edit... button.
6.
Change the holiday name in the Description field, select the date and click Ok.
Removing Holidays
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:

click the New QuoteManager Window

in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Holidays, or click the Holidays
3.
Select the desired holiday list from the Holiday List' list.
4.
Select the holiday you want to delete.
5.
Click the Delete button.
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
icon on the toolbar.
Note: Check Do not use holidays check box to disable holidays for all exchanges.
390
Setting Symbols
Operating Symbol List
Symbol List is a list of commonly used financial instruments. Modern-day investors need easy access to any of the
trading vehicles.
QM has been developed based on those needs, the basic requirements being:
•
The program must function with numbers of symbols in tens of thousands
•
Rapid data access, which means powerful search, sorting, and selection capabilities
•
Convenient adding and editing of data
•
Simple data backup and restore
•
Minimal setup and maintenance effort
Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List
To start working with a symbol, the symbol must be added to the symbol list. Adding can be done manually or from
a list, downloaded from the data vendor.
Adding symbols manually is appropriate when the exact symbol name is known and the list of symbols is not
available from the data vendor. For instance, with DDE there is no way to download a list, and the user is supposed
to know the exact name for the query.
In all other cases, adding symbols manually is not recommended, as parameters in addition to the symbol name may
be required by the data vendor. When a symbol is added from a list, provided by the data vendor, all required
parameters are set automatically.
For details on specific data vendor symbols, see Built-in Datafeeds
Adding Symbols in Manual Mode
To add a symbol:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Symbol menu, select Add Symbol, then click Manually, or Click the Add Symbol
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select a Data Source from the list. If the desired data vendor is not listed, it could be that the vendor is not
installed. See Data Sources for additional information.
4.
Enter the Symbol name.
5.
Select the Category from the list.
391
6.
Select the Exchange from the list. If the desired exchange is not listed, see the Exchanges section.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Enter the symbol Root.
Tip: Stock root is the same as the stock's name.
9.
Click OK to add symbol with current properties or set Symbol Properties.
Adding Symbol from Data Vendor Supplied List
To add a symbol:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Symbol menu, select Add Symbol.
3.
Select From Data Source.
4.
Choose a data source from the Data Source list; the Insert Symbols into Portfolio window will open. If a data
vendor is not in the list:
•
data source does not support a symbol list (the symbol must be added manually)
•
data source is currently deactivated (the data source should be activated)
•
data source is not supported (Built-in Datafeeds should be used).
5.
Select a tab, corresponding to the type of symbol to be added.
6.
Enter all or part of the symbol name into the Symbol box and click Lookup.
Note: Additional search options may be available depending on data source selected.
7.
Select the desired symbol(s).
8.
Click Add. A message that you have added it to your database should appear.
Note: If there is a message “You must create *** exchange first”, it means that a symbol that is added has an
exchange that is not in the list of exchanges in QuoteManager. All that you need to do is to add the required exchange
to the list with correct corresponding abbreviation (see Setting Exchanges & ECNs).
9.
Click Close or continue to search for symbols.
Note: If necessary, Symbol Properties can be changed (not recommended).
Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol List
Symbols can be selected by using the keyboard or a mouse.
Using the keyboard, move the selection pointer to the line containing the symbol. If the selection is not visible, press
the Down Arrow button twice, the selection will be visible on the uppermost symbol; selection with the mouse is
simpler and can be achieved by left-clicking the line once.
To select several sequential symbols at once keep Shift pressed and select with Up or Down Arrow buttons.
To select several sequential symbols at once with the mouse keep Shift pressed, scroll using the Vertical Scroll Bar
to the required position, and click it.
To select many sequential symbols at once, select the starting symbol, keep Ctrl pressed and move the selection
with the Home/End or Page Up/Page Down buttons, then release Ctrl, press Shift and press Up/Down arrow
buttons depending on the direction of selecting.
392
To select many sequential symbols at once with the mouse keep Ctrl pressed and click the symbols.
If you need to select several non-sequential symbols using the keyboard, start on the first symbol, press and keep
down Ctrl and move the selection border to the desired position using the Up/Down Arrows, Home/End or Page
Up/Page Down, then press Space. To perform such selection with the mouse keep Ctrl pressed and click the symbols
to be selected.
Note: To select all symbols, select Edit in the main menu and then click Select All, or use the Ctrl+A keyboard
shortcut.
Deleting Symbol(s) from the Symbol List
To delete one or more symbols:
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
2.
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select the symbols to be deleted.
3.
Selected symbols can be deleted by one of the following methods:
•
Click the Delete Symbol
•
Right-clicking on the selected symbols and then clicking Delete Symbol
•
Selecting Symbol on the main menu and then clicking Delete Symbol
•
Pressing the Delete key on the keyboard
icon on the toolbar
Sorting the Symbol List
The list is sorted based on the contents of one of the available columns. For example, text data is sorted
alphabetically, but months in calendar order.
For sorting:
1.
On the View menu, click Sort By.
2.
Select the column to sort by, i.e. Symbol.
3.
Select the sorting direction - Sort Ascending or Sort Descending.
or:
1.
Click the corresponding column heading to sort by that column.
2.
The arrow on the heading indicates the sorting direction; click the column to reverse the sorting direction.
3.
Right-click a column heading to call up a context menu with sorting options. See Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol
List section.
Finding Symbol(s) in Symbol List
Two types of a search can be performed: an Incremental search and a Full String search.
An Incremental search locates a symbol as the symbol name is typed. Please note that an incremental search can be
performed by the signal name only, and not by any other attributes.
To perform an Incremental search:
1.
Select All Symbols in the left panel to search a list of all symbols, or select a particular symbol category.
2.
Click on any symbol in the right panel.
393
3.
Start typing the symbol name; as the name is being typed, the selection will move between symbols seeking
for a match.
Note: Each consecutive character in a symbol name must be typed with an interval of no more the one second; if
you pause for more then one second, a new search will be started, for a symbol name beginning with the first
character that was typed after a pause of more than a second.
To start a new search without waiting for the second to be over, simply press the ESC key.
Example: To search for AMD, type a m d with an interval of less than a second between each character; if you pause
for more than a second after typing a, once you type m, the first symbol, beginning with the character "m", will be
located instead.
A Full String search can be used to find multiple symbols that satisfy the search criteria. To
perform a Full String search:
1.
Select All Symbols in the left panel to search a list of all symbols, or select a particular symbol category.
2.
Select Edit in the main menu, and then click Find, or use the CTRL+F keyboard shortcut; a Find dialog box will
open.
3.
In the Find what text box, enter a string to search for.
4.
In the In column list box, select the column to search in.
5.
Click Find Next to begin the search.
6.
To continue the search, click Find Next again.
A previously performed search can be repeated by simply pressing the F3 key, without opening the Find dialog box.
Customizing the Symbol List
The program supports workspace customization. The user can select the data columns and set their widths,
including: Symbol, Description, Exchange Listed, Data Source, Contract Month, Price Scale, CUSIP, Root, Margin,
Contract Year, Expiation Date, Expiration Rule, Expiration Status, Daily Limit, Min. Movement, Big Point Value, Strike
Price, and Option Type.
To customize the Symbol List:
1.
On the View menu, click Columns.
2.
Select the checkboxes, corresponding to the columns to be displayed.
3.
Use the Move Up and the Move Down buttons to change the order in which the columns are displayed.
4.
Enter the desired width, in pixels, in to the The selected column should be N pixels box.
Note: Column width can also be resized by using the mouse.
Setting Custom Session Templates
This tool allows creating templates for rapid access to the session configurations.
This is especially useful for non-standard sessions used with several symbols.
Create a template once and activate it for the desired symbol with just a few clicks.
394
Adding Session Templates
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Session Templates, or click the Session Templates
3.
Click Add.
4.
Enter the Description ( up to 50 characters long ).
5.
Select Session Time. This option indicates the time used for setting sessions.
6.
Use the Add/Delete buttons to add or delete sessions.
icon on the toolbar.
Setting Custom Session Templates
Editing Session Templates
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Session Templates, or click the Session Templates
3.
Click Edit.
icon on the toolbar.
Deleting Session Templates
1. Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Session Templates, or click the Session Templates
3.
Click Delete.
icon on the toolbar.
Setting Expiration Rules
This tool is used to set the rule that will indicate the last day that an options or futures contract is valid.
Due to the fact that MultiCharts supports multiple brokers and exchanges, expiration rules may vary for different
contracts.
Adding Expiration Rule
1. Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
395
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Expiration Rules, or click the Expiration Rules
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Click the Add... button.
4.
Enter the Expiration Rule name in the Name field;
5.
Select the number and type of the days that the contracts come into effect; 6. Select the rule that will set the
benchmark date for the contract expiry;
7.
Click the OK" button to save the changes.
Editing Expiration Rule
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Expiration Rules, or click the Expiration Rules
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the Expiration Rule you want to edit.
4.
Click the Edit... button.
5.
Change the number and type of the days that the contracts come into effect; 6. Change the rule that will set
the benchmark date for the contract expiry;
7. Click the OK" button to save the changes.
Setting Expiration Rules
Removing Expiration Rule
1. Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Expiration Rules, or click the Expiration Rules
3.
Select the Expiration Rule you want to delete.
4.
Click the Delete button.
icon on the toolbar.
Note: Expiration Rule is IMPORTANT for custom futures contracts construction.
Settings Properties
It is possible to modify symbol properties in QuoteManager. Every symbol has a set of properties. Data Source,
Category, Exchange & ECN, Symbol Name and Symbol Root are the mandatory properties.
396
In case the symbol was added from a list supplied by data vendor all mandatory and most optional properties are
already set according to data vendor requirements.
It is possible to modify propeties only after the symbol is already added to the symbol list.
In case the symbol was added manually all mandatory (except Symbol Root) and some optional properties are
already set.
It is possible to modify propeties while creating a symbol as well as after the symbol is already added to the symbol
list.
Important: This information can be obtained from the exchanges where the symbol is listed or from a brokerage
firm.
The properties are edited in the Edit Symbol window:
Editing an existing symbol properties
1.
In QuoteManager double-click the necessary symbol in the symbol list.
2.
Select appropriate tab in the Edit Symbol window opened.
Note: First tab name dynamically changes according to the symbol category set.
3.
Set necessary properties.
or
1.
In QuoteManager select the necessary symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section).
2.
Click the Edit Symbol
3.
Select appropriate tab in the Edit Symbol window opened.
icon on the toolbar.
Note: First tab name dynamically changes according to the symbol category set.
4.
Set necessary properties.
or
1.
In QuoteManager select the necessary symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section).
2.
Under menu select Symbol and click Edit Symbol....
3.
Select appropriate tab in the Edit Symbol window opened.
Note: First tab name dynamically changes according to the symbol category set.
4.
Set necessary properties.
or
1.
In QuoteManager right-click on necessary symbol and select Edit Symbol....
2.
Select appropriate tab in the Edit Symbol window opened.
Note: First tab name dynamically changes according to the symbol category set.
3.
Set necessary properties.
397
Editing a new symbol properties
After filling information in the Add Symbol window the Edit Symbol window appears automatically making
possible setting properties.
Important: The Category property can not be changed for a symbol.
Important: It is required to set the Symbol Root property.
Tip: Symbol Root for stocks is the same as the Symbol Root property.
398
Price Scale
Returns a numeric expression representing the fractional portion of a full point move for a particular symbol. The
PriceScale value is represented by a whole number. E.g. the PriceScale of the E-Mini S&P is100, which represents
the fractional portion
of a full point move for the E-Mini S&P. Any stock would also have a PriceScale of 100. 1 / PriceScale = Minimum
price increment. Examples
MinMove / PriceScale returns the smallest increment between trades.
MinMove / PriceScale * BigPointValue returns the dollar value of the smallest change in price.
Tip: MultiCharts can display prices in both decimal and fractional format.
Displaying prices in decimal format
1.
Double click on the symbol in QuoteManager. The Edit Symbol window will appear.
2.
Select the Settings tab.Or:
1. In the Settings Details section, select the appropriate Price Scale from the drop-down list. Double click on the
symbol in QuoteManager. The Edit Symbol window will appear.
2.
Select the Settings tab.
3.
In the Settings Details section, select the appropriate Price Scale from the drop-down list.
The numerator of the fraction may have a decimal:
The "10th", "j", and "S" markings have special meaning.
Their definitions are laid out in the table below:
399
Marking Decimal representation in numerator Fractional Equivalent
10th
0, 0.1, 0.2, ... 0.9
1/10
j
0, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75
1/4
S
0, 0.5
1/2
As shown,
"10th" means the decimal in the numerator can be in increments of 0.1.
"j" means the decimal in the numerator can be in increments of 0.25.
"S" means the decimal in the numerator can be in increments of 0.5.
In a user defined price scale range, it is also possible to input numbers in fractional format into
the Maximum and Minimum fields. The numbers will be converted to decimal format when the dialog box is
closed.
However, the price scale on chart will still be in fractional format.
Note: If the price scale of the symbol is already in decimal format and it is changed to fractional format, the chart
must be reloaded for the fractional format to appear.
Symbol Dictionary for Futures
The Symbol Dictionary in QuoteManager contains a list of futures symbol roots with pre-defined contract
specifications and session times.
The user can use these pre-defined settings to add new symbols quickly without needing to manually complete each
field.
For example, if the user wants to add the ES #F symbol from eSignal and the Symbol Dictionary has the ES symbol
root defined, then QuoteManager will recognize the ES root symbol and automatically fill in the contract
specifications.
The contract specifications are important because the specifications are used to plot the chart and calculate dollar
amounts.
If the contract specifications are not correct, then the chart may not plot properly and the strategy may not function
properly.
It is also possible to add new symbol roots into Symbol Dictionary and edit existing symbol roots. Symbol Dictionary
contains symbol roots for most futures contracts. However, it is not possible for the list to be 100% complete, and
contract specifications may change.
400
Adding a Symbol Root to Symbol Dictionary
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
Click Tools in the main menu and select Symbol Dictionary, or click the Symbol Dictionary
icon on the
toolbar.
3.
Click the Add button. The New – Edit Root Settings window will appear.
4.
Complete the Settings and Sessions sections on the form.
5.
Click the OK button.
Editing a Symbol Root in Symbol Dictionary
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
Click Tools in the main menu and select Symbol Dictionary, or click the Symbol Dictionary
icon on the
toolbar.
3.
Select the symbol root to edit. Click the Edit button. The Edit Root Settings window will appear.
4.
Edit the fields.
5.
Click the OK button.
Symbol Dictionary for Futures
Using the Symbol Root in Symbol Dictionary
1.
Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
 click the New QuoteManager Window
2.
icon on the Main toolbar; or:
 in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Add a new symbol into QuoteManager. Make sure the new symbol's root is the same as the symbol root in
Symbol Dictionary. See Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List for more information.
3.
Open the Edit Symbol Window.
Opening Edit Symbol Window:
1.
Double-click the symbol in the symbol list, or
2.
Select the symbol in the symbol list, then select Symbol in the main menu and select Edit Symbol, or
3.
Right-click on the symbol and select Edit Symbol.
Note: Edit Symbol window is already open in Step 1. It is possible to leave it open and continue working with
it.
4.
Select the Settings tab in the Edit Symbol window.
401
5.
In the Settings Source section, select the Use Symbol Dictionary Settings radio button to use the symbol root's
contract specifications in Symbol Dictionary.
6.
Select the Sessions tab in the Edit Symbol window.
7.
In the Sessions Source section, select the Use Symbol Dictionary Sessions radio button to use the symbol root's
sessions information in Symbol Dictionary.
Multiplier for Trading Technologies Symbols
Understanding Multiplier for Trading Technologies Symbols
MultiCharts works with many data vendors and brokers, so it is important that the software is capable to work with
different data. In some cases price formats of data of the same symbol provided by 2 separate sources may differ
and this can cause some issues:
Example: Trading Technologies doesn't provide historical data into MultiCharts due to the nature of its
implementation in the software. In this case if a customer requires historical backfill, he or she may be interested in
using Merge function (see Merging Data Sources into a Single Chart ) to have historical date from IQFeed and realtime data from Trading Technologies on ES chart. It may lead to significant price spike on the chart, since the price
format of most data sources for ES symbol has 4 digits before the decimal part: 1234.50; when the same symbol
from Trading Technologies shows different containg only integer part format: 123450.
Example 2: Strategy is applied to your chart that is fed not with Trading Technologies data and the price for orders
is taken according to chart price format: 1234.50; that is not acceptable for Trading Trechnologies broker that has
123450 price on ES.
To make possible combining Trading Technologies data feed with another one or trade using Trading Technologies
as broker if you have any other data feed, the Multiplier feature has been added.
How to set up Multiplier
1.
Open Symbol Root settings for the symbol. (see Editing a Symbol Root in Symbol Dictionary)
2.
Add the multiplier rate to the description of the root manually (with asterisk in front, no spaces): *XXX
Note: No other symbol setting should be changed.Example: To get 4 integer and 2 decimal digits price format
for ES symbol from Trading Technologies, add *0.01.
3.
Save the changes by clicking Ok.
4.
Close MultiCharts and make sure all its processes are ended (see MultiCharts Processes).
5.
After restart of MultiCharts new data coming from Trading Technologies should have the required price format.
Note: After the Multiplier feature has been used it is important to manually remap the symbol in Symbol
Mapping window (see Symbol Mapping) , otherwise the Multiplier won't affect trading and orders will be sent
with incorrect prices.
Note 2: Multiplier feature affects only the data the collected in real-time. All previously collected data will still
have the same price format even if the Multiplier feature is used. If a customer is interested in converting old
data price format, he or she should export the data into ASCII file from the symbol in QuoteManager (see
Exporting Data) to import it back from the file into QuoteManager, using multiplier on import (see How to
import ASCII data).
402
Collecting Data
The program provides optimal performance with various data feeds. Its behavior depends on the data feed
connected; there exist three kinds of data feeds - data feeds that provide real-time only, data feeds that provide
both history and real-time and data feeds that provide history only.
See the Built-In Data Sources table for more detailed information on data feeds.
The program's behavior depending on the data feed type is described below:
Data feed provides real-time only
Most brokers do not provide history data. In this case the program receives only real-time data and stores it in the
local database. The data is saved immediately, at the same time as it is charted and may be used in the future. The
program creates 1 minute and 1 day resolutions automatically and stores them in the database along with ticks.
All other resolutions are generated from stored data. I.e. if we need a 100 tick chart, the program automatically
builds it from existing ticks. If a 2 minute chart is required, the program builds it from 1 minute data. In case of gaps
in data 1 tick, 1 minute or 1 day must be imported correspondingly.
See the Importing Data section for more detailed information.
Data feed provides both history and real-time
Most professional data vendors as well as a number of advanced brokers provide history data for the ultimate trader
convenience.
The amount and quality of data provided varies from vendor to vendor, though; see the Built-In Data Sources table
for a general overview of history data feeds.
MultiCharts demonstrates the best performance with such data vendors, freeing the user from the need to
download missing data manually.
The history data is stored in the local database and needs minimal effort for reuse, as only missing data has to be
downloaded instead of the entire period. Besides, as data is stored locally, it is accessible even when vendor servers
are not; all real-time data from the vendor is stored in the database as well, so no repeated queries must be sent
when charts are created again. This cuts down on the Internet traffic and accelerates work. 1 tick, 1 minute and 1
day resolutions are stored in the database.
Data feed provides only history data
There exists a multitude of End-of-Day and intraday historical data vendors. Data from such vendors is used by indepth analysis by experienced traders or for filling gaps in data from other vendors. When this data is used on its
own, without requiring combination with data from other vendors, we insist on importing data into symbols of realtime only vendors, such as Universal DDE.
This guarantees that the data will not be mixed up with already existing data and will be charted exactly the way it
was downloaded. The program saves to the database 1 tick, 1 minute and 1 day resolutions and generates all others
from them. When data is imported, existing data in the database will be overwritten by the data from the file if the
timestamps are the same.
403
Custom Futures
Understanding Custom Futures
Not all data sources provide continuous data. If continuous futures data is not provided by your data feed you can
create continuous symbols within MultiCharts.
Custom Futures is a symbol combined from the individual futures contracts. The data series of Custom Futures is
created by rolling over the data of the individual contracts added to the QuoteManager.
Custom Futures are useful for backtesting and charting purposes due to short operation time of individual futures
contracts. The rollover is performed only on the session end near to the moment of current contract expiration using
the rollover rules based on time and activity.
Custom Futures chart is plotted using the data available for individual contracts added in the QuoteManager.
If there is no data for the symbol in the database – the data will be requested from the data feed, similar to plotting
regular contracts charts.
“No data” message in the status line of the chart can be displayed if all the requested contracts have no data in the
data base and this data cannot be downloaded from the data feed.
Custom Futures limitations:
•
The resolutions available for Custom Futures are 1 Day and lower (tick, point, contract, change, second,
minute).
•
Only the Regular Chart type is available for custom futures.
•
Bar Magnifier Mode is not available for Custom Futures.
•
DataPlayback for Custom Futures can be used in “As Is” mode only.
Creating Custom Futures symbol
The procedure of creating a Custom Futures symbol consists of multiple steps.
Adding symbols to the data base
Individual futures contracts should be added to the database prior to creating a Custom Futures symbol. Creating a
Custom Futures will not add the necessary individual futures contracts. See Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section
for more information
Adding expired contracts to the database
Some data feeds provide data for expired contracts. Expired contracts may not be available through the lookup
window, such contracts should be added manually.
See Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section for more information
Note: Custom Futures and symbols (individual futures) should have the same data provider, exchange and Symbol
Root.
404
Adding symbol roots to the dictionary
For every data provider, not presented in the Symbol Dictionary list in the QuoteManager symbol roots should be
added to the Default symbol dictionary.
See Symbol Dictionary for Futures section for more information
Note: The symbol root expiration rule directly affects the symbol expiration date.
Creating a Custom Futures symbol
A new custom futures symbol can be created by using the Add Custom Futures window or by entering the Custom
Futures symbol parameters into the Command Line toolbar.
If the custom futures symbol name is known, the simplest way to create a new chart is to enter the symbol name
and all known symbol parameters into the command line.
Any omitted symbol parameters will automatically be selected, and the symbol plotted.
Creating Custom Futures Using the Add Custom Futures Window
To create a Custom Futures symbol:
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select File, then point to New and click QuoteManager Window.
2.
Select Instrument.
3.
Then click Add custom futures.
4.
Select the data source.
5.
Input the symbol name.
6.
Select the symbol root.
7.
Select contracts to use (if they are specified incorrectly in Symbol Dictionary Settings) by clicking on the check
boxes.
8.
Build continuous futures contract on.
To define the serial number of the contract on which the Custom Futures series is based select one of the available
options in the box: Nearest contract, 2nd nearest contract, N nearest contract.
While building a Custom Futures “N” Nearest contract will be taken for each moment of time. Algorithm of choosing
the rollover date
Event (Volume and/or Open Interest)
When day (Event) rollover is selected, e.g. the next contract’s Daily bar volume (Days of Higher) was higher than the
Volume of previous bar for the specified amount of days (1-9).
To select the event condition click Event
To define the rollover condition, select one of the available options in the Days of Higher box: Volume, Open interest,
Open Interest or Volume, Open Interest and Volume.
Time (certain date)
When Time rollover is selected – the transition from the previous contract to the next contract is done on the day
defined by displacement into the past from the expiration date for the specified value 0 – 99 of trading days (
Trading Days Prior to Expiration Date). An additional displacement can be set for the value up to 9 months into the
past using the Offset, i.e. the rollover date is the date obtained by displacement into the past from the Expiration
Date for Offset of months and prior trading days.
To select time condition click Time. In the Offset by Months prior box, enter an amount of months.
405
9.
Back adjustment mode
To define the back adjustment mode, in the Back Adjustment Mode box select one of the available options: no
adjustment, absolute difference, ratio.
•
No Adjustment - the bars of each series in use are not changed.
•
Absolute Difference - constant (С = Cnext - Cprev; where Cprev – close of the last bar before the rollover point)
is added to all data prior to the rollover date. The data of the last series is not corrected as there was no rollover for
it yet.
If the N contracts are rolled over then the data of the first contract is corrected N-1 times.
•
Ratio adjustment - all data prior to the rollover point is multiplied on the ratio (C= C next / Cprev). If the N
contracts are rolled over then the data of the first contract is corrected N-1 times.
10. “Symbol Code” field
Displays rollover encoded in a line. The encoding is done automatically if the information on the Custom Futures tab
is changed. The symbol code can be copied, but cannot be modified.
“Symbol Code” can be used in Real-time market scanner or Command Line to plot a Custom Futures chart bypassing
the dialogue window.
11. Set the Settings and Sessions tabs of Custom Futures up the same way as for individual contracts.
See Setting Properties section for more information
Creating Custom Futures charts
See Creating Charts for more information
Additional information regarding the Symbol Root
The data series of Custom Futures can be created only from the individual contracts present in the Database and
named according to the basic template: <Root>[<space>]<AbbrMonth>[<space>]<Year>[<suffix>]. Definitions:
<Root> - all symbols;
<AbbrMonth> - letters F, G, H, J, K, M, N, Q, U, V, X, Z, or abbreviations JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN,
JUL, AUG, SEP, OKT, NOV, DEC; 01,…,12
<Year> - 1, 2 or 4 digits indicating the year;
<empty space> - any quantity of empty spaces;
<suffix> - any sequence of two or more symbols, starting from '/' or '-'; []
- everything that is in the [] brackets can be omitted.
Note: If the necessary symbol is missing from the database data series will be created without it.
Custom Futures that cannot be created in MultiCharts
The root name should not contain following symbols <;> <:> <=> <!> <_> <”>. Custom Futures cannot be created for
such symbols.
If the symbol name does not satisfy the basic template, Custom Futures cannot be created for this symbol.
Troubleshooting
While Plotting a Custom Futures chart you may see yellow alert messages: “To construct Custom Futures please add
the following contracts”.
406
These alerts appear because Custom futures requests data prior and following the symbols already in the database
based on the selected rollover conditions and data request.
Custom Futures chart can be plotted without adding these symbols, if there are other individual contracts with data
in QuoteManager.
If there are no futures symbols in the data base for creating a Custom Futures, the following alert message will
appear:
407
Up, Down and Total Volume
There are three ways to get volume values for data series into MultiCharts:
•
Historical volume is provided by data vendor.
•
Volume is imported from ASCII file.
•
Volume is calculated in real-time by MultiCharts.
Historical Volume Provided by Data Vendor
Historical volume provided by a supported data vendor in MultiCharts is displayed depending on the type of data
(see Tick, Minute and Daily Data):
•
Historical tick volume.
In most cases supported data sources in MultiCharts provide only historical total tick volume, no up and down
volume. For tick-based resolutions all historical total volume is divided by 2 and allocated to up and down volume.
•
Historical minute and daily volume.
In most cases supported data sources in MultiCharts provide only historical total tick volume, no up and down
volume. For minute-based and daily-based resolutions all historical total volume is recorded to the data base as
total volume and is also recorded as up volume. Down volume is empty.
Volume is imported from ASCII file
When data is imported from ASCII a customer has opportunity to import all kinds of volume: up, down and total
volume.
Volume is calculated in real-time by MultiCharts
MultiCharts calculates volume in real-time and allocate it into up and down according to the following logic:
•
If a new tick comes with higher than previous price, the volume is recorded as up volume.
•
If a new tick comes with lower than previous price, the volume is recorded as down volume.
If a new tick comes with the same as previous price, the volume is recorded either to up or to down volume
depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with higher than previous price
and volume is recorded as up volume, and then another tick comes with the same as previous price, the volume is
recorded also to up volume.
408
PowerLanguage
Language Elements
PowerLanguage is a system of expressing financial instrument trading rules in a systematic and logical way that can
be executed by a computer.
A well-thought-out trading strategy, properly expressed in PowerLanguage, will be carried out with a far greater
speed, accuracy, and persistence then could ever be possible for a human trader.
Implementing trading strategies in PowerLanguage requires familiarity with the basic rules and structure of the
language, outlined below, as well as with the keywords described in the keyword section of this reference guide.
PowerLanguage Studies and Statements
A complete PowerLanguage "program" is called a Script. An example of a script would be a Strategy, a study that
issues trading orders, an Indicator, a study that draws plots on a chart to assist in making trading decisions, or a
Function, an independent procedure (subroutine) that can be called from another script to carry out a specific task.
PowerLanguage scripts consist of at least one, but usually more, statements. A statement is a complete instruction,
and ends with a semi-column (;).
An example of a statement (and of a one-line script):
Buy Next Bar At Open;
Statements are evaluated from left to right, and scripts are evaluated from top to bottom.
Price Charts
A data series consists of groups of price data points, based on a defined interval and arranged in a chronological
order.
The most popular format for visually presenting a data series is a Bar Chart. Each bar, based on a group of price data
points, is a vertical line connecting the High and the Low price points, and graphically represents the range of an
instrument's price movement over a defined interval. The prices of the first (Open) and of the last (Close) price
points of the group, on which the bar is based, are indicated on the line by marks known as the bar’s Open and Close
components.
PowerLanguage handles price data "packaged" in the form of bars. While bars can be based on a variety of
resolutions, the point of reference is always a "bar".
For example, the following statement places a Buy order at the Open price of the next bar if the previous bar's High
was less then the current bar's Close:
If High 1 Bar Ago < Close Then Buy Next Bar At Open;
Both time and price in the above statement are referenced in terms of bars.
409
Price Chart Evaluation by PowerLanguage Studies
A PowerLanguage script evaluates a chart on bar-by-bar basis, starting with the very first (oldest) bar on the chart.
The exact same script is executed for every bar.
After the entire script is executed for the first bar, the second bar is evaluated, and so on to the last bar on the chart.
The bar being currently evaluated by the study is defined as the current bar, and the previous bar is the 1 Bar Ago.
The current bar becomes the 1 Bar Ago once the study moves on to the next bar.
This is a basic overview is intended to give the initial understanding of how PowerLanguage studies function.
A more detailed description of how a chart is evaluated is presented in the How Scripts Work section.
PowerLanguage
Power language allows a combination of keywords, constants, variables, mathematical and logical operators, and
punctuation to be used to express trading rules and bring about both conditional as well as unconditional actions
and output.
There are tools to accomplish a variety of tasks, from the very basic, such as:
Print("My name is Joe");
All the way to array functions available in the advanced programming languages.
Each category of PowerLanguge components is discussed below:
Keywords
Most of the keywords are the instructions, "action words", of PowerLanguage.
Keywords instruct to buy or sell, plot or erase, compare or convert.
410
Some of the keywords are also "nouns", and return specific values or characteristics.
A list of keywords with detailed descriptions and examples is available in the Keyword Reference
Skip Words
Skip words are the interjections of PowerLanguage. They actually do nothing, and are skipped during code execution,
but they make PowerLanguage easier to read.
In PowerLanguage Editor, skip words appear in red. A list of these words is available in the Skip Words section of this
guide.
Operators
There are four types of operators: Mathematical, Relational, Logical, and String.
Mathematical operators are used to perform mathematical operations. There are five available mathematical
operators:
+
Addition
-
Subtraction
*
Multiplication
/
Division
( ) Parentheses
Relational operators are used to make comparisons. There are six relational operators:
<
Less then
>
Greater than
<=
Less then or equal to
=>
Greater than or equal
to
=
Equal to
<>
Not equal to
Logical operators are used to perform logical (Boolean) operations. There are two available logical operators: AND
and OR.
There is only one string operator, the plus sign ( + ), is used as follows to combine multiple string expressions in to
one:
"String expression one" + "and string expression two"
The resulting string expression will be:
"String expression one and string expression two"
Referencing previous bars
Previous bars' values can be referenced by using the statement N Bars Ago, or by using the bar offset notation that
consists of a numerical expression enclosed in square brackets:
High 2 Bars Ago or High [2]
411
Time and Date
Time values in PowerLanguage are specified in the 24-hour HHmm or HHmmss formats, where 1300 = 1:00 PM and
130000 = 1:00:00 PM, respectively.
Dates in PowerLanguage are specified in the YYYMMdd format, where YYY is the number of years since 1900, MM
is the month, and dd is the day of the month.
This format is also known as the "EL Date" format.
Variables
Variables are used to store numerical, string, or logical (true/false) values. The value stored in a variable can be
referenced throughout a script by the variable’s name, and can be modified by the script at any time. Variables must
be declared before use.
For more information see Variable
Arrays
Arrays are multiple-element variables.
How Scripts Work
PowerLanguage studies can be used with the charts created by the MultiCharts trading platform and with the
Portfolio Backtester.
PowerLanguage studies operate on price data, organized as a series of data points, based on a defined interval and
arranged in a chronological order. Each data point is a summary of a group of price points (ticks) that includes the
price values of the first and of the last tick, as well as the range of price movement over the defined interval. Data
points also include additional data, such as date and time of the last tick and trade volume.
The most popular format for visually presenting a data point is a bar. References to bars in this guide actually refer
to data points. Any other visual formats for presenting data points, such as candlesticks, points, lines, etc., can
equally well be substituted.
In this guide, references to charts are used as a visualization tool to aid in understanding how the PowerLanguage
scripting works.
PowerLanguage studies are divided in to two main types: Indicators and Signals.
An Indicator is a visual technical analysis tool, used to analyze market conditions and identify and forecast trends
and market patterns. An indicator is a visualization of a mathematical formula, and consists of one or more Plots –
lines, histograms, series of points or crosses, highs and lows, left and right ticks, or a combination of the above,
displayed on a chart. Indicators are computed using only price, volume, and (occasionally) open interest data.
A Signal is a mechanical technical analysis tool, used to systematically specify market entry or exit points according
to a set of trading rules implemented in the signal's algorithm. The trade points are indicated on a chart by ticks and
arrows. Strategies can easily be constructed by combining a number of signals. Market entry or exit points, specified
by the signals, can be used to send orders electronically directly to a broker, fully automating the trading process.
Due to the differences in their intended purposes, Indicators and Signals evaluate price data series somewhat
differently, and will be discussed separately.
Indicators
The purpose of indicators is to plot visualizations of mathematical formulas on a chart. The plots are created based
on one or more price data series.
412
When applied to a chart, an indicator script first evaluates all the completed bars one-by-one, starting with the very
first (oldest) bar on the chart.
The entire script is executed once for each completed bar. On each bar, based on the results of the evaluation, an
indicator script can generate output - graph, text, plot color change, audio alert, etc.
If indicator script contains references to previous bars' values, indicator can begin generating output starting with
the first bar that follows the Maximum number of bars a study will reference.
Once all the completed bars on the chart have been evaluated, an indicator script will proceed to evaluate the last
bar on the chart on tick-by-tick basis, without waiting for the bar to be completed. An incomplete bar is a summary
of all ticks received since the previous bar was completed.
Each time a new tick is received, the entire script will be executed for that bar, until the bar is completed and the
next bar is started. Indicator scripts treat incomplete bars the same way as the bars that are completed, and can
take action each time an incomplete bar is evaluated.
Please note that only the last, incomplete, bar is re-evaluated on every new tick, and not the whole series.
The process of evaluation of a bar by an indicator is called a recalculation or an update.
Indicator update on every tick is enabled by default. However, in some instances it may be undesirable for indicators
to be recalculated every time a new tick is received; updating a large number of complex indicators on every tick
will require substantial system resources.
Update on Every Tick option can be turned off in the MultiCharts settings.
Completed Bars (Indicators)
A bar is considered completed when it is closed and no additional ticks can be added to it.
• For time-based charts, the bar is closed once the first tick with a time stamp past the bar's interval is received, or
if no additional ticks are received for a period of three seconds.
• For tick-based charts, the bar is closed once the defined number of ticks has been reached.
• For range-based charts, the bar is closed once the tick with a price outside of the original bar's range has been
received.
• For volume-based charts, the bar is closed once a tick, bringing the current bar's total to the defined number of
contracts, has been received.
• For change-based charts, the bar is closed once a tick with a price, bringing the current bar's total number of price
changes to the defined number, has been received.
The Maximum number of bars a study will reference (Indicators)
A study's script can refer to the values of previous bars for use in evaluation of the current bar.
When a value of a bar N bars ago is referenced in a script, the study can only be visualized starting with the N + 1
bar.
The number of previous bars that must be available for a script in order to start performing calculations is called
Maximum number of bars a study will reference, or MaxBarsBack.
The MaxBarsBack value can be selected to be detected automatically or set manually.
When detected automatically, MaxBarsBack will initially be set to the value of the largest data offset in the study;
however, if a variable data offset is used in the script, the initial MaxBarsBack value may prove to be too small.
In such a case, the MaxBarsBack value will automatically be increased by 5 or by a factor of 1.618, whichever yields
a higher value, and the study recalculated.
413
The process of automatic MaxBarsBack detection may cause some functions to be executed repeatedly for the first
few bars of a chart when a study is first applied; this can be avoided by setting the MaxBarsBack value manually.
To select the smallest MaxBarsBack value sufficient for a particular study, set the value manually. The recommended
initial MaxBarsBack value is 50.
Signals
Signals are the basic building blocks of strategies. Signals are substantially more complex than indicators and take in
to account a far greater number of factors.
Signals compile strategy performance data and support backtesting and Automated Trade Execution.
When applied to a chart, a signal script first evaluates all the completed bars one-by-one, starting with the very first
( oldest) bar on the chart. The entire script is executed once for each completed bar. On each bar, based on the
results of the evaluation, a signal script may generate one or more trading orders. Orders are indicated by an arrow
or a mark on the chart, by a visual or an audio alert, etc. If signal script contains references to previous bars' values,
signal can begin generating orders staring with the first bar that follows the Maximum number of bars a study will
reference.
By default, once all the completed bars on a chart are evaluated, the execution of a signal script is paused until a
new bar is completed (a bar is completed once an interval, defined for each bar, is over), and then the entire script
is executed again for the new bar.
This signal script execution method can be modified by selecting intra-bar order generation. With intra-bar order
generation enabled, the signal script will evaluate the last bar without waiting for the bar to be completed. Each
time a new tick is received, the last bar will be re-evaluated, until the bar is completed and the next bar is started.
Incomplete bar is a summary of all ticks received since the previous bar was completed. In intra-bar order generation
mode, signal scripts treat incomplete bars the same way as the bars that are completed, and can take actions based
on evaluation of incomplete bars.
Please note that only the last, incomplete bar is re-evaluated on every new tick, and not the whole series.
Completed Bars (Signals)
A bar is considered completed when it is closed and no additional ticks can be added to it.
• For time-based charts, the bar is closed once the first tick with a time stamp past the bar's interval is received, or
if no additional ticks are received for a period of three seconds.
• For tick-based charts, the bar is closed once the defined number of ticks has been reached.
• For range-based charts, the bar is closed once the tick with a price outside of the original bar's range has been
received.
• For volume-based charts, the bar is closed once a tick, bringing the current bar's total to the defined number of
contracts, has been received.
• For change-based charts, the bar is closed once a tick with a price, bringing the current bar's total number of price
changes to the defined number, has been received.
The Maximum number of bars a study will reference (Signals)
A study's script can refer to the values of previous bars for use in evaluation of the current bar.
When a value of a bar N bars ago is referenced in a script, the study can only be visualized starting with the N + 1
bar.
414
The number of previous bars that must be available for a script in order to start performing calculations is called
Maximum number of bars a study will reference, or MaxBarsBack. The MaxBarsBack value can be selected to be
detected automatically or set manually.
When detected automatically, MaxBarsBack will initially be set to the value of the largest data offset in the study;
however, if a variable data offset is used in the script, the initial MaxBarsBack value may prove to be too small.
In such a case, the MaxBarsBack value will automatically be increased by 5 or by a factor of 1.618, whichever yields
a higher value, and the study recalculated.
The process of automatic MaxBarsBack detection may cause some functions to be executed repeatedly for the first
few bars of a chart when a study is first applied; this can be avoided by setting the MaxBarsBack value manually.
To select the smallest MaxBarsBack value sufficient for a particular study, set the value manually. The recommended
initial MaxBarsBack value is 50.
Learn more about setting MaxBarsBack values for Signals
Order Execution Priority
A signal can place multiple orders based on evaluation of a single bar. The orders may be generated by the same or
different statement types.
The orders are executed in three groups, based on the type of statement that generated the order:
Order group execution sequence:
1. Orders generated by This Bar [On] Close statements.
2. Orders generated by Next Bar [At] Market and Next Bar [At] Open statements.
3. Orders generated by Next Bar [At] Price Limit and Next Bar [At] Price Stop statements.
The orders generated within each order group are sorted by priority based on the current position:
Order Execution Priority Table
Higher value indicates greater priority
Position
Flat
Long
Short
Long Entry
1
1
2
Short Entry
1
2
1
Long Exit
-
1
-
Short Exit
-
-
1
Multiple same-direction orders are assigned priority relative to each other based on the order in which the order
statements are listed in the signal script.
When multiple signals are combined to create a strategy, same-direction orders generated by different signals are
assigned priority relative to each other based on the order that the signals appear under the Signals tab in the
Format Objects window.
Once the orders are sorted, the order that has the highest priority is executed. It is important to note that an entry
order in the direction, opposite to the current position, will not simply cover the position, but actually reverse it.
For example, a Long 1 order, executed for a Short 1 position, will result in a Long 1 and not in a Flat position.
415
Taking into account the change in position, resulting from execution of the order, the remaining orders are sorted
again, and the order that has the highest priority is executed.
This procedure is repeated until all the orders are executed, or until none of the orders left can be executed – for
example, only Exit orders are left and the position is flat.
If the only Entry orders left are in the same direction as the current position, these orders will only be executed if
Pyramiding is enabled.
Pyramiding settings allow the number of entries in the same direction to be limited to a set number.
Any orders left that could not be executed are discarded.
Order Execution Priority example:
Multiple orders are generated, in the following order: Short Exit, Short Entry, Long Entry, Long Exit, and Long Entry.
The current position is Short.
1. The orders are sorted by priority (in descending order): Long entry, Long entry, Short exit, Short entry (Long exit could not
be executed).
SX SE LE LX
2. Long entry is executed; the position is now Long.
SX SE V LX
LE
LE
3 . The orders are sorted by priority (in descending order): Short entry, Long entry, Long exit (Short exit could not be executed
).
4. Short entry is executed; the position is now Short.
SX V V LX
LE
5 . The orders are sorted by priority (in descending order): Long entry, Short exit (Long exit could not be executed ).
6. Long entry is executed; the position is now Long.
SX V V LX
V
7 . The orders are sorted by priority (in descending order): Long exit (Short exit could not be executed ).
8. Long exit is executed; the position is now Flat.
SX V V V V
9. The only order left, Short exit, can not be executed and is discarded.
SX V V V V
The net result of executing the above orders, from a Short position, will be a Flat position.
Additional Information Sources
MultiCharts' PowerLanguage is highly compatible with TradeStation EasyLanguage, so you can use EL guides to help
you learn PL.
• TradeStation EasyLanguage Extension Software Development Kit ( SDK) provides users with the ability to write
code in a programming language that allows for the creation of DLLs (for example, C++, Pascal, Delphi, or Visual
Basic) and call that code from within an EasyLanguage analysis technique.
• The essential EasyLanguage programming guide allows you to quickly look up usage and syntax concepts and
examples for the most commonly used features of EasyLanguage.
416
• The EasyLanguage Functions & Reserved Words Reference is a complete reference listing of every
EasyLanguage reserved word and EasyLanguage function. This comprehensive guide gives complete
descriptions, usages, input declarations, and code examples for each EasyLanguage syntax element.
About EasyLanguage
EasyLanguage Resources
This page lists various EasyLanguage resources.
Free Manuals
• The Essential EasyLanguage Programming Guide allows you to quickly look up usage and syntax concepts and
examples for the most commonly used features of EasyLanguage.
• The EasyLanguage Functions & Reserved Words Reference is a complete reference listing of every
EasyLanguage reserved word and EasyLanguage function. This comprehensive guide gives complete
descriptions, usages, input declarations, and code examples for each EasyLanguage syntax element.
Books
•
Building Winning Trading Systems with TradeStation.
Internet resources
•
Official MultiCharts forum.
Once per bar alert
With the Alert PowerLanguage keyword it's possible to trigger alerts every bar close or on every tick. But what if you
want to trigger an alert once per bar?
Triggering an alert once per bar
The code example below will trigger an alert once per bar, even if the alert properties (in the Alert tab from the
Format Indicator screen) are set to 'Alert Conditions Check - Every Tick'.
Variables:
IntraBarPersist alertAlreadyGiven(False);
417
if (CheckAlert = True) then begin
// Trigger an alert if the price goes higher than
// the highest high of the previous 10 bars.
if (alertAlreadyGiven = False) and (Close > Highest(High, 10)[1]) then begin
Alert(Text("The price, ", NumToStr(Close, 2), ", has crossed the highest high (",
NumToStr(Highest(High, 10)[1], 2), ") of the last 10 bars."));
// Set the boolean to true to prevent another alert
//
on this bar.
alertAlreadyGiven = True;
end;
// Reset the boolean variable so that an alert can
// be triggered during the next bar.
if (BarStatus(1) = 2) then alertAlreadyGiven = False;
end;
Triggering an alert once per bar - simplified
To simplify the triggering of an alert once per bar, and not clutter your code with the code logic from the example
above, consider making a function called AlertOncePerBar ( Return type: Numeric, Function Storage: Simple), in
which you'll place the following code:
{
AlertOncePerBar function; will generate an alert once per bar.
}
Inputs:
AlertText(StringSimple);
Variables:
IntraBarPersist barNumOfAlert(0);
if (CurrentBar <> barNumOfAlert) then begin
418
Alert(AlertText);
barNumOfAlert = CurrentBar;
end;
AlertOncePerBar = 0; // dummy
Now, if you want to call an alert once per bar (for example, with an EMA crossover), you can call that with:
if (XAverage(Close, 5) crosses above XAverage(Close, 20)) then AlertOncePerBar("EMA cross alert");
Outputting Dates in EasyLanguage
This article gives some tips and examples for outputting dates in EasyLanguage.
Relevant EasyLanguage Date reserved words
Just as a reminder, the following Date reserved words are often used in working with dates:
• Date, which returns the Date of the current bar in YYYMMdd format. This date format is always the format
with which a date calculation starts.
• CurrentDate, returns the current computer date in YYYMMdd format.
• ELDateToDateTime, converts a date in YYmmdd format to a date into DateTime format.
Outputting the date
The following example prints the current date to the PowerLanguage Editor log:
Print("The current date is: ", CurrentDate);
Which returns the following sentence: The current date is: 1120127.00.
To output the date in a more readable format, the reserved word FormatDate is needed. However, FormatDate
requires that the date is in DateTime format, while the default Date is in YYYMMdd format. So, a conversion to
DateTime is needed first. This is done with the ELDateToDateTime reserved word.
The code example below shows in detail which steps needs to be made.
Variables:
dateToday(0), dateInDateTimeFormat(0), dateReadable("");
419
// 1. Assign the date of today to the variable 'dateToday' dateToday = CurrentDate;
Print("The current date in YYYMMdd format is: ", dateToday, NewLine);
// 2. Now, convert the date to DateTime format
dateInDateTimeFormat = ELDateToDateTime(dateToday); Print("The current date in DateTime format is: ",
NumToStr(dateInDateTimeFormat, 5), NewLine);
// 3. Now we can print the current date in a more readable format dateReadable =
FormatDate("dd-MM-yyyy", dateInDateTimeFormat);
Print("The current date in a readable format is: ", dateReadable);
This returns the following:
The current date in YYYMMdd format is: 1120127.00
The current date in DateTime format is: 40935.00000
The current date in a readable format is: 27-01-2012
Of course, not all these steps are needed. The extensive above example can be rewritten to simply:
Print("The current date in a readable format is: ", FormatDate("dd-MM-yyyy", ELDateToDateTime(CurrentDate)));
Which returns:
The current date in a readable format is: 27-01-2012
Outputting the date in different formats
The FormatDate reserved word has a parameter string by which different date outputs can be generated. For
example, in the code above we used "dd-MM-yyyy" to return "27-1-2012".
The code example below shows some of these parameter options for FormatDate (see the FormatDate article for
an extensive list of parameter options).
Variables:
dateInDateTime(0);
dateInDateTime =
ELDateToDateTime(CurrentDate); Print("Date in short version: ",
FormatDate("d-M-y", dateInDateTime), NewLine);
// Note: the output of the following statement depends on your regionale
420
Print("Date in abbreviations: ", FormatDate("ddd-MMM-yy", dateInDateTime),
NewLine); Print("Date fully written: ", FormatDate("dddd MMMM yyyy",
dateInDateTime), NewLine);
Print("Date in a sentence: ",
FormatDate("The current Date is dddd anD the month is MMMM (which is
month #MM). The Year is yyyy.", dateInDateTime));
end;
This gives the following output:
Date in short version: 27-1-12
Date in abbreviations: vr-jan-12
Date fully written: vrijdag januari 2012 Date in a sentence: The current Date is vrijdag anD the month is januari
(which is month #01). The Year is 2012.
421
PowerLanguage Editor
Default Study Properties
Default study properties include Input Values, Style, and Maximum Bars Back settings.
When a study is applied to a chart, the default settings are used unless the user elects to set the study properties.
To learn more about setting study properties in MultiCharts, see Indicator Settings and Signal Settings
Setting Default Indicator Input Values
An Input is a constant used in Indicator calculations. Indicators can have one or more inputs, or none at all. Each
input is assigned a name.
There are three types of inputs: Numeric, True/False, and String. Indicators can easily be modified by changing the
input Values.
One of the main advantages of using the inputs is that basic adjustments to the indicator logic can be made be simply
changing the input values, without the need to edit the indicator code.
Most, but not all, indicators use input values.
Note: Default input values cannot be set for Signals or Functions.
To set default indicator input values:
1. Open the Properties window by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; or:
• Right-click within the script display window and then click Properties; or:
• Select File in the main menu and click Properties.
2. Select the General tab.
3. In the Inputs section, in the Value column, click on the input that you want to assign a default value to, and enter
the desired value.
4. Select the Use as Default check box and click OK.
Setting Default Indicator Style
To set properties:
1. Open the Properties window by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; or:
• Right-click within the script display window and then click Properties; or:
• Select File in the main menu and click Properties.
2. Select the General tab.
3. In the Style section, in the Type column, select the plot type from the drop-down list box.
422
4. In the Color column select the plot color from the drop-down palette box.
5. In the Style column select the plot style from the drop-down list box.
6. In the Weight column select the plot weight from the drop-down list box; the weight can only be selected for the
solid line style.
7. Select the Use as Default check box, and click OK.
Default Study Properties
Setting Default Signal Style
To set properties:
1. Open the Properties window by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; or:
• Right-click within the script display window and then click Properties; or:
• Select File in the main menu and click Properties.
2. Select the Entries or the Exits tab, to set the style of entry or exit points, respectively.
3. In each section, in the Color column, select a color for each of the components from the drop-down palette box.
4. In the Style column select the component style from the drop-down list box.
5. In the Size column select the component size from the drop-down list box; only the size of arrows and ticks can be
set.
6. Select the Use as Default check box, and click OK.
Setting Default Maximum Bars Back
All studies based on past data use a certain number of bars for their calculations.
The number of bars is called Maximum number of bars a study will reference, or Maximum Bars Back.
Either automatic Max Bars Back value detection or a set Max Bars Back value can be specified as the default.
Setting Automatic Max Bars Back Detection
To select automatic Maximum Bars Back detection as a default:
1. Open the Properties window by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; or:
• Right-click within the script display window and then click Properties; or:
• Select File in the main menu and click Properties.
2. Select the Properties tab.
3. In the Max number of bars study will reference section, click Auto-detect.
4. Select the Use as Default check box, and click OK.
Setting Default Max Bars Back Value
To set a default Maximum Bars Back value:
423
1. Open the Properties window by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; or:
• Right-click within the script display window and then click Properties; or:
 Select File in the main menu and click Properties.
2. Select the Properties tab.
3. In the Max number of bars study will reference section, click User specified, and enter the default Max Bars Back
value in to the box.
4. Select the Use as Default check box, and click OK.
Default Study Properties
Setting Default Indicator Price Scale (Axis) Type
The default type of indicator Y-Price Scale (Axis) Type can be set from the Properties tab of the Properties window:
1. Open the Properties window by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; or:
• Right-click within the script display window and then click Properties; or:
• Select File in the main menu and click Properties.
2. Select the Properties tab.
3. In the Axis Type section, click Linear or Semi-Log to specify linear or semi-log scale type, respectively.
4. Enter the default Max Bars Back value in to the User specified box.
5. Select the Use as Default check box, and click OK.
Setting Default Indicator SubChart
By default, an indicator can be placed into a new SubChart, or into the same SubChart as the Symbol that the
indicator is based on.
To set the default indicator SubChart:
1. Open the Properties window by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; or:
• Right-click within the script display window and then click Properties; or:
• Select File in the main menu and click Properties.
2. Select the Properties tab.
3. Select the Same as Symbol check box for the indicator to be placed by default into the same SubChart as the Symbol,
or clear the check box or the indicator to be placed into a new SubChart.
4. Select the Use as Default check box, and click OK.
Setting Indicator Update on Every Tick
An indicator can be recalculated every time a new tick is received, or only at the close of each bar. One or the other
may be more appropriate, depending on the indicator's algorithm. Updating a large number of complex indicators
on every tick will require substantial system resources To set the default indicator update rate:
1. Open the Properties window by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; or:
424
• Right-click within the script display window and then click Properties; or:
• Select File in the main menu and click Properties.
2. Select the Properties tab.
3. Clear the Update on every tick check box to recalculate the indicator on bar close only, or select the check box to
recalculate the indicator every time a new tick is received.
4. Select the Use as Default box, and click OK.
Editing Study Scripts
Studies are PowerLanguage scripts, expressing trading rules in a systematic and logical way that can be executed by
a computer. Scripts consist of at least one, but usually more, statements. Each statement is a complete instruction.
To learn more, see PowerLanguage Elements
PowerLanguage scripts can be easily created and edited by using the PowerLanguage Editor. PowerLanguage Editor
includes many advanced text editing features, built-in PowerLanguage keyword reference, and a keyword hint
feature.
Before a study can be applied to a chart, the study's script must be compiled.
The code is compiled directly in the PowerLanguage editor.
The script of a study can be password protected; script of a protected study can not be viewed without the password.
Text Editing Features
The following text editing features are available:
Undoing and Re-doing Changes
Changes to the script that were made since the editor was open or the study compiled can be undone; "undone"
changes can be redone again.
Changes can be undone by one of the following methods:
• Clicking the Undo
icon on the toolbar; or:
• Using the Ctrl+Z keyboard shortcut, or:
• Selecting Edit in the main menu, and clicking Undo.
Changes can be redone by one of the following methods:
• Clicking the Redo
icon on the toolbar; or:
• Using the Ctrl+Y keyboard shortcut, or:
• Selecting Edit in the main menu, and clicking Redo.
Note: Changes to the script made before the study was compiled cannot be undone.
Copying, Cutting and Pasting Code
Text can be copied, cut, and pasted within the PowerLanguage Editor and between the editor and other programs.
Text can be copied by one of the following methods:
425
• Using the Ctrl+C keyboard shortcut; or:
• Selecting Edit in the main menu, and clicking Copy.
Text can be cut by one of the following methods:
• Using the Ctrl+X keyboard shortcut; or:
• Selecting Edit in the main menu, and clicking Cut.
Text can be pasted by one of the following methods:
• Using the Ctrl+V keyboard shortcut; or:
• Selecting Edit in the main menu, and clicking Paste.
Finding Text
To find text:
1. Open the Find window by clicking the Find
icon on the toolbar, by using the Ctrl+F keyboard shortcut, or by
selecting Edit on the main menu and clicking Find.
2. Enter the text to be found into the Find what box.
3. Select the Match whole word only check box to find whole words only.
4. Check the Match case check box to make the search case-sensitive.
5. In the Direction section, choose Up or Down to select the search direction.
6. Click Find Next to begin the search or to find the next instance of the text.
Replacing Text
To replace text:
1. Open the Replace window by clicking the Replace
icon on the toolbar, by using the Ctrl+H keyboard shortcut, or
by selecting Edit on the main menu and clicking Replace.
2. Enter the text to be found and replaced into the Find what box.
3. Enter the replacement text into the Replace with box.
4. Select the Match whole word only check box to find whole words only.
5. Check the Match case check box to make the search case-sensitive.
6. In the Direction section, choose Up or Down to select the search direction.
7. Click Find Next to begin the search or to find the next instance of the text. Once an instance of the text to be replaced
is found, the instance is highlighted.
8. Click Replace to replace the highlighted instance of the text.
9. Click Replace All to replace all instances of the text in the current study window.
Compiling Scripts
Before a study can be applied to a chart, the study's script must be compiled. In process of compilation, the
correctness of code in the script is verified. If any errors are found, the compilation process stops, and the error is
highlighted. The results of the compilation, and errors if any, are displayed under the Build tab in the lower panel.
1. To compile the script in the active window: Click the Compile
toolbar icon, press the F3 key, or select
Compile in the main menu and click Compile Study Name.
426
2. To compile scripts of all opened studies: Select Compile in the main menu and click All Opened, or use the
Ctrl+Shift+F2 keyboard shortcut.
3. To compile any uncompiled scripts of all open studies: Select Compile in the main menu and click All Uncompiled.
4. To compile all scripts of all studies, stored on the computer: Select Compile in the main menu and click All Studies.
5. To compile indicators and signals only: Select Compile in the main menu and click All Indicators and Signals Only.
Protecting Studies
The script of a study can be password protected; script of a protected study can not be viewed without the password.
To protect a study:
1. Select Tools in the main menu, and click Protect Study.
2. In the Password Selection dialog box that appears, enter a password and click OK.
3. Reenter the password for confirmation, and click OK to password-protect the study's script.
Editor Overview
An integral part of the PowerLanguage programming environment, PowerLanguage Editor is a development tool for
creating and managing PowerLanguage studies.
Main functions of PowerLanguage Editor:
• Creating studies
• Importing and exporting studies
• Protecting Studies
• Editing the study code and settings
• Editing data
• Compiling studies
PowerLanguage Editor also features a built-in PowerLanguage keyword reference as well as keyword help hints.
To start PowerLanguage Editor:
• click the Run PowerLanguage Editor
icon on the MultiCharts Main toolbar, or:
• click the PowerLanguage Editor icon on the Quick Launch bar, or:
• click the PowerLanguage Editor icon on the desktop.
Editor Settings
The appearance of the PowerLanguage Editor work area can be customized.
Navigator panel, Output panel, Toolbar, and Status bar can be hidden and redisplayed.
Study Window font, font size, and background color can be selected.
The color of each type of the EasyLanguage(R) code elements and line numbers can be individually selected.
Hiding and Redisplaying Toolbars and Panels
To hide or redisplay a toolbar or panel, select View in the main menu and clear or select the check box next to the
name of the toolbar or panel.
427
Toolbars can also be hidden or redisplayed form the Editor Options window:
1. Open the Editor Options window.
To open the Editor Options window, select Tools in the main menu and click Editor Options.
2. Select the General tab.
3. In the Display section, clear or select the check box next to the name of the toolbar or panel to hide or redisplay
that toolbar or panel.
Note: Panels can also be hidden by clicking the Close button in the corner of the toolbar.
Setting Font and Font Size
Font type and size can be set form the Editor Options window:
1. Open the Editor Options window.
To open the Editor Options window, select Tools in the main menu and click Editor Options.
2. Select the General tab.
3. In the Editor section, select the font name from the drop-down list
4. Select the font size from the drop-down list.
Setting Colors
Study Window background color, and colors of each type of the EasyLanguage(R) code elements and line numbers
can be selected individually.
The colors can be set from form the Editor Options window:
1. Open the Editor Options window.
To open the Editor Options window, select Tools in the main menu and click Editor Options.
2. Select the Colors tab.
3. In the Display Items list, select an EasyLanguage(R) code element (item).
4. In the Item Color palette box, select one of the standard 40 colors, or click the More Colors button to create custom
colors; repeat for steps 3 and 4 for any additional items.
5. In the Background Color palette box, select one of the standard 40 colors for the background, or click the More
Colors button to create custom colors.
6. In the Line Numbers Color palette box, select one of the standard 40 colors for the line numbers, or click the More
Colors button to create custom colors.
Editor Work Area
PowerLanguage Editor work area consists of the study script display panel in the upper left part of the work area,
the navigator panel at the upper right part of the work area, and the output panel at the bottom of the work area.
Navigator and output panels can be hidden by using the View menu.
428
Study Script Display Panel
Multiple studies can be opened simultaneously in the study code display panel, with each study's code displayed in
a separate window.
Each window has its own tab at the top of the script display panel, with the study's name indicated on the tab.
The same study cannot be displayed in more than one window. The number of windows that can be added to the
display panel is limited only by your computer's hardware configuration.
Any one of the windows can be selected by clicking the window or the window tab, or by selecting Window in the
main menu and clicking a study name.
Study windows can be moved anywhere within the study script display panel, arranged in any order, resized,
maximized, minimized, and closed. Closing a study window does not delete the study.
Navigator Panel
The navigator panel can display either a list of PowerLanguage keywords, or a list of available studies.
To toggle between the keyword dictionary mode and the studies list mode, click the Studies tab or the Dictionary
tab at the bottom of the navigator panel.
Dictionary Mode
A list of PowerLanguage keywords is displayed in the navigator panel.
To display the information for a particular keyword, click the keyword name in the list; the reference information
will be displayed in the Help tab of the output panel.
Note: Help information for a keyword can also be displayed in the Help tab of the output panel by placing the
cursor over the keyword in a study window and pressing the F1 key.
Studies Mode
Available studies are organized within three subfolders: Indicators, Signals, and Functions.
Additional folders can be created by right-clicking on a root folder or on any of the subfolders, selecting Add, and
then clicking New Folder. Studies can be moved between any of the folders.
Navigator panel can be displayed or hidden by clicking View in the main menu and then selecting or clearing the
Navigator Bar checkbox.
The Output Panel
The output panel contains three tabs: Build, Output, and Help:
• The Build tab is used to view the information about study compilation
• The Output tab is used to view the study output
• The Help tab is used to view PowerLanguage keyword help information
Output panel can be displayed or hidden by clicking View in the main menu and then selecting or clearing the Output
Bar checkbox.
429
Arranging Study Windows
It is possible to arrange windows in any order. A study window can be positioned anywhere in the study code display
panel by placing the mouse pointer over the window's title bar, holding the left mouse button, and dragging the
window to the desired position. Study windows can also be arranged automatically, much the same way as in the
main MultiCharts application, by selecting Window in the main menu and then clicking the desired option.
Switching between Windows
You can switch between study windows by using the CTRL+F6 keyboard shortcut.
Importing and Exporting Studies
In addition to supporting PowerLanguage studies, MultiCharts platform supports nearly all of EasyLanguage®
studies.
MultiCharts supports Password-protected as well as Source-compiled (SEF) Study Protection.
Studies are imported and exported using the PowerLanguage Editor.
Importing Studies
In addition to MultiCharts native PLA (PowerLanguage Archive) format, studies in ELA, ELS, ELD, XML, and SEF
formats can be imported. Several studies can be imported simultaneously.
Note: Read-only studies in SEF (Source-compiled) format are imported using an Import Read-Only procedure.
Importing Studies in ELA, ELS, ELD, and XML Formats
To import studies into PowerLanguage Editor:
1. Open the Select Files window.
To open the Select Files window:
1. Click the Import
icon on the toolbar.
2. The Select Files window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Import, or by
using the Ctrl+I keyboard shortcut.
2. Select one or more studies files; several files can be selected at once by holding down Ctrl or/and Shift keys while
making the selection, and all files can be selected by using the Ctrl+A keyboard shortcut.
3. Click Open or double-click the selected file.
4. In the Import Studies window that appears, in the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or
Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies to be displayed in the list.
5. Select the studies to be imported by using the checkbox to the left of the study's name, or by double-clicking the
study's name; click Select All to select all studies, and Clear All to clear all selections.
430
6. At the bottom left of the Import Studies window, select the Compile on import checkbox to compile studies on
import; to learn more, see Compiling Studies.
7. Click OK to import the selected studies
Importing Studies in SEF (Read-Only) Format
Important: Only SEF studies created with the same version number (build) of MultiCharts can be imported!
To import a read-only study into PowerLanguage Editor:
1. Open the Select Files window by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Import Read-Only, or by using the
Ctrl+M keyboard shortcut.
2. Select a study file.
3. Click Open or double-click the selected file.
4. In the Import Studies window that appears, in the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or
Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies to be displayed in the list.
5. Select the studies to be imported by using the checkbox to the left of the study's name, or by double-clicking the
study's name; click Select All to select all studies, and Clear All to clear all selections.
6. Click OK to import the selected studies.
Exporting Studies
Studies can be exported in XML or SEF (Read-only) formats.
Exporting Studies in PLA Format
To export a study in PLA format:
1. Open the Export Studieswindow.
To open the Export Studieswindow:
1. Click the Export
icon on the toolbar.
2. The Export Studieswindow can also be opened by selecting Filein the main menu and clicking Export, or by using
the Ctrl+E keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies
to be displayed in the list.
3. Select the studies to be exported by using the checkbox to the left of the study’s name, or by double-clicking the
study’s name; click Select Allto select all studies, and Clear Allto clear all selections.
4. At the bottom left of the Export Studies window, select the Select dependant function(s) checkbox to automatically
select the relevant functions.
5. Click OKto open the Exportwindow.
6. Select a path and choose the filename and type for the file to export the study or studies to, and click Save.
Importing and Exporting Studies
431
Exporting Studies in SEF (Read-only) Format
To export a study in SEF (Read-only) format:
1. Open the Export Studies window by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Export Read-Only, or by using the
Ctrl+R keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies
to be displayed in the list.
3. Select the studies to be exported by using the checkbox to the left of the study’s name, or by double-clicking the
study’s name; click Select All to select all studies, and Clear All to clear all selections.
4. Click OK to open the Export window.
5. Select a path and choose the name for the file to export the study or studies to, and click Save.
Using Studies (PowerLanguage Editor)
Custom studies can be created from scratch or existing studies modified by using the PowerLanguage Editor.
Studies can be classified into three types: Indicators, Signals, and Functions.
An Indicator is a visual technical analysis tool, used to analyze market conditions and identify and forecast trends
and market patterns. An indicator is a visualization of a mathematical formula, and consists of one or more Plots –
lines, histograms, series of points or crosses, highs and lows, left and right ticks, or a combination of the above.
A Signal is a mechanical technical analysis tool, used to systematically specify market entry or exit points according
to a set of trading rules implemented in the signal's algorithm. The trade points are indicated on a chart by ticks and
arrows. Signals can be viewed as the basic building blocks of strategies.
A Function is an independent procedure (subroutine) that can be called from another script to carry out a specific
task.
Creating Indicators
To create an indicator:
1. Open New dialog box by clicking the New
icon on the toolbar, by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
New, or by using the Ctrl+N keyboard shortcut.
2. Select Indicator.
3. Enter the indicator name.
4. Click OK.
Creating Signals
To create a signal:
1. Open New dialog box by clicking the New
icon on the toolbar, by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
New, or by using the Ctrl+N keyboard shortcut.
432
2. Select Signal.
3. Enter the signal name.
4. Click OK.
Creating Functions
To create a function:
1. Open New dialog box by clicking the New
icon on the toolbar, by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
New, or by using the Ctrl+N keyboard shortcut.
2. Select Function.
3. Enter the function name. 4. Select the Return Type.
5. Select the Function Storage.
6. Click OK.
Available Studies List
A list of all available studies can be viewed in the Open window. Studies' Name, Type, Status, and the last
modification date (Modified) are displayed in the list.
Studies can be opened for editing, deleted, and studies' properties modified, from the Open window.
To open the Open window:
1. Click the Open
icon on the toolbar.
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using the Ctrl+O
keyboard shortcut.
Study List
The list of available studies, displayed in the Open window, can be set to include one or more of the following study
types: Indicators, Signals, and Functions. To select the study types to be listed, select or clear the appropriate
checkboxes in the Study Type section.
In the list, each study's name, type, status, and last modification date and time are displayed in the Name, Type,
Status, and Modified columns. The list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header:
• Name column displays the study's name.
• Type column displays the study's type: Indicator, Signal, or Function.
• Status column displays the study's status:
•
Compiled - the study is ready to be used; to learn more, see Compiling Studies
•
Protected - the study cannot be opened for editing, and the study’s code cannot be
viewed; to learn more, see Protecting Studies
• No status is displayed – the study has to be compiled before it can be used; to learn more, see Compiling
Studies
• Modified column displays the date and time that the most recent study modification has been made.
To scroll through the list of studies, use the scrollbar on the right side of the list, or the UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW keys on the keyboard.
433
Opening Studies
To open a study:
1. Open the Open window.
To open the Open window:
1. Click the Open
icon on the toolbar.
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using the Ctrl+O
keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies
to be included in the list.
3. Select one or more studies to be opened; several studies can be selected at once by holding down Ctrl or/and Shift
keys while making the selection. All studies can be selected by using the Ctrl+A keyboard shortcut, or by clicking any
study’s name and then clicking Select All.
4. Click OK or double-click the selected study.
Saving Studies
To save a study in PowerLanguage Editor, click the Save
icon on the toolbar. A study can also be saved by selecting
File in the main menu and clicking Save, or by using the Ctrl+S keyboard shortcut.
All studies, currently open in PowerLanguage editor, can be saved by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
Save All, or by using the Ctrl+Shift+S keyboard shortcut.
Note: If no modifications have been made to studies, the Save icon on the toolbar and Save commands will not be
available.
Renaming Studies
A study can be renamed by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; in the Properties tab of the Properties dialog box that appears,
in the Name box, enter the new study name and click OK.
• Right-click within the study’s window and then click Properties; in the Properties tab of the Properties dialog
box that appears, in the Name box, enter the new study name and click OK.
• Select File in the main menu and click Save As; in the dialog box that appears, enter the new study name and
click OK.
A study can also be renamed from the Open window. To rename a study from the Open window:
1. Open the Open window.
To open the Open window:
1. Click the Open
icon on the toolbar.
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using the
Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies
to be included in the list.
3. Right-click the study to be renamed, and then click Edit.
434
4. In the Properties tab of the Properties dialog box that appears, in the Name box, enter the new study name and
click OK.
Closing Studies
A study can be closed by one of the following methods:
• Click the Close icon on the study's title bar.
• Right-click on the study's window tab, and then click Close.
• Select File in the main menu and click Close.
• Use the Alt+F4 keyboard shortcut.
Deleting Studies
To delete a study:
1. Open the Open window.
To open the Open window:
1. Click the Open
icon on the toolbar.
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using
the Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of
studies to be included in the list.
3. Select one or more studies to be deleted; several studies can be selected at once by holding down Ctrl or/and
Shift keys while making the selection. All studies can be selected by using the Ctrl+A keyboard shortcut, or by
clicking any study’s name and then clicking Select All.
4. Press the Delete key on the keyboard, or right-click the study to be deleted, and then click Delete.
Editing Study Properties
Study properties can be edited from the Properties window.
Properties window can be opened by one of the following methods:
• Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar.
• Right-click within the study’s window and then click Properties.
Properties window can be opened from the Open window. To open the Properties window from the Open
window:
1. Open the Open window.
To open the Open window:
1. Click the Open
icon on the toolbar.
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using
the Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of
studies to be included in the list.
3. Right-click the study, the properties of which are to be edited, and then click Edit.
435
Portfolio Backtester
Backtesting a Portfolio
Once a portfolio has been created, strategy configured, and portfolio settings selected, the portfolio can be
backtested.
To backtest a portfolio:
•
Click the BackTest
button on the toolbar, or
•
Select Portfolio in the main menu and then select Run Backtesting.
Backtesting a portfolio will generate a Portfolio Performance Report that will be displayed in a separate window.
The description for each performance measure is described in the Report.
Configuring Strategies
Understanding Strategies
A strategy is a set of signals, applied to a chart. Signals systematically specify market entry or exit points according
to a set of trading rules implemented in the signals' algorithms, and can be viewed as the basic building blocks of
strategies.
Over 100 pre-built, customizable signals, covering the most popular trading concepts, are already included with the
platform, and additional signals can be imported from a variety of sources.
Signals can be fully customized, or entirely new signals created, using PowerLanguage® scripting in PowerLanguage
Editor.
A portfolio can contain several strategies.
Each strategy can have its own list of symbols and signals. It is possible apply different strategies to different sets of
symbols.
Basic adjustments to a signal's logic can be made by simply changing the Input Values. Signals can have one or more
inputs, or none at all. Multiple instances of the same signal can be used in the same strategy, and each instance can
have different input settings.
Strategies can be constructed by simply combining a number of signals.
Signal settings are specific to each particular signal, while Strategy Properties regulate the actions of a group of
signals as a whole.
436
Adding Strategies
To add a strategy to a portfolio:
1.
Under the main menu select Portfolio.
2.
Select Add Strategy.
Cloning Strategies
To clone a strategy right-click on the strategy and click Clone Strategy.
Adding Signals
The number of signals that can be added to a portfolio is limited only by your computer's hardware configuration.
To add a signal to a portfolio:
1.
Open Portfolio Tree window To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
Expand the Strategy for which the signal will be added.
3.
Right-click on the Signals node and select Add Signals.
4.
Select a signal from the Add Signals window.
5.
Select OK.
You can also drag and drop signals from one strategy to another.
Note: Only the compiled (those with the Ready Status of Yes) signals can be inserted. To learn more see Compiling
Studies
Removing Signals
To remove a signal:
1.
Open Portfolio Tree window To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
Expand the Strategy for which the signal will be removed.
3.
Expand the Signals node.
4.
Right-click on the signal to be removed and select Remove Signal.
Copy and Paste Signals
To copy / paste a signal right-click on the signal and click Copy / Paste.
Note: To select multiple signals at once select a signal, hold Shift button and move up or down the list of signals
using Up or Down Arrow buttons.
Signals List
To see which signals are applied to a portfolio:
437
1.
Open Portfolio Tree window To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
Expand the Strategy that contains the signals.
3.
Expand the Signals node.
Note: Signals' execution priority is assigned according to the order in which they appear in the Signals List, with the
signals at the top of the list having a higher priority. To view the available input parameters of a particular signal
1.
Right-click on the signal.
2.
Select Format Signal. The Format Signals window will appear. The table will show available inputs.
3.
In the Value column, click on the value of the input to be changed and enter the desired value.
Name – name of the signal
Inputs – input parameters of the signal; to learn more see Default Studies Inputs and Setting Studies Inputs
Turning Signals Off and On
Signals can be turned off or on. The script of a signal that is turned off will not be executed and will not generate
orders.
To turn a signal off or on:
1.
Open Portfolio Tree window To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
Right-click on the strategy in which the signal resides.
3.
Select Show Signals. The Format Settings window will appear.
4.
Select the Signals tab.
5.
Select the Status button to toggle the signal on or off.
6.
Click the OK button.
Changing Signal Priority
If execution of all entries generated for a portfolio causes the capital limits to be exceeded, then the entries with
the highest priority will receive preference, while the entries with the lowest priority will not be executed.
The priority of a symbol is the order in which it is listed in the Symbol List of the Portfolio Backtester.
Signal priority can also be specified in PowerLanguage using the PortfolioEntriesPriority keyword.
Moving a Signal to a Different Strategy
To move a signal to a different strategy:
Drag the signal from the strategy in which it resides and drop it into the Signals node of the new strategy.
Setting Signal Input Values
An Input is a constant used in the signal's calculations.
Signals can have one or more inputs, or none at all. Each input is assigned a name.
There are three types of inputs: Numeric, True/False, and String.
Signals can be modified by changing the input Values.
438
One of the main advantages of using the inputs is that basic adjustments to the study's logic can be made by simply
changing the input values, without the need to edit the studies' actual code.
Multiple instances of the same signal can be used in the same strategy, and can have different input settings.
Inputs are also used for Trading Strategy Optimization.
To change a signal's inputs:
1.
Open Portfolio Tree window To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
Right-click on the signal.
3.
Select Format Signal. The Format Signals window will appear. The table will show available inputs.
4.
In the Value column, click on the value of the input to be changed and enter the desired value.
Strategy Properties
Strategy properties are separate from the individual signals' settings, affect all of the signals in a strategy, and
regulate the actions of a group of signals as a whole.
Strategy properties include Costs/Capitalization, Maximum bars back, Position limits, and Trade size sections.
Costs/Capitalization
To change costs or/and capitalization assumptions:
1.
Open Portfolio Tree window To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1.
Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio
Tree.
2.
Right-click on the strategy.
3.
Select Show Properties. The Format Settings window will appear.
4.
Select the Properties tab.
5.
In the Costs/Capitalization section, enter the commission dollar amount in the Commission textbox, and:
 Select per Trade to specify that the dollar amount entered represents commission per trade, or
 Select per Share/Contract to specify that the dollar amount entered represents commission per
share/contract
6.
In the Costs/Capitalization section, enter the slippage dollar amount in the Slippage textbox, and:
 Select per Trade to specify that the dollar amount entered represents slippage per trade, or
 Select per Share/Contract to specify that the dollar amount entered represents slippage per
share/contract
7.
In the Interest Rate textbox, enter the interest rate, to be used in performance ratio calculations.
Maximum Number of Bars Study Will Reference
All signals based on past data use a certain number of bars for their calculations.
The maximum number of bars study will reference must be greater than or equal to the number of bars that the
signal uses.
For example, if the signal uses the past 10 bars to make its calculations, the maximum number of bars study will
reference must be greater than or equal to 10.
439
To change the maximum number of bars study will reference:
1.
Open Portfolio Tree window
To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2. Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
Right-click on the strategy.
3.
Select Show Properties. The Format Settings window will appear.
4.
Select the Properties tab.
5.
In the Costs/Capitalization section, enter a number in the Maximum number of bars study will reference
textbox.
Position Limits
Position Limits settings control the maximum number entry orders in the same direction and the maximum number
of shares/contracts per position.
To enter position limits:
1. Open Portfolio Tree window To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2. Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
Right-click on the strategy.
3.
Select Show Properties. The Format Settings window will appear.
4.
Select the Properties tab.
5.
In the Position Limits section, select the check box to enable order limits in the same direction.
6.
Enter the number of entry orders permitted in the same direction into the textbox.
 Select when the order is generated by a different entry order radio button to apply the entry
order limit only when the entry orders originated from different signals, or
 Select regardless of the entry that generated the order radio button to apply the entry order
limit regardless of whether the entry orders originated from the same or different signals.
7.
In the Maximum shares/contracts per position textbox, enter the maximum shares/contracts permitted.
Trade Size
Trade size settings set the size of each trade, either by the number shares/contracts or by currency value.
Trade size settings select the number shares/contracts or the currency value per each trade.
Note: These settings are ignored if trade size is specified by the signal.
To enter the trade size:
1. Open Portfolio Tree window
To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2. Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
Right-click on the strategy.
3.
Select Show Properties. The Format Settings window will appear.
4.
Select the Propertiestab.
440
5.
In the Trade Size section,
 Select the Fixed Shares/Contracts radio button to enter the trade size in terms of
shares/contracts, or
 Select the Dollars per Trade radio button to enter the trade size in terms of dollars, or
 Enter a whole number to specify how fractional shares/contracts will be rounded
 In the Minimum number shares/contracts box, enter the minimum number of shares/contracts.
 Select the Percent of Equity radio button to enter the trade size in terms of percent of equity.
Operating Portfolios
Portfolios can be created by the MultiCharts Portfolio Backtester.
MultiCharts Portfolio Backtester is included with the MultiCharts platform as a separate application.
Starting Portfolio Backtester
To start MultiCharts Portfolio Backtester:
1.
Select the Portfolio Backtester icon on the computer's desktop or on the Quick Launch bar, or:
2.
Select All Programs, select MultiCharts, and click Portfolio Backtester.
Creating Portfolios
To create a new Portfolio:
1.
Click the New Portfolio
icon on the toolbar, or
2.
Select File in the main menu and then select New Portfolio, or
3.
Press CTRL+N to use the keyboard shortcut.
Saving Portfolios
A Portfolio, complete with the strategy and all settings, is saved as a file with a .pws extension.
To save a Portfolio:
•
Select the Save Portfolio
icon on the toolbar, or
•
Select File in the main menu and then click Save Portfolio, or
•
Press CTRL+S to use the keyboard shortcut.
To save an already named Portfolio under a new name, select File in the main menu and select Save Portfolio As.
Loading Saved Portfolios
To load a saved Portfolio:
1.
Open the Open file window.
To access the Open file window:
•
Select the Load Portfolio
icon on the toolbar, or
•
Select File in the main menu and then click Load Portfolio, or
•
Press CTRL+O to use the keyboard shortcut.
441
2.
Navigate to the portfolio file (*.pws) and select it.
3.
Press the Open button.
Renaming Portfolios
Portfolios can be renamed by two different methods:
•
Save a copy of the Portfolio under a different name (see Saving Portfolios) or,
•
Use Windows Explorer or another program to rename a Portfolio file as you would any other Windows file.
Deleting Portfolios
Use Windows Explorer or another program to delete the Portfolio file as you would any other Windows file.
Understanding the Symbols Table
A table of portfolio symbols is displayed in the Symbols section. The symbols are displayed under two categories:
Tradable Symbols and Information Symbols.
Tradable Symbols
Tradable symbols are the symbols for which the orders are generated. Tradable symbols are listed in the first column
of the table, data1.
Unless PortfolioEntriesPriority function is specified within a strategy, the order, in which the symbols are listed in
the Symbols Table, determines the entry priority for the symbols, with the symbols at the top of the table having a
higher priority.
Informational Symbols
Informational symbols are the symbols that may be required by the strategy's logic to make trading decisions.
For example, if the strategy's logic references S&P 500 Index to make trading decisions for 3M, the S&P 500 Index
symbol must be listed in as an Informational symbol, in addition to the 3M symbol being listed as a Tradable symbol.
Up to four informational symbols can be used for each tradable symbol; informational symbols must be listed in the
data2 through data5 columns, in the same row as the tradable symbol for which they are intended.
Adding Symbols to the Symbol List table:
Note: Informational symbols can only be added to a row that already contains a tradable symbol.
To add a symbol:
1.
Select the cell where the symbol is to be added.
2.
Open the Select Symbol window by one of the following methods:
•
Double-click the cell, and then click the http://www.multicharts. com/ img/wiki/portfolio/ellipse.gif button,
or
•
Right-click the cell, and then click Format Instruments.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in the All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols.
The list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking on the column header.
442
If the symbol isn't in the list, please see Adding Symbols to Symbol List for more information.
Selecting Multiple Symbols
Multiple symbols can be selected in the Select Symbol window and added to the Symbol List.
New rows will be automatically inserted in to the table.
To select a group of adjacent symbols:
1.
Select the symbol on one end of the group.
2.
While holding the SHIFT key, select the symbol on the other end of the group. The entire group will be selected.
To select multiple symbols one-by-one:
1.
Hold down the CTRL key and select each symbol.
2.
To cancel the selection, hold down the CTRL key and select the symbol again.
5.
Click OK to add symbol(s) to the table.
Symbols can also be entered directly into each cell. Symbols are already in the QuoteManager database will show
up in blue.
Unrecognized symbols will show up in red, indicating that they must to be added to the Symbol List.
Working with Symbol List table
To delete a row,
1. Right-click on any cell
in the row.
2.
Select Delete Row. To
insert a row,
1.
Right-click on the Data1 cell in the row above which the new row is to be inserted.
2.
Select Move Down. A new row will be inserted.
A symbol can be copied from a cell using the CTRL+C keyboard shortcut, and pasted to a cell using CTRL+V keyboard
shortcut.
The symbol can also be pasted to all cells of a column. To paste a symbol to all sells of a column, select the entire
column by clicking the column header, and then paste the symbol to any of the selected cells.
Data Series Properties
Data Series Properties consists of Resolution, Field, Session, Build Volume On, and Time Zone settings.
Global Settings
Global settings consist of the Data Range and Time Zone settings.
To access global settings, select the Data tab in the main window.
Data Range
To backtest based on # of bars back or days back:
1.
Select the first (upper) radio button in the Data Rangesection.
2.
Enter a number in the textbox
443
3.
Select Bars Back or Days Back in the drop-down list.
4.
In the From field, enter the date from which Bars Back or Days Back will start counting.
To backtest based on a specified date range:
1.
Select the second (lower) radio in the Data Range section.
2.
Enter the date range in the From and To fields.
To set the timezone:
Select either Local or Exchange time zone from the drop-down list.
Symbol Specific Settings
Symbol specific settings consist of Resolution, Quote, Field, Sessions, and Build Volume On.
To access symbol specific settings:
1.
Select the cell where the symbol is to be added.
2.
Open the Select Symbol window by one of the following methods:
•
Double-click the cell, and then click the http:/ / www. multicharts. com/ img/ wiki/ portfolio/ ellipse. gif
button, or
•
Right-click the cell, and then click Format Instruments.
3.
Select the Settings tab:
Resolution
Resolution can be based on a Time interval (seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, or years), or on a Count
interval (tick, volume, change, or range). To set resolution,
1.
In the Resolution textbox, enter the number units for each bar.
2.
In the Resolution drop-down list, select the desired units.
To learn more about resolution, see Chart Resolution
Quote Field
It is possible to use trade data, bid data, or ask data by setting the Quote Field. To set the
Quote Field, select Ask, Bid, or Trade in the Quote Field list box.
To learn more about Quote Field, see Quote Field
Sessions
To set sessions:
Select the trading session of the symbol from the drop-down list.
Build Volume On
For volume-based resolution, it is possible to build the volume bars based on trade volume or tick count:
Select Trade Volume or Tick Count from the drop-down list.
Data Download Mode
It is possible to perform backtesting using only locally stored historical data, or download any additional data that
may be required before beginning the backtesting process.
To download any additional historical data that may be required before beginning backtesting,
444
1.
Select the Data tab in the main window.
2.
Select the Download Data Before Backtesting checkbox.
To perform backtesting using only the locally stored historical data, clear the Download data before backtesting
checkbox.
Portfolio Optimization
Understanding Optimization
A strategy is created by implementing trading concepts, ideas, and observations of historical market behavior, into
a trading system. The very idea of a trading system implies a degree of optimization to market behavior.
The process of strategy optimization further enhances and automates this process. Strategy optimization is the
search for the set of optimum parameters for the defined criteria. By testing a range of signal input values,
optimization aids in selecting the values that correspond, based on historical data, to the best strategy performance.
Optimization aids in better understanding of strategy's characteristics and in creating new criteria for entries and
exits.
Optimization can have detrimental effects if the user searches for the combination of inputs based solely on the
best performance over a period of historical data and focuses to much on market conditions that may never occur
again. This approach is known as over-optimization or curve-fitting. Performance will not be the same in real trading,
since historical patterns are highly unlikely to be repeated.
Optimization Methods